1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Pictorial index
Search by illustration
For safety
and security
Make sure to read through them
(Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)
Vehicle status
information and
indicators
Reading driving-related information
(Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)
Before driving
Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving
(Main topics: Keys, doors, seats)
Driving
Operations and advice which are necessary for driving
(Main topics: Starting hybrid system, refueling)
Interior features
Usage of the interior features
(Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)
Maintenance
and care
Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures
(Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)
When trouble
arises
What to do in case of malfunction and emergency
(Main topics: Battery discharge, flat tire)
Vehicle
specifications
Vehicle specifications, customizable features
(Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt,
SRS airbag and headlight aim instructions for Canadian
owners
Index
Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
2
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
TABLE OF CONTENTS
For your information......................................6
Reading this manual.................................... 10
How to search .................................................11
Pictorial index.................................................12
1-1. For safe use
Before driving....................................24
For safe driving..................................25
Seat belts .............................................26
SRS airbags ........................................32
Front passenger occupant classifi-
cation system ...................................41
Exhaust gas precautions.............. 45
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children.........................47
Child restraint systems ..................47
1-3. Lexus Enform
Lexus Enform Safety Connect ..60
Lexus Enform Remote.................. 65
Lexus Enform Service Connect 66
1-4. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features................. 67
Hybrid system precautions......... 70
1-5. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system ........................ 75
Alarm.....................................................77
2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators.... 80
Gauges and meters........................84
Multi-information display ............ 89
Head-up display...............................95
Energy monitor/fuel consumption
screen................................................99
3-1. Key information
Keys....................................................106
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the
doors
Side doors......................................... 110
Back door...........................................114
Smart access system with push-but-
ton start ...........................................126
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats.........................................132
Rear seats......................................... 133
Driving position memory........... 138
Head restraints ................................141
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and
mirrors
Steering wheel................................143
Inside rear view mirror ................144
Outside rear view mirrors......... 146
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and
moon roof
Power windows ............................. 148
Moon roof........................................150
1
For safety and security
2
Vehicle status information and
indicators
3
Before driving
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle........................156
Cargo and luggage....................... 161
Vehicle load limits.........................164
Trailer towing (vehicles with towing
package)........................................165
Trailer towing (vehicles without
towing package).........................173
Dinghy towing ................................173
4-2. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch............... 174
EV drive mode ...............................178
Hybrid transmission.....................180
Turn signal lever.............................183
Parking brake .................................184
Brake Hold.......................................187
ASC (Active Sound Control)..188
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch............................190
Automatic High Beam................193
Fog light switch ..............................196
Windshield wipers and washer196
Rear window wiper and washer
............................................................201
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap........203
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lexus Safety System + 2.0....... 205
PCS (Pre-Collision System) ......211
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ........218
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control).........................227
RSA (Road Sign Assist)............. 235
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range......................... 237
PKSA (Parking Support Alert)247
Intuitive parking assist................ 248
Parking Support Brake function (for
static objects).............................. 253
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)........262
Driving mode select switch .....270
Driving assist systems .................272
4-6. Driving tips
Hybrid vehicle driving tips ........277
Winter driving tips....................... 279
Utility vehicle precautions........ 282
5-1. Remote Touch
Remote Touch............................... 286
5-2. Using the air conditioning system
and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
............................................................291
Heated steering wheel/seat heat-
ers/seat ventilators................... 299
5-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ...........................302
5-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features..............305
4
Driving
5
Interior features
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Luggage compartment features
...........................................................308
5-5. Using the other interior features
Other interior features ............... 312
Garage door opener.................. 322
Compass..........................................328
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehi-
cle exterior................................... 332
Cleaning and protecting the vehi-
cle interior....................................335
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements.....339
General maintenance................340
Emission inspection and mainte-
nance (I/M) programs............342
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
...........................................................344
Hood..................................................346
Positioning a floor jack...............346
Engine compartment..................348
12-volt battery................................354
Tires ...................................................357
Tire inflation pressure.................365
Wheels..............................................367
Air conditioning filter..................368
Electronic key battery................369
Checking and replacing fuses. 371
Headlight aim.................................373
Light bulbs.......................................375
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ....................380
If your vehicle has to be stopped in
an emergency ............................380
If the vehicle is trapped in rising
water ............................................... 381
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
..........................................................383
If you think something is wrong
..........................................................386
If a warning light turns on or a warn-
ing buzzer sounds.....................388
If a warning message is displayed
..........................................................398
If you have a flat tire .................... 402
If the hybrid system will not start
..........................................................409
If you lose your keys.......................411
If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened.............................................411
If the electronic key does not oper-
ate properly...................................412
If the 12-volt battery is discharged
............................................................414
If your vehicle overheats............418
If the vehicle becomes stuck.....421
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level,
etc.)..................................................
424
Fuel information
.
........................... 432
Tire information ............................ 434
6
Maintenance and care
7
When trouble arises
8
Vehicle specifications
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8-2. Customization
Customizable features...............443
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize...........................454
9-1. For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S.
owners ...........................................456
Seat belt instructions for Canadian
owners (in French)....................456
SRS airbag instructions for Cana-
dian owners (in French)..........458
Headlight aim instructions for
Canadian owners (in French)465
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
...........................................................468
Alphabetical Index........................ 471
9
For owners
Index
6
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Please note that this manual applies to
all models and explains all equipment,
including options. Therefore, you may
find some explanations for equipment
not installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this man-
ual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Lexus policy
of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at
any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehi-
cle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of color and
equipment.
Approximately five hours after the
hybrid system is turned off, you may
hear sound coming from under the
vehicle for several minutes. This is the
sound of a fuel evaporation leakage
check and, it does not indicate a mal-
function.
A wide variety of non-genuine spare
parts and accessories for Lexus vehi-
cles are currently available in the mar-
ket. You should know that Toyota does
not warrant these products and is not
responsible for their performance,
repair, or replacement, or for any dam-
age they may cause to, or adverse
effect they may have on, your Lexus
vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified
with non-genuine Lexus products.
Modification with non-genuine Lexus
products could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even vio-
late governmental regulations. In addi-
tion, damage or performance
problems resulting from the modifica-
tion may not be covered under war-
ranty.
The installation of a mobile two-way
radio system in your vehicle could
affect electronic systems such as:
Hybrid system
Multiport fuel injection sys-
tem/sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system
Lexus Safety System + 2.0
Anti-lock brake system
SRS airbag system
Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Lexus
dealer for precautionary measures or
special instructions regarding installa-
tion of a mobile two-way radio system.
High voltage parts and cables on the
hybrid vehicles emit approximately the
same amount of electromagnetic
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Noise from under vehicle after
turning off the hybrid system
Accessories, spare parts and
modification of your Lexus
Installation of a mobile two-way
radio system
7
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
waves as the conventional gasoline
powered vehicles or home electronic
appliances despite of their electro-
magnetic shielding.
Unwanted noise may occur in the
reception of the mobile two-way radio.
The vehicle is equipped with sophisti-
cated computers that will record cer-
tain data, such as:
• Engine speed/Electric motor speed
(traction motor speed)
• Accelerator status
•Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the driving
assist systems
• Images from the cameras
Your vehicle is equipped with cameras.
Contact your Lexus dealer for the location
of recording cameras.
The recorded data varies according to
the vehicle grade level and options
with which it is equipped.
These computers do not record con-
versations or sounds, and only record
images outside of the vehicle in certain
situations.
Data Transmission
Your vehicle may transmit the data
recorded in these computers to Lexus
without notification to you.
Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in this
computer to diagnose malfunctions, con-
duct research and development, and
improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to
a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or
with the consent of the lessee if the vehi-
cle is leased
• In response to an official request by the
police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is
not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
Recorded image information can be
erased by your Lexus dealer.
The image recording function can be dis-
abled. However, if the function is disabled,
data from when the system operates will
not be available.
To learn more about the vehicle data
collected, used and shared by
Lexus, please visit
www.lexus.com/privacyvts/
.
If your Lexus has Lexus Enform and if
you have subscribed to those services,
please refer to the Lexus Enform
Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement for information on data
collected and its usage.
To learn more about the vehicle data
collected, used and shared by
Lexus, please visit
www.lexus.com/privacyvts/
.
Vehicle data recording
Usage of data collected through
Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland on-
ly)
8
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynam-
ics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and pas-
senger safety belts were buck-
led/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your
vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-
tion occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, spe-
cial equipment is required, and access
to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Disclosure of the EDR data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in
an EDR to a third party except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner
(or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is
obtained
• In response to an official request by the
police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Lexus may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle
safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for
research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
The SRS airbag and seat belt preten-
sioner devices in your Lexus contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is
scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may
cause an accident such as fire. Be sure
to have the systems of the SRS airbag
and seat belt pretensioner removed
and disposed of by a qualified service
shop or by your Lexus dealer before
you scrap your vehicle.
Event data recorder
Scrapping of your Lexus
9
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may
contain perchlorate. These compo-
nents may include airbag, seat belt pre-
tensioners, and wireless remote
control batteries.
Perchlorate Material
WARNING
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive
your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your
ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time,
impair judgment and reduce coordina-
tion, which could lead to an accident that
could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defen-
sively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and
be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full
attention to driving. Anything that dis-
tracts the driver, such as adjusting con-
trols, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with
resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding chil-
dren’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle, and never allow children to have
or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle
or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure
themselves by playing with the windows,
the moon roof, or other features of the
vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or
extremely cold temperatures inside the
vehicle can be fatal to children.
10
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Reading this manual
Explains symbols used in this man-
ual
Symbols in this manual
Symbols Meanings
WARNING:
Explains something that,
if not obeyed, could
cause death or serious
injury to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that,
if not obeyed, could
cause damage to or a
malfunction in the vehi-
cle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or
working procedures. Fol-
low the steps in numeri-
cal order.
Symbols in illustrations
Symbols Meanings
Indicates the action (push-
ing, turning, etc.) used to
operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an
operation (e.g. a lid opens).
Symbols Meanings
Indicates the component or
position being explained.
Means Do not, Do not do
this, or Do not let this hap-
pen.
12
Pictorial index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Pictorial index
■Exterior
The shape of the headlights may differ depending on the grade, etc.
Side doors...................................................................................................................P.110
Locking/unlocking..............................................................................................................P.110
Opening/closing the side windows...........................................................................P.148
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key..................................................P.412
Warning messages ..........................................................................................................P.398
Back door ................................................................................................................... P.114
Opening from inside the cabin
*
.....................................................................................P.117
Opening from outside ...............................................................................................P.115, 117
Warning messages ..........................................................................................................P.398
Outside rear view mirrors....................................................................................P.146
Adjusting the mirror angle..............................................................................................P.146
Folding the mirrors.............................................................................................................P.147
Driving position memory
*
..............................................................................................P.138
Defogging the mirrors....................................................................................................P.292
A
B
C
13
Pictorial index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Windshield wipers ........................................................................................ P.196, 201
Precautions against winter season............................................................................P.279
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer) ..................................................P.296
Precautions against car wash......................................................................................P.333
Fuel filler door........................................................................................................ P.203
Refueling method .............................................................................................................P.203
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity.........................................................................................P.425
Tires............................................................................................................................P.357
Tire size/inflation pressure ...........................................................................................P.430
Winter tires/tire chain ....................................................................................................P.279
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system..............................................P.357
Coping with flat tires........................................................................................................P.402
Hood ..........................................................................................................................P.346
Opening ...............................................................................................................................P.346
Engine compartment cover .........................................................................................P.349
Engine oil..............................................................................................................................P.426
Coping with overheat...................................................................................................... P.418
Warning messages ..........................................................................................................P.398
Headlights .................................................................................................................P.190
Parking lights/daytime running lights...............................................................P.190
Fog lights....................................................................................................................P.196
Cornering lights
*
.................................................................................................................P.192
Turn signal lights......................................................................................................P.183
Tail lights ....................................................................................................................P.190
License plate lights .................................................................................................P.190
Back-up light
Shifting the shift lever to R..............................................................................................P.180
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P.375, Watts: P.431)
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
15
Pictorial index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■Instrument panel
Power switch ............................................................................................................P.174
Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes.........................................P.174, 177
Emergency stop of the hybrid system..................................................................... P.380
When the hybrid system will not start ......................................................................P.409
Warning messages ..........................................................................................................P.398
Shift lever....................................................................................................................P.181
Changing the shift position..............................................................................................P.181
Precautions against towing...........................................................................................P.383
When the shift lever does not move ............................................................................P.181
Meters......................................................................................................................... P.84
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light..........................P.84, 88
Warning lights/indicator lights ......................................................................................P.80
When the warning lights come on............................................................................ P.388
Multi-information display...................................................................................... P.89
Display......................................................................................................................................P.90
Energy monitor.....................................................................................................................P.99
A
B
C
D
16
Pictorial index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
When the warning messages are displayed..........................................................P.398
Turn signal lever ......................................................................................................P.183
Headlight switch......................................................................................................P.190
Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/license plate lights/daytime running lights
...................................................................................................................................................P.190
Fog lights ............................................................................................................................... P.196
Windshield wiper and washer switch...................................................... P.196, 201
Usage............................................................................................................................ P.196, 201
Adding washer fluid.........................................................................................................P.353
Warning messages ..........................................................................................................P.398
Emergency flasher switch .................................................................................. P.380
Hood lock release lever.......................................................................................P.346
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch
*1
...................................................P.143
Adjustment........................................................................................................................... P.143
Driving position memory
*1
.............................................................................................P.138
Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever
*1
............................................P.143
Adjustment........................................................................................................................... P.143
Air conditioning system ........................................................................................P.291
Usage.......................................................................................................................................P.291
Rear window defogger...................................................................................................P.292
Audio system
*2
*1
: If equipped
*2
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
17
Pictorial index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■Switches
Instrument panel light control switches ............................................................ P.88
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button....................................... P.88
Front seat heater switches
*1
.............................................................................. P.300
Seat ventilator switches
*1
.....................................................................................P.301
Automatic High Beam switch..............................................................................P.193
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) main switch
*1
........................................................P.262
Power back door switch
*1
...................................................................................... P.117
Heated steering wheel switch
*1
........................................................................ P.300
Camera switch
*1, 2
Rear seat operation switches
*1
...........................................................................P.134
*1
: If equipped
*2
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
18
Pictorial index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Power window switches........................................................................................P.148
Window lock switch ...............................................................................................P.149
Outside rear view mirror switches....................................................................P.146
Door lock switch....................................................................................................... P.112
Driving position memory switches
*
...................................................................P.138
HUD (Head-up display) switches
*
.......................................................................P.95
ASC (Active Sound Control) dial
*
.................................................................... P.188
*
:If equipped
Audio remote control switches
*1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
19
Pictorial index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Paddle shift switches..............................................................................................P.182
Meter control switches.......................................................................................... P.89
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch ..................................................................P.242
Cruise control switch
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range.........................................P.237
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control) switch
*2
....................P.231
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch
*2
................................................................. P.223
Talk switch
*1
Telephone switches
*1
*1
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*2
: If equipped
EV drive mode switch ............................................................................................P.178
Driving mode select switch.................................................................................P.270
VSC off switch.........................................................................................................P.274
Parking brake switches.........................................................................................P.184
Applying/releasing...........................................................................................................P.184
Precautions against winter season............................................................................P.280
Warning buzzer/message.................................................................................P.185, 398
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
20
Pictorial index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Brake hold switch....................................................................................................P.187
Remote Touch.........................................................................................................P.286
Rear seat heater switches
*
................................................................................. P.300
*
:If equipped
E
F
G
21
Pictorial index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■Interior
SRS airbags................................................................................................................ P.32
Floor mats....................................................................................................................P.24
Front seats.................................................................................................................P.132
Rear seats..................................................................................................................P.133
Head restraints......................................................................................................... P.141
Seat belts .....................................................................................................................P.26
Console box.............................................................................................................P.306
Inside lock buttons...................................................................................................P.113
Cup holders .............................................................................................................P.306
Assist grips ................................................................................................................P.321
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
22
Pictorial index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■Ceiling
Inside rear view mirror ..........................................................................................P.144
Sun visors...................................................................................................................P.312
Vanity mirrors ..........................................................................................................P.312
Interior light
*2
........................................................................................................ P.303
Personal lights........................................................................................................ P.303
Moon roof switches
*1
.............................................................................................P.150
“SOS” button
*1
...........................................................................................................P.60
Garage door opener switches
*1
....................................................................... P.322
*1
: If equipped
*2
: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
23
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
1
For safety and security
For safety and security
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.................................24
For safe driving.............................. 25
Seat belts ......................................... 26
SRS airbags .................................... 32
Front passenger occupant classifi-
cation system ................................41
Exhaust gas precautions........... 45
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children..................... 47
Child restraint systems .............. 47
1-3. Lexus Enform
Lexus Enform Safety Connect60
Lexus Enform Remote............... 65
Lexus Enform Service Connect
........................................................... 66
1-4. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features.............. 67
Hybrid system precautions......70
1-5. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system ..................... 75
Alarm................................................. 77
24
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1-1.For safe use
Use only floor mats designed specifi-
cally for vehicles of the same model
and model year as your vehicle. Fix
them securely in place onto the carpet.
1 Insert the retaining hooks (clips)
into the floor mat eyelets.
2 Turn the upper knob of each retain-
ing hook (clip) to secure the floor
mats in place.
Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips)
may differ from that shown in the illustra-
tion.
Before driving
Observe the following before start-
ing off in the vehicle to ensure
safety of driving.
Installing floor mats
A
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s
floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with
the pedals while driving. An unexpect-
edly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle. This
could lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ When installing the driver’s floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for
other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Lexus Genu-
ine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the
driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely
using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on
top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-
side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this
check after cleaning the floor.
● With the hybrid system stopped and
the shift lever in P, fully depress each
pedal to the floor to make sure it does
not interfere with the floor mat.
25
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
Adjust the angle of the seatback so
that you are sitting straight up and
so that you do not have to lean for-
ward to steer. (P.132)
Adjust the seat so that you can
depress the pedals fully and so that
your arms bend slightly at the
elbow when gripping the steering
wheel. (P.132, 143)
Lock the head restraint in place
with the center of the head restraint
closest to the top of your ears.
(P.141)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P.27)
Make sure that all occupants are wear-
ing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle. (P.27)
Use a child restraint system appropri-
ate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belt. (P.47)
Make sure that you can see the rear of
the vehicle clearly, by adjusting the
inside and outside rear view mirrors
properly. (P.144, 146)
For safe driving
For safe driving, adjust the seat and
mirror to an appropriate position
before driving.
Correct driving posture
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
A
B
C
D
● Do not adjust the position of the
driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the
driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct pos-
ture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and
head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the front
seats.
Objects placed under the front seats
may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in
place. This may lead to an accident
and the adjustment mechanism may
also be damaged.
● Always observe the legal speed limit
when driving on public roads.
● When driving over long distances, take
regular breaks before you start to feel
tired. Also, if you feel tired or sleepy
while driving, do not force yourself to
continue driving and take a break
immediately.
Correct use of the seat belts
Adjusting the mirrors
26
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are
wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat
belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one
person only. Do not use a seat belt for
more than one person at once, includ-
ing children.
● Lexus recommends that children be
seated in the rear seat and always use
a seat belt and/or an appropriate child
restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position,
do not recline the seat more than nec-
essary. The seat belt is most effective
when the occupants are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under
your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and
snug across your hips.
■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (P.27)
Women who are pregnant should posi-
tion the lap belt as low as possible over
the hips in the same manner as other
occupants, extending the shoulder belt
completely over the shoulder and avoid-
ing belt contact with the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only the pregnant woman, but also the
fetus could suffer death or serious injury
as a result of sudden braking or a colli-
sion.
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (P.27)
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to
choking or other serious injuries that
could result in death. If this occurs and
the buckle cannot be unfastened, scis-
sors should be used to cut the belt.
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allow-
ing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
27
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
Extend the shoulder belt so that it
comes fully over the shoulder, but
does not come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoulder.
Position the lap belt as low as possi-
ble over the hips.
Adjust the position of the seatback.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat.
Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were princi-
pally designed for persons of adult size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate
for the child, until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s
seat belt. (P.47)
● When the child becomes large enough to
properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, fol-
low the instructions regarding seat belt
usage. (P.26)
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long enough,
a personalized seat belt extender is avail-
able from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
WARNING
● Inspect the seat belt system periodi-
cally. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt
until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts
cannot protect an occupant from
death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are
locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function cor-
rectly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including
the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if
there’s no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove,
modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs
carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inap-
propriate handling may lead to incor-
rect operation.
Correct use of the seat belts
WARNING
■ Using a seat belt extender
Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if
you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender
when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, increasing
the risk of death or serious injury in the
event of an accident.
28
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1 To fasten the seat belt, push the
plate into the buckle until a click
sound is heard.
2 To release the seat belt, press the
release button .
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sud-
den stop or on impact. It may also lock if you
lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy
motion will allow the belt to extend so that
you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-
pletely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and
cannot be extended. This feature is used to
hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt
and then pull the belt out once more.
1 Take out the plate.
Plate A
Plate B
2 When fixing the belt, in the order of
plate A and then plate B, insert the
WARNING
● The personalized extender may not be
safe on another vehicle, when used by
another person, or at a different seat-
ing position other than the one origi-
nally intended.
NOTICE
■ When releasing a seat belt extender
Press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt, then,
release the extender from the seat belt
buckle.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle
interior and the extender itself.
Fastening and releasing the seat
belt (except for the rear center
seat)
A
Fastening the seat belt (for the
rear center seat)
A
B
29
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
plate into the buckle until a clicking
sound is heard.
Plate A
Plate B
Buckle
1 To release the hooked buckle, push
the buckle release button .
2 Insert the mechanical key
(P.106) or plate B into the notch
of buckle and remove the belt.
Retract the belt slowly when releasing and
stowing the seat belt.
Mechanical key
Plate B
Buckle
3 Stow in the cover in the order of
plate B and then plate A.
In order to securely fix it, firmly insert it to
WARNING
■ When using the rear center seat belt
Do not use the rear center seat belt with
either buckle released. Fastening only
one of the buckles may result in death or
serious injury in case of sudden braking
or a collision.
A
B
C
Releasing and stowing the seat
belt (for the rear center seat)
A
A
B
C
30
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
the back.
Plate A
Plate B
4 Stow the seat belt buckle in the
pockets.
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sud-
den stop or on impact. It may also lock if you
lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy
motion will allow the belt to extend so that
you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-
pletely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and
cannot be extended. This feature is used to
hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt
and then pull the belt out once more.
1 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor
down while pressing the release
button .
2 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor
up.
Move the height adjuster up and down as
needed until you hear a click.
The pretensioners help the seat belts to
quickly restrain the occupants by
retracting the seat belts when the vehi-
A
B
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder
anchor height (front seats)
WARNING
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from your neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce
the amount of protection in an accident
and cause death or serious injuries in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or
accident.
Seat belt pretensioners (front
seats)
A
31
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
cle is subjected to certain types of
severe frontal or side collision or a
vehicle rollover.
The pretensioners do not activate in the
event of a minor frontal impact, a minor
side impact or a rear impact.
■ Replacing the belt after the preten-
sioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple colli-
sions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the
second or subsequent collisions.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cush-
ion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s
weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger’s weight
properly. As a result, the seat belt pre-
tensioner for the front passenger’s seat
may not activate in the event of a colli-
sion.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the
SRS warning light will come on. In that
case, the seat belt cannot be used
again and must be replaced at your
Lexus dealer.
32
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Location of the SRS airbags
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with
interior components
SRS knee airbag
Can help provide driver protection
SRS seat cushion airbag
Can help restrain the front passenger
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work
together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
SRS airbag system
A
B
C
D
33
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
SRS curtain shield airbags
• Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
• Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of vehi-
cle rollover
■ SRS airbag system components
Front passenger airbag
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
Side airbags
Curtain shield airbags
Side impact sensors (rear)
SRS warning light
Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)
Driver airbag
Side impact sensors (front door)
Driver’s seat belt pretensioner
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner and force limiter
Seat cushion airbag
Driver’s seat position sensor
Knee airbag
Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
E
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
34
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
Front impact sensors
Airbag sensor assembly
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor
vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag
deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system com-
ponents diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information.
As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-
toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising, etc., may
be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the
extremely high speed deployment (infla-
tion) by hot gases.
● A loud noise and white powder will be
emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering
wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the front seats, parts of the front
and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may
be hot for several minutes. The airbag
itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● The hybrid system will be stopped and
fuel supply to the engine will be stopped.
(P.73)
● All of the doors will be unlocked. (P.111)
● For Lexus Enform Safety Connect sub-
scribers, if any of the following situations
occur, the system is designed to send an
emergency call to the response center,
notifying them of the vehicle’s location
(without needing to push the “SOS” but-
ton) and an agent will attempt to speak
with the occupants to ascertain the level
of emergency and assistance required. If
the occupants are unable to communi-
cate, the agent automatically treats the
call as an emergency and helps to dis-
patch the necessary emergency services.
(P.60)
• An SRS airbag is deployed.
• A seat belt pretensioner is activated.
• The vehicle is involved in a severe rear-
end collision.
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS
front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the
event of an impact that exceeds the set
threshold level (the level of force corre-
sponding to an approximately 12-18 mph
[20-30 km/h] frontal collision with a
fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be con-
siderably higher in the following situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a
parked vehicle or sign pole, which can
move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride
collision, such as a collision in which the
front of the vehicle underrides, or goes
under, the bed of a truck
● Depending on the type of collision, it is
possible that only the seat belt preten-
sioners will activate.
● The SRS front airbags for the front pas-
senger will not activate if there is no pas-
senger sitting in the front passenger seat.
However, the SRS front airbags for the
front passenger may deploy if luggage is
put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccu-
pied.
● The SRS seat cushion airbag on the front
passenger seat will not operate if the
occupant is not wearing a seat belt.
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS
side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags
will deploy in the event of an impact that
exceeds the set threshold level (the level
of force corresponding to the impact
force produced by an approximately
3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with
P
Q
R
35
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
the vehicle cabin from a direction per-
pendicular to the vehicle orientation at an
approximate speed of 12 -18 mph [20 -
30 km/h]).
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags will
deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.
● All SRS side and curtain shield airbags
will deploy in the event of a severe frontal
collision.
■ Conditions under which the SRS air-
bags may deploy (inflate), other than a
collision
The SRS front airbags, SRS side and curtain
shield airbags may also deploy if a serious
impact occurs to the underside of your
vehicle. Some examples are shown in the
illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling
The SRS curtain shield airbags may also
deploy under the situations shown in the
illustration.
● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy
the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or
rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved
in a low-speed frontal collision. But, when-
ever a collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, deploy-
ment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy
the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain
shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags
may not activate if the vehicle is subjected
to a collision from the side at certain angles,
or a collision to the side of the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger compart-
ment
● Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbags do not generally
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear colli-
sion, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-
speed side or low-speed frontal collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
36
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
The SRS curtain shield airbags do not gen-
erally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if
it is involved in a low-speed side or low-
speed frontal collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Pitching end over end
■ When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle will
require inspection and/or repair. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been
inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS front airbags to inflate.
● A portion of a door or its surrounding
area is damaged or deformed, or the
vehicle was involved in an accident that
was not severe enough to cause the
SRS side and curtain shield airbags to
inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger air-
bag or lower portion of the instrument
panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● The front passenger’s seat cushion sur-
face is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● The surface of the seats with the SRS side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars
or roof side rail garnishes (padding) con-
taining the SRS curtain shield airbags
inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
37
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the
vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental
devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with
considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the
driver is very close to the airbag. The
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s air-
bag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of
inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250
mm) from your driver airbag provides
you with a clear margin of safety. This
distance is measured from the center
of the steering wheel to your breast-
bone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250
mm) away now, you can change your
driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as
you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many
drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250
mm) distance, even with the driver seat
all the way forward, simply by reclining
the back of the seat somewhat. If
reclining the back of your seat makes it
hard to see the road, raise yourself by
using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or
raise the seat if your vehicle has that
feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt
it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head
and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recom-
mended by NHTSA above, while still
maintaining control of the foot pedals,
steering wheel, and your view of the
instrument panel controls.
38
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
WARNING
● If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the front seat belt buckles
but the seat belt extender has not also
been fastened to the latch plate of the
seat belt, the SRS front airbags will
judge that the driver and front passen-
ger are wearing the seat belt even
though the seat belt has not been con-
nected. In this case, the SRS front air-
bags may not activate correctly in a
collision, resulting in death or serious
injury in the event of a collision. Be
sure to wear the seat belt with the seat
belt extender.
● The SRS front passenger airbag also
deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury
especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passen-
ger seat should be as far from the air-
bag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained
infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag.
An infant or child who is too small to
use a seat belt should be properly
secured using a child restraint system.
Lexus strongly recommends that all
infants and children be placed in the
rear seats of the vehicle and properly
restrained. The rear seats are safer for
infants and children than the front pas-
senger seat. (P.47)
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
● Do not allow the front seat occupants
to hold items on their knees.
● Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pil-
lars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seat toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehi-
cle.
39
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
WARNING
● Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board, steering wheel pad and lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when the SRS driver, front passenger
and knee airbags deploy.
● Do not attach anything to areas such
as a door, windshield, side door glass,
front or rear pillar, roof side rail and
assist grip.
● Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard objects on the coat hooks. All of
these items could become projectiles
and may cause death or serious injury,
should the SRS curtain shield airbags
deploy.
● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where
the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be
sure to remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which
cover the parts where the SRS side air-
bags and SRS seat cushion airbag
inflate as they may interfere with infla-
tion of the SRS airbags. Such accesso-
ries may prevent the side airbags and
seat cushion airbag from activating
correctly, disable the system or cause
the side airbags and seat cushion air-
bag to inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels
of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to
malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component
parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they
may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the
SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or
leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so.
Wash off any residue as soon as possi-
ble to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are
stored, such as the steering wheel pad
and front and rear pillar garnishes, are
damaged or cracked, have them
replaced by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not place anything, such as a cush-
ion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s
weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger’s weight
properly. As a result, the SRS front air-
bags for the front passenger may not
deploy in the event of a collision.
40
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
WARNING
■ Modification and disposal of SRS air-
bag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or per-
form any of the following modifications
without consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or
deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing
death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and
repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or
replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or
seat upholstery, front, side and rear pil-
lars or roof side rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front
fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment
● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars,
kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows,
winches or roof luggage carrier
● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspen-
sion system
● Installation of electronic devices such
as mobile two-way radios and CD
players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a per-
son with a physical disability
41
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
For the U.S.A.
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
For Canada
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification sys-
tem. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and acti-
vates or deactivates the front passenger airbag and seat cushion airbag in the
front passenger side.
System components
A
B
C
D
E
F
42
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Adult
*1
■ Child
*4
■ Child restraint system with infant
*5
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification
system
Indicator/warning
light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indica-
tor lights
“AIR BAG ON”
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Off
*2
or flashing
*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag Activated
Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger
side
Activated
*2
or deac-
tivated
*3
Indicator/warning
light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indica-
tor lights
“AIR BAG OFF” or
“AIR BAG ON”
*4
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Off
*2
or flashing
*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated or acti-
vated
*4
Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger
side
Deactivated or acti-
vated
*2, 4
Indicator/warning
light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indica-
tor lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
*6
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Off
*2
or flashing
*3
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger
side
43
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
■ Unoccupied
■ There is a malfunction in the system
*1
: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the
front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on
his/her physique and posture.
*2
: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.
*3
: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*4
: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the sys-
tem may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the phy-
sique or posture.
*5
: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-
facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it
is unavoidable. (P.49)
*6
: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child
restraint system properly. (P.47)
Indicator/warning
light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indica-
tor lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger
side
Indicator/warning
light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indica-
tor lights
“AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light
On
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger
side
44
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant classifica-
tion system precautions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system. Failure to do so may
cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat
belt plate has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in
the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator light is not illuminated when
using the seat belt extender for the
front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated, dis-
connect the extender tongue from the
seat belt buckle, and reconnect the
seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt
extender after making sure the “AIR
BAG ON” indicator light is illumi-
nated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for
the front passenger will not activate,
which could cause death or serious
injury in the event of a collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front
passenger seat or equipment (e.g.
seatback pocket).
● Do not put weight on the front passen-
ger seat by putting your hands or feet
on the front passenger seat seatback
from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the
front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front pas-
senger seat.
● Do not recline the front passenger
seatback so far that it touches a rear
seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the SRS airbags
for the front passenger will not activate
in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return
the seatback to a position where it
does not touch the rear seat. Keep the
front passenger seatback as upright as
possible when the vehicle is moving.
Reclining the seatback excessively
may lessen the effectiveness of the
seat belt system.
● If an adult sits in the front passenger
seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the
passenger to sit up straight, well back
in the seat, feet on the floor, and with
the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator still remains illu-
minated, either ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat, or if that is not
possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install a for-
ward-facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, install the
child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat in the proper order.
(P.49)
● Do not modify or remove the front
seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or
subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS warning light may come on to
indicate a malfunction of the front pas-
senger occupant classification system.
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer
immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the
rear seat should not contact the front
seatbacks.
45
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
WARNING
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a
cushion and seat cover, that covers the
seat cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the uphol-
stery of the front seat.
Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human
body is contained in exhaust gases
if inhaled.
WARNING
Exhaust gases contain harmful carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases
to enter the vehicle and may lead to an
accident caused by light-headedness, or
may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
■ Important points while driving
● Keep the back door closed.
● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehi-
cle even when the back door is closed,
open the windows and have the vehi-
cle inspected at your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated
area or a closed area, such as a
garage, stop the hybrid system.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the
hybrid system on for a long time. If
such a situation cannot be avoided,
park the vehicle in an open space and
ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter
the vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the hybrid system operat-
ing in an area with snow build-up, or
where it is snowing. If snowbanks build
up around the vehicle while the hybrid
system is operating, exhaust gases
may collect and enter the vehicle.
46
1-1. For safe use
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
WARNING
■ Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked
periodically. If there is a hole or crack
caused by corrosion, damage to a joint
or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to
have the vehicle inspected and repaired
by your Lexus dealer.
47
1-2. Child safety
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
1-2.Child safety
Points to remember: P.47
Child restraint system: P.48
When using a child restraint system:
P.49
Child restraint system installation
method
• Fixed with a seat belt: P.51
• Fixed with a child restraint LATCH
anchor: P.55
• Using an anchor bracket (for top
tether strap): P.57
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A.
as well as Canada now require the use
of child restraint systems.
Prioritize and observe the warn-
ings, as well as the laws and regula-
Riding with children
Observe the following precautions
when children are in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system appro-
priate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly
wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
It is recommended that children
sit in the rear seats to avoid acci-
dental contact with the shift lever,
wiper switch, etc.
Use the rear door child-protector
lock or the window lock switch to
avoid children opening the door
while driving or operating the
power window accidentally.
(P.113, 149)
Do not let small children operate
equipment which may catch or
pinch body parts, such as the
power window, hood, back door,
seats etc.
WARNING
■ When children are in the vehicle
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle, and never allow children to have
or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle
or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure
themselves by playing with the windows,
the moon roof (if equipped) or other fea-
tures of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures
inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
Child restraint systems
Before installing a child restraint
system in the vehicle, there are pre-
cautions that need to be observed,
different types of child restraint sys-
tems, as well as installation meth-
ods, etc., written in this manual.
Use a child restraint system when
riding with a small child that cannot
properly use a seat belt. For the
child’s safety, install the child restraint
system to a rear seat. Be sure to fol-
low the installation method that is in
the operation manual enclosed with
the restraint system.
Table of contents
Points to remember
48
1-2. Child safety
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
tions for child restraint systems.
Choose a child restraint system that
suits your vehicle and is appropriate
to the age and size of the child.
Use a child restraint system until the
child becomes large enough to
properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
■ Types of child restraint system installation methods
Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system about
the installation of the child restraint system.
WARNING
■ When a child is riding
Observe the following precautions. Fail-
ure to do so may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
● For effective protection in automobile
accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a
seat belt or child restraint system
which is correctly installed. For installa-
tion details, refer to the operation man-
ual enclosed with the child restraint
system. General installation instruction
is provided in this manual.
● Lexus strongly urges the use of a
proper child restraint system that con-
forms to the weight and size of the
child, installed on the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front seat.
● Holding a child in your or someone
else’s arms is not a substitute for a child
restraint system. In an accident, the
child can be crushed against the wind-
shield or between the holder and the
interior of the vehicle.
■ Handling the child restraint system
If the child restraint system is not prop-
erly fixed in place, the child or other pas-
sengers may be seriously injured or even
killed in the event of sudden braking, sud-
den swerving, or an accident.
● If the vehicle were to receive a strong
impact from an accident, etc., it is pos-
sible that the child restraint system has
damage that is not readily visible. In
such cases, do not reuse the restraint
system.
● Make sure you have complied with all
installation instructions provided with
the child restraint system manufac-
turer and that the system is properly
secured.
● Keep the child restraint system prop-
erly secured on the seat even if it is not
in use. Do not store the child restraint
system unsecured in the passenger
compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child
restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the lug-
gage compartment.
Child restraint system
49
1-2. Child safety
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
■ When installing a child restraint
system to a front passenger seat
For the safety of a child, install child
restraint systems to a rear seats. When
installing child restraint system to a
front passenger seat is unavoidable,
adjust the seat as follows and install the
child restraint system.
Move the front seat fully rearward. If
the passenger seat height can be
adjusted, move it to the upper most
position.
Adjust the seatback angle to the
most upright position. When install-
ing a forward-facing child seat, if
there is a gap between the child seat
and the seatback, adjust the seat-
back angle until good contact is
achieved.
Installation method Page
Seat belt attachment P.51
Child restraint
LATCH anchors
attachment
P.55
Anchor brackets (for
top tether strap)
attachment
P.57
When using a child restraint sys-
tem
50
1-2. Child safety
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
If the head restraint interferes with
your child restraint system, and the
head restraint can be removed,
remove the head restraint. Other-
wise, put the head restraint in the
upper most position.
WARNING
■ When using a child restraint system
Observe the following precautions. Fail-
ure to do so may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
● Never install a rear-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator light is illuminated. In the event of
an accident, the force of the rapid infla-
tion of the front passenger airbag can
cause death or serious injury to the
child if the rear-facing child restraint
system is installed on the front passen-
ger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system
may be installed on the front passen-
ger seat only when it is unavoidable. A
child restraint system that requires a
top tether strap should not be used in
the front passenger seat since there is
no top tether strap anchor for the front
passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system
may be installed on the front passen-
ger seat only when it is unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as pos-
sible, and raise the seat to the upper
most position, even if the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated. If
the head restraint interferes with the
child restraint system installation and
the head restraint can be removed,
remove the head restraint.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her
head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat,
front or rear pillars or roof side rails
from which the SRS side airbags or
SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even
if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if the
SRS side airbags and curtain shield air-
bags inflate, and the impact could
cause death or serious injury to the
child.
● When a booster seat is installed,
always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the
child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck, but
not so that it could fall off the child’s
shoulder.
51
1-2. Child safety
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
A child restraint system for a small
child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap por-
tion of the lap/shoulder belt.
■ Installing child restraint system
using a seat belt (child restraint
lock function belt)
Install the child restraint system in
accordance to the operation manual
enclosed with the child restraint sys-
tem.
■ Rear-facing — Infant seat/convert-
ible seat
1 Adjust the rear seat
If there is a gap between the child seat and
the seatback, adjust the seatback until
good contact is achieved.
2 Place the child restraint system on
the rear seat facing the rear of the
vehicle.
3 Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock
mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot
be extended.
5 While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
WARNING
● Use child restraint system suitable to
the age and size of the child and install
it to the rear seat.
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the right-
hand rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
Child restraint system fixed with
a seat belt
52
1-2. Child safety
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a
point where there is no slack in the belt,
pull the belt to check that it cannot be
extended.
6 After installing the child restraint
system, rock it back and forth to
ensure that it is installed securely.
(P.54)
■ Forward-facing — Convertible seat
1 Adjust the seat
When using the front passenger
seat
If installing the child restraint system to the
front passenger seat is unavoidable, refer
to P.49 for front passenger seat adjust-
ment.
When using the rear seat
If there is a gap between the child seat and
the seatback, adjust the seatback angle
until good contact is achieved.
2 If the head restraint interferes with
the child restraint system installa-
tion and the head restraint can be
removed, remove the head
restraint. (P.142)
3 Place the child restraint system on
the seat facing the front of the vehi-
cle.
4 Run the seat belt through the child
restraint system and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
5 Fully extend the shoulder belt and
allow it to retract to put it in lock
53
1-2. Child safety
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot
be extended.
6 While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until the
child restraint system is securely in
place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a
point where there is no slack in the belt,
pull the belt to check that it cannot be
extended.
7 If the child restraint has a top tether
strap, follow the child restraint man-
ufacturer’s operation manual
regarding the installation, using the
top tether strap to latch onto the
top tether strap anchor. (P.57)
8 After installing the child restraint
system, rock it back and forth to
ensure that it is installed securely.
(P.54)
■ Booster seat
1 If installing the child restraint sys-
tem to the front passenger seat is
unavoidable, refer to P.49 for front
passenger seat adjustment.
2 High back type: If the head restraint
interferes with your child restraint
system, and the head restraint can
be removed, remove the head
restraint. (P.142)
3 Place the child restraint system on
the seat facing the front of the vehi-
cle.
Booster type
54
1-2. Child safety
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
High back type
4 Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the child
restraint system according to the
manufacturer’s instructions and
insert the plate into the buckle.
Make sure that the belt is not
twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly
positioned over the child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is as low as possible.
(P.27)
■ Removing a child restraint system
installed with a seat belt
Press the buckle release button and
fully retract the seat belt.
When releasing the buckle, the child
restraint system may spring up due to the
rebound of the seat cushion. Release the
buckle while holding down the child
restraint system.
Since the seat belt automatically reels itself,
slowly return it to the stowing position.
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint sys-
tem
Observe the following precautions. Fail-
ure to do so may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
● Do not allow children to play with the
seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may
lead to choking or other serious inju-
ries that could result in death. If this
occurs and the buckle cannot be
unfastened, scissors should be used to
cut the belt.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are
securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system left
and right, and forward and backward
to ensure that it has been securely
installed.
● After securing a child restraint system,
never adjust the seat.
● When a booster seat is installed,
always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the
child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck, but
not so that it could fall off the child’s
shoulder.
● Follow all installation instructions pro-
vided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
55
1-2. Child safety
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
■ Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for the
outboard rear seats. (Buttons display-
ing the location of the anchors are
attached to the seats.)
■ When installing in the rear out-
board seats
Install the child restraint system in
accordance to the operation manual
enclosed with the child restraint sys-
tem.
1 Adjust the seat
If there is a gap between the child seat and
the seatback, adjust the seatback until
good contact is achieved.
2 If the head restraint interferes with
the child restraint system installa-
tion and the head restraint can be
removed, remove the head
restraint. (P.142)
3 Widen the gap between the seat
cushion and seatback slightly.
With flexible lower attachments
4 Latch the hooks of the lower
attachments onto the LATCH
anchors.
For owners in Canada:
WARNING
● When securing some types of child
restraint systems in rear seats, it may
not be possible to properly use the
seat belts in positions next to the child
restraint without interfering with it or
affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be
sure your seat belt fits snugly across
your shoulder and low on your hips. If it
does not, or if it interferes with the
child restraint, move to a different posi-
tion. Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● When installing a child restraint system
in the rear center seat, adjust both
seatbacks at the same angle. Other-
wise, the child restraint system cannot
be securely restrained and this may
cause death or serious injuries in the
event of sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
■ When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR
lock mode, do not fully extend the shoul-
der belt. ALR mode causes the belt to
tighten only. This could cause injury or
discomfort to the child. (P.28)
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when
installing a child restraint system, the seat
belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or
other passengers in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Child restraint system fixed with
a child restraint LATCH anchor
56
1-2. Child safety
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
The symbol on a child restraint system indi-
cates the presence of a lower connec-
tor system.
With rigid lower attachments
4 Latch the buckles onto the LATCH
anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indi-
cates the presence of a lower connec-
tor system.
5 If the child restraint has a top tether
strap, follow the child restraint man-
ufacturer’s operation manual
regarding the installation, using the
top tether strap to latch onto the
top tether strap anchor. (P.57)
6 After installing the child restraint
system, rock it back and forth to
ensure that it is installed securely.
(P.54)
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to
anchors
The LATCH system conforms to
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE
J1819.
A
A
57
1-2. Child safety
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
■ Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap)
Anchor brackets are provided for each
rear seat.
Use anchor brackets when fixing the
top tether strap.
Anchor bracket
Anchor bracket for rear center seat
Anchor bracket for rear outboard
seats
■ Fixing the top tether strap to the
anchor bracket
Install the child restraint system in
accordance to the operation manual
enclosed with the child restraint sys-
tem.
Outboard rear seats
1 Adjust the head restraint to the
upmost position.
If the head restraint interferes with the child
restraint system installation and the head
restraint can be removed, remove the head
restraint. (P.142)
2 Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint sys-
tem
Observe the following precautions. Fail-
ure to do so may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
● When using the LATCH anchors, be
sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat
belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system.
● Follow all installation instructions pro-
vided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
● When securing some types of child
restraint systems in rear seats, it may
not be possible to properly use the
seat belts in positions next to the child
restraint without interfering with it or
affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be
sure your seat belt fits snugly across
your shoulder and low on your hips. If it
does not, or if it interferes with the
child restraint, move to a different posi-
tion. Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury.
● If the seat is adjusted, reconfirm the
security of the child restraint system.
Using an anchor bracket (for top
tether strap)
A
B
C
58
1-2. Child safety
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Make sure the top tether strap is securely
latched. (P.54)
When installing the child restraint system
with the head restraint being raised, be
sure to have the top tether strap pass
underneath the head restraint.
Top tether strap
Hook
Rear center seat
1 Adjust the head restraint to the
downmost position.
If the head restraint interferes with the child
restraint system installation and the head
restraint can be removed, remove the head
restraint. (P.142)
2 Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is securely
latched. (P.54)
When installing the child restraint system
with the head restraint being lower, be sure
to have the top tether strap pass over the
top of the head restraint.
Top tether strap
Hook
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to
anchors
The LATCH system conforms to
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE
J1819.
A
B
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint sys-
tem
Observe the following precautions. Fail-
ure to do so may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
● Firmly attach the top tether strap and
make sure that the belt is not twisted.
● Do not attach the top tether strap to
anything other than the anchor
bracket.
● After securing a child restraint system,
never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions pro-
vided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
A
B
59
1-2. Child safety
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
WARNING
● Outboard rear seats: When installing
the child restraint system with the head
restraint being raised, after the head
restraint has been raised and then the
anchor bracket has been fixed, do not
lower the head restraint.
● Rear center seat: When installing the
child restraint system with the head
restraint being lowered, be sure to
have the top tether strap pass over the
top of the head restraint. If the belt
passes below the head restraint, it is
possible that the child restraint system
may not be securely fixed.
NOTICE
■ Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap)
When not in use, make certain to close
the lid. If it remains open, the lid may be
damaged.
60
1-3. Lexus Enform
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1-3.Lexus Enform
*
:If equipped
Microphone
“SOS” button
LED light indicators
Lexus Enform Safety Con-
nect
*
Safety Connect is a subscription-
based telematics service that uses
Global Positioning System (GPS)
data and embedded cellular tech-
nology to provide safety and secu-
rity features to subscribers. Safety
Connect is supported by Lexus’
designated response center, which
operates 24 hours per day, 7 days
per week.
Safety Connect service is available
by subscription on select, telemat-
ics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect ser-
vice, you are agreeing to be bound
by the Telematics Subscription Ser-
vice Agreement and its Terms and
Conditions, as in effect and
amended from time to time, a cur-
rent copy of which is available at
Lexus.com. All use of the Safety
Connect service is subject to such
then-applicable Terms and Condi-
tions.
System components
A
B
C
61
1-3. Lexus Enform
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
■ Certification for Lexus Enform
62
1-3. Lexus Enform
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Subscribers have the following Safety
Connect services available:
Automatic Collision Notification
*
Helps drivers receive necessary response
from emergency service providers.
(P.63)
*
: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft.
(P.63)
Emergency Assistance Button
(“SOS”)
Connects drivers to response-center sup-
port. (P.63)
Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assis-
tance. (P.63)
After you have signed the Telematics
Subscription Service Agreement and
are enrolled, you can begin receiving
services.
A variety of subscription terms is avail-
able for purchase. Contact your Lexus
dealer, call the following or push the
“SOS” button in your vehicle for fur-
ther subscription details.
• The United States
1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987)
• Canada
1-800-26-LEXUS (1-800-265-3987)
•Puerto Rico
1-877-539-8777
■ Safety Connect Services Information
● Phone calls using the vehicles Blue-
tooth
®
technology will not be possible
during Safety Connect.
Services Subscription
63
1-3. Lexus Enform
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall
2009 on select Lexus models (in the
contiguous United States only). Contact
with the Safety Connect response center
is dependent upon the telematics device
being in operative condition, cellular con-
nection availability, and GPS satellite sig-
nal reception, which can limit the ability to
reach the response center or receive
emergency service support. Enrollment
and Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement required. A variety of sub-
scription terms is available; charges vary
by subscription term selected and loca-
tion.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emer-
gency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle
Location will function in the United
States, including Hawaii and Alaska,
Puerto Rico and in Canada, and
Enhanced Roadside Assistance will func-
tion in the United States, Puerto Rico and
in Canada.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emer-
gency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle and
Enhanced Road Assistance will not func-
tion in the United States Virgin Islands.
For vehicles first sold in the USVI, no
Safety Connect services will function in
and outside the United States Virgin
Islands.
● Safety Connect services are not subject
to section 255 of the Telecommunica-
tions Act and the device is not TTY com-
patible.
■ Languages
The Safety Connect response center will
offer support in multiple languages. The
Safety Connect system will offer voice
prompts in English, Spanish, and French.
Please indicate your language of choice
when enrolling.
■ When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response
center if the network is busy.
When the power switch is turned to
ON mode, the red indicator light
comes on for 2 seconds then turns off.
Afterward, the green indicator light
comes on, indicating that the service is
active.
The following indicator light patterns
indicate specific system usage condi-
tions:
Green indicator light on = Active
service
Green indicator light flashing =
Safety Connect call in process
Red indicator light (except at vehi-
cle start-up) = System malfunction
(contact your Lexus dealer)
No indicator light (off) = Safety
Connect service not active
■ Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or
severe rear-end collision, the system is
designed to automatically call the
response center. The responding agent
receives the vehicle’s location and
attempts to speak with the vehicle
occupants to assess the level of emer-
gency. If the occupants are unable to
communicate, the agent automatically
treats the call as an emergency, con-
tacts the nearest emergency services
provider to describe the situation, and
requests that assistance be sent to the
location.
Safety Connect LED light Indi-
cators
Safety Connect services
64
1-3. Lexus Enform
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect
can work with local authorities to assist
them in locating and recovering the
vehicle. After filing a police report, call
the Safety Connect response center at
1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-
3987) in the United States, 1-877-
539-8777 in Puerto Rico or 1-800-
265-3987 in Canada, and follow the
prompts for Safety Connect to initiate
this service.
In addition to assisting law enforce-
ment with recovery of a stolen vehicle,
Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle
location data may, under certain cir-
cumstances, be shared with third par-
ties to locate your vehicle. Further
information is available at Lexus.com.
■ Emergency Assistance Button
(“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the
road, push the “SOS” button to reach
the Safety Connect response center.
The answering agent will determine
your vehicle’s location, assess the
emergency, and dispatch the neces-
sary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button,
tell the response-center agent that you are
not experiencing an emergency.
■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds
GPS data to the already included war-
ranty- based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” but-
ton to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help
with a wide range of needs, such as:
towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a
description of the Roadside Assistance
services and their limitations, please
see the Safety Connect Terms and
Conditions, which are available at
Lexus.com.
Important! Read this information about
exposure to radio frequency signals
before using Safety Connect;
The Safety Connect system installed in
your vehicle is a low-power radio trans-
mitter and receiver. It receives and also
sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Commu-
nications Commission (FCC) adopted
RF exposure guidelines with safety lev-
els for mobile wireless phones. Those
guidelines are consistent with the
safety standards previously set by the
following U.S. and international stan-
dards bodies.
ANSI (American National Stan-
dards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
NCRP (National Council on Radia-
tion Protection and Measurement)
Report 86 [1986]
ICNIRP (International Commission
on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protec-
tion) [1996]
Those standards were based on com-
prehensive and periodic evaluations of
the relevant scientific literature. Over
120 scientists, engineers, and physi-
Safety information for Safety
Connect
65
1-3. Lexus Enform
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
cians from universities, and govern-
ment health agencies and industries
reviewed the available body of
research to develop the ANSI Stan-
dard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect com-
plies with the FCC guidelines in addi-
tion to those standards.
*
: If equipped
After you sign the Telematics Subscrip-
tion Service Agreement, download the
Lexus App from your smartphone’s
app store, and register within the app
(or enroll and complete registration at
the dealer), you can begin using these
services. (P.60)
A variety of subscription terms are
available. Contact your Lexus dealer,
or call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-
255-3987) for further subscription
details.
■ Availability of service
Lexus Enform Remote is not available in
some countries or areas.
■ Lexus Enform Remote Information
● Lexus Enform Remote should only be
used by authorized users.
● Laws in some communities may require
that the vehicle be within view of the user
when operating Lexus Enform Remote.
Lexus Enform Remote
*
Lexus Enform Remote is a smart-
phone application that lets you view
and remotely control certain
aspects of your vehicle.
For details about the functions and
services of this application, refer to
http://www.lexus.com/enform/
.
Function of the Lexus Enform
Remote is achieved by using an
embedded cellular device in the
vehicle (DCM: Data Communica-
tion Module).
Subscription
66
1-3. Lexus Enform
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
In some states, use of Lexus Enform
Remote may violate state or local laws.
Before using Lexus Enform Remote,
check your state and local laws.
● Any malfunction of the Lexus should be
repaired by your Lexus dealer.
● Lexus Enform Remote is designed to
work at temperatures above -22°F (-
30°C). This specification is related to the
Lexus Enform Remote operation, but is
dependent on the vehicle’s operating
temperature range which may be differ-
ent.
● Content is subject to change without
notice.
● Some features of the Lexus Enform
Remote may not be available on some
models.
● Additional information can be found at
www.lexus.com/enform/
.
● Availability of functions of the Lexus
Enform service is dependent on network
reception level.
■ Safety information for Lexus Enform
Remote
Refer to the safety information for Safety
Connect: P.64
*
: If equipped
■ Availability of service
Lexus Enform Service Connect is not avail-
able in some countries or areas.
■ Lexus Enform Service Connect Infor-
mation
Availability of functions of the Lexus Enform
Service Connect is dependent on network
reception level.
■ Safety information for Lexus Enform
Service Connect
Refer to the safety information for Safety
Connect: P.64
Lexus Enform Service Con-
nect
*
Lexus Enform Service Connect
uses embedded telematics hard-
ware to collect and transmit vehicle
data that allows Lexus to provide:
Vehicle Health Report (VHR)
(Safety Recalls, Service Cam-
paigns, Current Vehicle Alerts,
Required Maintenance, and Vehi-
cle Condition Status)
Maintenance Notifications
Vehicle Alert Notifications
For details about this service and
how to register, refer to
http://www.lexus.com/enform/
.
The Lexus Enform Service Con-
nect is achieved by using a Data
Communication Module (DCM)
built in the vehicle.
67
1-4. Hybrid system
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
1-4.Hybrid system
The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.
Gasoline engine
Front electric motor (traction motor)
Rear electric motor (traction motor)
■ When stopped/during start off
The gasoline engine stops
*
when the
vehicle is stopped. During start off, the
electric motor (traction motor) drives
the vehicle. At slow speeds or when
traveling down a gentle slope, the
engine is stopped
*
and the electric
motor (traction motor) is used.
When the shift lever is in N, the hybrid
battery (traction battery) is not being
charged. When the vehicle is stopped,
always put the shift lever to P.
Hybrid system features
Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conven-
tional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your
vehicle, and operate it with care.
The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric
motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel effi-
ciency and reducing exhaust emissions.
System components
A
B
C
68
1-4. Hybrid system
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Also, even in heavy traffic conditions,
drive the vehicle in D or S.
*
: When the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) requires charging or the engine is
warming up, etc., the gasoline engine will
not automatically stop. (P.68)
■ During normal driving
The gasoline engine is predominantly
used. The electric motor (traction
motor) charges the hybrid battery
(traction battery) as necessary.
■ When accelerating sharply
When the accelerator pedal is
depressed heavily, the power of the
hybrid battery (traction battery) is
added to that of the gasoline engine via
the electric motor (traction motor).
■ When braking (regenerative brak-
ing)
The wheels operate the electric motor
(traction motor) as a power generator,
and the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) is charged.
■ Regenerative braking
In the following situations, kinetic energy is
converted to electric energy and decelera-
tion force can be obtained in conjunction
with the recharging of the hybrid battery
(traction battery).
● The accelerator pedal is released while
driving with the shift lever in D or S.
● The brake pedal is depressed while driv-
ing with the shift lever in D or S.
■ EV indicator
The EV indicator comes on when the vehi-
cle is driven using only the electric motor
(traction motor) or the gasoline engine is
stopped.
■ Conditions in which the gasoline engine
may not stop
The gasoline engine starts and stops auto-
matically. However, it may not stop auto-
matically in the following conditions
*
:
● During gasoline engine warm-up
● During hybrid battery (traction battery)
charging
● When the temperature of the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) is high or low
● When the heater is switched on
*
: Depending on the circumstances, the
gasoline engine may also not stop auto-
matically in other situations.
■ Charging the hybrid battery (traction
battery)
As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid
battery (traction battery), the battery does
not need to be charged from an outside
source. However, if the vehicle is left parked
for a long time the hybrid battery (traction
battery) will slowly discharge. For this rea-
son, be sure to drive the vehicle at least
once every few months for at least 30 min-
utes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) becomes fully
discharged and you are unable to start the
hybrid system, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Charging the 12-volt battery
P.416
■ After the 12-volt battery has discharged
or when the terminal has been removed
and installed during exchange, etc.
The gasoline engine may not stop even if
the vehicle is being driven by the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery). If this continues for a
few days, contact your Lexus dealer.
69
1-4. Hybrid system
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a
hybrid vehicle
There may be no engine sound or vibration
even though the vehicle is able to move with
the “READY” indicator is illuminated. For
safety, make sure to shift the shift lever to P
and apply the parking brake when parked.
The following sounds or vibrations may
occur when the hybrid system is operating
and are not a malfunction:
● Motor sounds may be heard from the
engine compartment.
● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid
battery (traction battery) behind the rear
seats when the hybrid system starts or
stops.
● Relay operating sounds such as a snap or
soft clank will be emitted from the hybrid
battery (traction battery), behind the rear
seats, when the hybrid system is started
or stopped.
● Sounds from the hybrid system may be
heard when the back door is open.
● Sounds may be heard from the transmis-
sion when the gasoline engine starts or
stops, when driving at low speeds, or
during idling.
● Engine sounds may be heard when
accelerating sharply.
● Sounds may be heard due to regenera-
tive braking when the brake pedal is
depressed or as the accelerator pedal is
released.
● Vibration may be felt when the gasoline
engine starts or stops.
● Cooling fan sounds may be heard from
the air intake vents under the rear seats.
■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and dis-
posal
Contact your Lexus dealer regarding main-
tenance, repair, recycling and disposal. Do
not dispose of the vehicle yourself.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. on/off operation of the EV
indicator) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P.443)
When driving with the gasoline engine
stopped, a sound, which changes in
accordance with the driving speed, will
be played in order to warn people
nearby of the vehicle’s approach. The
sound will stop when the vehicle speed
exceeds approximately 22 mph (35
km/h).
■ Acoustic vehicle alerting system
In the following cases, the acoustic vehicle
alerting system may be difficult for sur-
rounding people to hear.
● In very noisy areas
● In the wind or the rain
Also, as the acoustic vehicle alerting system
is installed on the front of the vehicle, it may
be more difficult to hear from the rear of the
vehicle compared to the front.
Acoustic vehicle alerting system
70
1-4. Hybrid system
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
The illustration is an example for explanation and may differ from the actual item.
Warning label
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Rear electric motor (traction motor)
Service plug
High voltage cables (orange)
Front electric motor (traction motor)
Power control unit
Air conditioning compressor
■ Running out of fuel
When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the
hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the
Hybrid system precautions
Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it is a high voltage system
(about 650 V at maximum) as well as contains parts that become extremely
hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the warning labels attached to
the vehicle.
System components
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
71
1-4. Hybrid system
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
vehicle with at least enough gasoline to
make the low fuel level warning light
(P.393) go off. If there is only a small
amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not
be able to start. (The standard amount of
fuel is about 2.7 gal. [10.1 L, 2.2 Imp.gal.],
when the vehicle is on a level surface. This
value may vary when the vehicle is on a
slope. Add extra fuel when the vehicle is
inclined.)
■ Electromagnetic waves
● High voltage parts and cables on hybrid
vehicles incorporate electromagnetic
shielding, and therefore emit approxi-
mately the same amount of electromag-
netic waves as conventional gasoline
powered vehicles or home electronic
appliances.
● Your vehicle may cause sound interfer-
ence in some third party-produced radio
parts.
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a
limited service life. The lifespan of the
hybrid battery (traction battery) can
change in accordance with driving style and
driving conditions.
WARNING
■ High voltage precautions
This vehicle has high voltage DC and AC
systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC
and AC high voltage is very dangerous
and can cause severe burns and electric
shock that may result in death or serious
injury.
● Never touch, disassemble, remove or
replace the high voltage parts, cables
or their connectors.
● The hybrid system will become hot
after starting as the system uses high
voltage. Be careful of both the high
voltage and the high temperature, and
always obey the warning labels
attached to the vehicle.
● Never try to open the service plug
access hole located underneath the
rear seats. The service plug is used
only when the vehicle is serviced and is
subject to high voltage.
■ Road accident cautions
Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of death or serious injury:
● Pull your vehicle off the road, shift the
shift lever to P, apply the parking brake,
and turn the hybrid system off.
● Do not touch the high voltage parts,
cables and connectors.
● If electric wires are exposed inside or
outside your vehicle, an electric shock
may occur. Never touch exposed elec-
tric wires.
● If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the
fluid as it may be strong alkaline elec-
trolyte from the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery). If it comes into contact
with your skin or eyes, wash it off
immediately with a large amount of
water or, if possible, boric acid solu-
tion. Seek immediate medical atten-
tion.
● If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle,
leave the vehicle as soon as possible.
Never use a fire extinguisher that is not
meant for electric fires. Using even a
small amount of water may be danger-
ous.
72
1-4. Hybrid system
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
The cooling air intake and discharge
vents for the hybrid battery (traction
battery) are located under the rear
seats and between the rear seats and
deck board, respectively. If the air
intake vents are blocked, it could lead
to a reduction in hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) output.
The hybrid battery (traction battery) out-
put will not be reduced, even if the space
between the upper part of the air dis-
charge vents on the back of the rear seat
and deck board is blocked with luggage,
etc.
WARNING
● If your vehicle needs to be towed, do
so with four wheels raised. If the
wheels connected to the electric
motor (traction motor) are on the
ground when towing, the motor may
continue to generate electricity. This
may cause a fire. (P.383)
● Carefully inspect the ground under the
vehicle. If you find that liquid has
leaked onto the ground, the fuel sys-
tem may have been damaged. Leave
the vehicle as soon as possible.
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
● Never resell, hand over or modify the
hybrid battery. To prevent accidents,
hybrid batteries that have been
removed from a disposed vehicle are
collected through Lexus dealers. Do
not dispose of the battery yourself.
Unless the battery is properly collected,
the following may occur, resulting in
death or serious injury:
• The hybrid battery may be illegally dis-
posed of or dumped, and it is hazard-
ous to the environment or someone
may touch a high voltage part, result-
ing in an electric shock.
• The hybrid battery is intended to be
used exclusively with your hybrid vehi-
cle. If the hybrid battery is used outside
of your vehicle or modified in any way,
accidents such as electric shock, heat
generation, smoke generation, an
explosion and electrolyte leakage may
occur.
When reselling or handing over your
vehicle, the possibility of an accident is
extremely high because the person
receiving the vehicle may not be aware
of these dangers.
● If your vehicle is disposed of without
the hybrid battery having been
removed, there is a danger of serious
electric shock if high voltage parts,
cables and their connectors are
touched. In the event that your vehicle
must be disposed of, the hybrid battery
must be disposed of by your Lexus
dealer or a qualified service shop. If
the hybrid battery is not disposed of
properly, it may cause electric shock
that can result in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Do not carry large amounts of water
such as water cooler bottles in the vehi-
cle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery
(traction battery), the battery may be
damaged.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) air intake and discharge
vents
73
1-4. Hybrid system
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
Air intake vents
Air discharge vents
When a certain level of impact is
detected by the impact sensor, the
emergency shut off system blocks the
high voltage current and stops the fuel
pump to minimize the risk of electrocu-
tion and fuel leakage. If the emergency
shut off system activates, your vehicle
will not restart. To restart the hybrid
system, contact your Lexus dealer.
A message is automatically displayed
when a malfunction occurs in the
hybrid system or an improper opera-
tion is attempted.
If a warning message is shown on the
multi-information display, read the
message and follow the instructions.
NOTICE
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) air
intake and discharge vents
● Do not place objects that will block the
air intake vents. The hybrid battery
(traction battery) may have a reduc-
tion in hybrid battery (traction battery)
output as well as be damaged.
● Clean the air intake and discharge
vents regularly to prevent the hybrid
battery (traction battery) from over-
heating.
● Do not get water or foreign materials
in either the air intake and discharge
vents as this may cause a short circuit
and damage the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery).
A
B
● If “Maintenance required for Traction
battery cooling parts See owner’s
manual” is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display, clean the air intake vents
(P.337). If the message is still dis-
played after cleaning the air intake
vents, have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
● A filter is installed to the air intake vent.
When the filter remains noticeably
dirty even after cleaning the air intake
vent, filter cleaning or replacement is
recommended. For information
regarding filter cleaning or replace-
ment, contact your Lexus dealer.
Emergency shut off system
Hybrid warning message
74
1-4. Hybrid system
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ If a warning light comes on, a warning
message is displayed, or the 12-volt bat-
tery is disconnected
The hybrid system may not start. In this
case, try to start the system again. If the
“READY” indicator does not come on, con-
tact your Lexus dealer.
75
1-5. Theft deterrent system
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
1-5.Theft deterrent system
The indicator light flashes after the
power switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after
the power switch has been turned to
ACCESSORY or ON mode to indi-
cate that the system has been can-
celed.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type
immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to
malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact
with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touch-
ing a key registered to the security sys-
tem (key with a built-in transponder chip)
of another vehicle
■ Certification for the immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
Immobilizer system
The vehicle’s keys have built-in tran-
sponder chips that prevent the
hybrid system from starting if a key
has not been previously registered
in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
This system is designed to help pre-
vent vehicle theft but does not guar-
antee absolute security against all
vehicle thefts.
Operating the system
76
1-5. Theft deterrent system
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
For vehicles sold in Canada
WARNING
■ Certifications for the immobilizer
system
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates cor-
rectly
Do not modify or remove the system. If
modified or removed, the proper opera-
tion of the system cannot be guaranteed.
77
1-5. Theft deterrent system
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1
For safety and security
■ Items to check before locking the
vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of
the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure
of the following:
Nobody is in the vehicle.
The windows and moon roof (if
equipped) are closed before the
alarm is set.
No valuables or other personal
items are left in the vehicle.
■ Setting
Close the doors and hood, and lock all
the doors using the entry function or
wireless remote control. The system
will be set automatically after 30 sec-
onds.
Except for Canada, the alarm can also
be set using the mechanical key.
The indicator light changes from being on
to flashing when the system is set.
■ Canceling or stopping
Do one of the following to deactivate
or stop the alarms:
Unlock the doors using the entry
function or wireless remote control.
(Except for Canada, the mechanical
key can also be used.)
Turn the power switch to ACCES-
SORY or ON mode, or start the
hybrid system. (The alarm will be
deactivated or stopped after a few
seconds.)
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type
alarm system.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following
situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm
system.)
Alarm
The alarm uses light and sound to
give an alert when an intrusion is
detected.
The alarm is triggered in the follow-
ing situations when the alarm is set:
Except for Canada: A locked
door is unlocked or opened in any
way other than using the entry
function, wireless remote control
or mechanical key. (The doors will
lock again automatically.)
For Canada: A locked door is
unlocked or opened in any way
other than using the entry func-
tion or wireless remote control.
(The doors will lock again auto-
matically.)
The hood is opened.
Setting/canceling/stopping the
alarm system
78
1-5. Theft deterrent system
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
● For Canada: The doors are unlocked
using the mechanical key.
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door
or hood, or unlocks the vehicle using an
inside lock button.
● The 12-volt battery is recharged or
replaced when the vehicle is locked.
(P.416)
■ Alarm-operated door lock
In the following cases, depending on the sit-
uation, the door may automatically lock to
prevent improper entry into the vehicle:
● When a person remaining in the vehicle
unlocks the door and the alarm is acti-
vated.
● While the alarm is activated, a person
remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.
● When recharging or replacing the 12-volt
battery.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates cor-
rectly
Do not modify or remove the system. If
modified or removed, the proper opera-
tion of the system cannot be guaranteed.
79
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Vehicle status information
and indicators
2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators.80
Gauges and meters ....................84
Multi-information display..........89
Head-up display ........................... 95
Energy monitor/fuel consumption
screen ............................................ 99
80
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2-1.Instrument cluster
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all warning lights
and indicators illuminated.
The units used on the meter and some indicators may differ depending on the tar-
get region.
Warning lights inform the driver of mal-
functions in any of the vehicle’s sys-
tems.
Warning lights and indicators
The warning lights and indicators inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s
various systems.
Instrument cluster
Warning lights
(U.S.A.)
Brake system warning light
*1
(P.388)
(Red)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light
*1
(P.388)
Charging system warning
light
*2
(P.388)
Output control warning light
*2
(P.388, 399)
Low engine oil pressure warn-
ing light
*2
(P.389)
High coolant temperature
warning light
*2
(P.389)
(Yellow)
Brake system warning light
*1
(P.389)
(U.S.A.)
Malfunction indicator lamp
*1
(P.389)
81
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
*1
: These lights turn on when the power
switch is turned to ON mode to indi-
cate that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after the
hybrid system is on, or after a few sec-
onds. There may be a malfunction in a
system if the lights do not turn on, or
turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
*2
: This light illuminates on the multi-infor-
mation display.
*3
: The light flashes to indicate a malfunc-
tion.
*4
: This light illuminates on the center
panel.
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
*1
(P.389)
SRS warning light
*1
(P.390)
(U.S.A.)
ABS warning light
*1
(P.390)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
*1
(P.390)
(Yellow)
Electric power steering sys-
tem warning light
*1
(P.390)
(Red)
Electric power steering sys-
tem warning light
*1
(P.390)
PCS warning light
*1
(P.391)
(Orange)
LTA indicator
*2
(if equipped)
(P.391)
LDA indicator
*2
(if equipped)
(P.391)
PKSB OFF indicator
*1, 3
(if
equipped) (P.392)
Slip indicator light
*1
(P.392)
Brake hold operated indica-
tor
*1, 3
(P.392)
(U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator
*3
(P.392)
(Canada)
Parking brake indicator
*3
(P.392)
Low fuel level warning light
(P.393)
Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt reminder light
(P.393)
Rear passengers’ seat belt
reminder light
*4
(P.393)
Master warning light
*1
(P.394)
Tire pressure warning light
*1
(P.394)
Brake Override Sys-
tem/Drive-Start Control warn-
ing light
*2
(P.395)
WARNING
■ If a safety system warning light does
not come on
Should a safety system light such as the
ABS and SRS airbag warning light not
come on when you start the hybrid sys-
tem, this could mean that these systems
are not available to help protect you in an
accident, which could result in death or
serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Lexus dealer immediately if this
occurs.
82
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
The indicators inform the driver of the
operating state of the vehicle’s various
systems.
Indicators
Turn signal indicator (P.183)
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator (P.190)
(Canada)
Tail light indicator (P.190)
Headlight high beam indicator
(P.192)
Automatic High Beam indica-
tor (P.193)
Fog light indicator (P.196)
“READY” indicator (P.174)
EV indicator (P.68)
EV drive mode indicator
*2
(P.178)
“Eco” indicator
*2
(P.270)
“Sport” indicator
*2
(if
equipped) (P.270)
“Sport S” indicator
*2
(if
equipped) (P.270)
“Sport S+” indicator
*2
(if
equipped) (P.270)
“Custom” indicator
*2
(if
equipped) (P.270)
Dynamic radar cruise control
indicator
*2
(P.237)
Cruise control “SET” indica-
tor
*2
(P.237)
Cruise control indicator
*2
(P.237)
(White)
LTA indicator
*2
(if equipped)
(P.223)
LDA indicator
*2
(if equipped)
(P.232)
(Green)
LTA indicator
*2
(if equipped)
(P.223)
LDA indicator
*2
(if equipped)
(P.232)
(Orange)
LTA indicator
*2, 3
(if equipped)
(P.223)
LDA indicator
*2, 3
(if
equipped) (P.232)
Intuitive parking assist indica-
tor (if equipped) (P.248)
PKSB OFF indicator
*1, 4
(if
equipped) (P.254)
Slip indicator light
*1, 3
(P.273)
VSC off indicator
*1, 4
(P.274)
PCS warning light
*1, 4
(P.213)
(U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator
(P.184)
(Canada)
Parking brake indicator
(P.184)
Brake hold standby indicator
*1
(P.187)
Brake hold operated indica-
tor
*1
(P.187)
83
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
*1
: These lights turn on when the power
switch is turned to the ON mode to
indicate that a system check is being
performed. They will turn off after the
hybrid system is on, or after a few sec-
onds. There may be a malfunction in a
system if the lights do not turn on, or
turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
*2
: This light illuminates on the multi-infor-
mation display.
*3
: The light flashes to indicate that the sys-
tem is operating.
*4
: The light comes on when the system is
turned off.
*5
: When the outside temperature is
approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, the
indicator will flash for approximately 10
seconds, then stay on.
*6
: In order to confirm operation, the BSM
outside rear view mirror indicators illu-
minate in the following situations:
When the power switch is turned to
ON mode while the BSM main switch is
set to ON.
When the BSM main switch is set to
ON while the power switch is in ON
mode.
If the system is functioning correctly, the
BSM outside rear view mirror indica-
tors will turn off after a few seconds.
If the BSM outside rear view mirror indi-
cators do not illuminate or do not turn
off, there may be a malfunction in the
system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected
by your Lexus dealer.
*7
: This light illuminates on the outside rear
view mirrors.
*8
: This light illuminates on the center
panel.
Low outside temperature indi-
cator
*2, 5
(P.84)
BSM outside rear view mirror
indicators
*6, 7
(if equipped)
(P.262)
Security indicator
*8
(P.75,
77)
(U.S.A.)
“AIR BAG ON/OFF” indi-
cator
*8
(P.41)
(Canada)
“AIR BAG ON/OFF” indi-
cator
*8
(P.41)
84
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
When driving mode is in other than Sport mode (P.270)
The units used on the meters may differ depending on the target region.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
Hybrid System Indicator
Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (P.87)
Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C). Low
outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is 37°F (3°C) or
lower.
Background color of driving mode
Background color changes according to the driving mode. (P.270)
•Sport mode: Red
•Eco mode: Blue
When in Normal mode, the background color is black.
Clock
Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the instrument panel. (P.312)
Multi-information display
Gauges and meters
The meters display various drive information.
Meter display
A
B
C
D
E
F
85
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (P.89)
Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction (P.398)
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
Shift position and shift range
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P.180)
Odometer, trip meter and maintenance required information display
Odometer:
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven
Trip meter:
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset.
Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances inde-
pendently.
Maintenance required information:
Displays the remaining distance until the engine oil should be changed.
• Displays the maintenance required information when the power switch is ON mode.
• It can be reset on of the multi-information display. (P.92)
When driving mode is in Sport mode (P.270)
The units used on the meters may differ depending on the target region.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
G
H
I
J
A
B
86
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C). Low
outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is 37°F (3°C) or
lower.
Background color of driving mode
Background color changes according to the driving mode. (P.270)
•Sport mode: Red
•Eco mode: Blue
When in Normal mode, the background color is black.
Clock
Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the instrument panel. (P.312)
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data (P.89)
Displays warning messages in case of a malfunction (P.398)
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
Shift position and shift range
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P.180)
Odometer, trip meter and maintenance required information display
Odometer:
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven
Trip meter:
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset.
Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances inde-
pendently.
Maintenance required information:
Displays the remaining distance until the engine oil should be changed.
• Displays the maintenance required information when the power switch is ON mode.
• It can be reset on of the multi-information display. (P.92)
■ Operating condition
The power switch is in ON mode.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
87
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
■ Hybrid System Indicator
Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving
range is being exceeded (during full
power driving etc.)
Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven in
an Eco-friendly manner.
Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is not
being used very often.
The gasoline engine will automatically
stop and restart under various condi-
tions.
Charge area
Shows that energy is being recovered
via the regenerative brake.
● Hybrid System Indicator is displayed
when the driving mode is in other than
the Sport mode.
● By keeping the indicator needle within
Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can
be achieved.
● Charge area indicates regeneration
*
sta-
tus. Regenerated energy will be used to
charge the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery).
*
: When used in this manual, “regeneration”
refers to the conversion of energy cre-
ated by the movement of the vehicle into
electrical energy.
■ Tachometer
Hybrid System Indicator switches to the
tachometer when driving mode is in Sport
mode. The settings of the tachometer dis-
play can be changed on the multi-informa-
tion display.
■ Engine speed
On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is pre-
cisely controlled in order to help improve
fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emis-
sions, etc.
There are times when the engine speed that
is displayed may differ even when vehicle
operation and driving conditions are the
same.
■ Outside temperature display
● In the following situations, the correct
outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer
than normal to change.
• When stopped, or driving at low speeds
(less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
• When the outside temperature has
changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of
a garage, tunnel, etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system
may be malfunctioning.
Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
■ Pop-up display
In some situations, a pop-up display will be
temporarily displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display or the odometer/trip
meter/maintenance required information
screen.
The pop-up display function can be set
on/off. (P.93)
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the
display. This phenomenon is characteristic
of liquid crystal displays, and there is no
problem continuing to use the display.
■ Customization
The meter display can be customized on
A
B
C
D
88
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
the multi-information display.
(Customizable features: P.443)
Switches between odometer, trip
meter and maintenance required infor-
mation displays. When the trip meter is
displayed, pressing and holding the
button will reset the trip meter.
The brightness of the instrument panel
lights can be adjusted.
1 Darker
2 Brighter
■ Instrument panel brightness adjustment
The instrument panel brightness levels
when the tail lights are on and off can be
adjusted individually. However, when the
surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.),
turning on the tail lights will not change the
instrument panel brightness. At this time,
any adjustments made to the instrument
panel brightness levels will be applied to
both settings at once.
WARNING
■ The information display at low tem-
peratures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm
up before using the liquid crystal infor-
mation display. At extremely low tem-
peratures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display
changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the
driver’s shifting and the new gear number
appearing on the display. This lag could
cause the driver to downshift again,
causing rapid and excessive engine brak-
ing and possibly an accident resulting in
personal death or injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and
its components
● When the tachometer is displayed, do
not let the indicator needle of the
tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the
engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H); or “Engine Cool-
ant Temp High” or “Hybrid System
Overheated” is shown on the multi-
information display. In this case, imme-
diately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and check the engine or hybrid system
after it has cooled completely.
(P.418)
Changing between the odome-
ter, trip meter and maintenance
required information
Changing the Instrument panel
light brightness
89
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
■ Display
■ Menu icons
■ Liquid crystal display
P.87
The multi-information display is oper-
ated using the meter control switches.
Select an item/change pages
Enter/set
Return to the previous screen
Press: Displays the screen regis-
tered to . When no screen has
been registered, the drive informa-
tion screen will be displayed. Press
and hold: Registers the currently
displayed screen to .
The registration confirmation screen is dis-
played. If the selected screen cannot be
registered, a registration failure message
Multi-information display
The multi-information display pres-
ents the driver with a variety of
vehicle data.
Display and menu icons
Drive information (P.90)
Navigation system-linked dis-
play (if equipped) (P.91)
Audio system-linked display
(P.91)
Driving assist system informa-
tion (P.91)
Warning message display
(P.92)
Settings display (P.92)
NOTICE
■ The multi-information display at low
temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm
up before using the liquid crystal infor-
mation display. At extremely low tem-
peratures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display
changes may be delayed.
Changing the meter display
A
B
C
D
90
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
will be shown.
Call sending/receiving and history
display
Linked with the hands-free system, sending
or receiving call is displayed. For details
regarding the hands-free system, refer to
the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■ Content displayed as drive infor-
mation
Select to display various drive data.
Items displayed can be switched by
pressing or of the meter con-
trol switches to select and pressing
or .
Current fuel consumption
*1
Displays the current rate of fuel consump-
tion
Average fuel consumption (after
reset
*2
/after start/after refuel)
*1
Displays the average fuel consumption
since the function was reset, the hybrid sys-
tem was started, and the vehicle was refu-
eled, respectively
Use the displayed average fuel consump-
tion as a reference.
Average vehicle speed (after
reset
*2
/after start)
*1
Displays the average vehicle speed since
the function was reset and the hybrid sys-
tem was started, respectively
Elapsed time (after reset
*2
/after
start)
*1
Displays the elapsed time since the func-
tion was reset and the hybrid system was
started, respectively
Distance (driving range/after start)
*1
Displays the estimated maximum distance
that can be driven with the quantity of fuel
remaining and the distance driven after the
hybrid system was started respectively.
• This distance is computed based on your
average fuel consumption. As a result,
the actual distance that can be driven
may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is
added to the tank, the display may not be
updated.
When refueling, turn the power switch
off. If the vehicle is refueled without turn-
ing the power switch off, the display may
not be updated.
*1
: Displayed when the item is set in “Drive
Info 1”, “Drive Info 2” and “Drive Info 3”.
*2
: The function can be reset by pressing
the of the meter control switches
for longer than 1 second when the item
to reset is displayed.
If there is more than one item that can
be reset, the item selection screen will
appear.
■ Energy monitor
P.99
■ G monitor (if equipped)
Displays the acceleration forces of the
front, back, left and right of the vehicle.
Also displays the turning angle of the
steering wheel, brake oil pressure,
accelerator opening.
The actual vehicle conditions may
differ from those on the display
Drive information
E
91
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
screen, depending on the road con-
ditions, outside temperature, vehicle
speed, etc. Use the display screen
as a reference.
If a 12-volt battery terminal is dis-
connected and reconnected, the
steering amount display may be dis-
abled temporarily. After driving the
vehicle for a while, the display will be
enabled.
■ Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
■ Tire inflation pressure
Displays inflation pressure of each tire.
The inflation pressure of the spare tire will
not be displayed.
■ Vehicle sway warning
Detects the sway of the vehicle within a
lane, which is often associated with a
decrease in the driver’s attention level
and alerts the driver.
This display is a part of the LTA (Lane
Tracing Assist) system or LDA (Lane
Departure Alert with steering control)
system. The display is enabled when
the operating conditions of the vehicle
sway warning are met. (P.222, 231)
■ Display off
A blank screen is displayed.
■ Tire inflation pressure
● It may take a few minutes to display the
tire inflation pressure after the power
switch is turned to ON mode. It may also
take a few minutes to display the tire infla-
tion pressure after inflation pressure has
been adjusted.
● “--” may be displayed if the tire informa-
tion cannot be determined due to unfa-
vorable radio wave conditions.
● Tire inflation pressure changes with tem-
perature. The displayed values may also
be different from the values measured
using a tire pressure gauge.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting
12-volt battery terminals
The drive information will be reset.
Select to display the following naviga-
tion system-linked information.
Route guidance
Compass display (heading-up dis-
play)
Select to enable selection of an audio
source or track on the display using the
meter control switches.
Select to display the operational status
of the following systems:
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped) (P.218)
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control) (if equipped)
(P.227)
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range (P.237)
RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped) (P.235)
The displayed icon changes depending
on the system used.
Navigation system-linked dis-
play (if equipped)
Audio system-linked display
Driving assist system information
92
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Select to display warning messages
and measures to be taken if a malfunc-
tion is detected. (P.398)
The settings of the following items can
be changed using the meter control
switches.
For functions that can be enabled or
disabled, the function switches
between on and off each time is
pressed.
■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped) (P.218)
Select to set up the following items.
Lane centering
Select to enable/disable the lane centering
function.
Steering Assist
Select to enable/disable steering wheel
assistance.
Alert
Select to change the alert types.
Alert sensitivity
Select to set the warning sensitivity.
Sway warning
Select to enable/disable the vehicle sway
warning.
Sway sensitivity
Select to set the vehicle sway warning sen-
sitivity.
■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert
with steering control) (if equipped)
(P.227)
Select to set up the following items.
Steering Assist
Select to enable/disable steering wheel
assistance.
Alert
Select to change the alert types.
Alert sensitivity
Select to set the warning sensitivity.
Sway warning
Select to enable/disable the vehicle sway
warning.
Sway sensitivity
Select to set the vehicle sway warning sen-
sitivity.
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)
(P.211)
Select to set up the following items.
PCS on/off
Select to enable/disable the pre-collision
system.
PCS sensitivity
Select to change the warning timing.
■ PKSA (Parking Support Alert) (if
equipped) (P.247)
Select to set up the following items.
Intuitive parking assist sensor
Select to enable/disable the intuitive park-
ing assist sensor.
Volume
Select to set the volume of the buzzer
Warning message display
Settings display
93
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
which sounds when the parking support
alert is operated.
■ PKSB (Parking Support
Brake function) (if equipped)
(P.253)
PKSB on/off
Select to enable/disable the parking sup-
port brake function (for static objects).
■ RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped) (P.235)
Select to set up the following items.
Road Sign Assist
Select to enable/disable road sign assist.
Over Speed
Select to set the over speed alert on/off.
Level of Over Speed
Select to set the over speed alert level.
Others
Select to set the other road sign assist.
■ Clock
Select to switch between 12-hour dis-
play and 24-hour display.
■ Vehicle Settings
PBD (Power Back Door)
*1
(P.114)
Select to set up the following items.
•System settings
Select to enable/disable the power back
door system.
•Volume
Select to set the volume of the buzzer
which sounds when the power back door
system.
• Kick Sensor
*2
Select to enable/disable the kick sensor.
*1
: Vehicles with power back door
*2
: Vehicles with Hands Free Power Back
Door
TPMS (Tire Pressure Warning Sys-
tem) (P.359)
Select to initialize the tire pressure warning
system.
Scheduled Maintenance (P.339)
Select to initialize the scheduled mainte-
nance.
Oil maintenance (P.350)
Select to reset the engine oil maintenance
information (message indicating mainte-
nance is required and distance until the
next oil change) after engine oil mainte-
nance is performed.
■ Meter settings
Language
Select to change the language on the dis-
play.
Units
Select to change the unit of measure for
fuel consumption.
EV Indicator (P.68)
Select to set the EV indicator on/off.
Switch settings (P.89)
Displays a procedure to register a desired
screen to
.
You can register 1 screen as a shortcut,
which can be displayed by pressing
.
Drive information screen (P.90)
94
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Select to choose between 2 items that will
be displayed on each drive information
screen (“
Drive info 1”, “Drive info 2” and
“Drive info 3
”) respectively.
Pop-up display (P.87)
Select to set the following pop-up displays,
which may appear in some situations,
on/off.
• Intersection guidance display of the nav-
igation system-linked system
• Incoming call display of the hands-free
phone system
• Instrument panel brightness adjustment
display
Accent color
Select to change the accent colors on the
screen, such as the cursor color.
Tachometer settings
Select to set the display of the tachometer
or Hybrid System Indicator to automati-
cally change according to the driving
mode or static.
Initialization
Select to reset the meter display settings.
■ Suspension of the settings display
In the following situations, the settings dis-
play using the meter control switches will be
suspended.
● When a warning message appears on the
multi-information display
● When the vehicle begins to move
Automatically displayed when the sys-
tem is used. (P.248)
WARNING
■ Cautions during setting up the dis-
play
As the hybrid system needs to be operat-
ing during setting up the display, ensure
that the vehicle is parked in a place with
adequate ventilation. In a closed area
such as a garage, exhaust gases includ-
ing harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may
collect and enter the vehicle. This may
lead to death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During setting up the display
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge,
ensure that the hybrid system is operat-
ing while setting up the display features.
Intuitive parking assist (if
equipped)
95
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
*
:If equipped
Head-up display
Display brightness will change automati-
cally according to the brightness of the sur-
rounding area.
Display position adjustment switch
Display brightness adjustment
switch
Display brightness can be adjusted to the
desired level.
“HUD” button
“DISP” button
Vehicle speed
Hybrid System Indicator (P.97)
Tachometer
Shift position and shift range
Displays the selected shift position or
selected shift range (P.180)
Audio display
Displays audio information for approxi-
mately 3 seconds when the audio system is
operated
Route guidance display (vehicles
with navigation system) (P.98)
When approaching an intersection while
the navigation system is giving route guid-
ance, an arrow will automatically be dis-
played to indicate the direction of travel.
Lane departure warning display
(LTA [Lane Tracing Assist]) (if
equipped) (P.218)
Lane departure warning display
(LDA [Lane Departure Alert with
steering control]) (if equipped)
(P.227)
Approach warning display
(Dynamic radar cruise control with
full speed range) (P.243)
Road signs (RSA [Road Sign
Assist]) (if equipped) (P.235)
Pre-collision warning message (Pre-
Collision System) (P.211)
Speed limit display (vehicles with
navigation system) (P.98)
Parking Support Brake function (for
static objects) (if equipped)
(P.253)
Head-up display
*
The head-up display can be used to
project vehicle speed and other
information onto the windshield.
System components
A
B
C
D
E
Head-up display contents
96
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
G monitor (if equipped) (P.90)
Brake Override System (P.157)
Drive-Start Control (P.157)
■ “HUD” button
Pressing the button turns the head-up
display on/off and changes the vehicle
speed display units as follows:
U.S.A.
OFFON (MPH)ON
(km/h)OFF
Canada
OFFON (km/h)ON
(MPH)OFF
■ “DISP” button
Pressing the button changes the dis-
play items (except vehicle speed) as
follows:
•Off
• Hybrid System Indicator
• Tachometer
• G monitor (if equipped)
■ Head-up display
● The head-up display may seem dark and
hard to see when viewed through sun-
glasses, especially polarized sunglasses.
Adjust the brightness of the head-up dis-
play or remove your sunglasses.
● When the head-up display is turned off, it
will not display anything until it is turned
on again.
Switching the head-up display
A
WARNING
■ Before using the head-up display
Check that the position and brightness of
the head-up display image does not
interfere with safe driving. Incorrect
adjustment of the image’s position or
brightness may obstruct the driver’s view
and lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
■ Caution for changing settings of the
head-up display
As the hybrid system needs to be operat-
ing while changing the settings of the
head-up display, ensure that the vehicle
is parked in a place with adequate venti-
lation. In a closed area such as a garage,
exhaust gases including harmful carbon
monoxide (CO) may collect and enter
the vehicle. This may lead to death or a
serious health hazard.
97
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
■ Adjusting the display position
1 Higher
2 Lower
■ Setting the brightness
The brightness of the display is auto-
matically adjusted in accordance with
the brightness of the surrounding envi-
ronment. However, the brightness can
also be manually adjusted in 9 stages.
1 Brighter
2 Darker
Charge area
Shows regenerative charging.
Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is not
being used very often.
The gasoline engine will automatically stop
and restart under various conditions.
Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to components
● Do not place any drinks near the head-
up display projector. If the projector
gets wet, electrical malfunctions may
result.
● Do not place anything on or put stick-
ers onto the head-up display projector.
Doing so could interrupt head-up dis-
play indications.
● Do not touch the inside of the head-up
display projector or thrust sharp edges
or the like into the projector.
Doing so could cause mechanical mal-
functions.
■ When changing the settings of the
head-up display
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge,
ensure that the hybrid system is operat-
ing while changing the settings of the
head-up display.
Making the display easier to see
Hybrid System Indicator
A
B
C
98
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Eco-friendly manner.
Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is
being exceeded (during full power driving,
etc.)
When the vehicle approaches an inter-
section, the direction the vehicle
should go is guided by the arrow.
When the vehicle approaches an inter-
section, the route guidance will start
and the distance
*
to the intersection
will also be displayed.
*
: The distance indication will disappear
when the vehicle passes through the
intersection.
Displays the speed limit for the current
road.
Select to display/non-display the fol-
lowing items:
• Route guidance to destination
• Driving assist system information
• Audio system operation status
•Lane display
When customizing vehicle features,
ensure that the vehicle is parked in a
safe place with the shift lever in P and
the parking brake set.
1 Until the screen changes, continue
pressing the “DISP” button, and it
will repeat until the item desired to
be changed is displayed.
Customization can be performed when
the head-up display is on.
2 Press the “DISP” button to switch
between on and off.
On and off will be switched between each
time the button is pressed.
Route guidance display (vehicles
with navigation system)
Speed limit display (vehicles with
navigation system)
D
Display customization
99
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
If the button is left alone without being
operated for a short time, setting will be
finished automatically.
■ When the 12-volt battery is discon-
nected
The customize settings of the head-up dis-
play will be reset.
Multi-information display
Navigation/multimedia system dis-
play
Meter control switches
“MENU” button
Touchpad
Energy monitor/fuel con-
sumption screen
You can view the status of your
hybrid system on the multi-informa-
tion display and the navigation/mul-
timedia system display.
The energy monitor or fuel con-
sumption screen can be displayed
and operated on the side display.
System components
A
B
C
D
E
100
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Navigation/multimedia system display
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select on the screen.
If the “Trip Information” or “History” screen is displayed, select “Energy”.
Multi-information display
Press or of the meter control switches and select , and then or
to select the energy monitor display.
Energy monitor
When the vehicle is powered by the electric motor (traction motor)
Navigation/multimedia system display Multi-information display
When the vehicle is powered by both the gasoline engine and the electric motor (traction
motor)
Navigation/multimedia system display Multi-information display
When the vehicle is powered by the gasoline engine
Navigation/multimedia system display Multi-information display
101
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
status
Navigation/multimedia system dis-
play
Low
High
Multi-information display
Low
High
These images are examples only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.
When the vehicle is charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)
Navigation/multimedia system display Multi-information display
When there is no energy flow
Navigation/multimedia system display Multi-information display
A
B
A
B
102
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Trip information
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select on the
screen.
If a screen other than “Trip Information” is
displayed, select “Trip Information”.
Resetting the consumption data
Fuel consumption in the past 15
minutes
Current fuel consumption
Regenerated energy in the past 15
minutes
One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up
to 5 symbols are shown.
Average vehicle speed since the
hybrid system was started.
Elapsed time since the hybrid sys-
tem was started.
Cruising range (P.103)
Average fuel consumption for the past
15 minutes is divided by color into past
averages and averages attained since
the power switch was last turned to
ON mode. Use the displayed average
fuel consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.
■ History
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select on the
screen.
If a screen other than “History” is dis-
played, select “History”.
Best recorded fuel consumption
Latest fuel consumption
Previous fuel consumption record
Resetting the history data
Updating the latest fuel consump-
tion data
The average fuel consumption history
is divided by color into past averages
and the average fuel consumption
since the last updated. Use the dis-
played average fuel consumption as a
reference.
The image is an example only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.
■ Updating the history data
Update the latest fuel consumption by
selecting “Clip” to measure the current fuel
consumption again.
Fuel consumption
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
B
C
D
E
103
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
■ Resetting the data
The fuel consumption data can be deleted
by selecting “Clear”.
■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance
that can be driven with the quantity of fuel
remaining.
This distance is computed based on your
average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be
driven may differ from that displayed.
Display the vehicle information on the
side display (P.289), and then select
or to display the desired
screen.
■ Trip information (type A)
Displays the average fuel consumption
and regenerated energy for the past 10
minutes in 1 minute intervals, as well as
the cruising range.
The image is an example only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.
Use the displayed average fuel consump-
tion as a reference.
■ Trip information (type B)
Displays the cruising range, latest fuel
consumption and the amount of time
elapsed since the hybrid system was
started.
The image is an example only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.
Use the displayed average fuel consump-
tion as a reference.
■ History
Displays the average fuel consumption
and highest fuel consumption.
The image is an example only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.
Use the displayed average fuel consump-
tion as a reference.
■ Energy monitor
Displays the hybrid system operation
and energy recovery states.
Displayed content is the same as that dis-
played on the multi-information display.
(P.100)
Using the side display (vehicles
with navigation system)
104
2-1. Instrument cluster
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
The image is an example only, and may
vary slightly from actual conditions.
105
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
3
Before driving
Before driving
3-1. Key information
Keys .................................................106
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the
doors
Side doors......................................110
Back door.......................................114
Smart access system with push-
button start................................. 126
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats..................................... 132
Rear seats......................................133
Driving position memory ........138
Head restraints............................. 141
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and
mirrors
Steering wheel.............................143
Inside rear view mirror............. 144
Outside rear view mirrors......146
3-5. Opening, closing the windows
and moon roof
Power windows...........................148
Moon roof .....................................150
106
3-1. Key information
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3-1.Key informat ion
The following keys are provided with
the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access system with
push-button start (P.126)
• Operating the wireless remote control
function
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Card key (electronic key) (if
equipped)
Operating the smart access system with
push-button start (P.126)
■ Card key (if equipped)
● The mechanical key that is stored inside
the card key should be used only if a
problem arises, such as when the card
key does not operate properly.
● If the battery cover is not installed and the
battery falls out or if the battery was
removed because the key got wet, rein-
stall the battery with the positive terminal
facing the Lexus emblem.
● The card key is not waterproof.
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an
aircraft, make sure you do not press any
buttons on the electronic key while inside
the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an
electronic key in your bag, etc., ensure that
the buttons are not likely to be pressed acci-
dentally. Pressing a button may cause the
electronic key to emit radio waves that
could interfere with the operation of the air-
craft.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
(The card key battery life is about a year
and a half.)
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will
sound in the cabin when the hybrid sys-
tem stops.
● As the electronic key always receives
radio waves, the battery will become
depleted even if the electronic key is not
used. The following symptoms indicate
that the electronic key battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when nec-
essary.
• The smart access system with push-but-
ton start or the wireless remote control
does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface
does not turn on.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not
leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m)
of the following electrical appliances that
produce a magnetic field:
Keys
Key types
A
B
C
D
107
3-1. Key information
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and
battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless
phones
• Induction cookers
• Table lamps
■ Replacing the battery
P.369
■ Confirmation of the registered key
number
The number of keys already registered to
the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
The electronic keys are equipped with
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to
strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not expose the keys to high tem-
peratures for long periods of time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them
in an ultrasonic washer, etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic
materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or anything else
to the surface of the electronic key.
● Do not place the keys near objects that
produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,
audio systems and induction cookers,
or medical electrical equipment, such
as low-frequency therapy equipment.
■ Carrying the electronic key on your
person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm)
or more away from electric appliances
that are turned on. Radio waves emitted
from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10
cm) of the electronic key may interfere
with the key, causing the key to not func-
tion properly.
■ In case of a smart access system with
push-button start malfunction or
other key related problems
P.412
■ When an electronic key is lost
P.411
■ Handling the card key
● If the battery or card key terminals get
wet, the battery may corrode and the
card key may stop working.
If the key is dropped into water, or if
drinking water, etc., is spilled on the
key, immediately remove the battery
cover and wipe the battery and termi-
nals. (To remove the battery cover,
lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is
corroded, have your Lexus dealer
replace the battery.
● Do not crush the battery cover or use
a screwdriver to remove the battery
cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover
may bend or damage the key.
● If the battery cover is frequently
removed, the battery cover may
become loose.
● When installing the battery, make sure
to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong
direction may cause the battery to
deplete rapidly.
● The surface of the card key may be
damaged, or its coating may peel off in
the following situations:
• The card key is carried together with
hard objects, such as coins and keys.
• The card key is scraped with a sharp
object, such as the tip of a mechanical
pencil.
• The surface of the card key is wiped
with thinner or benzene.
Wireless remote control
108
3-1. Key information
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
the following wireless remote control:
Locks all the doors (P.110)
Unlocks all the doors (P.110)
Opens the windows and moon
roof
*1, 2
(P.110)
Opens and closes the power back
door
*1
(P.117)
Sounds the alarm (P.108)
*1
: If equipped
*2
: This setting must be customized at your
Lexus dealer.
■ Theft deterrent panic mode
When is pressed for longer than
about 1 second, an alarm will sound inter-
mittently and the vehicle lights will flash to
deter any person from trying to break into
or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
electronic key.
■ Back door reserve lock function (vehi-
cles with power back door)
This function is a function which reserves
locking of all doors, beforehand, when the
back door is open. When the follow is done,
all the doors except the back door are
locked and then back door will also be
locked at the same time it is closed.
1 Close all doors, except the back door.
2 Push the wireless lock button during the
automatic closing operation of the back
door.
To take out the mechanical key, push
the release button and take the key out.
The mechanical key can only be inserted in
one direction, as the key only has grooves
on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in
a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt
to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store it in
the electronic key. Carry the mechanical
key together with the electronic key. If the
electronic key battery is depleted or the
entry function does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
(P.412)
A
B
C
D
E
Using the mechanical key
109
3-1. Key information
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
■ When required to leave the vehicle’s
key with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances
demand. (P.306)
Remove the mechanical key for your own
use and provide the attendant with the elec-
tronic key only.
■ If you lose your mechanical keys
P.411
■ If a wrong key is used
The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate
inside mechanism.
■ Card key
● If it is difficult to take out the mechanical
key, push down the release button using a
pen tip, etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out,
use a coin, etc.
● To store the mechanical key in the card
key, insert it while pressing the release
button.
NOTICE
■ Handling the card key
Do not apply excess force when inserting
the mechanical key into the card key.
Doing so may damage the card key.
110
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3-2.Opening, closing and locking t he doors
■ Using the smart access system with
push-button start
Carry the electronic key to enable this
function.
1 Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door. Grip any passen-
ger door handle to unlock all the
doors.
*
Make sure to touch the sensor on the back
of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 sec-
onds after the doors are locked.
2 Touch the lock sensor (the indenta-
tion on the surface of the door han-
dle) to lock all the doors.
Check that the door is securely locked.
*
: The door unlock settings can be
changed.
■ Using the wireless remote control
1 Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely locked.
2 Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s
door. Pressing the button again within 3
seconds unlocks the other doors.
Press and hold to open the windows and
moon roof
*1, 2
*1
: If equipped
*2
: This setting must be customized at your
Lexus dealer.
■ Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry
function unlocks using the wireless remote
control.
1 Turn the power switch off.
2 When the indicator light on the key sur-
face is not on, press and hold ,
or for approximately 5
seconds while pressing and holding
.
The setting changes each time an operation
is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release
the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and
repeat step 2.)
Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and
unlocked using the entry function,
wireless remote control or door
lock switch.
Unlocking and locking the doors
from the outside
111
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
For vehicles with alarm: To prevent unin-
tended triggering of the alarm, unlock the
doors using the wireless remote control and
open and close a door once after the set-
tings have been changed. (If a door is not
opened within 60 seconds after is
pressed, the doors will be locked again and
the alarm will automatically be set.)
In a case that the alarm is triggered, imme-
diately stop the alarm. (P.77)
■ Locking the doors from the outside with-
out a key
1 Move the inside lock button to the lock
position.
2 Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the power
switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, or
the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and
the door may be locked.
■ Impact detection door lock release sys-
tem
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a
strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the
type of accident, however, the system may
not operate.
■ Operation signals
Doors:
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flash-
ers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once;
Unlocked: Twice)
Windows and moon roof:
A buzzer sounds to indicate that all win-
dows and moon roof are opening.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately
60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked,
the security feature automatically locks the
vehicle again.
■ Open door warning buzzer
If the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5
km/h), the master warning light flashes and
a buzzer sounds to indicate that door(s) or
the hood in not fully closed.
The open door(s) or hood is displayed on
the multi-information display.
■ Welcome light illumination control
The side marker, parking, tail and license
plate lights automatically turn on at night
when the doors are unlocked using the
entry function or wireless remote control if
the light switch is in the position.
■ When the door cannot be locked by the
lock sensor on the surface of the door
handle
When the door cannot be locked even if the
lock sensor on the surface of the door han-
dle is touched by a finger, touch the lock
sensor with the palm.
When gloves are being worn, remove the
gloves.
Multi-information
display/Beep
Unlocking function
Exterior: Beeps 3
times
Interior: Pings
once
Holding the driver’s
door handle unlocks
only the driver’s door.
Holding any of the
passenger door han-
dles unlocks all the
doors.
Exterior: Beeps
twice
Interior: Pings
once
Holding a door han-
dle unlocks all the
doors.
112
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when
a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds
continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the
door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehi-
cle once more.
■ Setting the alarm
Locking the doors will set the alarm system.
(P.77)
■ Conditions affecting the operation of
the smart access system with push-but-
ton start or wireless remote control
P.128
■ If the smart access system with push-
button start or the wireless remote con-
trol does not operate properly
● Use the mechanical key to lock and
unlock the doors. (P.412)
● Replace the key battery with a new one if
it is depleted.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a
key) can be changed. (Customizable fea-
tures: P.443)
■ Using the door lock switches
1 Locks all the doors
2 Unlocks all the doors
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while
driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door
opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Ensure that all doors are properly
closed and locked.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the
doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front
doors, as the doors may be opened
even if the inside lock buttons are in
locked position.
● Set the rear door child-protector locks
when children are seated in the rear
seats.
■ When opening or closing a door
Check the surroundings of the vehicle
such as whether the vehicle is on an
incline, whether there is enough space
for a door to open and whether a strong
wind is blowing. When opening or clos-
ing the door, hold the door handle tightly
to prepare for any unpredictable move-
ment.
■ When using the wireless remote con-
trol and operating the power windows
or moon roof (if equipped)
Operate the power window or moon
roof after checking to make sure that
there is no possibility of any passenger
having any of their body parts caught in
the window or moon roof. Also do not let
a child operate window by the mechani-
cal key. It is possible for children and
other passengers to get caught in the
power window or moon roof.
Unlocking and locking the doors
from the inside
113
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
■ Using the inside lock button
1 Locks the door
2 Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by pull-
ing the inside handle even if the lock
buttons are in the lock position.
■ Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from inside the
vehicle when the lock is set.
1 Unlock
2 Lock
These locks can be set to prevent children
from opening the rear doors. Push down on
each rear door switch to lock both rear
doors.
■ Automatic door locking and unlocking
systems
The following functions can be set or can-
celed:
For instructions on customizing, refer to
P.443.
Function Operation
Speed linked door
locking function
All doors are auto-
matically locked
when vehicle speed
is approximately 12
mph (20 km/h) or
higher.
Shift position linked
door locking func-
tion
All doors are auto-
matically locked
when shifting the
shift lever out of P.
Shift position linked
door unlocking
function
All doors are auto-
matically unlocked
when shifting the
shift lever to P.
Driver’s door linked
door unlocking
function
All doors are auto-
matically unlocked
when driver’s door is
opened.
114
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Back door
The back door can be opened using
the back door open switch, smart
access system with push-button
start or wireless remote control.
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
● Keep the back door closed while driv-
ing.
If the back door is left open, it may hit
nearby objects while driving or lug-
gage may be unexpectedly thrown out,
causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter
the vehicle, causing death or a serious
health hazard. Make sure to close the
back door before driving.
● Before driving the vehicle, make sure
that the back door is fully closed. If the
back door is not fully closed, it may
open unexpectedly while driving,
causing an accident.
● Never let anyone sit in the luggage
compartment. In the event of sudden
braking or a collision, they are suscep-
tible to death or serious injury.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Do not allow children to play in the lug-
gage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked in the
luggage compartment, they could
have heat exhaustion or other injuries.
● Do not allow a child to open or close
the back door.
Doing so may cause the back door to
move unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be
caught by the closing back door.
■ Operating the back door
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the
body to be caught, resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow
and ice, from the back door before
opening it. Failure to do so may cause
the back door to suddenly shut again
after it is opened.
● When opening or closing the back
door, thoroughly check to make sure
the surrounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure
they are safe and let them know that
the back door is about to open or
close.
● Use caution when opening or closing
the back door in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
● Vehicles without power back door:
The back door may suddenly shut if it is
not opened fully. It is more difficult to
open or close the back door on an
incline than on a level surface, so
beware of the back door unexpectedly
opening or closing by itself. Make sure
that the back door is fully open and
secure before using the luggage com-
partment.
● Vehicles with power back door: The
back door may suddenly shut if it is not
opened fully, while on a steep incline.
Make sure that the back door is
secured before using the luggage
compartment.
115
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
■ Smart access system with push-
button start
Carry the electronic key to enable this
function.
1 Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely locked.
2 Unlocks all the doors
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 sec-
onds after the doors are locked.
■ Wireless remote control
P.107
■ Door lock switches
P.112
■ Open
Raise the back door while pressing up
the back door opener switch.
WARNING
● When closing the back door, take
extra care to prevent your fingers, etc.,
from being caught.
● When closing the back door, make
sure to press it lightly on its outer sur-
face. If the back door handle is used to
fully close the back door, it may result
in hands or arms being caught.
● Do not pull on the back door damper
stay (vehicles without power back
door) (P.116) or back door spindle
(vehicles with power back door)
(P.123) to close the back door, and
do not hang on the back door damper
stay (vehicles without power back
door) or back door spindle (vehicles
with power back door).
Doing so may cause hands to be
caught or the back door damper stay
(vehicles without power back door) or
back door spindle (vehicles with
power back door) to break, causing an
accident.
● If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy
object is attached to the back door, it
may suddenly shut again after being
opened, causing someone’s hands,
head or neck to be caught and injured.
When installing an accessory part to
the back door, using a genuine Lexus
part is recommended.
Unlocking and locking the back
door from the outside
Unlocking and locking the back
door from the inside
Opening/closing the back door
(vehicles without power back
door)
116
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Close
Lower the back door using the back
door handle, and make sure to push
the back door down from the outside
to close it.
■ Luggage compartment light
● The luggage compartment light turns on
when the back door is opened.
● If the luggage compartment light is left on
when the power switch is turned off, the
light will go off automatically after 20
minutes.
■ If the back door opener is inoperative
The back door can be unlocked from the
inside.
1 Remove the cover.
To protect the cover, place a rag between
the flathead screwdriver and the cover as
shown in the illustration.
2 Move the lever.
NOTICE
■ Back door damper stays
The back door is equipped with damper
stays that hold the back door in place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to
the back door damper stay resulting
in malfunction.
● Do not attach any foreign objects, such
as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives
to the damper stay rod.
● Do not touch the damper stay rod with
gloves or other fabric items.
● Do not attach any accessories other
than genuine Lexus parts to the back
door.
● Do not place your hand on the damper
stay or apply lateral forces to it.
A
A
117
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
■ Opening/closing the back door
using the wireless remote control
Press the for 1 second.
■ Opening/closing the back door
from the inside
Press the for 1 second.
A buzzer sounds and the back door auto-
matically opens and closes.
Pressing the while the back door is
opening/closing stops the operation.
When the is pressed again for 1 sec-
ond during the halted operation, the back
door will perform the reverse operation.
■ Opening/closing the back door
from the outside
Open
When the back door is unlocked: Press the
back door opener switch.
When the back door is locked: While car-
rying the electronic key on your person,
press the back door opener switch.
A buzzer sounds and the back door auto-
matically opens.
Pressing the switch while the back door is
opening stops the operation.
Close
Pressing the .
A buzzer sounds and the back door auto-
matically closes.
Pressing the while the back door is
closing stops the operation.
Pressing the again will reverse the
operation.
Close the back door and lock all
doors (close & lock function)
Press the .
Opening/closing the back door
(vehicles with power back door)
118
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
A different buzzer than the normal one will
sound and the power back door will begin
closing automatically. When the power
back door is closed, all of the doors will
lock simultaneously and operation signals
will indicate that all of the doors have been
locked.
If the is pressed while the power
back door is closing, the operation will
stop.
Pressing the again will close the
power back door automatically.
■ Closing the back door using the
back door handle
Lower the back door using the back
door handle, then a buzzer sounds and
the back door automatically closes.
■ Opening/closing the back door
using the kick sensor (vehicles with
Hands Free Power Back Door)
1 While carrying an electronic key,
stand within the smart access sys-
tem with push-button start opera-
tion range, approximately 19.7 to
27.6 in. (50 to 70 cm) from the rear
bumper.
Kick sensor
Kick sensor detection area
Smart access system with push-
button start operation detection
area (P.127)
2 Perform a kick operation by mov-
ing your foot to within approxi-
mately 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the rear
bumper and then pulling it back.
• Perform the entire kick operation
within 1 second.
• The back door will not start operat-
ing while a foot is detected under
the rear bumper.
• Operate the back door without
contacting the rear bumper with
your foot.
• If another electronic key is in the
cabin or luggage compartment, it
may take slightly longer than normal
for the operation to occur.
A
B
C
119
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
When all of the doors are locked: If the
movement is detected by the kick sensor,
all of the doors will be unlocked.
Kick sensor
Kick sensor detection area
3 When the kick sensor detects that
your foot is pulled back, a buzzer
will sound and the back door will
automatically fully open/close.
If kick operation is performed again in the
middle of back door operating, the opera-
tion will stop.
■ Luggage compartment light
● The luggage compartment light turns on
when the back door is opened.
● If the luggage compartment light is left on
when the power switch is turned off, the
light will go off automatically after 20
minutes.
■ Power back door operating conditions
With the power back door operations set to
ON, it can automatically open and close for
the following conditions:
● When the electronic key is being carried
and the power back door switch is
pushed
*
● When the wireless remote control is
used
*
● When the power switch is in ON mode,
in addition to the above for the opening
operations, the back door operates for
any of the following conditions:
• Parking brake is engaged
• The brake pedal is depressed
• The shift lever is in P
*
: When configured with the customization
function so that it can be operated after
being unlocked, operate the back door
after it has been unlocked.
■ Kick sensor operating conditions (vehi-
cles with Hands Free Power Back Door)
● When the kick sensor operation setting is
turned on
● The electronic key is within the opera-
tional range. (P.127)
■ Back door closer
In the event that the back door is left slightly
open, the back door closer will automati-
cally close it to the fully closed position.
Whatever the state of the power switch, the
back door closer operates.
■ Operation of the power back door
● A buzzer sounds and the emergency
flashers flash twice to indicate that the
back door is opening/closing.
● When the power back door operations
are OFF, the power back door does not
operate but it can be opened and closed
by hand.
● When the power back door automati-
cally opens, if an abnormality due to peo-
ple or objects is detected, operation will
stop.
■ Close & lock function
When the power back door is open, this
function closes the power back door and
then locks all of the doors simultaneously.
When the following procedures are per-
formed and there are no electronic keys for
the vehicle within the vehicle, all of the
doors will lock when the power back door is
completely closed.
1 Close all of the doors except the power
back door.
2 While carrying an electronic key, press
the switch on the lower part of
the power back door.
A different buzzer than the normal one will
sound and then the power back door will
A
B
120
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
begin closing automatically. When the
power back door is closed, all of the doors
will lock simultaneously and operation sig-
nals will indicate that all of the doors have
been locked.
■ Situations in which the close & lock
function may not operate properly
(vehicles with Hands Free Power Back
Door)
In the following situations, the close & lock
function may not operate properly:
● If the switch on the lower part of
the power back door is pressed by a hand
which is holding an electronic key
● If the switch on the lower part of
the power back door is pressed when the
electronic key is in a bag, etc. that is
placed on the ground
● If the switch on the lower part of
the power back door is pressed with the
electronic key not near the vehicle.
■ Situations in which the kick sensor may
operate unintentionally (vehicles with
Hands Free Power Back Door)
In the following situations, the kick sensor
may not operate properly:
● When a foot remains under the rear
bumper
● If the rear bumper is strongly hit with a
foot or is touched for a while
If the rear bumper has been touched for a
while, wait for a short time before attempt-
ing to operate the back door again.
● When operated while a person is too
close to the rear bumper
● When an external radio wave source
interferes with the communication
between the vehicle and electronic key
(P.128)
● When the vehicle is parked near an elec-
trical noise source which affects the sen-
sitivity of the kick sensor, such as a pay
parking spot, gas station, electrically
heated road, or fluorescent light
● When the vehicle is near a TV tower,
electric power plant, radio station, large
display, airport or other facility that gen-
erates strong radio waves or electrical
noise
● When a large amount of water is applied
to the rear bumper, such as when the
vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain
● When mud, snow, ice, etc. is attached to
the rear bumper
● When the vehicle has been parked for a
while near objects that may move and
contact the rear bumper, such as plants
● When an accessory is installed to the rear
bumper
If an accessory has been installed, turn the
kick sensor operation setting off.
■ Situations in which the kick sensor does
not operate properly (vehicles with
Hands Free Power Back Door)
When an electronic key is in the operation
range, the kick sensor may operate unin-
tentionally, so be careful in the following sit-
uations.
● When a large amount of water is applied
to the rear bumper, such as when the
vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain
● When dirt is wiped off the rear bumper
● When a small animal or small object, such
as a ball, moves under the rear bumper
● When an object is moved from under the
rear bumper
● If someone is swinging their legs while sit-
ting on the rear bumper
● If the legs or another part of someone’s
body contacts the rear bumper while
passing by the vehicle
● When the vehicle is parked near an elec-
trical noise source which affects the sen-
sitivity of the kick sensor, such as a pay
parking spot, gas station, electrically
heated road, or fluorescent light
● When the vehicle is near a TV tower,
electric power plant, radio station, large
display, airport or other facility that gen-
erates strong radio waves or electrical
noise
121
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
● When the vehicle is parked in a place
where objects such as plants are near the
rear bumper
● If luggage, etc. is set near the rear
bumper
● If accessories or a vehicle cover is
installed/removed near the rear bumper
● When the vehicle is being towed
To prevent unintentional operation, turn the
kick sensor operation setting off.
■ When reconnecting the 12-volt battery
To enable the power back door to operate
properly, close the back door manually.
■ Jam protection function
Sensors are installed in the right and left
sides of the power back door. When the
door is automatically closing and the sen-
sors are pushed due to an object being
clamped, etc., the jam protection function
operates.
From that position the door automatically
moves a little in the opposite direction and
then the function stops.
■ If the back door opener is inoperative
The back door can be unlocked from the
inside.
1 Remove the cover.
To protect the cover, place a rag between
the flathead screwdriver and the cover as
shown in the illustration.
2 Move the lever.
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. back door automatic open
and stop position) can be changed. (Cus-
tomizable features: P.443)
WARNING
■ Back door closer
● In the event that the back door is left
slightly open, the back door closer will
automatically close it to the fully closed
position. It takes several seconds
before the back door closer begins to
operate. Be careful not to catch fingers
or anything else in the back door, as
this may cause bone fractures or other
serious injuries.
● Use caution when using the back door
closer as it still operates when the
power back door system is canceled.
122
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
WARNING
■ Power back door
Observe the following precautions when
operating the power back door.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
● Check the safety of the surrounding
area to make sure there are no obsta-
cles or anything that could cause any
of your belongings to get caught.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure
they are safe and let them know that
the back door is about to open or
close.
● If the power back door system is
turned off with the main switch while
the back door is operating automati-
cally, the automatic operation is
stopped. The back door then has to be
operated manually. Take extra care
when on an incline, as the back door
may open or close unexpectedly.
● If the operating conditions of the
power back door are no longer met, a
buzzer may sound and the back door
may stop opening or closing. The back
door then has to be operated manu-
ally. Take extra care when on an incline,
as the back door may open or close
abruptly.
● On an incline, the back door may sud-
denly shut after it opens. Make sure
the back door is fully open and secure.
● In the following situations, the power
back door may detect an abnormality
and automatic operation may be
stopped. In this case, the back door
has to be operated manually. Take
extra care when on an incline, as the
back door may open or close abruptly.
• When the back door contacts an
obstacle
• When the 12-volt battery voltage sud-
denly drops, such as when the power
switch is turned to power ON mode or
the hybrid system is started during
automatic operation
● If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy
object is attached to the back door, the
power back door may not operate,
causing itself to malfunction, or the
back door may suddenly shut again
after being opened, causing some-
one’s hands, head or neck to be caught
and injured. When installing an acces-
sory part to the back door, using a
genuine Lexus part is recommended.
■ Jam protection function
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
● Never use any part of your body to
intentionally activate the jam protec-
tion function.
● The jam protection function may not
work if something gets caught just
before the back door fully closes. Be
careful not to catch fingers caught or
anything else.
● The jam protection function may not
work depending on the shape of the
object that is caught. Be careful not to
catch fingers or anything else.
■ Kick sensor (vehicles with Hands
Free Power Back Door)
Observe the following precautions when
operating the power back door.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
● Check the safety of the surrounding
area to make sure there are no obsta-
cles or anything that could cause any
of your belongings to get caught.
● When putting your foot near the lower
center part of the rear bumper and
moving it from the rear bumper, be
careful not to touch the exhaust pipes
until they have cooled down suffi-
ciently, as touching hot exhaust pipes
can cause burns.
● Do not operate the Hands Free Power
Back Door if there is little space under
the rear bumper.
123
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
NOTICE
■ Back door spindles
The back door is equipped with spindles
that hold the back door in place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to
the back door spindle , resulting in
malfunction.
● Do not attach any foreign objects, such
as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives
to the spindle rod.
● Do not touch the spindle rod with
gloves or other fabric items.
● Do not attach heavy accessories to the
back door. When attaching, ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
● Do not place your hand on the spindle
or apply lateral forces to it.
■ To prevent back door closer malfunc-
tion
Do not apply excessive force to the back
door while the back door closer is oper-
ating.
■ To prevent damage to the power back
door
● Make sure that there is no ice between
the back door and frame that would
prevent movement of the back door.
Operating the power back door when
excessive load is present on the back
door may cause a malfunction.
● Do not apply excessive force to the
back door while the power back door
is operating.
A
A
● Take care not to damage the sensors
(installed on the right and left edges of
the power back door) with a knife or
other sharp object. If the sensor is dis-
connected, the power back door will
not close automatically.
■ Close & lock function
When closing the power back door using
the close & lock function, a different
buzzer than the normal one will sound
before the operation begins.
To check that the operation has started
correctly, check that a different buzzer
than the normal one has sounded.
Additionally, when the power back door
is fully closed and locked, operation sig-
nals will indicate that all of the doors have
been locked.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure
that the operational signals have oper-
ated and that all of the doors are locked.
■ Kick sensor precautions (vehicles
with Hands Free Power Back Door)
The kick sensor is located behind lower
center part of the rear bumper. Observe
the following to ensure that the power
back door function operates properly:
● Keep the lower center part of the rear
bumper clean at all times.
If the lower center part of the rear
bumper is dirty or covered with snow,
the kick sensor may not operate. In this
situation, clean off the dirt or snow,
move the vehicle from the current
position and then check if the kick sen-
sor operates.
If it does not operate, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not apply coatings that have a rain
clearing (hydrophilic) effect, or other
coatings, to the lower center part of
the rear bumper.
124
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
ON (operate) and OFF (stop) can be
switched between by the of the
multi-information display. (P.89)
1 Press or of the meter con-
trol switches and select .
2 Press or of the meter con-
trol switches, select the “Vehicle
Settings” and then press .
3 Press or of the meter con-
trol switches, select and
then press .
4 Press or of the meter con-
trol switches, and then select
“PBD”.
5 ON and OFF will be switched over
with presses of on the meter
control switches.
When OFF is selected and the operations
of the power back door is made to stop
from the of multi-information display,
unless it is set to ON, the operation of the
power back door will not return. (No
return in the power switch operation)
NOTICE
● Do not park the vehicle near objects
that may move and contact the lower
center part of the rear bumper, such as
grass or trees.
If the vehicle has been parked for a
while near objects that may move and
contact the lower center part of the
rear bumper, such as grass or trees,
the kick sensor may not operate. In this
situation, move the vehicle from the
current position and then check if the
kick sensor operates. If it does not
operate, have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
● Do not subject the kick sensor or its
surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the kick sensor or its surrounding
area has been subjected to a strong
impact, the kick sensor may not oper-
ate properly. If the kick sensor does
not operate in the following situations,
have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
• The kick sensor or its surrounding area
has been subjected to a strong impact.
• The lower center part of the rear
bumper is scratched or damaged.
● Do not disassemble the rear bumper.
● Do not attach stickers to the rear
bumper.
● Do not paint the rear bumper.
● If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy
object is attached to the power back
door, disable the kick sensor.
Canceling the power back door
system (vehicles with power
back door)
125
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
ON (enable) and OFF (disable) can be
switched between by the of the
multi-information display. (P.89)
1 Press or of the meter con-
trol switches and select .
2 Press or of the meter con-
trol switches, select the “Vehicle
Settings” and then press .
3 Press or of the meter con-
trol switches, select , and
then press .
4 Press or of the meter con-
trol switches, and then select “Kick
Sensor”.
5 ON and OFF will be switched over
with presses of on the meter
control switches.
When OFF is selected and the operations
of the kick sensor is made to stop from the
of multi-information display, unless it is
set to ON, the operation of the kick sensor
will not return. (No return in the power
switch operation)
The open position of the power back
door can be adjusted.
1 Stop the back door in the desirable
position. (P.117)
2 Press and hold the power back
door switch on the back door for 2
seconds.
• When the settings are completed,
the buzzer sounds 4 times.
• When opening the back door the
next time, the back door will stop at
that position.
■ Returning the back door automatic stop
position to the initial settings
Press and hold the power back door switch
on the back door for 7 seconds.
After the buzzer sounds 4 times, it sounds
twice more. When the power back door
does the opening operation the next time,
the door will open to the initial settings posi-
tion.
Canceling the kick sensor (vehi-
cles with Hands Free Power
Back Door)
Adjusting the open position of
the back door (vehicles with
power back door)
126
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ When setting the open position of the
back door by the navigation system or
multimedia system
The opening position can be set with the
navigation system or multimedia system.
(P.443)
Priority for the stop position is given to the
last position set by either the switch,
navigation system or multimedia system.
■ Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna inside the luggage compart-
ment
Antenna outside the luggage compart-
ment
Smart access system with
push-button start
The following operations can be
performed simply by carrying the
electronic key (including the card
key) on your person, for example in
your pocket. The driver should
always carry the electronic key.
Locks and unlocks the doors
(P.110)
Locks and unlocks the back door
(P.115)
Starts and stops the hybrid system
(P.174)
A
B
C
D
127
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
■ Effective range (areas within which the
electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking the doors
The system can be operated when the
electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7
m) of an outside door handle. (Only the
doors detecting the key can be oper-
ated.)
When starting the hybrid system or
changing power switch modes
The system can be operated when the elec-
tronic key is inside the vehicle.
■ If an alarm sounds or a warning message
is displayed
A combination of exterior and interior
alarms as well as warning messages shown
on the multi-information display are used to
prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents
resulting from erroneous operation. Take
appropriate measures in response to any
warning message on the multi-information
display. (P.398)
When only an alarm sounds, circumstances
and correction procedures are as follows.
● When an exterior alarm sounds once for
5 seconds
● When an Interior alarm pings repeatedly
■ When “Smart Access System Malfunc-
tion See Owner’s Manual” will be dis-
played on the multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
■ Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be acti-
vated in order to prevent the electronic key
battery and the 12-volt battery from being
discharged while the vehicle is not in opera-
tion for a long time.
● In the following situations, the smart
access system with push-button start may
take some time to unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in an
area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the
outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or
longer.
• The smart access system with push-but-
ton start has not been used for 5 days or
longer.
● If the smart access system with push-but-
ton start has not been used for 14 days or
longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at
any doors except the driver’s door. In this
case, take hold of the driver’s door han-
dle, or use the wireless remote control or
the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
■ Turning an electronic key to battery-
saving mode
When battery-saving mode is set, battery
depletion is minimized by stopping the elec-
Situation
Correction proce-
dure
An attempt was
made to lock the
vehicle while a door
was open.
Close all of the
doors and lock the
doors again.
A
B
Situation
Correction proce-
dure
The power switch
was turned to
ACCESSORY
mode while the
driver’s door was
open (The driver’s
door was opened
when the power
switch was in
ACCESSORY
mode).
Turn the power
switch off and close
the driver’s door.
128
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
tronic key from receiving radio waves.
Press twice while pressing and
holding .
Confirm that the electronic key indicator
flashes 4 times. While the battery-saving
mode is set, the smart access system with
push-button start cannot be used. To cancel
the function, press any of the electronic key
buttons.
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button
start, wireless remote control and immobi-
lizer system use weak radio waves. In the
following situations, the communication
between the electronic key and the vehicle
may be affected, preventing the smart
access system with push-button start, wire-
less remote control and immobilizer system
from operating properly. (Ways of coping:
P.412)
● When the electronic key battery is
depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant,
gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates
strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When the electronic key is in contact
with, or is covered by the following metal-
lic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil
inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
•Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio
waves) are being used nearby
● When carrying the electronic key
together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
• Portable radio, cellular phone, cordless
phone or other wireless communication
devices
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a
wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital
assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or
metallic objects are attached to the rear
window
● When the electronic key is placed near a
battery charger or electronic devices
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the
effective range (detection areas), the sys-
tem may not operate properly in the fol-
lowing cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the win-
dow or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors
are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or
in a high place, or too close to the rear
bumper center when the back door is
opened.
• The electronic key is on the instrument
panel, luggage room, floor, or in the door
pockets or glove box when the hybrid
system is started or power switch modes
are changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of
the instrument panel or near the door
pockets when exiting the vehicle.
Depending on the radio wave reception
conditions, it may be detected by the
antenna outside the cabin and the door
will become lockable from the outside,
possibly trapping the electronic key
inside the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is within the
effective range, the doors may be locked
or unlocked by anyone.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the
vehicle, it may be possible to start the
hybrid system if the electronic key is near
the window.
● The doors may unlock if a large amount
129
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
of water splashes on the door handle,
such as in the rain or in a car wash when
the electronic key is within the effective
range. (The door will automatically be
locked after approximately 60 seconds if
the doors are not opened and closed.)
● If the wireless remote control is used to
lock the doors when the electronic key is
near the vehicle, there is a possibility that
the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote
control to unlock the doors.)
● Touching the door lock sensor while
wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock
operation. Remove the gloves and touch
the lock sensor again.
● When the lock operation is performed
using the lock sensor, recognition signals
will be shown up to two consecutive
times. After this, no recognition signals
will be given.
● If the door handle becomes wet while the
electronic key is within the effective
range, the door may lock and unlock
repeatedly. In that case, follow the follow-
ing correction procedures to wash the
vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft.
(2 m) or more away from the vehicle.
(Take care to ensure that the key is not
stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving
mode to disable the smart access system
with push-button start. (P.127)
● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle
and a door handle becomes wet during a
car wash, a message may be shown on
the multi-information display and a
buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To
turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
● The lock sensor may not work properly if
it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud,
etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to
operate it again.
● A sudden approach to the effective
range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case,
return the door handle to the original
position and check that the doors unlock
before pulling the door handle again.
● If there is another electronic key in the
detection area, it may take slightly longer
to unlock the doors after the door handle
is gripped.
■ When the vehicle is not driven for
extended periods
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not
leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m)
of the vehicle.
● The smart access system with push-but-
ton start can be deactivated in advance.
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when
operating the system. Do not get the elec-
tronic key too close to the vehicle when
operating the system from the outside of the
vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding
condition of the electronic key, the key may
not be detected correctly and the system
may not operate properly. (The alarm may
go off accidentally, or the door lock preven-
tion may not operate.)
■ If the smart access system with push-
button start does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors: Use
the mechanical key. (P.412)
● Starting the hybrid system: P.413
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. smart access system with
push-button start) can be changed. (Cus-
tomizable features: P.443)
If the smart access system with push-button
start has been deactivated by a customized
setting, refer to the explanations for the fol-
lowing operations.
● Locking and unlocking the doors:
Use the wireless remote control or
mechanical key. (P.110, 412)
● Starting the hybrid system and changing
power switch modes: P.413
● Stopping the hybrid system: P.176
130
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
For vehicles sold in Canada
131
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
WARNING
■ Caution regarding interference with
electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pace-
makers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should keep
away from the smart access system
with push-button start antennas.
(P.126)
The radio waves may affect the opera-
tion of such devices. If necessary, the
entry function can be disabled. Ask
your Lexus dealer for details, such as
the frequency of radio waves and tim-
ing of the emitted radio waves. Then,
consult your doctor to see if you
should disable the entry function.
● Users of any electrical medical device
other than implantable cardiac pace-
makers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should con-
sult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under
the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected
effects on the operation of such medi-
cal devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details on dis-
abling the entry function.
132
3-3. Adjusting the seats
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3-3.Adjusting the seats
Seat position adjustment switch
Seat cushion (front) angle adjust-
ment switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Seatback angle adjustment switch
Lumbar support adjustment switch
(for driver’s side)
■ Power easy access system (if equipped)
The driver’s seat and steering wheel move
in accordance with power switch mode and
the driver’s seat belt condition. (P.138)
Front seats
The seats can be adjusted (longitu-
dinally, vertically, etc.). Adjust the
seat to ensure the correct driving
posture.
Adjustment procedure
A
B
C
D
E
WARNING
■ When adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat
position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving
seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat
or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become
jammed in the seat mechanism.
■ Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap
belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may
slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your
neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious
injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while
driving as the seat may unexpectedly
move and cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
133
3-3. Adjusting the seats
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
Manual seat
Reclining adjustment
Power seat
Reclining adjustment
■ Operating conditions for reclining
adjustment (power seat)
When the following conditions are met,
switch operations are possible.
● When the seatback position is within the
range in the following illustration from
the upright position.
● When the other operation switches for
the seat being operated are not pressed.
■ Reclining adjustment (power seat)
Stop the seatback partway. To set the seat-
back to the rearmost position, press the
button again.
■ Power seat operations (if equipped)
If the seat has a cover or seat cushion, it may
not operate properly. Also, when folding
down the seat, check that there is nothing
on the rear seat that would interfere with
the operation.
Rear seats
Reclining adjustments and folding
the seat backs can be done with
either lever or switch operations.
Adjustment procedure
A
A
WARNING
■ When operating the seatback
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
● Keep other passengers from being hit
with the seatback.
A
134
3-3. Adjusting the seats
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Before folding down the rear seat-
backs
1 Stow the rear center seat belt, seat
belt buckles and armrest. (P.29)
2 Lower the head restraint of the rear
seat. (P.141)
■ Folding down rear seatbacks (man-
ual seat)
Pull the seatback angle adjustment
lever and fold down the seatback.
■ Folding down rear seatbacks
(power seat)
Press and hold the switch to fold down
the seatback.
The buzzer sounds and operations start.
The buzzer sounds again when the opera-
tion is complete.
To stop the operation of a seat partway,
press either seat operation switch for that
seat, once more. Switches for that seat in
other locations can be used to stop the
operations. (buzzer sounds depending on
stopping position of the seatback)
Instrument panel switch
WARNING
● Do not bring your hands close to the
moving parts or between the seats, as
well as do not let any part of your body
get caught.
● Vehicles with power seat: Do not let
children operate the seatback as other
passengers may get caught in seat.
● Vehicles with power seat: Check that
there are no passengers sitting in the
seat before folding that seat forward.
Also, do let other passengers sit in the
seat while the seat is forward folding.
■ Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap
belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may
slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your
neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious
injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while
driving as the seat may unexpectedly
move and cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
Folding down the rear seatbacks
135
3-3. Adjusting the seats
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
Rear seat switch
When the seatback is collapsed to the rear,
put the seatback in the most upright posi-
tion and press the switch once again.
Luggage room switch
■ Returning the rear seatbacks
(manual seat)
1 Raise the rear seatback until it
locks.
2 Check that the plate for the seat
belt is on the front side of the seat.
When using the seat belt for the rear cen-
ter seat (P.28)
■ Returning the rear seatbacks
(power seat)
1 Press and hold the switch to return
the seatback.
The buzzer sounds and operations start.
The buzzer sounds again when the opera-
tion is complete.
To stop the operation of a seat partway,
press either seat operation switch for that
seat, once more. Switches for that seat in
other locations can be used to stop the
operations. (buzzer sounds depending on
stopping position of the seatback)
Instrument panel switch
Rear seat switch
136
3-3. Adjusting the seats
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Luggage room switch
2 Check that the plate for the seat
belt is on the front side of the seat.
When using the seat belt for the rear cen-
ter seat (P.28)
■ Operating conditions for folding down
the seatback (power seat)
When the following conditions are met,
switch operations are possible.
● When operating the rear seat switch: The
seatback position is within the range
in the illustration from the most upright
position.
● When operating the instrument panel
switch or luggage compartment switch:
The seatback position is within the
range in the illustration.
● When operating the rear seat switch:
When the rear door for the seat to be
operated is open.
● When operating the luggage compart-
ment switch: When the back door is
open.
● When the other operation switches for
the seat being operated are not pressed.
When the power switch is in ON mode, in
addition to the above, the power seat oper-
ates for any of the following conditions:
• Parking brake is engaged
• The brake pedal is depressed
• The shift lever is in P
■ Operating conditions for returning the
seatback (power seat)
When the following conditions are met,
switch operations are possible.
● When operating the rear seat switch: The
seatback position is within the range
in the illustration from the most upright
position.
● When operating the rear seat switch:
When the rear door for the seat to be
operated is open.
● When operating the luggage compart-
ment switch: When the back door is
open.
● When the other operation switches for
the seat being operated are not pressed.
When the power switch is in ON mode, in
addition to the above, the power seat oper-
ates for any of the following conditions:
• Parking brake is engaged
• The brake pedal is depressed
• The shift lever is in P
A
B
A
137
3-3. Adjusting the seats
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
■ Seatback jam protection function
(power seat)
When folding down the seatback, if a for-
eign object is perceived between the seat-
back and seat cushion, the seatback will
reverse operations and then stops opera-
tions.
The buzzer sounds intermittently during
reverse operations and sounds continu-
ously when operations are stopped.
WARNING
■ When folding the rear seatbacks
down and after folded
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Do not fold the seatbacks down while
driving.
● Stop the vehicle on level ground, set
the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P.
● Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded
seatback or in the luggage compart-
ment while driving.
● Do not allow children to enter the lug-
gage compartment.
■ After returning the rear seatback to
the upright position
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Make sure that the seatback is
securely locked in position by lightly
pushing it back and forth.
● Check that the seat belts are not
twisted or caught in the seatback.
■ Jam protection function (vehicles
with power seat)
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
● Never use any part of your body to
intentionally activate the jam protec-
tion function.
● The jam protection function may not
work if something gets caught just
before the seatback is fully folded for-
ward. Be careful not to get fingers
caught or anything else.
● The jam protection function may not
work depending on the shape of the
object that is caught. Be careful not to
catch fingers or anything else.
NOTICE
■ Stowing the seat belts
The seat belts and the buckles for the
rear center seat, as well as the armrest,
must be stowed before you fold down the
rear seatbacks. (P.29)
138
3-3. Adjusting the seats
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
*
:If equipped
When all of the following have been
performed, the driver’s seat and steer-
ing wheel are automatically adjusted to
a position that allows driver to enter
and exit the vehicle easily.
• The shift lever has been shifted to P.
• The power switch has been turned
off.
• The driver’s seat belt has been
unfastened.
When any of the following has been
performed, the driver’s seat and steer-
ing wheel automatically return to their
original positions.
• The power switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY mode or ON
mode.
• The driver’s seat belt has been fas-
tened.
■ Operation of the power easy access sys-
tem
When exiting the vehicle, the power easy
access system may not operate if the seat is
already close to the rearmost position, etc.
■ Customization
The seat movement amount settings of the
power easy access system can be custom-
ized. (Customizable features: P.443)
1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the power switch to ON
mode.
3 Adjust the driver’s seat, steering
wheel and outside rear view mir-
rors to the desired positions.
4 While pressing the “SET” button, or
within 3 seconds after the “SET”
button is pressed, press button “1”,
“2” or “3” until the buzzer sounds.
If the selected button has already been
preset, the previously recorded position
Driving position memory
*
This feature automatically adjusts
the front seats, steering wheel and
outside rear view mirrors to make
entering and exiting the vehicle
easier or to suit your preferences.
Three different driving positions
can be recorded into memory.
Each electronic key (including a
card key) can be registered to
recall your preferred driving posi-
tion.
Enabling easier driver entry and
exit (Power easy access system)
Recording a driving position into
memory
139
3-3. Adjusting the seats
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
will be overwritten.
■ Seat positions that can be memorized
(P.132)
The adjusted positions other than the posi-
tion adjusted by lumbar support switch can
be recorded.
■ In order to correctly use the driving
position memory function
If a seat position is already in the furthest
possible position and the seat is operated in
the same direction, the recorded position
may be slightly different when it is recalled.
1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the power switch to ON
mode.
3 Press one of the buttons for the
driving position you want to recall
until the buzzer sounds.
■ To stop the position recall operation
part-way through
Perform any of the following:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Operate any of the seat adjustment
switches (only cancels seat position
recall).
● Operate the tilt and telescopic steering
control switch (only cancels steering
wheel position recall).
■ Operating the driving position memory
after turning the power switch off
Recorded seat positions can be activated
up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is
opened and another 60 seconds after it is
closed again.
■ Registering procedure
Record your driving position to button
“1”, “2” or “3” before performing the
following:
Carry only the key you want to register,
and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that
the seat does not strike the rear passen-
ger or squeeze your body against the
steering wheel.
Recalling a driving position
Registering/canceling/recall a
driving position to an electronic
key (memory recall function)
140
3-3. Adjusting the seats
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
driving position cannot be recorded
properly.
1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the power switch to ON
mode.
3 Recall the driving position that you
want to record.
4 While pressing the recalled button,
press and hold the door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the
buzzer sounds.
If the driving position could not be regis-
tered, the buzzer sounds continuously for
approximately 3 seconds.
■ Cancelation procedure
1 Carry only the key you want to can-
cel and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle,
the driving position cannot be can-
celed properly.
2 Turn the power switch to ON
mode.
3 While pressing the “SET” button,
press and hold the door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the
buzzer sounds twice.
If it could not be canceled, the buzzer
sounds continuously for approximately 3
seconds.
■ Recall procedure
1 Make sure that the doors are
locked before recalling the driving
position. Carry the electronic key
that has been registered to the driv-
ing position, and then unlock and
open the driver’s door using the
smart access system with push-but-
ton start or wireless remote control.
The driving position will move to the
recorded position (not including the steer-
ing wheel). However, the seat will move to
a position slightly behind the recorded
position in order to make entering the vehi-
cle easier.
If the driving position is in a position that
has already been recorded, the seat and
outside rear view mirrors will not move.
2 Turn the power switch to ACCES-
SORY mode or ON mode, or fas-
ten a seat belt.
The seat and steering wheel will move to
the recorded position.
■ Recalling the driving position using the
memory recall function
● Different driving positions can be regis-
tered for each electronic key. Therefore,
the driving position that is recalled may
be different depending on the key being
carried.
● If a door other than the driver’s door is
unlocked with the smart access system
with push-button start, the driving posi-
tion cannot be recalled. In this case, press
the driving position button which has
been set.
■ Customization
The unlock door settings of the memory
recall function can be customized. (Cus-
tomizable features: P.443)
141
3-3. Adjusting the seats
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
■ Front seats
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while press-
ing the lock release button .
■ Rear seats
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while press-
ing the lock release button .
■ Adjusting the height of the head
restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
■ Adjusting the center rear seat head
restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level
from the stowed position when using.
The position of the front head restraint
can be adjusted forward in 4 stages.
If the head restraint is pulled forward from
the foremost position, it will return to the
rearmost position.
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all
seats.
WARNING
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions
regarding the head restraints.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for
each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the cor-
rect position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints,
push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints
removed.
Vertical adjustment
A
Horizontal adjustment (if
equipped)
A
142
3-3. Adjusting the seats
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Pull the head restraint up while press-
ing the lock release button .
If the head restraint touches the ceiling,
making the removal difficult, change
the seat height or angle. (P.132, 133)
Align the head restraint with the instal-
lation holes and push it down to the
lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
Removing the head restraints
Installing the head restraints
A
A
143
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
3-4.Adjusting th e steering wheel and mi rrors
Manual type
1 Hold the steering wheel and push
the lever down.
2 Adjust to the ideal position by mov-
ing the steering wheel horizontally
and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up to
secure the steering wheel.
Power type
Operating the switch moves the steer-
ing wheel in the following directions:
1 Up
2 Down
3 Toward the driver
4 Away from the driver
■ The steering wheel can be adjusted
when (power type)
The power switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode
*
.
*
: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the
steering wheel can be adjusted regard-
less of power switch mode.
■ Automatic adjustment of the steering
position (if equipped)
A desired steering position can be entered
to memory and recalled automatically by
the driving position memory system.
(P.138)
■ Power easy access system (if equipped)
The steering wheel and driver’s seat move
in accordance with power switch mode and
the driver’s seat belt condition. (P.138)
■ After adjusting the steering wheel
(manual type)
Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering
wheel is not securely locked.
Steering wheel
Adjustment procedure
144
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
To sound the horn, press on or close to
the mark.
The height of the rear view mirror can
be adjusted to suit your driving pos-
ture.
Adjust the height of the rear view mir-
ror by moving it up and down.
Responding to the level of brightness
of the headlights of vehicles behind, the
reflected light is automatically
reduced.
Type A
Changing automatic anti-glare func-
tion mode on/off
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mis-
handle the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel
(manual type)
Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move
suddenly, possibly causing an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
Sounding the horn
Inside rear view mirror
The rear view mirror’s position can
be adjusted to enable sufficient
confirmation of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of rear view
mirror
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror
while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the
vehicle and cause an accident, resulting
in death or serious injury.
Anti-glare function
145
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
When the automatic anti-glare function is
in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode each
time the power switch is turned to ON
mode.
Pressing the button turns the function to
OFF mode. (The indicator also turns
off.)
Type B
Changing automatic anti-glare func-
tion mode on/off
When the automatic anti-glare function is
in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode each
time the power switch is turned to ON
mode.
Pressing the button turns the function to
OFF mode. (The indicator also turns
off.)
■ To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover them.
Type A
Type B
A
A
A
A
146
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1 To select a mirror to adjust, press
the switch.
Left
Right
2 To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when
The power switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode.
■ When using in cold weather
Vehicles with driving position memory:
When used in cold weather during reverse
driving, the door mirror could be frozen and
may not automatically point the mirror sur-
face downward. In this event, remove any
ice and snow from the mirror surface.
■ Defogging the mirrors
The outside rear view mirrors can be
cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on
the rear window defogger to turn on the
outside rear view mirror defoggers.
(P.292)
■ Auto anti-glare function
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror
is set to automatic mode, the outside rear
view mirrors will activate in conjunction with
the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to
reduce reflected light. (P.144)
■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror
angle (vehicles with driving position
memory)
A desired mirror face angle can be entered
to memory and recalled automatically by
Outside rear view mirrors
For safe driving, adjust the mirror
angles to secure visibility before
driving.
WARNING
■ When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while
driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of con-
trol of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side
mirrors must be extended and prop-
erly adjusted before driving.
■ When the mirror defoggers are oper-
ating
Do not touch the rear view mirror sur-
faces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.
Adjustment procedure
A
B
A
B
C
D
147
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
the driving position memory. (P.138)
■ Linked mirror function when reversing
(vehicles with driving position memory)
When the mirror select switch is in the “L”
or “R” position, the outside rear view mir-
rors will automatically angle downwards
when the vehicle is reversing in order to
give a better view of the ground.
To disable this function, move the mirror
select switch to the neutral position
(between “L” or “R”)
With the shift lever in R, adjust the mirror
angle to a desired position to set the mirror
angle used when the vehicle is reversing.
The adjusted angle will be memorized and
the mirror will automatically tilt to the mem-
orized angle whenever the shift lever is
shifted to R from next time.
The memorized downward tilt position of
the mirror is linked to the normal position
(angle adjusted with the shift lever in other
than R). Therefore, if the normal position is
changed after adjustment, the tilt position
will also change.
When the normal position is changed, read-
just the angle in reversing.
When used in cold weather, the door mirror
could be frozen and may not automatically
point the mirror surface downward. In this
event, remove any ice and snow from the
mirror surface.
1 Folds the mirrors
2 Extends the mirrors
Putting the outside rear view mirror folding
switch in the neutral position sets the mir-
rors to automatic mode. Automatic mode
allows the folding or extending of the mir-
rors to be linked to locking/unlocking of
the doors.
■ When using in cold weather
When automatic mode is used in cold
weather, the door mirror could freeze up
and automatic stowing and return may not
be possible. In this event, after removing any
ice and snow from the door mirror, operate
the mirror using manual mode or move it by
hand.
■ Customization
The automatic mirror folding and extending
operation can be changed. (Customizable
features: P.443)
Folding and extending the mir-
rors
WARNING
■ When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror mal-
function, be careful not to get your hand
caught by the moving mirror.
148
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3-5.Opening, clo sing the windows and m oon roof
The power windows can be opened
and closed by a one-touch operation of
the switches.
1 Closing
2 One-touch closing
*
3 Opening
4 One-touch opening
*
*
: To stop the window partway, operate the
switch in the opposite direction.
■ The power windows can be operated
when
The power switch is in ON mode.
■ Operating the power windows after
turning the hybrid system off
The power windows can be operated for
approximately 45 seconds even after the
power switch is turned to ACCESSORY
mode or turned off. They cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is
opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes jammed between the
window and the window frame while the
window is closing, window movement is
stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ Catch protection function
If an object becomes caught between the
door and window while the window is open-
ing, window movement is stopped.
■ When the window cannot be opened or
closed
When the jam protection function or catch
protection function operates unusually and
the door window cannot be opened or
closed, perform the following operations
with the power window switch of that door.
● Stop the vehicle. With the power switch in
ON mode, within 4 seconds of the jam
protection function or catch protection
function activating, continuously operate
the power window switch in the one-
touch closing direction or one-touch
opening direction so that the door win-
dow can be opened and closed.
● If the door window cannot be opened
and closed even when performing the
above operations, perform the following
procedure for function initialization.
1 Turn the power switch to ON mode.
2 Pull and hold the power window switch
in the one-touch closing direction and
completely close the door window.
3 Release the power window switch for a
moment, resume pulling the switch in
the one-touch closing direction, and
hold it there for approximately 6 sec-
onds or more.
4 Press and hold the power window
switch in the one-touch opening direc-
tion. After the door window is com-
pletely opened, continue holding the
switch fan additional 1 second or more.
5 Release the power window switch for a
moment, resume pushing the switch in
the one-touch opening direction, and
hold it there for approximately 4 sec-
onds or more.
6 Pull and hold the power window switch
in the one-touch closing direction
again. After the door window is com-
pletely closed, continue holding the
switch for a further 1 second or more.
If you release the switch while the window is
moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window reverses and cannot be fully
Power windows
Opening and closing the power
windows
149
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
closed or opened, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Door lock linked window operation
● The power windows can be opened and
closed using the mechanical key.
*
(P.413)
● The power windows can be opened using
the wireless remote control.
*
(P.110)
*
: These settings must be customized at
your Lexus dealer.
■ Power windows open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown
on the multi-information display in the
instrument cluster when the power switch is
turned off and the driver’s door is opened
with the power windows open.
■ Customization
Setting (e.g. linked door lock operation) can
be changed.
(Customizable features: P.443)
This function is designed to prevent
children from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.
Press the switch down to lock the pas-
senger window.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● The driver is responsible for all the
power window operations, including
the operation for the passengers. In
order to prevent accidental operation,
especially by a child, do not let a child
operate the power windows. It is possi-
ble for children and other passengers
to have body parts caught in the power
window. Also, when riding with a child,
it is recommended to use the window
lock switch. (P.149)
● Check to make sure that all passen-
gers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught
when a window is being operated.
● When using the wireless remote con-
trol or mechanical key and operating
the power windows, operate the
power window after checking to make
sure that there is no possibility of any
passenger having any of their body
parts caught in the window. Also do
not let a child operate window by the
mechanical key. It is possible for chil-
dren and other passengers to get
caught in the power window.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the
power switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There
may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to
an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to
intentionally activate the jam protec-
tion function.
● The jam protection function may not
work if something gets jammed just
before the window is fully closed. Be
careful not to get any part of your body
jammed in the window.
■ Catch protection function
● Never use any part of your body or
clothing to intentionally activate the
catch protection function.
● The catch protection function may not
work if something gets caught just
before the window is fully opened. Be
careful not to get any part of your body
or clothing caught in the window.
Preventing accidental operation
(window lock switch)
150
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
*
: If equipped
■ Opening and closing
1 Open
Press and hold the “OPEN” switch. The
moon roof tilts up and then fully opens
automatically.
*
2 Close
Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch. The
moon roof fully closes automatically.
*
*
: Lightly press either end of the moon roof
open/close switch to stop the moon roof
while it is operating.
Moon roof
*
For comfortable cabin experience,
the ceiling (moon roof) can be
opened or tilted up.
WARNING
■ Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
● Do not allow any passengers to put
their hands or heads outside the vehi-
cle while it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
Operation instructions
151
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
■ Tilting up and down
1 Tilt up
Press and hold the “UP” switch. It automat-
ically opens until the tilt up stop position.
*
2 Tilt down
Press and hold the “DOWN” switch. The
moon roof full close automatically.
*
*
: Lightly press either end of the moon roof
switch to stop the moon roof while it is
operating.
■ The moon roof can be operated when
The power switch is in ON mode.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon
roof and the frame while the moon roof is
closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and
the moon roof opens slightly.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed
manually. However, the sunshade will open
automatically when the moon roof is
opened.
■ When the moon roof does not close nor-
mally
Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens
slightly
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.
*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause
for approximately 10 seconds.
*2
Then it will close again and tilt down. Finally
it will stop.
3 Check to make sure that the moon roof
completely stops and then release the
switch.
● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts
back up
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the “DOWN” switch.
*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause
for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up
position.
*2
Then it will close again. Finally it will stop.
3 Check to make sure that the moon roof
has completely stopped and then
release the switch.
*1
: If the switch is released at the incorrect
time, the procedure will have to be per-
formed again from the beginning.
*2
: If the switch is released after the above
mentioned 10 second pause, automatic
operation will be disabled. In that case,
perform the moon roof initialization by
referring to “When tilt up/down or moon
roof opening and closing can be done
but automatic full opening and closing
cannot be done” on P.151.
If the moon roof does not fully close even
after performing the above procedure cor-
rectly, have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
■ When the moon roof does not move
normally
When the opening and closing operation or
automatic opening function of the moon
roof does not move normally, perform the
following initialization procedures.
1 Turn the power switch to ON mode.
2 Operate the moon roof.
The initialization method changes depend-
ing on the contents that can be operated.
● If only the tilt up operations can be done
when the moon roof is closed
3 Press and hold the “DOWN” or
“CLOSE” switch.
Open until the tilt up stop position. After
that the moon roof opens and completely
152
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
closes.
After that tilt up once again and stop at the
completely closed position.
4 Confirm that moon roof has completely
stopped and release the switch.
● If the moon roof can only be closed when
the moon roof is partially opened
3 Press and hold the “DOWN” or
“CLOSE” switch.
Fully close the moon roof, tilt up and open it
close to the fully open position. After that,
fully close the moon roof and tilt up once
again, then stop the moon roof in the fully
closed position.
4 Confirm that moon roof has completely
stopped and release the switch.
● When tilt up/down or moon roof opening
and closing can be done but automatic
full opening and closing cannot be done
3 Press the “OPEN” switch and fully
open.
4 Press the “CLOSE” switch and fully
close.
5 Press the “UP” switch and tilt up until
the tilt up stop position.
6 Press the “DOWN” switch and tilt
down.
If the switch is released before any step is
completes, the procedure will have to be
performed again from the beginning.
If the opening and closing operations or
automatic opening function does not move
as normal, even after performing the above
mentioned operations, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Moon roof open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown
on the multi-information display in the
instrument cluster when the power switch is
turned off and the driver’s door is opened
with the moon roof open.
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
● The moon roof can be opened and
closed using the mechanical key.
*
(P.413)
● The moon roof can be opened using the
wireless remote control.
*
(P.110)
*
: These settings must be customized at
your Lexus dealer.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
■ Closing the moon roof
● The driver is responsible for moon roof
opening and closing operations.
In order to prevent accidental opera-
tion, especially by a child, do not let a
child operate the moon roof. It is possi-
ble for children and other passengers
to have body parts caught in the moon
roof.
● Check to make sure that all passen-
gers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught
when the moon roof is being operated.
● When using the wireless remote con-
trol or mechanical key and operating
the moon roof, operate the moon roof
after checking to make sure that there
is no possibility of any passenger hav-
ing any of their body parts caught in
the moon roof. Also, do not let a child
operate moon roof by the mechanical
key. It is possible for children and other
passengers to get caught in the moon
roof.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the
power switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There
may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to
an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to
intentionally activate the jam protec-
tion function.
153
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3
Before driving
WARNING
● The jam protection function may not
work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof is fully closed.
Also, the jam protection function is not
designed to operate while the moon
roof switch is being pressed. Take care
so that your fingers, etc. do not get
caught.
154
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
155
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
4
Driving
Driving
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle.....................156
Cargo and luggage....................161
Vehicle load limits......................164
Trailer towing (vehicles with tow-
ing package)..............................165
Trailer towing (vehicles without
towing package)......................173
Dinghy towing .............................173
4-2. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch............174
EV drive mode ............................178
Hybrid transmission..................180
Turn signal lever..........................183
Parking brake ..............................184
Brake Hold....................................187
ASC (Active Sound Control)188
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch.........................190
Automatic High Beam.............193
Fog light switch ...........................196
Windshield wipers and washer
.........................................................196
Rear window wiper and washer
.........................................................201
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap.....203
4-5. Using the driving support sys-
tems
Lexus Safety System + 2.0....205
PCS (Pre-Collision System) ...211
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ..... 218
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control)......................227
RSA (Road Sign Assist).......... 235
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range...................... 237
PKSA (Parking Support Alert)
....................................................... 247
Intuitive parking assist............. 248
Parking Support Brake function
(for static objects).................. 253
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).... 262
Driving mode select switch ..270
Driving assist systems...............272
4-6. Driving tips
Hybrid vehicle driving tips .... 277
Winter driving tips.................... 279
Utility vehicle precautions..... 282
156
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4-1.Before driving
■ Starting the hybrid system
P.174
■ Driving
1 With the brake pedal depressed,
shift the shift lever to D. (P.180)
2 Release the parking brake.
(P.185)
If the parking brake is in automatic mode,
the parking brake is released automatically
when shifting the shift lever to any position
other than P. (P.184)
3 Gradually release the brake pedal
and gently depress the accelerator
pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■ Stopping
1 With the shift lever in D, depress the
brake pedal.
2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
(P.185)
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an
extended period of time, shift the shift lever
to P. (P.180)
■ Parking the vehicle
1 With the shift lever in D, depress the
brake pedal.
2 Set the parking brake (P.185),
and shift the shift lever to P
(P.180).
3 Press the power switch to stop the
hybrid system.
4 Lock the door, making sure that you
have the electronic key on your
person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as
needed.
■ Starting off on an uphill
1 With the brake pedal depressed,
shift the shift lever to D. (P.180)
2 Pull the parking brake switch and
parking brake is set manually.
(P.185)
3 Release the brake pedal and gently
depress the accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle.
4 Press the parking brake switch and
parking brake is released manually.
(P.185)
■ When starting off on an uphill
The hill-start assist control will activate.
(P.273)
■ For fuel-efficient driving
Keep in mind that hybrid vehicles are similar
to conventional vehicles, and it is necessary
to refrain from activities such as sudden
acceleration. (P.277)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because
visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road
will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain,
because the road surface will be espe-
cially slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on
an expressway in the rain, because there
may be a layer of water between the tires
and the road surface, preventing the
steering and brakes from operating prop-
erly.
Driving the vehicle
The specified procedures should be
observed to ensure safe driving:
Driving procedure
157
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ Restraining the hybrid system output
(Brake Override System)
● When the accelerator and brake pedals
are depressed at the same time, the
hybrid system output may be restrained.
● A warning message is displayed on the
multi-information display and head-up
display (if equipped) while the system is
operating.
■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start
Control)
● When the following unusual operation is
performed, the hybrid system output may
be restrained.
• When the shift lever is shifted from R to D,
D to R, N to R, P to D, or P to R (D
includes S) with the accelerator pedal
depressed, a warning message appears
on the multi-information display and
head-up display (if equipped). If a warn-
ing message is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display and head-up display (if
equipped), read the message and follow
the instructions.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed
too much while the vehicle is in reverse.
● While Drive-Start Control is being acti-
vated, your vehicle may have trouble
escaping from the mud or fresh snow. In
such case, deactivate TRAC (P.273)
to cancel Drive-Start Control so that the
vehicle may become able to escape from
the mud or fresh snow.
■ Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing
the following precautions is recommended:
● For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for
extended periods.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer. (vehicles with towing
package)
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign
country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registra-
tion laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P.432)
■ Eco-friendly driving
P.87
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the “READY”
indicator is illuminated. This prevents the
vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with
the location of the brake and accelera-
tor pedals to avoid depressing the
wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelera-
tor pedal instead of the brake pedal
will result in sudden acceleration that
may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your
body around, leading to difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to
operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving
posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly. This allows you to depress
the brake and accelerator pedals
properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your
right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay
response in an emergency, resulting in
an accident.
158
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
WARNING
● The driver should pay extra attention
to pedestrians when the vehicle is
powered only by the electric motor
(traction motor). As there is no engine
noise, the pedestrians may misjudge
the vehicle’s movement. Even though
the vehicle is equipped with the acous-
tic vehicle alerting system, drive with
care as pedestrians in the vicinity may
still not notice the vehicle if the sur-
rounding area is noisy.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop
the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases
can be extremely hot. These hot parts
may cause a fire if there is any flamma-
ble material nearby.
● During normal driving, do not turn off
the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid
system off while driving will not cause
loss of steering or braking control,
however, power assist to the steering
will be lost. This will make it more diffi-
cult to steer smoothly, so you should
pull over and stop the vehicle as soon
as it is safe to do so.
In the event of an emergency, such as if
it becomes impossible to stop the vehi-
cle in the normal way: P.380
● Use engine braking (downshift) to
maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may
cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (P.180)
● Do not adjust the positions of the
steering wheel, the seat, or the inside
or outside rear view mirrors while driv-
ing.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Always check that all passengers’
arms, heads or other parts of their
body are not outside the vehicle.
● Do not drive across a river or through
other bodies of water.
This may cause electric/electronic
components to short circuit, damage
the hybrid system or cause other seri-
ous damage to the vehicle.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed
limit. Even if the legal speed limit per-
mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140
km/h) unless your vehicle has high-
speed capability tires.
Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may
result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire
dealer to determine whether the tires
on your vehicle are high-speed capa-
bility tires or not before driving at such
speeds.
■ When driving on slippery road sur-
faces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and
steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehi-
cle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine braking
due to shifting, or changes in engine
speed could cause the vehicle to skid.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly
depress the brake pedal to make sure
that the brakes are functioning prop-
erly. Wet brake pads may prevent the
brakes from functioning properly. If the
brakes on only one side are wet and
not functioning properly, steering con-
trol may be affected.
■ When shifting the shift lever
● Do not let the vehicle roll backward
while the shift lever is in a driving posi-
tion, or roll forward while the shift lever
is in R.
Doing so may result in an accident or
damage to the vehicle.
● Do not shift the shift lever to P while
the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission
and may result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol.
159
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
WARNING
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while
the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission
and may result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol.
● Do not shift the shift lever to a driving
position while the vehicle is moving
backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission
and may result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol.
● Shifting the shift lever to N while the
vehicle is moving will disengage the
hybrid system.
Engine braking is not available when N
is selected.
● Be careful not to shift the shift lever
with the accelerator pedal depressed.
Shifting the shift lever to any position
other than P or N may lead to unex-
pected rapid acceleration of the vehi-
cle that may cause an accident and
result in death or serious injury.
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping
noise (brake pad wear limit indica-
tors)
Have the brake pads checked and
replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible. Rotor damage may result if the
pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when
the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
unnecessarily.
If the shift lever is in any position other
than P or N, the vehicle may acceler-
ate suddenly and unexpectedly, caus-
ing an accident.
● In order to prevent accidents due to
the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while
stopped with the “READY” indicator is
illuminated, and apply the parking
brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline,
in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or back-
ward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake
as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed
while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which
could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters,
spray cans, or soft drink cans in the
vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter
or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle
may cause the plastic lenses and plas-
tic material of glasses to deform or
crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing
the contents to spray over the interior
of the vehicle, and may also cause a
short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical
components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the
vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the
floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is
adjusted, causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to the
windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on
the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act
as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
● Do not leave a door or window open if
the curved glass is coated with a met-
allized film such as a silver-colored
one. Reflected sunlight may cause the
glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
160
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
WARNING
● Always apply the parking brake, shift
the shift lever to P, stop the hybrid sys-
tem and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended
while the “READY” indicator is illumi-
nated.
If the vehicle is parked with the shift
lever in P but the parking brake is not
set, the vehicle may start to move, pos-
sibly leading to an accident.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while
the “READY” indicator is illuminated
or immediately after turning the hybrid
system off.
Doing so may cause burns.
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the hybrid system off. Other-
wise, if you accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal,
this could cause an accident or fire due
to hybrid system overheating. Addition-
ally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly
ventilated area, exhaust gases may col-
lect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive more
cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the
brakes are wet, and this may cause one
side of the vehicle to brake differently
than the other side. Also, the parking
brake may not securely hold the vehi-
cle.
● If the electronically controlled brake
system does not operate, do not follow
other vehicles closely and avoid hills or
sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but
the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual. Also, the brak-
ing distance will increase. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
● The brake system consists of 2 or more
individual hydraulic systems; if one of
the systems fails, the other(s) will still
operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than
usual and the braking distance will
increase. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck
Do not spin the wheels excessively when
any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehi-
cle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may
damage the driveline components or
propel the vehicle forward or backward,
causing an accident.
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain the hybrid
system output.
● Do not use the accelerator pedal or
depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time to hold the
vehicle on a hill.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in
either direction and hold it there for an
extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power
steering motor.
● When driving over bumps in the road,
drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the
vehicle, etc.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the fol-
lowing situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the
brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehi-
cle.
161
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
NOTICE
● The vehicle will make abnormal
sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat
tire (P.402)
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded
after heavy rain, etc. Doing so may cause
the following serious damage to the vehi-
cle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water
immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded
road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure
to have your Lexus dealer check the fol-
lowing:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil
and fluid used for the engine, hybrid
transmission, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the bearings
and suspension joints (where possi-
ble), and the function of all joints, bear-
ings, etc.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always set the parking brake, and shift
the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may
cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle
may accelerate suddenly if the accelera-
tor pedal is accidentally depressed.
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following infor-
mation about storage precautions,
cargo capacity and load.
WARNING
■ Things that must not be carried in the
luggage compartment
The following things may cause a fire if
loaded in the luggage compartment:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals
from being depressed properly, may
block the driver’s vision, or may result in
items hitting the driver or passengers,
possibly causing an accident.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the lug-
gage compartment whenever possi-
ble.
● Do not stack cargo and luggage in the
luggage compartment higher than the
seatbacks.
● When you fold down the rear seats,
long items should not be placed
directly behind the front seats.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-
gage compartment. It is not designed
for passengers. They should ride in
their seats with their seat belts prop-
erly fastened.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on
the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats
(when stacking items)
•On the luggage cover
• On the instrument panel
•On the dashboard
162
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Cargo capacity depends on the total
weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-
ity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
(1) Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750
(5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity calculated in Step
4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
(P.164)
Vehicles without towing package:
Lexus does not recommend towing a
WARNING
● Secure all items in the occupant com-
partment.
■ When using a roof luggage carrier
(vehicles with roof rails)
Observe the following precautions:
● Place the cargo so that its weight is dis-
tributed evenly between the front and
rear axles.
● If loading long or wide cargo, never
exceed the vehicle overall length or
width. (P.424)
● Before driving, make sure the cargo is
securely fastened on the roof luggage
carrier.
● Loading cargo on the roof luggage
carrier will make the center of gravity
of the vehicle higher. Avoid high
speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,
sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers,
otherwise it may result in loss of con-
trol or vehicle rollover due to failure to
operate this vehicle correctly and
result in death or serious injury.
● If driving for a long distance, on rough
roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehi-
cle now and then during the trip to
make sure the cargo remains in its
place.
● Do not exceed 176.3 lb. (80 kg) cargo
weight on the roof luggage carrier.
NOTICE
■ When loading cargo (vehicles with
moon roof)
Do not set luggage on the moon roof.
Failure to observe so may lead to cause
damage.
Capacity and distribution
163
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is
not designed for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity (vehicle capac-
ity weight) (P.424)
When 2 people with the combined
weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your
vehicle, which has a total load capacity
(vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg),
the available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as
follows:
B
*2
lb. (kg) − A
*1
lb. (kg) = C
*3
lb. (kg)
*1
: A = Weight of people
*2
: B = Total load capacity
*3
: C = Available cargo and luggage load
In this condition, if 3 more passengers
with the combined weight of D lb. (kg)
get on, the available cargo and lug-
gage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as
follows:
C lb. (kg) − D
*4
lb. (kg) = E
*5
lb. (kg)
*4
: D = Additional weight of people
*5
: E = Available cargo and luggage load
As shown in the example above, if the
number of occupants increases, the
cargo and luggage load will be
reduced by an amount that equals the
increased weight due to the additional
occupants. In other words, if an
increase in the number of occupants
causes an excess of the total load
capacity (combined weight of occu-
pants plus cargo and luggage load),
you must reduce the cargo and lug-
gage on your vehicle.
WARNING
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle
weight rating or the total vehicle
weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant’s
weight and the cargo load is less than
the total load capacity, do not apply the
load unevenly. Improper loading may
cause deterioration of steering or
braking control which may cause
death or serious injury.
Calculation formula for your
vehicle
A
B
164
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Total load capacity (vehicle capac-
ity weight):
P.424
Total load capacity means the com-
bined weight of occupants, cargo and
luggage.
■ Seating capacity:
P.424
Seating capacity means the maximum
number of occupants whose esti-
mated average weight is 150 lb. (68
kg) per person.
■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) (vehi-
cles with towing package):
P.169, 424
TWR means the maximum gross trailer
weight (trailer weight plus its cargo
weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.
■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) (vehi-
cles without towing package)
Lexus does not recommend towing a
trailer with your vehicle.
■ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or
decrease depending on the weight and
the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire
and loading information label. (P.365)
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total
load capacity, seating capacity,
towing capacity and cargo capac-
ity.
Description
WARNING
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires,
but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.
165
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
Contact your Lexus dealer for further
information about additional require-
ments such as a towing kit, etc.
■ Matching trailer ball height to trailer
coupler height
No matter which class of tow hitch applies,
for a more safe trailer hookup, the trailer
ball setup must be the proper height for the
coupler on the trailer.
Coupler
Trailer ball
■ Before towing
Check that the following conditions are
met:
● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are prop-
erly inflated. (P.430)
● Trailer tires are inflated according to the
trailer manufacturer’s recommendation.
● All trailer lights work as required by law.
● All lights work each time you connect
them.
● The trailer ball is set at the proper height
for the coupler on the trailer.
● The trailer is level when it is hitched.
Do not drive if the trailer is not level, and
check for improper tongue weight, over-
loading, worn suspension, or other possi-
ble causes.
● The trailer cargo is securely loaded.
● The rear view mirrors conform to all
applicable federal, state/provincial or
local regulations. If they do not, install
rear view mirrors appropriate for towing
purposes.
■ AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension
System) (if equipped)
The suspension can be switched for
improvement in driveability. (P.273)
Trailer towing (vehicles with
towing package)
Your vehicle is designed primarily
as a passenger-and-load-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an
adverse impact on handling, per-
formance, braking, durability, and
fuel consumption. For your safety
and the safety of others, you must
not overload your vehicle or trailer.
You must also ensure that you are
using appropriate towing equip-
ment, that the towing equipment
has been installed correctly and
used properly, and that you employ
the requisite driving habits.
Vehicle-trailer stability and braking
performance are affected by trailer
stability, brake performance and
setting, trailer brakes, the hitch and
hitch systems (if equipped).
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme
care and drive the vehicle in accor-
dance with your trailer’s character-
istics and operating conditions.
Lexus warranties do not apply to
damage or malfunction caused by
towing a trailer for commercial pur-
poses.
A
B
166
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Break-in schedule
If your vehicle is new or equipped with any
new power train components (such as an
engine, transmission, differential or wheel
bearing), Lexus recommends that you do
not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been
driven for over 500 miles (800 km).
After the vehicle has been driven for over
500 miles (800 km), you can start towing.
However, for the next 500 miles (800 km),
drive the vehicle at a speed of less than 50
mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and
avoid full throttle acceleration.
■ Maintenance
● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will
require more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load. (See “Warranty
and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” or “Scheduled Mainte-
nance”.)
● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing
ball and bracket after approximately 600
miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
■ If trailer sway occurs
One or more factors (crosswinds, passing
vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can adversely
affect handling of your vehicle and trailer,
causing instability.
● If trailer swaying occurs:
• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer
straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by
turning the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal
immediately but very gradually to reduce
speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply
vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the
steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer
should stabilize.
● After the trailer swaying has stopped:
• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants
out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and the
trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is appropri-
ate, if possible.
• Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded
after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the speed
at which trailer swaying occurred is beyond
the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer
combination. Drive at a lower speed to pre-
vent instability. Remember that swaying of
the towing vehicle-trailer increases as
speed increases.
WARNING
■ Trailer towing precautions
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care
and drive the vehicle in accordance with
the trailer’s characteristics and operating
conditions. Failure to do so could cause
an accident resulting in death or serious
injury. Vehicle stability and braking per-
formance are affected by trailer stability,
brake setting and performance, and the
hitch. Your vehicle will handle differently
when towing a trailer.
■ To avoid accident or injury
● Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked
TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.
● Adjust the tongue weight within the
appropriate range. Place heavier loads
as close to the trailer axle as possible.
● Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h),
the posted towing speed limit or the
speed limit for your trailer as set forth
in your trailer owner’s manual, which-
ever is lowest. Slow down sufficiently
before making a turn, in cross winds,
on wet or slippery surface, etc. to help
avoid an accident. If you experience a
vehicle-trailer instability from reduc-
ing a certain speed, slow down and
make sure you keep your vehicle
speed under the speed of which you
experience the instability.
● Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp
turns.
167
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ GCWR (Gross Combination
Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross combi-
nation weight. The gross combination
weight is the sum of the total vehicle
weight (including the occupants, cargo
and any optional equipment installed
on the vehicle) and the weight of the
trailer being towed (including the
cargo in the trailer).
WARNING
● Do not apply the brakes suddenly as
you may skid, resulting in jackknifing
and loss of vehicle control. This is
especially true on wet or slippery sur-
faces.
● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assem-
bly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross
axle weight and trailer tongue weight
capacities.
● Do not use the dynamic radar cruise
control system when trailer towing.
● Slow down and downshift before
descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden down-
shifts while descending steep or long
downhill grades.
● Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely
on steep long downhills. Before
descending steep or long downhill
grades, slow down and downshift. Do
not make sudden downshifts when
descending steep or long downhill
grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal
down too long or applying the brakes
too frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat and result in
reduced braking efficiency.
● Do not tow a trailer when the compact
spare tire is installed on your vehicle.
■ When towing a trailer
Lexus recommends trailers with brakes
that conform to any applicable federal
and state/provincial regulations.
● If the gross trailer weight exceeds
unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are
required. Lexus recommends trailers
with brakes that conform to all applica-
ble federal and state/provincial regula-
tions.
● Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic
system, as this will lower the vehicle’s
braking effectiveness.
● Never tow a trailer without using a
safety chain securely attached to both
the trailer and the vehicle. If damage
occurs to the coupling unit or hitch
ball, there is danger of the trailer wan-
dering into another lane.
NOTICE
■ When installing a trailer hitch
Use only the position recommended by
your Lexus dealer. Do not install the
trailer hitch on the bumper; this may
cause body damage.
■ Do not directly splice trailer lights
Do not directly splice trailer lights.
Directly splicing trailer lights may dam-
age your vehicle’s electrical system and
cause a malfunction.
Towing related terms
168
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
The maximum allowable gross vehicle
weight. The gross vehicle weight is the
total weight of the vehicle. When tow-
ing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle
weight (including the occupants, cargo
and any optional equipment installed
on the vehicle) and the tongue weight.
■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing)
The maximum allowable gross axle
weight. The gross axle weight is the
load placed on each axle (front and
rear).
Front GAWR
Rear GAWR
■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross trailer
weight. The gross trailer weight is the
sum of the trailer weight and the weight
of the cargo in the trailer.
TWR is calculated assuming base vehi-
cle with one driver, one front passen-
ger, towing package (if available), hitch
and hitch systems (if required).
Additional optional equipment, passengers
and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the
trailer weight rating so as not to exceed
GCWR, GVWR and GAWR.
With brakes
■ Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer
Weight Rating)
The trailer weight rating for towing a
trailer without a trailer service brake
system.
Without brakes
A
B
A
A
169
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ Tongue Weight
The load placed on the trailer hitch ball.
(P.169)
The gross trailer weight must never
exceed 1500 lb. (685 kg).
The gross combination weight must
never exceed 6835 lb. (3100 kg).
The gross vehicle weight must never
exceed the GVWR indicated on the
Certification Label.
The gross axle weight on each axle
must never exceed the GAWR indi-
cated on the Certification Label.
If the gross trailer weight is over the
unbraked TWR, trailer service
brakes are required.
Confirm that the gross trailer weight,
gross combination weight, gross vehi-
cle weight, gross axle weight and
tongue weight are all within the limits.
■ GCWR
*
6835 lb. (3100 kg)
■ TWR
*
1500 lb. (685 kg).
■ Unbraked TWR
*
1000 lb. (450 kg)
*
: These models meet the tow-vehicle trail-
ering requirement of SAE International
per SAE J2807.
A recommended tongue weight
varies in accordance with the types
of trailers or towing as described
below.
To ensure the recommended values
shown below, the trailer must be
loaded by referring to the following
instructions.
•Tongue Weight
The gross trailer weight should be distrib-
uted so that the tongue weight is 9% to
11%.
(Tongue weight /Gross trailer weight x 100
= 9% to 11%)
The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight
and tongue weight can be measured with
platform scales found at a highway weigh-
ing station, building supply company,
trucking company, junk yard, etc.
Weight limits
GCWR, TWR and Unbraked
TWR
Trailer Tongue Weight
170
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Gross trailer weight
Tongue weight
Trailer hitch assemblies have different
weight capacities. Lexus recommends
the use of Lexus hitch/bracket for your
vehicle. For details, contact your Lexus
dealer.
If you wish to install a trailer hitch,
contact your Lexus dealer.
Use only a hitch that conforms to
the gross trailer weight requirement
of your vehicle.
Follow the directions supplied by the
hitch manufacturer.
Lubricate the hitch ball with a light
coating of grease.
Remove the hitch ball whenever you
are not towing a trailer. Remove the
trailer hitch if you do not need it.
After removing the hitch, seal any
mounting hole in the vehicle body to
prevent entry of any substances into
the vehicle.
Weight carrying ball position:
42.1 in. (1069.9 mm)
Hitch receiver pin hole position:
33.7 in. (855.6 mm)
Please consult your dealer when
installing trailer lights, as incorrect
installation may cause damage to the
vehicle’s lights. Please take care to
comply with your state’s laws when
installing trailer lights.
Hitch
A
B
WARNING
■ Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different
weight capacities established by the hitch
manufacturer. Even though the vehicle
may be physically capable of towing a
higher weight, the operator must deter-
mine the maximum weight rating of the
particular hitch assembly and never
exceed the maximum weight rating
specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding
the maximum weight rating set by the
trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an
accident resulting in death or serious
personal injuries.
Positions for towing hitch
receiver and hitch ball
Connecting trailer lights
A
B
171
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
Your vehicle will handle differently
when towing a trailer. Help to avoid an
accident, death or serious injury, keep
the following in mind when towing:
Speed limits for towing a trailer vary
by state or province. Do not exceed
the posted towing speed limit.
Lexus recommends that the vehicle-
trailer speed limit is 65 mph (104
km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road.
Do not exceed this limit, the posted
towing speed limit or the speed limit
for your trailer as set forth in your
trailer owner’s manual, whichever is
lowest. Instability of the towing vehi-
cle-trailer combination (trailer
sway) increases as speed increases.
Exceeding speed limits may cause
loss of control.
Before starting out, check the trailer
lights, tires and the vehicle-trailer
connections. Recheck after driving
a short distance.
Practice turning, stopping and
reversing with the trailer attached in
an area away from traffic until you
become accustomed to the feel of
the vehicle-trailer combination.
Reversing with a trailer attached is
difficult and requires practice. Grip
the bottom of the steering wheel
and move your hand to the left to
move the trailer to the left. Move
your hand to the right to move the
trailer to right. (This is generally
opposite to reversing without a
trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or
prolonged turning. Have someone
guide you when reversing to reduce
the risk of an accident.
As stopping distance is increased
when towing a trailer, vehicle-to
vehicle distance should be
increased. For each 10 mph (16
km/h) of speed, allow at least one
vehicle and trailer length.
Avoid sudden braking as you may
skid, resulting in the trailer jackknif-
ing and a loss of vehicle control. This
is especially true on wet or slippery
surfaces.
Avoid jerky starts or sudden accel-
eration.
Avoid jerky steering and sharp
turns, and slow down before making
turn.
Note that when making a turn, the
trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the
turn. Compensate by making a
wider than normal turning radius.
Slow down before making a turn, in
cross winds, on wet or slippery sur-
faces, etc.
Increasing vehicle speed can desta-
bilize the trailer.
Take care when passing other vehi-
cles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do
not forget the length of your trailer,
and be sure you have plenty of room
before changing lanes.
To maintain engine braking effi-
ciency and charging system perfor-
mance when using engine braking,
Trailer towing tips
172
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
do not put the transmission in D.
(P.180)
Instability happens more frequently
when descending steep or long
downhill grades. Before descend-
ing, slow down and downshift. Do
not make sudden downshifts while
descending steep or long downhill
grades.
Avoid holding the brake pedal down
too long or applying the brakes too
frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat and result in
reduced braking efficiency.
Due to the added load of the trailer,
your vehicle’s engine may overheat
on hot days (at temperatures over
85°F [30°C]) when driving up a
long or steep grade. If the engine
coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates overheating, immediately turn
off the air conditioning (if in use),
pull your vehicle off the road and
stop in a safe spot. (P.418)
Always place wheel blocks under
both the vehicle’s and the trailer’s
wheels when parking. Put the trans-
mission in P and apply the parking
brake. Avoid parking on a slope, but
if unavoidable, do so only after per-
forming the following:
1 Apply the brakes and keep them
applied.
2 Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle’s and trailer’s
wheels.
3 When the wheel blocks are in
place, release the brakes slowly
until the blocks absorb the load.
4 Shift into P and apply the parking
brake.
5 Turn off the hybrid system.
When restarting after parking on a
slope:
1 With the transmission in P, start the
hybrid system. Be sure to keep the
brake pedal depressed.
2 Shift into a forward gear. If revers-
ing, shift into R.
3 If the parking brake is in manual
mode, release the parking brake.
(P.185)
4 Release the brake pedal, and slowly
pull or back away from the wheel
blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
5 Have someone retrieve the blocks.
173
4-1. Before driving
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
Trailer towing (vehicles with-
out towing package)
Lexus does not recommend towing
a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus
also does not recommend the
installation of a tow hitch or the use
of a tow hitch carrier for a wheel-
chair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your
vehicle is not designed for trailer
towing or for the use of tow hitch
mounted carriers.
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be
dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehi-
cle
Do not tow your vehicle with the four
wheels on the ground.
■ To prevent causing serious damage to
the hybrid transmission and AWD
system
Never tow this vehicle with any of the
wheels on the ground. This may cause
serious damage to the hybrid transmis-
sion and AWD system.
174
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4-2.Driving pro cedures
1 Check that the parking brake is set.
2 Check that the shift lever is in P.
3 Firmly depress the brake pedal.
and a message will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the hybrid system can-
not be started.
4 Press the power switch shortly and
firmly.
When operating the power switch, one
short, firm press is enough.
It is not necessary to press and hold the
switch.
If the “READY” indicator turns on, the
hybrid system will operate normally.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until
the “READY” indicator is illuminated.
The hybrid system can be started from any
power switch mode.
5 Check that the “READY” indicator
is illuminated.
The vehicle will not move when the
“READY” indicator is off.
■ If the hybrid system does not start
● The immobilizer system may not have
been deactivated. (P.75)
Contact your Lexus dealer.
● Check that the shift lever is securely set in
P. The hybrid system may not start if the
shift lever is displaced out of P. “To Start
Vehicle, Put Shift Lever into P” will be dis-
played on the multi-information display.
● The smart access system with push-but-
ton start may not be operating prop-
erly.(P.413)
■ When the ambient temperature is low,
such as during winter driving conditions
When starting the hybrid system, the flash-
ing time of the “READY” indicator may be
long. Leave the vehicle as it is until the
“READY” indicator is steady on, as steady
means the vehicle is able to move.
■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a
hybrid vehicle
P.69
■ Electronic key battery depletion
P.106
■ Conditions affecting operation
P.128
■ Note for the entry function
P.128
■ Steering lock function
● After turning the power switch off and
opening and closing the doors, the steer-
ing wheel will be locked due to the steer-
ing lock function. Operating the power
switch again automatically cancels the
steering lock.
● When the steering lock cannot be
released, “Steering Wheel Lock Press
Power Switch while Turning Wheel” will
be displayed on the multi-information dis-
play.
Power (ignition) switch
Performing the following opera-
tions when carrying the electronic
key on your person starts the hybrid
system or changes power switch
modes.
Starting the hybrid system
175
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
Check that the shift lever is in P. Press the
power switch while turning the steering
wheel left and right.
● To prevent the steering lock motor from
overheating, operation of the motor may
be suspended if the hybrid system is
turned on and off repeatedly in a short
period of time. In this case, refrain from
operating the hybrid system. After about
10 seconds, the steering lock motor will
resume functioning.
■ If “Smart Access System Malfunction
See Owner’s Manual” is displayed on
the multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
■ If the “READY” indicator does not come
on
In the event that the “READY” indicator
does not come on even after performing
the proper procedures for starting the vehi-
cle, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ If the hybrid system is malfunctioning
P.73
■ Electronic key battery
P.369
■ Operation of the power switch
● If the switch is not pressed shortly and
firmly, the power switch mode may not
change or the hybrid system may not
start.
● If attempting to restart the hybrid system
immediately after turning the power
switch off, the hybrid system may not start
in some cases. After turning the power
switch off, please wait a few seconds
before restarting the hybrid system.
■ If the smart access system with push-
button start has been deactivated by a
customized setting
P.443
1 Stop the vehicle completely.
2 Set the parking brake (P.185),
and shift the shift lever to P
(P.180).
3 Press the power switch.
WARNING
■ When starting the hybrid system
Always start the hybrid system while sit-
ting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress
the accelerator pedal while starting the
hybrid system under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident result-
ing in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving
If hybrid system failure occurs while the
vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the
doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and
complete stop. The steering lock func-
tion will activate and this may lead to an
accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■ When starting the hybrid system
If the hybrid system becomes difficult to
start, have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer immediately.
NOTICE
■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction
with the power switch
If the power switch seems to be operat-
ing somewhat differently than usual, such
as the switch sticking slightly, there may
be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus
dealer immediately.
Stopping the hybrid system
176
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4 Release the brake pedal and check
that the display on the instrument
cluster is off.
■ Automatic hybrid system shut off fea-
ture
● The vehicle is equipped with a feature
that automatically shuts off the hybrid sys-
tem when the shift lever is in P with the
hybrid system operating for an extended
period.
● The hybrid system will automatically shut
off after approximately 1 hour if it has
been left running while the shift lever is in
P.
● The timer for the automatic hybrid system
shut off feature will reset if the brake
pedal is depressed or if the shift lever is in
a position other than P.
● After the vehicle is parked, if the door is
locked with the door lock switch (P.112)
from the inside or the mechanical key
from the outside, the automatic hybrid
system shut off feature will be disabled.
The timer for the automatic hybrid system
shut off feature will be re-enabled if the
driver’s door is opened.
■ Locking the door from outside with the
hybrid system operating
1 With the driver’s door open, pull the
driver’s door handle and insert the
mechanical key.
2 Turn the mechanical key counterclock-
wise.
3 Pull out the mechanical key and close
the door.
WARNING
■ Stopping the hybrid system in an
emergency
If you want to stop the hybrid system in an
emergency while driving the vehicle,
press and hold the power switch for more
than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times
or more in succession. (P.380)
However, do not touch the power switch
while driving except in an emergency.
Turning the hybrid system off while driv-
ing will not cause loss of steering or brak-
ing control, however, power assist to the
steering will be lost. This will make it
more difficult to steer smoothly, so you
should pull over and stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
WARNING
■ When parking
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Observe the following precau-
tions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases
to enter the vehicle and may lead to an
accident caused by light-headedness, or
may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated
area or a closed area, such as a
garage, stop the hybrid system.
177
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
Modes can be changed by pressing
the power switch with brake pedal
released. (The mode changes each
time the switch is pressed.)
1 Off
*
The emergency flashers can be used.
2 ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as the
audio system can be used.
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
3 ON mode
All electrical components can be used.
“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
*
: If the shift lever is in a position other than
P when turning off the hybrid system, the
power switch will be turned to ACCES-
SORY mode, not to off.
■ Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode
for more than 20 minutes or ON mode (the
hybrid system is not operating) for more
than an hour with the shift lever in P, the
power switch will automatically turn off.
However, this function cannot entirely pre-
vent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave
the vehicle with the power switch in
ACCESSORY or ON mode for long peri-
ods of time when the hybrid system is not
operating.
■ When stopping the hybrid system with
the shift lever in a position other than P
If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift
lever in a position other than P, the power
switch will not be turned off but instead be
turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform
the following procedure to turn the switch
off:
1 Check that the parking brake is set.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
3 Check that “Turn Off Vehicle” is dis-
played on the multi-information display
and then press the power switch once.
4 Check that “Turn Off Vehicle” on the
multi-information display is off.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the
hybrid system operating for a long
time. If such a situation cannot be
avoided, park the vehicle in an open
space and ensure that exhaust fumes
do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the hybrid system operat-
ing in an area with snow build-up, or
where it is snowing. If snowbanks build
up around the vehicle while the hybrid
system is operating, exhaust gases
may collect and enter the vehicle.
Changing power switch modes
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
● Do not leave the power switch in
ACCESSORY or ON mode for long
periods of time without the hybrid sys-
tem on.
178
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Turns EV drive mode on/off
When EV drive mode is turned on, the EV
drive mode indicator will come on.
Pressing the switch when in EV drive mode
will return the vehicle to normal driving
(using the gasoline engine and electric
motor [traction motor]).
■ Situations in which EV drive mode can-
not be turned on
It may not be possible to turn EV drive
mode on in the following situations. If it can-
not be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a
message will be shown on the multi-infor-
● If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION
ON” is displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display while the hybrid system is
not operating, the power switch is not
off. Exit the vehicle after turning the
power switch off.
● Do not stop the hybrid system when
the shift lever is in a position other than
P. If the hybrid system is stopped in
another shift lever position, the power
switch will not be turned off but instead
be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If
the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY
mode, 12-volt battery discharge may
occur.
EV drive mode
In EV drive mode, electric power is
supplied by the hybrid battery
(traction battery), and only the
electric motor (traction motor) is
used to drive the vehicle.
This mode allows you to drive in res-
idential areas early in the morning
and late at night, or in indoor park-
ing lots, etc., without concern for
noises and gas emissions.
However, when the acoustic vehi-
cle alerting system is active, the
vehicle may produce sound.
Operating instructions
179
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
mation display.
● The temperature of the hybrid system is
high.
The vehicle has been left in the sun,
driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.
● The temperature of the hybrid system is
low.
The vehicle has been left in temperatures
lower than about 32 °F (0 °C) for a long
period of time, etc.
● The gasoline engine is warming up.
● The hybrid battery (traction battery) is
low.
The remaining battery level indicated in
the “Energy Monitor” display is low.
(P.100)
● Vehicle speed is high.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly
or the vehicle is on a hill, etc.
● The windshield defogger is in use.
■ Switching to EV drive mode when the
gasoline engine is cold
If the hybrid system is started while the gas-
oline engine is cold, the gasoline engine will
start automatically after a short period of
time in order to warm up. In this case, you
will become unable to switch to EV drive
mode.
After the hybrid system has started and the
“READY” indicator has illuminated, press
the EV drive mode switch before the gaso-
line engine starts to switch to EV drive
mode.
■ Automatic cancelation of EV drive
mode
When driving in EV drive mode, the gaso-
line engine may automatically restart in the
following situations. When EV drive mode
is canceled, a buzzer will sound, the EV
drive mode indicator will go off after flash-
ing, and a message is displayed on the
multi-information display.
● The hybrid battery (traction battery)
becomes low.
The remaining battery level indicated in
the “Energy Monitor” display is low.
(P.100)
● Vehicle speed is high.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly
or the vehicle is on a hill, etc.
■ Possible driving distance when driving in
EV drive mode
EV drive mode’s possible driving distance
ranges from a few hundred meters to
approximately 0.6 mile (1 km). However,
depending on vehicle conditions, there are
situations when EV drive mode cannot be
used. (The distance that is possible depends
on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level
and driving conditions.)
■ Fuel economy
The hybrid system is designed to achieve
the best possible fuel economy during nor-
mal driving (using the gasoline engine and
electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in
EV drive mode more than necessary may
lower fuel economy.
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
When driving in EV drive mode, pay spe-
cial attention to the area around the vehi-
cle. Because there is no engine noise,
pedestrians, people riding bicycles or
other people and vehicles in the area
may not be aware of the vehicle starting
off or approaching them, so take extra
care while driving. Therefore, take extra
care while driving even if the acoustic
vehicle alerting system is active.
180
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
*1
: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce
noise, shift the shift lever to D for normal
driving.
You can choose gear range suitable for
your driving situation by operating the
paddle shift switches.
*2
: By selecting shift ranges using S mode,
you can control accelerating force and
engine braking force.
■ S mode
● When the shift range is 4 or lower, hold-
ing the shift lever toward “+” sets the shift
range to 6.
● Automatically selects a higher shift range
before the engine speed becomes too
high.
■ When driving with dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range activated
Even when performing the following
actions with the intent of enabling engine
braking, engine braking will not activate
because dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range will not be canceled.
● While driving in S mode, downshifting to
5 or 4. (P.182)
● When switching the driving mode to
Sport mode while driving in D position.
(P.270)
■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start
Control)
When the following unusual operation is
performed, the hybrid system output may
be restrained.
● When the shift lever is shifted from R to D,
D to R, N to R, P to D, or P to R (D
includes S) with the accelerator pedal
depressed, a warning message appears
on the multi-information display. If a
warning message is shown on the multi-
information display, read the message
and follow the instructions.
● When the accelerator pedal is depressed
too much while the vehicle is in reverse.
Hybrid transmission
Select the shift position depending
on your purpose and situation.
Shift position purpose and func-
tions
Shift posi-
tion
Objective or function
P
Parking the vehicle/starting
the hybrid system
R Reversing
N Neutral
D
Normal driving
*1
S
S mode driving
*2
(P.182)
WARNING
■ When driving on slippery road sur-
faces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden
acceleration, as this could result in the
vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.
NOTICE
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
charge
If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery
(traction battery) will not be charging,
even when the engine is running. There-
fore, if the vehicle is left with the shift
lever in N, the hybrid battery (traction
battery) will discharge, and this may
result in the vehicle not being able to
start.
181
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ Shift lock system
The shift lock system is a system to prevent
accidental operation of the shift lever in
starting.
The shift lever can be shifted from P only
when the power switch is in ON mode and
the brake pedal is being depressed.
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
First, check whether the brake pedal is
being depressed.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your
foot on the brake pedal, there may be a
problem with the shift lock system. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
The following steps may be used as an
emergency measure to ensure that the shift
lever can be shifted.
Releasing the shift lock:
1 Set the parking brake.
2 Turn the power switch off.
3 Depress the brake pedal.
4 Pry the cover up with a flathead screw-
driver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover, cover the
tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
5 Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the but-
ton is pressed
P.270
Shifting the shift lever
While the power switch is in ON
mode, move the shift lever with the
brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P
and D, make sure that the vehicle is
completely stopped.
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident when releas-
ing the shift lock
Before pressing the shift lock override
button, make sure to set the parking
brake and depress the brake pedal.
If the accelerator pedal is accidentally
depressed instead of the brake pedal
when the shift lock override button is
pressed and the shift lever is shifted out
of P, the vehicle may suddenly start, pos-
sibly leading to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
Selecting the driving mode
182
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
To drive using temporary shift range
selection, operate the “-” paddle shift
switch while the shift lever in D. Chang-
ing the shift range enables the level of
engine braking force to be selected.
The shift range can then be selected by
operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift
switches.
1 Upshifting
2 Downshifting
The selected shift range, from 1 to 6, will be
displayed on the multi-information display.
The initial shift range is 4 when the “-” pad-
dle shift switch is operated.
To return to normal D position driving, the
“+” paddle shift switch must be held down
for a period of time.
■ Shift ranges and their functions
You can choose from 6 levels of
engine braking force.
A lower shift range will provide
greater engine braking force than a
higher shift range, and the engine
revolutions will also increase.
■ Automatic deactivation of shift range
selection in the D position
Shift range selection in the D position will
be deactivated in the following situations:
● When the vehicle comes to a stop
● If the accelerator pedal is depressed for
more than a certain period of time
● When the shift lever is shifted to a posi-
tion other than D
To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to
S. Shift ranges can be selected by
operating the shift lever or paddle shift
switches, allowing you to drive in the
shift range of your choice. The shift
range can be selected by operating the
shift lever or the “-” and “+” paddle shift
switches.
1 Upshifting
2 Downshifting
The selected shift range, from 1 to 6, will be
displayed.
The initial shift range in S mode is 4.
Selecting shift ranges in the D
position
Selecting shift ranges in the S
position
183
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ Shift ranges and their functions
You can choose from 6 levels of
accelerating force and engine brak-
ing force.
A lower shift range will provide
greater accelerating force and
engine braking force than a higher
shift range, and the engine revolu-
tions will also increase.
■ Downshifting restriction warning
buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving perfor-
mance, downshifting operation may some-
times be restricted. In some circumstances,
downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever or paddle shift switch is
operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
1 Right turn
2 Lane change to the right (move the
lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3
times.
3 Lane change to the left (move the
lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3
times.
4 Left turn
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The power switch is in ON mode.
■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear
turn signal lights has not burned out.
■ Customization
P.443
Turn signal lever
Operating instructions
184
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Turns automatic mode on
While the vehicle is stopped, pull and
hold the parking brake switch until the
automatic mode lamp turns on.
Parking brake indicator (U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator (Canada)
Parking brake lamp
Automatic mode lamp
The parking brake is set or released
automatically according to shift lever
operation.
When the shift lever is moved out of
P, the parking brake will be released,
and the parking brake indicator light
and parking brake lamp turn off.
When the shift lever is moved into P,
the parking brake will be set, and the
parking brake indicator light and
parking brake lamp turn on.
Operate the shift lever with the brake
pedal depressed.
■ Turns automatic mode off
While the vehicle is stopped, press and
hold the parking brake switch until the
automatic mode lamp turns off.
Parking brake indicator (U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator (Canada)
Parking brake lamp
Parking brake
The parking brake can be set or
released automatically or manually.
In automatic mode, the parking
brake can be set or released auto-
matically according to shift lever
operation. Also, even in automatic
mode, the parking brake can be set
or released manually.
Operating instructions
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
185
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
Automatic mode lamp
■ Using the manual mode
The parking brake can be set and
released manually.
Parking brake indicator (U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator (Canada)
Parking brake lamp
Automatic mode lamp
1 Sets the parking brake
The parking brake indicator light and park-
ing brake lamp will turn on.
Pull and hold the parking brake switch if an
emergency occurs and it is necessary to
operate the parking brake while driving.
2 Releases the parking brake
Operate the parking brake switch while
depressing the brake pedal. Make sure
that the parking brake indicator light and
parking brake lamp turn off.
If the parking brake indicator light and
parking brake lamp flashes, operate the
switch again. (P.392)
■ Parking brake operation
● When the power switch is not in ON
mode, the parking brake cannot be
released using the parking brake switch.
● When the power switch is not in ON
mode, automatic mode (automatic brake
setting and releasing) is not available.
■ If “Parking Brake Overheated Parking
Brake Unavailable” is displayed on the
multi-information display
If the parking brake is operated repeatedly
over a short period of time, the system may
restrict operation to prevent overheating. If
this happens, refrain from operating the
parking brake. Normal operation will return
after about 1 minute.
■ Parking brake operation sound
When the parking brake operates, a motor
sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Parking brake indicator light and park-
ing brake lamp
● Depending on the power switch mode,
the parking brake indicator light and
parking brake lamp will turn on and stay
on as described below:
ON mode: Comes on until the parking
brake is released.
Not in ON mode: Stays on for approxi-
mately 15 seconds.
● When the power switch is turned off with
the parking brake set, the parking brake
indicator light and parking brake lamp
will stay on for about 15 seconds. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Changing the mode
When changing the automatic mode on/off,
the message will be shown on the multi-
information display and the buzzer sounds.
■ Parking the vehicle
P.156
■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven
with the parking brake engaged. “Release
Parking Brake” is displayed on the multi-
D
A
B
C
D
186
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
information display.
■ Warning messages and buzzers
Warning messages and buzzers are used to
indicate a system malfunction or to inform
the driver of the need for caution. If a warn-
ing message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display, read the message and follow
the instructions.
■ If the brake system warning light comes
on
P.389
■ Usage in winter time
P.280
WARNING
■ When parking the vehicle
Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone.
The parking brake may be released unin-
tentionally and there is the danger of the
vehicle moving that may lead to an acci-
dent resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Parking brake switch
Do not set any objects near the parking
brake switch. Objects may interfere with
the switch and may lead the parking
brake to unexpectedly operate.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
Before you leave the vehicle, shift the
shift lever to P, set the parking brake and
make sure that the vehicle does not
move.
■ When the system malfunctions
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and
check the warning messages.
■ When the parking brake cannot be
released due to a malfunction
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking
performance and increase brake wear.
Have the vehicle inspected by contact
your Lexus dealer immediately if this
occurs.
187
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
Turns the brake hold system on
The brake hold standby indicator
(green) comes on. While the system is
holding the brake, the brake hold operated
indicator (yellow) comes on.
■ Brake hold system operating conditions
The brake hold system cannot be turned on
in the following conditions:
● The driver’s door is not closed.
● The driver is not wearing the seat belt.
If any of the conditions above are detected
when the brake hold system is enabled, the
system will turn off and the brake hold
standby indicator light will go off. In addi-
tion, if any of the conditions are detected
while the system is holding the brake, a
warning buzzer will sound and a message
will be shown on the multi-information dis-
play. The parking brake will then be set
automatically.
■ Brake hold function
● If the brake pedal is left released for a
period of about 3 minutes after the sys-
tem has started holding the brake, the
parking brake will be set automatically. In
this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a
message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display.
● To turn the system off while the system is
holding the brake, firmly depress the
brake pedal and press the button again.
● The brake hold function may not hold the
vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep
incline. In this situation, it may be neces-
sary for the driver to apply the brakes. A
warning buzzer will sound and the multi-
information display will inform the driver
of this situation. If a warning message is
shown on the multi-information display,
read the message and follow the instruc-
tions.
■ When the parking brake is set automati-
cally while the system is holding the
brakes
With the brake pedal depressed, release
the parking brake by operating the parking
brake switch, making sure that the parking
brake indicator light goes off. (P.184)
■ When an inspection at your Lexus
dealer is necessary
When the brake hold standby indicator
(green) does not illuminate even when the
brake hold switch is pressed with the brake
hold system operating conditions met, the
system may be malfunctioning. Have the
vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer.
■ If “Brake Hold Fault Depress Brake to
Deactivate Visit Your Dealer” is dis-
played on the multi-information display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Warning messages and buzzers
Warning messages and buzzers are used to
indicate a system malfunction or to inform
the driver of the need for caution. If a warn-
ing message is shown on the multi-informa-
Brake Hold
The brake hold system keeps the
brake applied when the shift lever is
in D, S or N with the system on and
the brake pedal has been
depressed to stop the vehicle. The
system releases the brake when the
accelerator pedal is depressed with
the shift lever in D or S to allow
smooth start off.
Enabling the system
A
B
188
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
tion display, read the message and follow
the instructions.
■ If the brake hold operated indicator
flashes
P.392
*
: If equipped
1 Louder
2 Lower
The indicator comes on when the ASC
system is on.
When the dial is turned to the lowest
volume, the ASC system will be turned
off and the indicator will go off.
■ Operating conditions
When the driving mode select switch is not
WARNING
■ When the vehicle is on a steep incline
When using the brake hold system on a
steep incline, exercise caution. The brake
hold function may not hold the vehicle in
such a situation.
■ When stopped on a slippery road
The system cannot stop the vehicle when
the gripping ability of the tires has been
exceeded. Do not use the system when
stopped on a slippery road.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
The brake hold system is not designed
for use when parking the vehicle for a
long period of time. Turning the power
switch off while the system is holding the
brake may release the brake, which
would cause the vehicle to move. When
operating the power switch, depress the
brake pedal, shift the shift lever to P and
set the parking brake.
ASC (Active Sound Con-
trol)
*
The ASC system is an electronic
sound system that generates
engine sound, conveying the
kinetic situations of the vehicle’s
acceleration and deceleration to
the driver through the speakers
inside the instrument panel.
The vehicle’s response to the
driver’s acceleration behavior and
shift operations are also conveyed
in sound.
When Sport mode is selected, the
sound conveyed to the driver will be
louder.
Controlling volume
189
4-2. Driving procedures
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
in Eco mode or EV drive mode.
■ Temporary cancelation of the ASC sys-
tem functions
The ASC system may be temporarily can-
celed depending on the driving conditions,
such as when the tires slip due to sudden
acceleration.
190
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4-3.Operati ng the lights and w ipers
Operating the switch turns on
the lights as follows:
Type A
1 The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate, instrument panel
lights, and daytime running lights
(P.191) turn on.
2 The headlights and all the
lights listed above (except daytime
running lights) turn on.
3 The headlights, daytime
running lights (P.191) and all the
lights listed above turn on and off
automatically.
4 The daytime running lights
turn off.
Type B
1 The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate, instrument panel
lights, and daytime running lights
(P.191) turn on.
2 The headlights and all the
lights listed above (except daytime
running lights) turn on.
3 The headlights, daytime
running lights (P.191) and all the
lights listed above turn on and off
automatically (when the power
switch is in ON mode).
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated
manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
191
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ AUTO mode can be used when
The power switch is in ON mode.
■ Daytime running light system
● The daytime running lights illuminate
using the same lights as the parking lights
and illuminate brighter than the parking
lights.
● To make your vehicle more visible to
other drivers during daytime driving, the
daytime running lights turn on automati-
cally when all of the following conditions
are met. (The daytime running lights are
not designed for use at night.)
• The hybrid system is started
• The parking brake is released
• The headlight switch is in the or
*
position
*
: When the surroundings are bright
The daytime running lights remain on after
they illuminate, even if the parking brake is
set again.
● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights
can be turned off by operating the switch.
● Compared to turning on the headlights,
the daytime running light system offers
greater durability and consumes less
electricity, so it can help improve fuel
● If a turn signal light is in use, the daytime
running light, on the same side, is turned
off. For emergency flashers, both are
turned off.
■ Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the wind-
shield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detect-
ing the level of ambient light and may cause
the automatic headlight system to malfunc-
tion.
■ Automatic light off system
● When the headlights come on: The head-
lights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds
after a door is opened and closed if the
power switch is turned to ACCESSORY
mode or turned off. (The lights turn off
immediately if on the key is
pressed after all the doors are locked.)
● When only the tail lights come on: The tail
lights turn off automatically if the power
switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode
or turned off and the driver’s door is
opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the power
switch to ON mode, or turn the light switch
off once and then back to or
.
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the power switch is
turned off or turned to ACCESSORY
mode and the driver’s door is opened while
the lights are turned on.
■ Automatic headlight leveling system (if
equipped)
The level of the headlights is automatically
adjusted according to the number of pas-
sengers and the loading condition of the
vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not
interfere with other road users.
■ 12-volt battery-saving function
In order to prevent the 12-volt battery of the
vehicle from discharging, if the headlights
and/or tail lights are on when the power
switch is turned off the 12-volt battery sav-
ing function will operate and automatically
turn off all the lights after approximately 20
minutes. When the power switch is turned
to ON mode, the 12-volt battery-saving
192
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
function will be disabled.
When any of the following are performed,
the 12-volt battery-saving function is can-
celed once and then reactivated. All the
lights will turn off automatically 20 minutes
after the 12-volt battery-saving function has
been reactivated:
● When the headlight switch is operated
● When a door is opened or closed
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be
changed. (Customizable features:
P.443)
1 With the headlights on, push the
lever away from you to turn on the
high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
2 Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high beams
once.
You can flash the high beams with the
headlights on or off.
When the following conditions are met,
while the headlights (low beam) are on,
the cornering lights will additionally
turn on and light up the direction of
movement for the vehicle. This is to
ensure excellent visibility when either
driving at intersections or parking at
night.
The steering wheel is operated
The turn signal lever is operated
The shift lever is in R
■ Cornering light control
● However, when vehicle speed is 25 mph
(40 km/h) or above, the cornering lights
do not turn on.
● After the lights remain illuminated for 30
minutes, they automatically turn off.
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)
secures excellent visibility at intersec-
tions and on curves by automatically
adjusting the direction of the light axis
of the headlights according to vehicle
speed and the degree of the tire’s angle
as controlled by steering input.
AFS operates at speeds of 6 mph (10
km/h) or higher.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than
necessary when the hybrid system is off.
Turning on the high beam head-
lights
Cornering lights (if equipped)
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System) (if equipped)
193
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
1 Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
2 Turn the headlight switch to the
or position.
The Automatic High Beam indicator will
come on when the system is operating.
■ Operating conditions
The power switch is in ON mode.
■ High beam automatic turning on or off
conditions
When all of the following conditions are ful-
filled, high beam will be automatically
turned on:
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 21
mph (34 km/h).
● The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
● There are no oncoming or preceding
vehicles with headlights or tail lights
turned on.
● There are few streetlights on the road
ahead.
If any of the following conditions are ful-
filled, high beam will be automatically
turned off:
● Vehicle speed drops below approxi-
mately 17 mph (27 km/h).
● The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
● Oncoming or preceding vehicles have
headlights or tail lights turned on.
● There are many streetlights on the road
ahead.
■ Camera sensor detection information
● High beam may not be automatically
turned off in the following situations:
• When oncoming vehicles suddenly
appear from a curve
• When the vehicle is cut in front of by
another vehicle
• When oncoming or preceding vehicles
are hidden from sight due to repeated
Automatic High Beam
The Automatic High Beam uses an
in-vehicle camera sensor to assess
the brightness of streetlights, the
lights of oncoming and preceding
vehicles, etc., and automatically
turns high beam on or off as neces-
sary.
WARNING
■ Limitations of the Automatic High
Beam
Do not rely on the Automatic High
Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings and turning
high beam on or off manually if neces-
sary.
Activating the Automatic High
Beam system
194
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
curves, road dividers or roadside trees
● High beam may be turned off if an
oncoming vehicle that is using fog lights
without using the headlights is detected.
● House lights, street lights, red traffic sig-
nals, and illuminated billboards or signs
may cause the high beam to turn off.
● The following factors may affect the
amount of time taken to turn high beam
on or off:
• The brightness of headlights, fog lights,
and tail lights of oncoming and preceding
vehicles
• The movement and direction of oncom-
ing and preceding vehicles
• When a oncoming or preceding vehicle
only has operational lights on one side
• When a oncoming or preceding vehicle
is a two-wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradient,
curve, condition of the road surface, etc.)
• The number of passengers and amount of
luggage
● High beam may be turned on or off when
unexpected by the driver.
● In the situations below, the system may
not be able to correctly detect the sur-
rounding brightness levels, and may flash
or expose nearby pedestrians to the high
beam. Therefore, you should consider
turning the high beams on or off manually
rather than relying on the Automatic
High Beam system.
• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sand-
storms, etc.)
• The windshield is obscured by fog, mist,
ice, dirt, etc.
• The windshield is cracked or damaged.
• The camera sensor is deformed or dirty.
• The camera sensor temperature is
extremely high.
• Surrounding brightness levels are equal
to those of headlights, tail lights or fog
lights.
• Vehicles ahead have headlights or tail
lights that are either switched off, dirty,
are changing color, or are not aimed
properly.
• When driving through an area of inter-
mittently changing brightness and dark-
ness.
• When frequently and repeatedly driving
ascending/descending roads, or roads
with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces
(such as stone-paved roads, gravel
tracks, etc.).
• When frequently and repeatedly taking
curves or driving on a winding road.
• There is a highly reflective object ahead
of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror.
• The back of a vehicle ahead is highly
reflective, such as a container on a truck.
• The vehicle’s headlights are damaged or
dirty.
• The vehicle is listing or tilting, due to a flat
tire, a trailer being towed, etc.
• The driver believes that the high beam
may be causing problems or distress to
other drivers or pedestrians nearby.
NOTICE
■ Notes when using the Automatic
High Beam system
Observe the following to ensure that the
Automatic High Beam functions cor-
rectly.
● Do not touch the camera sensor.
● Do not subject the camera sensor to a
strong impact.
● Do not disassemble the camera sen-
sor.
● Do not spill liquids onto the camera
sensor.
● Do not apply window tinting or stickers
to the camera sensor or the area of
windshield near the camera sensor.
195
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ Switching to low beam
Press the Automatic High Beam
switch.
The Automatic High Beam indicator will
turn off.
Press the switch to activate the Automatic
High Beam system again.
■ Switching to high beam
Push the lever away from you.
The Automatic High Beam indicator will
turn off and the high beam indicator will
turn on.
Pull the lever to its original position to acti-
vate the Automatic High Beam system
again.
■ Switching to the high beams temporarily
The high beams are turned on while the
lever is pulled toward you. Returning the
lever to its original position turns the low
beams on. A while after the low beams are
turned on, the Automatic High Beam sys-
tem will be activated again.
NOTICE
● Do not place items on the dashboard.
There is a possibility that the camera
sensor will mistake items reflected in
the windshield for streetlights, the
headlights of other vehicles, etc.
● Do not install a parking tag or any
other accessories near or around the
camera sensor.
● Do not overload the vehicle.
● Do not modify the vehicle.
● Do not replace windshield with non-
genuine windshield.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
Turning the high beams on/off
manually
196
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1 Turns the fog lights off
2 Turns the fog lights on
■ Fog lights can be used when
The headlights are on in low beam.
Operating the lever operates
the wipers or washer as follows.
■ Intermittent windshield wipers with
interval adjuster (if equipped)
Type A
1 Off
Fog light switch
When in difficult driving conditions,
such as in rain and fog, turn on the
front fog lights to secure front visi-
bility and turn on the rear fog lights
to notify following vehicles the exis-
tence of your vehicle.
Operating instructions
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than
necessary when the hybrid system is off.
Windshield wipers and
washer
Operating the lever can switch
between automatic operation and
manual operation, or can use the
washer.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may dam-
age the windshield.
Operating the wiper lever
197
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
2 Intermittent operation
3 Low speed operation
4 High speed operation
5 Temporary operation
Wiper intervals can be adjusted when
intermittent operation is selected.
6 Increases the intermittent wind-
shield wiper frequency
7 Decreases the intermittent wind-
shield wiper frequency
8 Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
Pulling the lever operates the wipers and
washer.
The wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer squirts.
Vehicles with headlight cleaners:
When the headlights are on and the lever is
pulled and held, the headlight cleaners will
operate once. After this, the headlight
cleaners will operate every 5th time the
lever is pulled.
Type B
1 Off
2 Intermittent operation
3 Low speed operation
4 High speed operation
5 Temporary operation
Wiper intervals can be adjusted when
intermittent operation is selected.
198
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6 Increases the intermittent wind-
shield wiper frequency
7 Decreases the intermittent wind-
shield wiper frequency
8 Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
Pulling the lever operates the wipers and
washer.
The wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer squirts.
Vehicles with headlight cleaners:
When the headlights are on and the lever is
pulled and held, the headlight cleaners will
operate once. After this, the headlight
cleaners will operate every 5th time the
lever is pulled.
■ Rain-sensing windshield wipers (if
equipped)
Type A
1 Off
2 Rain-sensing operation
3 Low speed operation
4 High speed operation
5 Temporary operation
When is selected, the wipers
will operate automatically when the
sensor detects falling rain. The system
automatically adjusts wiper timing in
accordance with rain volume and vehi-
cle speed.
The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted
when is selected.
199
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
6 Increases the sensitivity
7 Decreases the sensitivity
8 Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
Pulling the lever operates the wipers and
washer.
The wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer squirts.
Vehicles with headlight cleaners:
When the headlights are on and the lever is
pulled and held, the headlight cleaners will
operate once. After this, the headlight
cleaners will operate every 5th time the
lever is pulled.
Type B
1 Off
2 Rain-sensing operation
3 Low speed operation
4 High speed operation
5 Temporary operation
When is selected, the wipers
will operate automatically when the
sensor detects falling rain. The system
automatically adjusts wiper timing in
accordance with rain volume and vehi-
cle speed.
The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted
when is selected.
200
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6 Increases the sensitivity
7 Decreases the sensitivity
8 Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
Pulling the lever operates the wipers and
washer.
The wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer squirts.
Vehicles with headlight cleaners:
When the headlights are on and the lever is
pulled and held, the headlight cleaners will
operate once. After this, the headlight
cleaners will operate every 5th time the
lever is pulled.
■ The windshield wipers and washer can
be operated when
The power switch is in ON mode.
■ Dripping prevention wiper sweep (vehi-
cles with rain-sensing windshield wip-
ers)
After washing and wiping operation several
times, the wipers operate one more time
after a short delay to prevent dripping.
However, this function will not operate while
driving.
■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper opera-
tion (vehicles with rain-sensing wind-
shield wipers)
Vehicle speed affects the Intermittent wiper
interval.
■ Raindrop sensor (vehicles with rain-
sensing windshield wipers)
● The raindrop sensor judges the amount
of raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not
operate properly when sunlight from the
rising or setting of the sun intermittently
strikes the windshield, or if bugs, etc. are
present on the windshield.
● If the wiper switch is turned to the
position while the power switch is in ON
mode, the wipers will operate once to
show that AUTO mode is activated.
● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor
is 194°F (90°C) or higher, or 5°F (-15°C)
or lower, automatic operation may not
occur. In this case, operate the wipers in
any mode other than AUTO mode.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not
blocked, if there is washer fluid in the
washer fluid tank.
201
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
Operating the switch operates
the rear wiper as follows:
Type A
1 Off
2 Intermittent operation
3 Normal operation
WARNING
■ Caution regarding the use of wind-
shield wipers in AUTO mode (vehi-
cles with rain-sensing windshield
wipers)
The windshield wipers may operate
unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or
the windshield is subject to vibration in
AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers,
etc. do not become caught in the wind-
shield wipers.
■ Caution regarding the use of washer
fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer
fluid until the windshield becomes warm.
The fluid may freeze on the windshield
and cause low visibility. This may lead to
an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as
the washer fluid pump may overheat.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the wipers on longer than
necessary when the hybrid system is off.
Rear window wiper and
washer
NOTICE
■ When the rear window is dry
Do not use the wiper, as it may damage
the rear window.
Operating the wiper lever
202
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4 Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
Pushing the lever operates the wiper and
washer.
The wiper will automatically operate a cou-
ple of times after the washer squirts.
Type B
1 Off
2 Intermittent operation
3 Normal operation
4 Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
Pushing the lever operates the wiper and
washer.
The wiper will automatically operate a cou-
ple of times after the washer squirts.
■ The rear window wiper and washer can
be operated when
The power switch is in ON mode.
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as
the washer fluid pump may overheat.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the wiper on longer than
necessary when the hybrid system is off.
203
4-4. Refueling
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
4-4.Refueling
Turn the power switch off and
ensure that all the doors and win-
dows are closed.
Confirm the type of fuel.
■ Fuel types
P.432
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehi-
cle has a fuel tank opening that only accom-
modates the special nozzle on unleaded
fuel pumps.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp illumi-
nates
The malfunction indicator lamp may illumi-
nate erroneously if refueling is performed
repeatedly when the fuel tank is nearly full.
1 With all doors unlocked, press the
center of the rear edge of the fuel
filler door.
Push inward and take your hand away to
slightly open the fuel filler door. Then open
Opening the fuel tank cap
Before refueling the vehicle
WARNING
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while
refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before
opening the fuel door, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge
any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refu-
eling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors
to ignite while refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank
cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard
when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard
before fully removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may spray
out of the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not dis-
charged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel
tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are
harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehi-
cle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite
and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch
any person or object that is statically
charged. This may cause static elec-
tricity to build up, resulting in a possible
ignition hazard.
■ When refueling
Observe the following precautions to
prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel
tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the
fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel noz-
zle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the fuel tank.
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such
as causing the emission control system to
operate abnormally, damaging fuel sys-
tem components or the vehicle’s painted
surface.
Opening the fuel tank cap
204
4-4. Refueling
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
the door fully by hand.
2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open and put it into the holder on
the fuel filler door.
■ When the fuel filler door cannot be
opened
P.411
1 After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once the
cap is released, it will turn slightly in
the opposite direction.
2 Close the fuel filler door, and press
the center of the rear edge of the
fuel filler door.
When you lock the doors, the fuel filler
door will lock also.
■ Fuel filler door lock condition
The fuel filler door may not be locked even
when the vehicle’s doors are locked in the
following conditions:
● When operating the door lock button
inside the vehicle
● When the automatic door locking system
is operated
● When the fuel filler door is closed after
the vehicle’s doors are locked
■ Warning buzzer for loose fuel cap
When the power switch is in ON mode and
the cap is loose, the buzzer sounds and a
message is displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display.
Closing the fuel tank cap
WARNING
■ When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus
fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Doing so may cause a fire or other inci-
dent which may result in death or serious
injury.
205
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
4-5.Using the dr iving support systems
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)
P.211
■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if
equipped)
P.218
■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control) (if equipped)
P.227
■ AHB (Automatic High Beam)
P.193
■ RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if
equipped)
P.235
■ Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range
P.237
Two types of sensors, located behind
the front grille and windshield, detect
information necessary to operate the
drive assist systems.
Radar sensor
Front camera
Lexus Safety System + 2.0
The Lexus Safety System + 2.0 con-
sists of the following drive assist sys-
tems and contributes to a safe and
comfortable driving experience:
Driving assist system
WARNING
■ Lexus Safety System + 2.0
The Lexus Safety System + 2.0 is
designed to operate under the assump-
tion that the driver will drive safely, and is
designed to help reduce the impact to
the occupants and the vehicle in the case
of a collision or assist the driver in normal
driving conditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of recog-
nition accuracy and control performance
that this system can provide, do not
overly rely on this system. The driver is
always responsible for paying attention
to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving
safely.
Sensors
WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the radar sen-
sor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not
operate properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
A
B
206
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
WARNING
● Keep the radar sensor and the radar
sensor cover clean at all times.
Radar sensor
Radar sensor cover
If the front of the radar sensor or the front
or back of the radar sensor cover is dirty
or covered with water droplets, snow,
etc., clean it.
Clean the radar sensor and radar sensor
cover with a soft cloth to avoid damaging
them.
● Do not attach accessories, stickers
(including transparent stickers) or
other items to the radar sensor, radar
sensor cover or surrounding area.
● Do not subject the radar sensor or its
surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the radar sensor, front radar sensor,
or front bumper has been subjected to
a strong impact, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
● Do not modify or paint the radar sen-
sor or radar sensor cover.
● In the following cases, the radar sensor
must be recalibrated. Contact your
Lexus dealer for details.
• When the radar sensor or front grille
are removed and installed, or replaced
• When the front bumper is replaced
A
B
■ To avoid malfunction of the front cam-
era
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the front camera may not
operate properly, possibly leading to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
● Keep the windshield clean at all times.
• If the windshield is dirty or covered
with an oily film, water droplets, snow,
etc., clean the windshield.
• If a glass coating agent is applied to the
windshield, it will still be necessary to
use the windshield wipers to remove
water droplets, etc. from the area of
the windshield in front of the front
camera.
• If the inner side of the windshield
where the front camera is installed is
dirty, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not attach objects, such as stickers,
transparent stickers, etc., to the outer
side of the windshield in front of the
front camera (shaded area in the illus-
tration).
From the top of the windshield to
approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below
the bottom of the front camera
Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm)
(Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm] to the
right and left from the center of the
front camera)
A
B
207
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
WARNING
● If the part of the windshield in front of
the front camera is fogged up or cov-
ered with condensation or ice, use the
windshield defogger to remove the
fog, condensation or ice. (P.292)
● If water droplets cannot be properly
removed from the area of the wind-
shield in front of the front camera by
the windshield wipers, replace the
wiper insert or wiper blade.
● Do not attach window tint to the wind-
shield.
● Replace the windshield if it is damaged
or cracked.
After replacing the windshield, the
front camera must be recalibrated.
Contact your Lexus dealer for details.
● Do not allow liquids to contact the
front camera.
● Do not allow bright lights to shine into
the front camera.
● Do not dirty or damage the front cam-
era.
When cleaning the inside of the wind-
shield, do not allow glass cleaner to
contact the lens of the front camera.
Also, do not touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact
your Lexus dealer.
● Do not subject the front camera to a
strong impact.
● Do not change the installation position
or direction of the front camera or
remove it.
● Do not disassemble the front camera.
● Do not modify any components of the
vehicle around the front camera
(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.
● Do not attach any accessories to the
hood, front grille or front bumper that
may obstruct the front camera. Con-
tact your Lexus dealer for details.
● If a surfboard or other long object is to
be mounted on the roof, make sure
that it will not obstruct the front cam-
era.
● Do not modify the headlights or other
lights.
208
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
For vehicles sold in Canada
209
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ If a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display
A system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.
● In the following situations, perform the actions specified in the table. When the normal
operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear and the system will
become operational.
If the message does not disappear, contact your Lexus dealer.
Situation Actions
When the area around a sensor is covered
with dirt, moisture (fogged up, covered with
condensation, ice, etc.), or other foreign
matter
To clean the part of the windshield in front of
the front camera, use the windshield wipers
or the windshield defogger of the air condi-
tioning system (P.292).
210
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
● In the following situations, if the situation has changed (or the vehicle has been driven for
some time) and the normal operating conditions are detected, the message will disappear
and the system will become operational.
If the message does not disappear, contact your Lexus dealer.
• When the temperature around the radar sensor is outside of the operational range, such
as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an extremely cold environment
• When the front camera cannot detect objects in front of the vehicle, such as when driving
in the dark, snow, or fog, or when bright lights are shining into the front camera
When the temperature around the front
camera is outside of the operational range,
such as when the vehicle is in the sun or in an
extremely cold environment
If the front camera is hot, such as after the
vehicle had been parked in the sun, use the
air conditioning system to decrease the tem-
perature around the front camera.
If a sunshade was used when the vehicle was
parked, depending on its type, the sunlight
reflected from the surface of the sunshade
may cause the temperature of the front cam-
era to become excessively high.
If the front camera is cold, such after the
vehicle is parked in an extremely cold envi-
ronment, use the air conditioning system to
increase the temperature around the front
camera.
The area in front of the front camera is
obstructed, such as when the hood is open
or a sticker is attached to the part of the
windshield in front of the front camera.
Close the hood, remove the sticker, etc. to
clear the obstruction.
Situation Actions
211
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
The system can detect the following:
Vehicles
Bicyclists
Pedestrians
■ Pre-collision warning
When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high, a
buzzer will sound and a warning mes-
sage will be displayed on the multi-
information display to urge the driver
to take evasive action.
■ Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the system applies greater braking
force in relation to how strongly the
brake pedal is depressed.
■ Pre-collision braking
If the system determines that the possi-
bility of a frontal collision is extremely
high, the brakes are automatically
applied to help avoid the collision or
reduce the impact of the collision.
■ Suspension control (if equipped)
When the system determines that the
possibility of a frontal collision is high,
the Adaptive Variable Suspension Sys-
tem (P.273) will control the damping
force of the shock absorbers to help
maintain an appropriate vehicle pos-
ture.
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
The pre-collision system uses a
radar sensor and front camera to
detect objects (P.211) in front of
the vehicle. When the system
determines that the possibility of a
frontal collision with an object is
high, a warning operates to urge
the driver to take evasive action
and the potential brake pressure is
increased to help the driver avoid
the collision. If the system deter-
mines that the possibility of a frontal
collision with an object is extremely
high, the brakes are automatically
applied to help avoid the collision
or help reduce the impact of the
collision.
The pre-collision system can be dis-
abled/enabled and the warning tim-
ing can be changed. (P.213)
Detectable objects
System functions
212
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
WARNING
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
● The driver is solely responsible for safe
driving. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision system
instead of normal braking operations
under any circumstances. This system
will not prevent collisions or lessen col-
lision damage or injury in every situa-
tion. Do not overly rely on this system.
Failure to do so may lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious
injury.
● Although this system is designed to
help avoid a collision or help reduce
the impact of the collision, its effective-
ness may change according to various
conditions, therefore the system may
not always be able to achieve the same
level of performance.
Read the following conditions care-
fully. Do not overly rely on this system
and always drive carefully.
• Conditions under which the system
may operate even if there is no possi-
bility of a collision: P.215
• Conditions under which the system
may not operate properly: P.216
● Do not attempt to test the operation of
the pre-collision system yourself.
Depending on the objects used for
testing (dummies, cardboard objects
imitating detectable objects, etc.), the
system may not operate properly, pos-
sibly leading to an accident.
■ Pre-collision braking
● When the pre-collision braking func-
tion is operating, a large amount of
braking force will be applied.
● If the vehicle is stopped by the opera-
tion of the pre-collision braking func-
tion, the pre-collision braking function
operation will be canceled after
approximately 2 seconds. Depress the
brake pedal as necessary.
● The pre-collision braking function may
not operate if certain operations are
performed by the driver. If the acceler-
ator pedal is being depressed strongly
or the steering wheel is being turned,
the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and pos-
sibly prevent the pre-collision braking
function from operating.
● In some situations, while the pre-colli-
sion braking function is operating,
operation of the function may be can-
celed if the accelerator pedal is
depressed strongly or the steering
wheel is turned and the system deter-
mines that the driver is taking evasive
action.
● If the brake pedal is being depressed,
the system may determine that the
driver is taking evasive action and pos-
sibly delay the operation timing of the
pre-collision braking function.
■ When to disable the pre-collision sys-
tem
In the following situations, disable the
system, as it may not operate properly,
possibly leading to an accident resulting
in death or serious injury:
● When the vehicle is being towed
● When your vehicle is towing another
vehicle
● When transporting the vehicle via
truck, boat, train or similar means of
transportation
● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with
the hybrid system on and the tires are
allowed to rotate freely
● When inspecting the vehicle using a
drum tester such as a chassis dyna-
mometer or speedometer tester, or
when using an on vehicle wheel bal-
ancer
● When a strong impact is applied to the
front bumper or front grille, due to an
accident or other reasons
213
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ Enabling/disabling the pre-colli-
sion system
The pre-collision system can be
enabled/disabled on (P.92) of
the multi-information display.
The system is automatically enabled each
time the power switch is turned to ON
mode.
If the system is disabled, the PCS warn-
ing light will turn on and a message will
be displayed on the multi-information
display.
“Pre-Collision System Off”
■ Changing the pre-collision warn-
ing timing
The pre-collision warning timing can
be changed on (P.92) of the
multi-information display.
The warning timing setting is retained
when the power switch is turned off. How-
ever, if the pre-collision system is disabled
and re-enabled, the operation timing will
return to the default setting (middle).
1 Early
2 Middle
This is the default setting.
3 Late
WARNING
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a sta-
ble manner, such as when the vehicle
has been in an accident or is malfunc-
tioning
● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty
manner or off-road
● When the tires are not properly
inflated
● When the tires are very worn
● When tires of a size other than speci-
fied are installed
● When tire chains are installed
● When a compact spare tire or an
emergency tire puncture repair kit is
used
● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may
obstruct the radar sensor or front cam-
era is temporarily installed to the vehi-
cle
Changing settings of the pre-col-
lision system
A
214
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Operational conditions
The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal
collision with a detected object is high.
Each function is operational at the following speed
● Pre-collision warning
● Pre-collision brake assist
● Pre-collision braking
The system may not operate in the following situations:
● If a 12-volt battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle
has not been driven for a certain amount of time
● If the shift lever is in R
● When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning function will
be operational)
■ Object detection function
The system detects objects based on their
size, profile, motion, etc. However, an object
may not be detected depending on the sur-
rounding brightness and the motion, pos-
ture, and angle of the detected object,
preventing the system from operating prop-
erly. (P.216) The illustration shows an
image of detectable objects.
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
Relative speed between your
vehicle and object
Vehicles
Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to
180 km/h)
Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to
180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestrians
Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to
80 km/h)
Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to
80 km/h)
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
Relative speed between your
vehicle and object
Vehicles
Approx. 20 to 110 mph (30
to 180 km/h)
Approx. 20 to 110 mph (30
to 180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestrians
Approx. 20 to 50 mph (30
to 80 km/h)
Approx. 20 to 50 mph (30
to 80 km/h)
Detectable objects Vehicle speed
Relative speed between your
vehicle and object
Vehicles
Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to
180 km/h)
Approx. 7 to 110 mph (10 to
180 km/h)
Bicyclists and pedestrians
Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to
80 km/h)
Approx. 7 to 50 mph (10 to
80 km/h)
215
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ Cancelation of the pre-collision braking
If either of the following occur while the
pre-collision braking function is operating, it
will be canceled:
● The accelerator pedal is depressed
strongly.
● The steering wheel is turned sharply or
abruptly.
■ Conditions under which the system may
operate even if there is no possibility of a
collision
● In some situations such as the following,
the system may determine that there is a
possibility of a frontal collision and oper-
ate.
• When passing a detectable object, etc.
• When changing lanes while overtaking a
detectable object, etc.
• When approaching a detectable object
in an adjacent lane or on the roadside,
such as when changing the course of
travel or driving on a winding road
• When rapidly closing on a detectable
object, etc.
• When approaching objects on the road-
side, such as detectable objects, guard-
rails, utility poles, trees, or walls
• When there is a detectable object or
other object by the roadside at the
entrance of a curve
• When there are patterns or paint in front
of your vehicle that may be mistaken for a
detectable object
• When the front of your vehicle is hit by
water, snow, dust, etc.
• When overtaking a detectable object
that is changing lanes or making a
right/left turn
• When passing a detectable object in an
oncoming lane that is stopped to make a
right/left turn
• When a detectable object approaches
very close and then stops before entering
the path of your vehicle
• If the front of your vehicle is raised or low-
ered, such as when on an uneven or
undulating road surface
• When driving on a road surrounded by a
structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron
bridge
• When there is a metal object (manhole
cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protru-
sion in front of your vehicle
• When passing under an object (road
sign, billboard, etc.)
216
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
• When approaching an electric toll gate
barrier, parking area barrier, or other
barrier that opens and closes
• When using an automatic car wash
• When driving through or under objects
that may contact your vehicle, such as
thick grass, tree branches, or a banner
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When driving near an object that reflects
radio waves, such as a large truck or
guardrail
• When driving near a TV tower, broad-
casting station, electric power plant, or
other location where strong radio waves
or electrical noise may be present
■ Situations in which the system may not
operate properly
● In some situations such as the following,
an object may not be detected by the
radar sensor and front camera, prevent-
ing the system from operating properly:
• When a detectable object is approaching
your vehicle
• When your vehicle or a detectable object
is wobbling
• If a detectable object makes an abrupt
maneuver (such as sudden swerving,
acceleration or deceleration)
• When your vehicle approaches a detect-
able object rapidly
• When a detectable object is not directly
in front of your vehicle
• When a detectable object is near a wall,
fence, guardrail, manhole cover, vehicle,
steel plate on the road, etc.
• When a detectable object is under a
structure
• When part of a detectable object is hid-
den by an object, such as large baggage,
an umbrella, or guardrail
• When multiple detectable objects are
close together
• If the sun or other light is shining directly
on a detectable object
• When a detectable object is a shade of
white and looks extremely bright
• When a detectable object appears to be
nearly the same color or brightness as its
surroundings
• If a detectable object cuts or suddenly
emerges in front of your vehicle
• When the front of your vehicle is hit by
water, snow, dust, etc.
• When a very bright light ahead, such as
the sun or the headlights of oncoming
traffic, shines directly into the front cam-
era
• When approaching the side or front of a
vehicle ahead
• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle
• If a vehicle ahead is narrow, such as a per-
sonal mobility vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear
end, such as an unloaded truck
• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end,
such as a low bed trailer
• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high
217
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
ground clearance
• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which
protrudes past its rear bumper
• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped,
such as a tractor or side car
• If a vehicle ahead is a child sized bicycle,
a bicycle that is carrying a large load, a
bicycle ridden by more than one person,
or a uniquely shaped bicycle (bicycle with
a child seat, tandem bicycle, etc.)
• If a pedestrian/or the riding height of a
bicyclist ahead is shorter than approxi-
mately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approxi-
mately 6.5 ft. (2 m)
• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is wearing over-
sized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt,
etc.), making their silhouette obscure
• If a pedestrian is bending forward or
squatting or bicyclist is bending forward
• If a pedestrian/bicyclist is moving fast
• If a pedestrian is pushing a stroller, wheel-
chair, bicycle or other vehicle
• When driving in inclement weather such
as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When the surrounding area is dim, such
as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in
a tunnel, making a detectable object
appear to be nearly the same color as its
surroundings
• When driving in a place where the sur-
rounding brightness changes suddenly,
such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
• After the hybrid system has started the
vehicle has not been driven for a certain
amount of time
• While making a left/right turn and for a
few seconds after making a left/right turn
• While driving on a curve and for a few
seconds after driving on a curve
• If your vehicle is skidding
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-
ered
• If the wheels are misaligned
• If a wiper blade is blocking the front cam-
era
• The vehicle is being driven at extremely
high speeds
• When driving on a hill
• If the radar sensor or front camera is mis-
aligned
● In some situations such as the following,
sufficient braking force may not be
obtained, preventing the system from
performing properly:
• If the braking functions cannot operate to
their full extent, such as when the brake
parts are extremely cold, extremely hot,
or wet
• If the vehicle is not properly maintained
(brakes or tires are excessively worn,
improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven on a
gravel road or other slippery surface
■ If VSC is disabled
● If VSC is disabled (P.274), the pre-col-
lision brake assist and pre-collision brak-
ing functions are also disabled.
● The PCS warning light will turn on and
“VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake
System Unavailable” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
218
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
*
:If equipped
When driving on highways and free-
ways with white (yellow) lane lines, this
function alerts the driver when the
vehicle might depart from its lane or
course
*
and provides assistance by
operating the steering wheel to keep
the vehicle in its lane or course
*
. Fur-
thermore, the system provides steering
assistance when dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range is operat-
ing to keep the vehicle in its lane.
The LTA system recognizes white (yel-
low) lane lines or a course
*
using the
front camera. Additionally, it detects
preceding vehicles using the front
camera and radar.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
*
Summary of functions
WARNING
■ Before using LTA system
● Do not rely solely upon the LTA sys-
tem. The LTA system does not auto-
matically drive the vehicle or reduce
the amount of attention that must be
paid to the area in front of the vehicle.
The driver must always assume full
responsibility for driving safely by pay-
ing careful attention to the surround-
ing conditions and operating the
steering wheel to correct the path of
the vehicle. Also, the driver must take
adequate breaks when fatigued, such
as from driving for a long period of
time.
● Failure to perform appropriate driving
operations and pay careful attention
may lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● When not using the LTA system, use
the LTA switch to turn the system off.
■ Situations unsuitable for LTA system
In the following situations, use the LTA
switch to turn the system off. Failure to do
so may lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Vehicle is driven on a road surface
which is slippery due to rainy weather,
fallen snow, freezing, etc.
● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered
road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see
due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or
restricted lane due to construction
work.
● Vehicle is driven in a construction
zone.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are
equipped.
● When the tires have been excessively
worn, or when the tire inflation pres-
sure is low.
219
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
WARNING
● When tires of a size other than speci-
fied are installed.
● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other
than that highways and freeways.
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer
or during emergency towing.
■ Preventing LTA system malfunctions
and operations performed by mistake
● Do not modify the headlights or place
stickers, etc. on the surface of the
lights.
● Do not modify the suspension etc. If
the suspension etc. needs to be
replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not install or place anything on the
hood or grille. Also, do not install a
grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar,
etc.).
● If your windshield needs repairs, con-
tact your Lexus dealer.
■ Conditions in which functions may
not operate properly
In the following situations, the functions
may not operate properly and the vehicle
may depart from its lane. Drive safely by
always paying careful attention to your
surroundings and operate the steering
wheel to correct the path of the vehicle
without relying solely on the functions.
● When the follow-up cruising display is
displayed (P.223) and the preced-
ing vehicle changes lanes. (Your vehi-
cle may follow the preceding vehicle
and also change lanes.)
● When the follow-up cruising display is
displayed (P.223) and the preced-
ing vehicle is swaying. (Your vehicle
may sway accordingly and depart from
the lane.)
● When the follow-up cruising display is
displayed (P.223) and the preced-
ing vehicle departs from its lane. (Your
vehicle may follow the preceding vehi-
cle and depart from the lane.)
● When the follow-up cruising display is
displayed (P.223) and the preced-
ing vehicle is being driven extremely
close to the left/right lane line. (Your
vehicle may follow the preceding vehi-
cle and depart from the lane.)
● Vehicle is being driven around a sharp
curve.
● Objects or patterns that could be mis-
taken for white (yellow) lines are pres-
ent on the side of the road (guardrails,
reflective poles, etc.).
220
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
WARNING
● Vehicle is driven where the road
diverges, merges, etc.
● Repair marks of asphalt, white (yellow)
lines, etc. are present due to road
repair.
● There are shadows on the road that
run parallel with, or cover, the white
(yellow) lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area without
white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a
tollgate or checkpoint, or at an inter-
section, etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are cracked,
“Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement
marker” or stones are present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot be
seen or are difficult to see due to sand,
etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road surface
that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.
● The traffic lines are yellow (which may
be more difficult to recognize than
lines that are white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross over a
curb, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright sur-
face, such as concrete.
● If the edge of the road is not clear or
straight.
● The vehicle is driven on a surface that
is bright due to reflected light, etc.
● The vehicle is driven in an area where
the brightness changes suddenly, such
as at the entrances and exits of tunnels,
etc.
● Light from the headlights of an oncom-
ing vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the
camera.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road which
tilts left or right, or a winding road.
● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or
rough road.
● The traffic lane is excessively narrow
or wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to
carrying heavy luggage or having
improper tire pressure.
● The distance to the preceding vehicle
is extremely short.
● The vehicle is moving up and down a
large amount due to road conditions
during driving (poor roads or road
seams).
● When driving in a tunnel or at night
with the headlights off or when a head-
light is dim due to its lens being dirty or
it being misaligned.
● The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.
221
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ Lane departure alert function
When the system determines that the
vehicle might depart from its lane or
course
*
, a warning is displayed on the
multi-information display, and either a
warning buzzer will sound or the steer-
ing wheel will vibrate to alert the driver.
When the warning buzzer sounds or the
steering wheel vibrates, check the area
around your vehicle and carefully operate
the steering wheel to move the vehicle
back to the center of the lane.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
■ Steering assist function
When the system determines that the
vehicle might depart from its lane or
course
*
, the system provides assis-
tance as necessary by operating the
steering wheel in small amounts for a
short period of time to keep the vehicle
in its lane.
If the system detects that the steering
wheel has not been operated for a fixed
amount of time or the steering wheel is not
being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed
on the multi-information display and the
function is temporarily canceled.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
WARNING
● The vehicle is affected by wind from a
vehicle driven in a nearby lane.
● The vehicle has just changed lanes or
crossed an intersection.
● Tires which differ by structure, manu-
facturer, brand or tread pattern are
used.
● Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
● The vehicle is being driven at
extremely high speeds.
Functions included in LTA system
222
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Vehicle sway warning function
When the vehicle is swaying within a
lane, the warning buzzer will sound and
a message will be displayed on the
multi-information display to alert the
driver.
■ Lane centering function
This function is linked with dynamic
radar cruise control with full-speed
range and provides the required assis-
tance by operating the steering wheel
to keep the vehicle in its current lane.
When dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range is not operating, the lane
centering function does not operate.
In situations where the white (yellow) lane
lines are difficult to see or are not visible,
such as when in a traffic jam, this function
will operate to help follow a preceding
vehicle by monitoring the position of the
preceding vehicle.
If the system detects that the steering
wheel has not been operated for a fixed
amount of time or the steering wheel is not
being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed
on the multi-information display and the
function is temporarily canceled.
223
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
Press the LTA switch to turn the LTA
system on.
The LTA indicator illuminates and a mes-
sage is displayed on the multi-information
display.
Press the LTA switch again to turn the LTA
system off.
When the LTA system is turned on or off,
operation of the LTA system continues in
the same condition the next time the hybrid
system is started.
LTA indicator
The illumination condition of the indicator
informs the driver of the system operation
status.
Illuminated in white:
LTA system is operating.
Illuminated in green:
Steering wheel assistance of the steering
assist function or lane centering function is
operating.
Flashing in orange:
Lane departure alert function is operating.
Operation display of steering
wheel operation support
Displayed when the multi-information dis-
play is switched to the driving assist system
information screen.
Indicates that steering wheel assistance of
the steering assist function or lane center-
ing function is operating.
Both outer sides of the lane are displayed:
Indicates that steering wheel assist of the
lane centering function is operating.
One outer side of the lane is displayed:
Indicates that steering wheel assist of the
Turning LTA system on Indications on multi-information
display
A
B
224
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
steering assist function is operating.
Both outer sides of the lane are flashing:
Alerts the driver that their input is neces-
sary to stay in the center of the lane (lane
centering function).
Follow-up cruising display
Displayed when the multi-information dis-
play is switched to the driving assist system
information screen.
Indicates that steering assist of the lane
centering function is operating by monitor-
ing the position of a preceding vehicle.
When the follow-up cruising display is dis-
played, if the preceding vehicle moves,
your vehicle may move in the same way.
Always pay careful attention to your sur-
roundings and operate the steering wheel
as necessary to correct the path of the
vehicle and ensure safety.
Lane departure alert function dis-
play
Displayed when the multi-information dis-
play is switched to the driving assist system
information screen.
Inside of displayed lines is white
Indicates that the system is recognizing
white (yellow) lines or a course
*
. When
the vehicle departs from its lane, the
white line displayed on the side the
vehicle departs from flashes orange.
Inside of displayed lines is black
Indicates that the system is not able to
recognize white (yellow) lines or a
course
*
or is temporarily canceled.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
■ Operation conditions of each function
● Lane departure alert function
This function operates when all of the fol-
lowing conditions are met.
• LTA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) or more.
*1
• System recognizes white (yellow) lane
lines or a course
*2
. (When a white [yel-
low] line or course
*2
is recognized on
only one side, the system will operate
only for the recognized side.)
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8
ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is not being driven around a
sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are detected.
(P.226)
*1
: The function operates even if the vehicle
speed is less than approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) when the lane centering
function is operating.
*2
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
● Steering assist function
This function operates when all of the fol-
C
D
225
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
lowing conditions are met in addition to the
operation conditions for the lane departure
alert function.
•Setting for “Steering Assist” in of the
multi-information display is set to “On”.
(P. 89)
• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated
by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a
steering force level suitable for changing
lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not oper-
ating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel warning is not
displayed. (P.226)
● Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of the fol-
lowing conditions are met.
• Setting for “Sway Warning” in of the
multi-information display is set to “On”.
(P.89)
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8
ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are detected.
(P.226)
● Lane centering function
This function operates when all of the fol-
lowing conditions are met.
• LTA is turned on.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” and “Lane
Center” in of the multi-information
display are set to “On”. (P.89)
• This function recognizes white (yellow)
lane lines or the position of a preceding
vehicle (except when the preceding vehi-
cle is small, such as a motorcycle).
• The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range is operating in vehicle-
to-vehicle distance control mode.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 10
to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m).
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is not being driven around a
sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are detected.
(P.226)
• Vehicle does not accelerate or deceler-
ate by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a
steering force level suitable for changing
lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not oper-
ating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel warning is not
displayed. (P.226)
• The vehicle is being driven in the center
of a lane.
• Steering assist function is not operating.
■ Temporary cancelation of functions
● When operation conditions are no longer
met, a function may be temporarily can-
celed. However, when the operation con-
ditions are met again, operation of the
function is automatically restored.
(P.224)
● If the operation conditions (P.224) are
no longer met while the lane centering
function is operating, the steering wheel
may vibrate and the buzzer may sound to
indicate that the function has been tem-
porarily canceled. However, if the “Alert”
customization setting is set to ,
the system will notify the driver by vibrat-
ing the steering wheel instead of sound-
ing the buzzer.
■ Steering assist function/lane centering
function
● Depending on the vehicle speed, lane
departure situation, road conditions, etc.,
the driver may not feel the function is
operating or the function may not oper-
ate at all.
● The steering control of the function is
overridden by the driver’s steering wheel
operation.
● Do not attempt to test the operation of
the steering assist function.
■ Lane departure alert function
● The warning buzzer may be difficult to
hear due to external noise, audio play-
back, etc. Also, it may be difficult to feel
steering wheel vibrations due to the road
226
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
conditions, etc.
● If the edge of the course
*
is not clear or
straight, the lane departure alert function
may not operate.
● Do not attempt to test the operation of
the lane departure alert function.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
■ Hands off steering wheel warning
In the following situations, a warning mes-
sage urging the driver to hold the steering
wheel and the symbol shown in the illustra-
tion are displayed on the multi-information
display to warn the driver. The warning
stops when the system determines that the
driver holds the steering wheel. Always
keep your hands on the steering wheel
when using this system, regardless of warn-
ings.
● When the system determines that the
driver is driving without holding the steer-
ing wheel while the system is operating
If the driver continues to keep their hands
off of the steering wheel, the buzzer sounds,
the driver is warned and the function is tem-
porarily canceled. This warning also oper-
ates in the same way when the driver
continuously operates the steering wheel
only a small amount.
The buzzer also sounds even if the alert
type is set to .
● When the system determines that the
vehicle may not turn and instead depart
from its lane while driving around a curve
Depending on the vehicle condition and
road conditions, the warning may not oper-
ate. Also, if the system determines that the
vehicle is driving around a curve, warnings
will occur earlier than during straight-lane
driving.
● When the system determines that the
driver is driving without holding the steer-
ing wheel while the steering wheel assist
of the steering assist function is operat-
ing.
If the driver continues to keep their hands
off of the steering wheel and the steering
wheel assist is operating, the buzzer sounds
and the driver is warned. Each time the
buzzer sounds, the continuing time of the
buzzer becomes longer.
The buzzer also sounds even if the alert
type is set to .
■ Vehicle sway warning function
When the system determines that the vehi-
cle is swaying while the vehicle sway warn-
ing function is operating, a buzzer sounds
and a warning message urging the driver to
rest and the symbol shown in the illustration
are simultaneously displayed on the multi-
information display.
Depending on the vehicle and road condi-
tions, the warning may not operate.
■ Warning message
If the following warning message is dis-
played on the multi-information display and
the LTA indicator illuminates in orange, fol-
low the appropriate troubleshooting proce-
dure. Also, if a different warning message is
displayed, follow the instructions displayed
on the screen.
● “LTA Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”
The system may not be operating properly.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
227
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
dealer.
● “LTA Unavailable”
The system is temporarily canceled due to a
malfunction in a sensor other than the front
camera. Turn the LTA system off, wait for a
little while, and then turn the LTA system
back on.
● “LTA Unavailable at Current Speed”
The function cannot be used as the vehicle
speed exceeds the LTA operation range.
Drive slower.
■ Customization
Function settings can be changed. (Cus-
tomizable features: P.443)
*
: If equipped
When driving on highways and free-
ways with white (yellow) lane lines, this
function alerts the driver when the
vehicle might depart from its lane or
course
*
and provides assistance by
operating the steering wheel to keep
the vehicle in its lane or course
*
.
The LDA system recognizes white (yel-
low) lane lines or a course
*
using the
front camera. Additionally, it detects
preceding vehicles using the front
camera and radar.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
LDA (Lane Departure Alert
with steering control)
*
Summary of functions
228
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
WARNING
■ Before using LDA system
● Do not rely solely upon the LDA sys-
tem. The LDA system does not auto-
matically drive the vehicle or reduce
the amount of attention that must be
paid to the area in front of the vehicle.
The driver must always assume full
responsibility for driving safely by pay-
ing careful attention to the surround-
ing conditions and operating the
steering wheel to correct the path of
the vehicle. Also, the driver must take
adequate breaks when fatigued, such
as from driving for a long period of
time.
● Failure to perform appropriate driving
operations and pay careful attention
may lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● When not using the LDA system, use
the LDA switch to turn the system off.
■ Situations unsuitable for LDA system
In the following situations, use the LDA
switch to turn the system off. Failure to do
so may lead to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Vehicle is driven on a road surface
which is slippery due to rainy weather,
fallen snow, freezing, etc.
● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered
road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see
due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are
equipped.
● When the tires have been excessively
worn, or when the tire inflation pres-
sure is low.
● When tires of a size other than speci-
fied are installed.
● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other
than that highways and freeways.
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer
or during emergency towing.
■ Preventing LDA system malfunctions
and operations performed by mistake
● Do not modify the headlights or place
stickers, etc. on the surface of the
lights.
● Do not modify the suspension, etc. If
the suspension, etc. needs to be
replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not install or place anything on the
hood or grille. Also, do not install a
grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar,
etc.).
● If your windshield needs repairs, con-
tact your Lexus dealer.
■ Conditions in which functions may
not operate properly
In the following situations, the functions
may not operate properly and the vehicle
may depart from its lane. Drive safely by
always paying careful attention to your
surroundings and operate the steering
wheel to correct the path of the vehicle
without relying solely on the functions.
● Vehicle is being driven around a sharp
curve.
● Objects or patterns that could be mis-
taken for white (yellow) lines are pres-
ent on the side of the road (guardrails,
reflective poles, etc.).
229
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
WARNING
● Vehicle is driven where the road
diverges, merges, etc.
● Repair marks of asphalt, white (yellow)
lines, etc. are present due to road
repair.
● There are shadows on the road that
run parallel with, or cover, the white
(yellow) lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area without
white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a
tollgate or checkpoint, or at an inter-
section, etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are cracked,
“Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement
marker” or stones are present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot be
seen or are difficult to see due to sand,
etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road surface
that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.
● The traffic lines are yellow (which may
be more difficult to recognize than
lines that are white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross over a
curb, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright sur-
face, such as concrete.
● If the edge of the road is not clear or
straight.
● The vehicle is driven on a surface that
is bright due to reflected light, etc.
● The vehicle is driven in an area where
the brightness changes suddenly, such
as at the entrances and exits of tunnels,
etc.
● Light from the headlights of an oncom-
ing vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the
camera.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road which
tilts left or right, or a winding road.
● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or
rough road.
● The traffic lane is excessively narrow
or wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to
carrying heavy luggage or having
improper tire pressure.
● The distance to the preceding vehicle
is extremely short.
● The vehicle is moving up and down a
large amount due to road conditions
during driving (poor roads or road
seams).
● When driving in a tunnel or at night
with the headlights off or when a head-
light is dim due to its lens being dirty or
it being misaligned.
● The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.
230
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Lane departure alert function
When the system determines that the
vehicle might depart from its lane or
course
*
, a warning is displayed on the
multi-information display, and either a
warning buzzer will sound or the steer-
ing wheel will vibrate to alert the driver.
When the warning buzzer sounds or the
steering wheel vibrates, check the area
around your vehicle and carefully operate
the steering wheel to move the vehicle
back to the center of the lane.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
■ Steering assist function
When the system determines that the
vehicle might depart from its lane or
course
*
, the system provides assis-
tance as necessary by operating the
steering wheel in small amounts for a
short period of time to keep the vehicle
in its lane.
If the system detects that the steering
wheel has not been operated for a fixed
amount of time or the steering wheel is not
being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed
on the multi-information display and the
function is temporarily canceled.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
WARNING
● The vehicle has just changed lanes or
crossed an intersection.
● Tires which differ by structure, manu-
facturer, brand or tread pattern are
used.
● Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
Functions included in LDA sys-
tem
231
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ Vehicle sway warning function
When the vehicle is swaying within a
lane, the warning buzzer will sound and
a message will be displayed on the
multi-information display to alert the
driver.
Press the LDA switch to turn the LDA
system on.
The LDA indicator illuminates and a mes-
sage is displayed on the multi-information
display.
Press the LDA switch again to turn the
LDA system off.
When the LDA system is turned on or off,
operation of the LDA system continues in
the same condition the next time the hybrid
system is started.
Turning LDA system on
232
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
LDA indicator
The illumination condition of the indicator
informs the driver of the system operation
status.
Illuminated in white:
LDA system is operating.
Illuminated in green:
Steering wheel assistance of the steering
assist function is operating.
Flashing in orange:
Lane departure alert function is operating.
Operation display of steering
wheel operation support
Displayed when the multi-information dis-
play is switched to the driving assist system
information screen.
Indicates that steering wheel assistance of
the steering assist function is operating.
Lane departure alert function dis-
play
Displayed when the multi-information dis-
play is switched to the driving assist system
information screen.
Inside of displayed lines is white
Indicates that the system is recognizing
white (yellow) lines or a course
*
. When the
vehicle departs from its lane, the white line
displayed on the side the vehicle departs
from flashes orange.
Inside of displayed lines is black
Indicates that the system is not able to rec-
ognize white (yellow) lines or a course
*
or
is temporarily canceled.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
■ Operation conditions of each function
● Lane departure alert function
This function operates when all of the fol-
lowing conditions are met.
• LDA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) or more.
• System recognizes white (yellow) lane
lines or a course
*
. (When a white [yellow]
line or course
*
is recognized on only one
side, the system will operate only for the
Indications on multi-information
display
A
B
C
233
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
recognized side.)
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8
ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is not being driven around a
sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are detected.
(P.234)
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
● Steering assist function
This function operates when all of the fol-
lowing conditions are met in addition to the
operation conditions for the lane departure
alert function.
•Setting for “Steering Assist” in of the
multi-information display is set to “On”.
(P.89)
• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated
by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a
steering force level suitable for changing
lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not oper-
ating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel warning is not
displayed. (P.233)
● Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of the fol-
lowing conditions are met.
• Setting for “Sway Warning” in of the
multi-information display is set to “On”.
(P.89)
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8
ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are detected.
(P.234)
■ Temporary cancelation of functions
When operation conditions are no longer
met, a function may be temporarily can-
celed. However, when the operation condi-
tions are met again, operation of the
function is automatically restored.
(P.232)
■ Steering assist function
● Depending on the vehicle speed, lane
departure situation, road conditions, etc.,
the driver may not feel the function is
operating or the function may not oper-
ate at all.
● The steering control of the function is
overridden by the driver’s steering wheel
operation.
● Do not attempt to test the operation of
the steering assist function.
■ Lane departure alert function
● The warning buzzer may be difficult to
hear due to external noise, audio play-
back, etc. Also, it may be difficult to feel
steering wheel vibrations due to the road
conditions, etc.
● If the edge of the course
*
is not clear or
straight, the lane departure alert function
may not operate.
● Do not attempt to test the operation of
the lane departure alert function.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side
of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
■ Hands off steering wheel warning
In the following situations, a warning mes-
sage urging the driver to hold the steering
wheel and the symbol shown in the illustra-
tion are displayed on the multi-information
display to warn the driver.The warning stops
when the system determines that the driver
holds the steering wheel. Always keep your
hands on the steering wheel when using this
system, regardless of warnings.
● When the system determines that the
driver is driving without holding the steer-
ing wheel while the system is operating
If the driver continues to keep their hands
off of the steering wheel, the buzzer sounds,
234
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
the driver is warned and the function is tem-
porarily canceled. This warning also oper-
ates in the same way when the driver
continuously operates the steering wheel
only a small amount.
The buzzer also sounds even if the alert
type is set to .
● When the system determines that the
vehicle may not turn and instead depart
from its lane while driving around a curve
Depending on the vehicle condition and
road conditions, the warning may not oper-
ate. Also, if the system determines that the
vehicle is driving around a curve, warnings
will occur earlier than during straight-lane
driving.
● When the system determines that the
driver is driving without holding the steer-
ing wheel while the steering wheel assist
of the steering assist function is operating
If the driver continues to keep their hands
off of the steering wheel and the steering
wheel assist is operating, the buzzer sounds
and the driver is warned. Each time the
buzzer sounds, the continuing time of the
buzzer becomes longer.
The buzzer also sounds even if the alert
type is set to .
■ Vehicle sway warning function
When the system determines that the vehi-
cle is swaying while the vehicle sway warn-
ing function is operating, a buzzer sounds
and a warning message urging the driver to
rest and the symbol shown in the illustration
are simultaneously displayed on the multi-
information display.
Depending on the vehicle and road condi-
tions, the warning may not operate.
■ Warning message
If the following warning message is dis-
played on the multi-information display and
the LDA indicator illuminates in orange, fol-
low the appropriate troubleshooting proce-
dure. Also, if a different warning message is
displayed, follow the instructions displayed
on the screen.
● “Lane Departure Alert Malfunction Visit
Your Dealer”
The system may not be operating properly.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
● “Lane Departure Alert Unavailable”
The system is temporarily canceled due to a
malfunction in a sensor other than the front
camera. Turn the LDA system off, wait for a
little while, and then turn the LDA system
back on.
● “Lane Departure Alert Unavailable at
Current Speed”
The function cannot be used as the vehicle
speed exceeds the LDA operation range.
Drive slower.
● “Lane Departure Alert Unavailable
Below Approx 50km/h”
The LDA system cannot be used as the
vehicle speed is less than approximately 32
mph (50 km/h). Drive the vehicle at
approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.
■ Customization
Function settings can be changed. (Cus-
tomizable features: P.443)
235
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
*
:If equipped
The RSA system recognizes specific
road signs using the front camera to
provide information to the driver via
the display.
If the system judges that the vehicle is
being driven over the speed limit, per-
forming prohibited actions, etc.,
according to the recognized road
signs, it notifies the driver through a
visual notification and notification
buzzer.
When the front camera recognizes a
sign, the sign will be displayed on the
multi-information display.
When the driving assist system
information is selected, a maximum
of 3 signs can be displayed.
(P.89)
When a tab other than the driving
assist system information is selected,
the following types of road signs will
be displayed.(P.89)
• Speed limit sign
• Do Not Enter sign (when notification is
necessary)
If signs other than speed limit signs are rec-
ognized, they will be displayed in an over-
lapping stack under the current speed limit
sign.
The following types of road signs,
including electronic signs and blinking
signs, are recognized.
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
*
Summary of functions
WARNING
■ Before using the RSA
Do not rely solely upon the RSA system.
RSA is a system which supports the
driver by providing information, but it is
not a replacement for a driver’s own
vision and awareness. Drive safely by
always paying careful attention to the
traffic rules.
Indication on the multi-informa-
tion display
Supported types of road signs
236
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
A non-official or a recently introduced traf-
fic sign may not be recognized.
: Speed limit
: Do Not Enter
: Stop
: Yield
In the following situations, the RSA sys-
tem will notify the driver.
When the vehicle speed exceeds
the speed notification threshold of
the speed limit sign displayed, the
sign display will be emphasized and
a buzzer will sound.
When the RSA system recognizes a
do not enter sign and determines
that your vehicle has entered a no-
entry area, the displayed sign will
flash and a buzzer will sound.
Depending on the situation, a notifica-
tion function may not operate properly.
■ Setting procedure
1 Press or of the meter control
switches and select
2 Press or of the meter control
switches and select , then press
3 Press or of the meter control
switches, select the desired setting, and
then press
■ Automatic turn-off of RSA sign display
In the following situations a displayed speed
limit sign and/or do not enter signs will stop
being displayed automatically:
● No sign has been recognized for a cer-
tain distance.
● The road changes due to a left or right
turn, etc.
In the following situations, stop and yield
signs will stop being displayed automati-
cally:
● The system determines that your vehicle
has passed the sign.
● The road changes due to a left or right
turn, etc.
■ Conditions in which the function may
not operate or detect correctly
In the following situations, RSA does not
operate normally and may not recognize
signs, display the incorrect sign, etc. How-
ever, this does not indicate a malfunction.
● The front camera is misaligned due to a
strong impact being applied to the sen-
sor, etc.
● Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the wind-
shield near the front camera.
● In inclement weather such as heavy rain,
fog, snow or sand storms
● Light from an oncoming vehicle, the sun,
etc. enters the front camera.
● The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or bent.
● The contrast of electronic sign is low.
● All or part of the sign is hidden by the
leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.
● The sign is only visible to the front camera
for a short amount of time.
Notification function
237
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
● The driving scene (turning, lane change,
etc.) is judged incorrectly.
● If a sign not appropriate for the currently
traveled lane, but the sign exists directly
after a freeway branches, or in an adja-
cent lane just before merging.
● Stickers are attached to the rear of the
preceding vehicle.
● A sign resembling a system compatible
sign is recognized.
● Side road speed signs may be detected
and displayed (if positioned in sight of the
front camera) while the vehicle is travel-
ing on the main road.
● Roundabout exit road speed signs may
be detected and displayed (if positioned
in sight of the front camera) while travel-
ing on a roundabout.
● The front of the vehicle is raised or low-
ered due to the carried load.
● The surrounding brightness is not suffi-
cient or changes suddenly.
● When a sign intended for trucks, etc. is
recognized.
● The speed information displayed on the
meter and on the navigation system may
be different due to the navigation system
using map data.
■ Speed limit sign display
If the power switch was last turned off while
a speed limit sign was displayed on the
multi-information display, the same sign dis-
plays again when the power switch is turned
to ON mode.
■ If “RSA malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is
shown
The system may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized. (Cus-
tomizable features: P.443)
In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, the vehicle automatically accel-
erates, decelerates and stops to match
the speed changes of the preceding
vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is
not depressed. In constant speed con-
trol mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed
speed.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range on freeways and
highways.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode (P.240)
Constant speed control mode
(P.244)
Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range
Summary of functions
System Components
238
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Multi-information display
Set speed
Indicators
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch
Cruise control switch
WARNING
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range
● Driving safely is the sole responsibility
of the driver. Do not rely solely on the
system, and drive safely by always pay-
ing careful attention to your surround-
ings.
● The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range provides driving
assistance to reduce the driver’s bur-
den. However, there are limitations to
the assistance provided.
Read the following conditions carefully.
Do not overly rely on this system and
always drive carefully.
• When the sensor may not be correctly
detecting the vehicle ahead:P.245
• Conditions under which the vehicle-
to-vehicle distance control mode may
not function correctly: P.246
● Set the speed appropriately depend-
ing on the speed limit, traffic flow, road
conditions, weather conditions, etc.
The driver is responsible for checking
the set speed.
● Even when the system is functioning
normally, the condition of the preced-
ing vehicle as detected by the system
may differ from the condition
observed by the driver. Therefore, the
driver must always remain alert, assess
the danger of each situation and drive
safely. Relying solely on this system or
assuming the system ensures safety
while driving can lead to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
A
B
C
D
E
● Switch the dynamic radar cruise con-
trol with full-speed range setting to off
using the “ON/OFF” button when not
in use.
■ Cautions regarding the driving assist
systems
Observe the following precautions, as
there are limitations to the assistance
provided by the system.
Failure to do so may cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure follow-
ing distance
The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range is only intended to help
the driver in determining the following
distance between the driver’s own vehi-
cle and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows
careless or inattentive driving, and it is
not a system that can assist the driver in
low-visibility conditions. It is still neces-
sary for driver to pay close attention to
the vehicle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver to judge proper
following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range determines whether the
following distance between the driver’s
own vehicle and a designated vehicle
traveling ahead is within a set range. It is
not capable of making any other type of
judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely
necessary for the driver to remain vigi-
lant and to determine whether or not
there is a possibility of danger in any
given situation.
239
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
WARNING
● Assisting the driver to operate the
vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range does not include func-
tions which will prevent or avoid colli-
sions with vehicles ahead of your vehicle.
Therefore, if there is ever any possibility
of danger, the driver must take immedi-
ate and direct control of the vehicle and
act appropriately in order to ensure the
safety of all involved.
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic
radar cruise control with full-speed
range
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control
with full-speed range in any of the follow-
ing situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate
speed control and could cause an acci-
dent resulting in death or serious injury.
● Roads where there are pedestrians,
cyclists, etc.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those cov-
ered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep downhills, or where there
are sudden changes between sharp up
and down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set
speed when driving down a steep hill.
● At entrances to freeways and highways
● When weather conditions are bad
enough that they may prevent the sen-
sors from detecting correctly (fog,
snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
● When there is rain, snow, etc. on the
front surface of the radar or front cam-
era
● In traffic conditions that require fre-
quent repeated acceleration and
deceleration
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer
or during emergency towing
● When an approach warning buzzer is
heard often
240
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
This mode employs a radar to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately
328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle following dis-
tance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle
ahead. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.
When driving on downhill slopes, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance may become shorter.
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver.
Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising
When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates
your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies
the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to changes in
the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by
the driver. Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to
prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by sys-
tem control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pushing the cruise control lever up or
depressing the accelerator pedal (start-off operation) will resume follow-up cruising. If the
start-off operation is not performed, system control continues to keep your vehicle
stopped.
When the turn signal lever is operated and your vehicle moves to an overtaking lane while
driving at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle will accelerate to help to overtake a
passing vehicle.
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
A
B
241
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
The system’s identification of what is an overtaking lane may be determined solely based on
the location of the steering wheel in the vehicle (left side driver position versus right side
driver position.) If the vehicle is driven to a region where the overtaking lane is on a different
side from where the vehicle is normally driven, the vehicle may accelerate when the turn
signal lever is operated in the opposite direction to the overtaking lane (e.g., if the driver
normally operates the vehicle in a region where the overtaking lane is to the right but then
drives to a region where the overtaking lane is to the left, the vehicle may accelerate when
the right turn signal is activated).
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set
speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant
speed cruising.
1 Press the “ON/OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Dynamic radar cruise control indicator will
come on and a message will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
Press the button again to deactivate the
cruise control.
If the “ON/OFF” button is pressed and
held for 1.5 seconds or more, the system
turns on in constant speed control mode.
(P.244)
2 Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (at or above
approximately 20 mph [30 km/h])
and push the lever down to set the
speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come
on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the lever
is released becomes the set speed.
To change the set speed, operate the
lever until the desired set speed is dis-
played.
C
Setting the vehicle speed (vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
Adjusting the set speed
242
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1 Increases the speed
(Except when the vehicle has been
stopped by system control in vehicle-to-
vehicle distance control mode)
2 Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the
lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever up or
down to change the speed, and release
when the desired speed is reached.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, the set speed will be increased or
decreased as follows:
For the U.S. mainland and Hawaii
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
*1
or 1
km/h (0.6 mph)
*2
each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases
in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
*1
or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
*2
increments for as long as the lever is held
For Canada, Guam and Puerto Rico
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
*1
or 1
km/h (0.6 mph)
*2
each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases
in 5 mph (8 km/h)
*1
or 5 km/h (3.1 mph)
*2
increments for as long as the lever is held
In the constant speed control mode
(P.244), the set speed will be increased
or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
*1
or 1
km/h (0.6 mph)
*2
each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: The speed will continue
to change while the lever is held.
*1
: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
*2
: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Pressing the switch changes the vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance as follows:
1 Long
2 Medium
3 Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set auto-
matically to long mode when the power
switch is turned to ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the pre-
ceding vehicle mark will also be dis-
played.
Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance (vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode)
A
243
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
Select a distance from the table below.
Note that the distances shown corre-
spond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
increases/decreases in accordance
with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is
stopped by system control, the vehicle
stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle
distance depending on the situation.
After the vehicle ahead of you starts
off, push the lever up.
Your vehicle will also resume follow-up
cruising if the accelerator pedal is
depressed after the vehicle ahead of
you starts off.
1 Pulling the lever toward you can-
cels the speed control.
The speed control is also canceled when
the brake pedal is depressed.
(When the vehicle has been stopped by
system control, depressing the brake pedal
does not cancel the setting.)
2 Pushing the lever up resumes the
cruise control and returns vehicle
speed to the set speed.
When your vehicle is too close to a
vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic
deceleration via the cruise control is
not possible, the display will flash and
the buzzer will sound to alert the driver.
An example of this would be if another
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance set-
tings (vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode)
Distance options
Vehicle-to-vehicle
distance
Long
Approximately 160
ft. (50 m)
Medium
Approximately 130
ft. (40 m)
Short
Approximately 100
ft. (30 m)
Resuming follow-up cruising
when the vehicle has been
stopped by system control (vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
Canceling and resuming the
speed control
Approach warning (vehicle-to-
vehicle distance control mode)
244
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
driver cuts in front of you while you are
following a vehicle. Depress the brake
pedal to ensure an appropriate vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance.
■ Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, warnings
may not occur even when the vehicle-
to-vehicle distance is small.
When the speed of the preceding
vehicle matches or exceeds your
vehicle speed
When the preceding vehicle is trav-
eling at an extremely slow speed
Immediately after the cruise control
speed was set
When depressing the accelerator
pedal
When constant speed control mode is
selected, your vehicle will maintain a
set speed without controlling the vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance. Select this
mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode does not function
correctly due to a dirty radar, etc.
1 With the cruise control off, press
and hold the “ON/OFF” button for
1.5 seconds or more.
Immediately after the “ON/OFF” button is
pressed, the dynamic radar cruise control
indicator will come on. Afterwards, it
switches to the cruise control indicator.
Switching to constant speed control mode
is only possible when operating the lever
with the cruise control off.
2 Accelerate or decelerate, with
accelerator pedal operation, to the
desired vehicle speed (at or above
approximately 20 mph [30 km/h])
and push the lever down to set the
speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come
on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the lever
is released becomes the set speed.
Adjusting the speed setting: P.241
Canceling and resuming the speed setting:
P.243
Selecting constant speed con-
trol mode
245
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-
speed range can be set when
● The shift lever is in D.
● The desired set speed can be set when
the vehicle speed is approximately 20
mph (30 km/h) or more. (However, when
the vehicle speed is set while driving at
below approximately 20 mph [30 km/h],
the set speed will be set to approximately
20 mph [30 km/h].)
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle
speed
The vehicle can accelerate by operating the
accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the
set speed resumes. However, during vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the
vehicle speed may decrease below the set
speed in order to maintain the distance to
the preceding vehicle.
■ When the vehicle stops while follow-up
cruising
● Pushing the lever up while the vehicle
ahead stops will resume follow-up cruis-
ing if the vehicle ahead starts off within
approximately 3 seconds after the lever
is pushed up.
● If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 sec-
onds after your vehicle stops, follow-up
cruising will be resumed.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-
vehicle distance control mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is
automatically canceled in the following situ-
ations.
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is
turned off.
● The sensor cannot detect correctly
because it is covered in some way.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
● The parking brake is operated.
● The vehicle is stopped by system control
on a steep incline.
● The following are detected when the
vehicle has been stopped by system con-
trol:
• The driver is not wearing a seat belt.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The vehicle has been stopped for about 3
minutes
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
is automatically canceled for any reasons
other than the above, there may be a mal-
function in the system. Contact your Lexus
dealer.
■ Automatic cancelation of constant
speed control mode
Constant speed control mode is automati-
cally canceled in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than
approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below
the set vehicle speed.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approxi-
mately 20 mph (30 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is
turned off.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
If constant speed control mode is automati-
cally canceled for any reasons other than
the above, there may be a malfunction in the
system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Brake operation
A brake operation sound may be heard and
the brake pedal response may change, but
these are not malfunctions.
■ Warning messages and buzzers for
dynamic radar cruise control with full-
speed range
Warning messages and buzzers are used to
indicate a system malfunction or to inform
the driver of the need for caution while driv-
ing. If a warning message is shown on the
multi-information display, read the message
and follow the instructions. (P.209, 398)
■ When the sensor may not be correctly
detecting the vehicle ahead
In the case of the following and depending
on the conditions, operate the brake pedal
when deceleration of the system is insuffi-
cient or operate the accelerator pedal
246
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
when acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly
detect these types of vehicles, the approach
warning (P.243) may not be activated.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in the same
lane
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers
with no load on board, etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
● When water or snow thrown up by the
surrounding vehicles hinders the detect-
ing of the sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards
(caused by a heavy load in the luggage
compartment, etc.)
● Preceding vehicle has an extremely high
ground clearance
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-
vehicle distance control mode may not
function correctly
In the case of the following conditions,
operate the brake pedal (or accelerator
pedal, depending on the situation) as nec-
essary.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly
detect vehicles ahead, the system may not
operate properly.
● When the road curves or when the lanes
are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or your
position in the lane is unstable
● When the vehicle ahead of you deceler-
ates suddenly
● When driving on a road surrounded by a
structure, such as in a tunnel or on a
bridge
● While the vehicle speed is decreasing to
the set speed after the vehicle acceler-
ates by depressing the accelerator pedal
247
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
*
:If equipped
■ Intuitive parking assist (if
equipped)
Ultrasonic sensors are used to detect
static objects in the detection area
when driving at a low speed or backing
up. (P.248)
■ Adjusting the buzzer volume
The buzzer volume can be adjusted on
the multi-information display.
Use the meter control switches to
change settings. (P.89)
1 Press or to select .
2 Press or to select “PKSA”
and then press .
3 Press or to select and
then press .
Each time the switch is pressed, the volume
level change between 1, 2, and 3.
■ Muting buzzer
P.249
PKSA (Parking Support
Alert)
*
The Parking Support Alert system
consists of the following functions
that operate when driving at a low
speed or backing up, such as when
parking. When the system deter-
mines that a collision with a
detected object, such as a wall is
high, a warning operates to urge
the driver to take evasive action.
PKSA (Parking Support Alert)
system
Setting the buzzer volume
248
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
*
:If equipped
■ Types of sensors
Front corner sensors
Front center sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors
■ Display
When the sensors detect an obstacle,
the following displays inform the driver
of the position and distance to the
obstacle.
Multi-information display
Front corner sensor operation
Front center sensor operation
Rear corner sensor operation
Rear center sensor operation
Navigation or multimedia system
Lexus parking assist monitor
Panoramic view monitor
Intuitive parking assist can be
Intuitive parking assist
*
The distance from your vehicle to
nearby obstacles when parallel
parking or maneuvering into a
garage is measured by the sensors
and communicated via the displays
and a buzzer. Always check the sur-
rounding area when using this sys-
tem.
System components
A
B
C
D
Turning intuitive parking assist
on/off
A
B
C
D
249
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
enabled/disabled on the multi-informa-
tion display as following:
1 Press or of meter control
switches and select .
2 Press or of meter control
switches and select “PKSA”.
3 Press or of meter control
switches, select , and then press
to select the desired setting
(on/off).
When ON (enable) is selected, the
Intuitive parking assist indicator comes
on.
When switched to OFF (disable) and
the Intuitive parking assist is deacti-
vated, the system will not reactivate if it
is not switched to ON again from the
screen of the multi-information dis-
play (Will not reactivate via power
switch operations).
■ The intuitive parking assist can be oper-
ated when
● The power switch is in ON mode.
● Intuitive parking assist function is on.
● The vehicle speed is less than about 6
mph (10 km/h).
● A shift position other than P is selected.
■ Setting the buzzer volume
The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the
multi-information display. (P.247)
■ Muting the buzzer sound
● To mute the buzzer sound
The buzzer can be temporarily muted by
pressing of the meter control
switches while an obstacle detection dis-
play is shown on the multi-information
display.
● To cancel the mute
Mute will be automatically canceled in
the following situations.
• When the shift position is changed
• When the vehicle speed has reached or
exceeded approximately 6 mph (10
km/h) with the shift lever in D
• When the intuitive parking assist is turned
off once and turned on again
• When the power switch is turned off once
and turned to ON mode again
• When a sensor is malfunctioning
■ Intuitive parking assist display
When an obstacle is detected while the
Lexus parking assist monitor is in use, the
warning indicator will appear in the upper
corner of the screen even if the display set-
ting has been set to off.
■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable” or “Park-
ing Assist Unavailable Clean Parking
Assist Sensor” is displayed on the multi-
information display
A sensor may be dirty or covered with snow
or ice. In such cases, if it is removed from
the sensor, the system should return to nor-
mal.
Also, due to the sensor being frozen at low
temperatures, a malfunction display may
appear or an obstacle may not be detected.
If the sensor thaws out, the system should
return to normal.
■ If “Parking Assist Malfunction Visit Your
Dealer” is displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
Depending on the malfunction of the sen-
sor, the device may not be working nor-
mally. Have the vehicle inspected by your
250
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Lexus dealer.
■ Sensor detection information
● The sensor’s detection areas are limited
to the areas around the vehicle’s bumper.
● Certain vehicle conditions and the sur-
rounding environment may affect the
ability of a sensor to correctly detect an
obstacle. Particular instances where this
may occur are listed below.
• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor.
(Wiping the sensors will resolve this
problem.)
• The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area
will resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a sensor is
frozen the screen may show an abnormal
display, or obstacles may not be
detected.
• The sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one
side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an
incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to
vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, or other loud
noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with
parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray
or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender
pole or wireless antenna.
• Towing eyelets are installed.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong
impact.
• A backlit license plate, license plate
holder, etc., are installed.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or
curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• The area directly under the bumpers is
not detected.
• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.
• A non-genuine Lexus suspension (low-
ered suspension etc.) is installed.
• People may not be detected if they are
wearing certain types of clothing.
In addition to the examples above, there are
instances in which, because of their shape,
signs and other objects may be judged by a
sensor to be closer than they are.
● The shape of the obstacle may prevent a
sensor from detecting it. Pay particular
attention to the following obstacles:
• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that
absorb sound waves
• Sharply-angled objects
• Low obstacles
• Tall obstacles with upper sections pro-
jecting outwards in the direction of your
vehicle
● The following situations may occur
during use.
• Depending on the shape of the obstacle
and other factors, the detection distance
may shorten, or detection may be impos-
sible.
• Obstacles may not be detected if they
are too close to the sensor.
• There will be a short delay between
obstacle detection and display. Even at
slow speeds, there is a possibility that the
obstacle will come within the sensor’s
detection areas before the display is
shown and the buzzer sounds.
• Thin posts or objects lower than the sen-
sor may not be detected when
approached, even if they have been
detected once.
• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to
the volume of audio system or air flow
noise of the air conditioning system.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(Customizable features: P.443)
WARNING
■ When using the intuitive parking
assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle
being unable to be driven safely and pos-
sibly cause an accident.
● Do not use the sensor at speeds in
excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
251
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ Detection range of the sensors
Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
Approximately 1.9 ft. (65 cm)
The diagram shows the detection range of
the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot
detect obstacles that are extremely close
to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may change
depending on the shape of the object etc.
■ Distance display
Sensors that detect an obstacle will illu-
minate continuously or blink. (As the
distance to the object becomes less
than 1.0 ft. (30 cm), the distance seg-
ments may blink.)
WARNING
● The sensors’ detection areas and reac-
tion times are limited. When moving
forward or reversing, check the areas
surrounding the vehicle (especially the
sides of the vehicle) for safety, and
drive slowly, using the brake to control
the vehicle’s speed.
● Do not install accessories within the
sensors’ detection areas.
NOTICE
■ When using intuitive parking assist
In the following situations, the system
may not function correctly due to a sen-
sor malfunction, etc. Have the vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer.
● The intuitive parking assist operation
display flashes, and a buzzer sounds
when no obstacles are detected.
● If the area around a sensor collides
with something, or is subjected to
strong impact.
● If the bumper collides with something.
● If the display shows continuously with-
out beeping, except when the buzzer
mute switch has been turned on.
● If a display error occurs, first check the
sensor.
If the error occurs even if there is no
ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is
likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or
steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor mal-
functioning.
Sensor detection display, obsta-
cle distance
A
B
C
252
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
*1
: The images may differ from that shown
in the illustrations. (P.248)
*2
: Automatic buzzer mute function is
enabled. (P.252)
*3
: The distance segments will blink slowly.
■ Buzzer operation and distance to
an obstacle
A buzzer sounds when the sensors are
operating.
The buzzer sounds faster as the
vehicle approaches an obstacle.
When the vehicle comes within the
approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) of the
obstacle, the buzzer sounds contin-
uously.
When 2 or more obstacles are
detected simultaneously, the buzzer
system responds to the nearest
obstacle. If one or both come within
the above distances, the beep will
repeat a long tone, followed by fast
beeps.
Automatic buzzer mute function:
After a buzzer begins sounding, if
the distance between the vehicle
and the detected object does not
become shorter, the buzzer will be
muted automatically. (However, if
the distance between the vehicle
and object is 1.0 ft. (30 cm) or less,
this function will not operate.)
Approximate distance to
obstacle
Display
*1
Rear center sensor: 4.9 ft.
(150 cm) to 1.9 ft. (65
cm)
*2
Front center sensor: 3.3
ft. (100 cm) to 1.9 ft. (65
cm)
*2
1.9 ft. (65 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45
cm)
*2
1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft.
(30 cm)
*2
1.0 ft. (30 cm) to 0.5 ft.
(15 cm)
*3
Less than 0.5 ft. (15 cm)
*3
253
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
*
:If equipped
The system operates in the following
situations when a static object is
detected in the traveling direction of
the vehicle.
■ The vehicle is driven at low speeds
and the brake pedal is not
depressed, or is depressed too late
■ The accelerator pedal is depressed
too far
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (for static objects)
*
When a collision may occur with a
static object while parking or trav-
eling at low speeds, when the vehi-
cle suddenly moves forward due to
mistaken accelerator pedal opera-
tion, or when the vehicle moves due
to the shift lever being in the wrong
position, the sensors detect static
objects to the front or rear in the
traveling direction of the vehicle,
and the system operates to lessen
impact with static objects such as
walls, and reduce resulting dam-
age.
Examples of system operation
254
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ When the shift lever is mistakenly
in D and the vehicle moves forward
■ Sensor positions and types
Front corner sensors
Front center sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors
This system can be enabled/disabled
on the multi-information display.
WARNING
■ For safe use
Do not rely solely upon the system. Rely-
ing solely upon the system may lead to an
unexpected accident.
● Driving safely is the sole responsibility
of the driver. Pay careful attention to
the surrounding conditions in order to
ensure safe driving. The Parking Sup-
port Brake function (for static objects)
can provide support to lessen the
severity of collisions. However, it may
not operate depending on the situa-
tion.
● The Parking Support Brake function
(for static objects) is not a system
designed to completely stop the vehi-
cle. Furthermore, even if the Parking
Support Brake function (for static
objects) is able to stop the vehicle,
brake control is canceled after
approximately 2 seconds, so depress
the brake pedal immediately.
Sensor positions and types
NOTICE
■ Preventing sensor malfunctions
● If the area around a sensor is subjected
to an impact, equipment may not oper-
ate properly due to a sensor malfunc-
tion. Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
● When using a high-pressure washer to
wash the vehicle, do not spray water
directly on the sensors. The sensors
may not function properly if subjected
to an impact from strong water pres-
sure.
● When using steam to wash the vehicle,
do not direct steam too close to the
sensors. The sensors may not function
properly if subjected to steam.
Changing settings of the Park-
ing Support Brake function (for
static objects)
A
B
C
D
255
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
1 Press “ ” or “ ” of the meter
control switches and select .
2 Press “ ” or “ ” of the meter
control switches and select .
3 Press on the meter control
switches to enable/disable the sys-
tem.
The PKSB OFF indicator comes on
when the Parking Support Brake
function is OFF (not operating).
When the Parking Support Brake func-
tion is switched OFF, system operation
does not resume until the function is
switched back ON through the set-
tings screen on the multi-information
display. (System operation does not
resume by operating the power
switch.)
■ Hybrid system output restraint control
When there is a static object, where a potential collision may occur, is detected, the
increase of the vehicle speed is restrained due to hybrid system output being con-
trolled.
Operation
256
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Accelerator pedal
Brake pedal
Hybrid system output
Braking force
ON
OFF
Control starts
Collision is likely
DOWN
“BRAKE!” is displayed in the multi-information display
“Switch to Brake” is displayed in the multi-information display
■ Brake Control
If the accelerator is continuously depressed even after the hybrid system output is
being controlled, the brakes are engaged and the vehicle decelerates.
Accelerator pedal
Brake pedal
Hybrid system output
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
A
B
C
257
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
Braking force
ON
OFF
Control starts
Collision is likely
DOWN
Collision possibility is very high
UP
“BRAKE!” is displayed in the multi-information display
“Switch to Brake” is displayed in the multi-information display
■ Operation starting conditions
When the PKSB OFF indicator is not illumi-
nated or flashing (P.254, 392) and all of
the following conditions are met, the system
operates.
● Hybrid system output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake function (for
static objects) is on.
• The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or
less.
• There is a static object in the traveling
direction of the vehicle (6 to 13 ft. [2 to 4
m] ahead).
• The system determined that a stronger-
than-normal brake operation was neces-
sary to avoid a collision.
● Brake control
• Hybrid system output restriction control
is being performed.
• The system determined that an emer-
gency brake operation was necessary to
avoid a collision.
■ Operation ending conditions
In any of the following situations, the system
stops operating.
● Hybrid system output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake function (for
static objects) has been turned off
(stopped).
• The collision became avoidable with nor-
mal brake operation.
• The static object is no longer in the travel-
ing direction of the vehicle (6 to 13 ft. [2
to 4 m] ahead).
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake function (for
static objects) has been turned off
(stopped).
• Approximately 2 seconds elapsed after
the vehicle was stopped by brake control.
• The brake pedal was depressed after the
vehicle was stopped by brake control.
• The static object is no longer in the travel-
ing direction of the vehicle (6 to 13 ft. [2
to 4 m] ahead).
■ Sensor detection range
The detection range of the Parking Support
Brake function (for static objects) differs
from the detection range of the clearance
sonar (P.251).
Therefore, even if the clearance sonar
detects a static object and provides a warn-
ing, the Parking Support Brake function (for
static objects) may not start operating.
■ Static objects not detected by the sen-
sors
The following static objects may not be
detected by the sensors.
● Objects such as people, cloth and snow,
that are difficult for sonic waves to reflect
off of. (In particular, people may also not
be detected depending on the type of
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
258
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
clothing they are wearing.)
● Objects not perpendicular with the
ground, objects not at a right angle to the
traveling direction of the vehicle, uneven
objects or waving objects
● Low objects
● Thin objects such as wires, fences, ropes
and signposts
● Objects that are extremely close to the
bumper
● Sharply-angled objects
● Tall objects with upper sections project-
ing outwards in the direction of your vehi-
cle
■ Situations in which the Parking Support
Brake function (for static objects) may
not operate
When driving with the shift lever in N
■ Situations when the system may operate
even though there is no possibility of a
collision
In the following situations, the system may
operate even though there is no possibility
of a collision.
● Environmental influence
• The vehicle is driven on a narrow road
• The vehicle is driven on a gravel road or
in an area with tall grass
• The vehicle is driven toward a banner or
flag, a low-hanging branch or a boom
barrier (such as those used at railroad
crossings, toll gates and parking lots).
• There is a static object on the shoulder of
the road (when the vehicle is driven in a
narrow tunnel, on a narrow bridge or on a
narrow road)
• The vehicle is being parallel parked
• There is a rut or hole in the surface of the
road
• When the vehicle is driven on a metal
cover (grating), such as those used for
drainage ditches
• The vehicle is driven on a steep slope
• The sensor is covered by water on a
flooded road
● Influence from the weather
• Ice, snow, dirt, etc., has adhered to the
sensor (if removed, the system returns to
normal)
• Heavy rain or water strikes the vehicle
• In severe weather such as fog, snow or a
sand storm
● Influence from other sonic waves
• An ultrasonic wave source is nearby, such
as the horn or clearance sonar of another
vehicle, a vehicle detector, a motorcycle
engine or the air brake of a large vehicle
• Electronic components (such as a backlit
license plate (especially fluorescent
types), fog lights, a fender pole or a wire-
less antenna) are installed near the sen-
sors
● Changes in the vehicle
• The vehicle is tilted a large amount
• The height of the vehicle has drastically
changed due to the carried load (the
nose tilts up or down)
• The direction of the sensor has deviated
due to a collision or other impact
■ Situations in which the system may not
operate normally
In the following situations, the system may
not operate normally.
● Environmental influence
• There is a static object that cannot be
detected between the vehicle and
another static object that can be
detected
• A static object such as another vehicle, a
motorcycle, a bicycle or a pedestrian cuts
in front of the vehicle or jumps out from
259
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
the side.
● Influence from the weather
• The area around the sensor is extremely
hot or cold
• The wind is strong
• Ice, snow, dirt, etc., has adhered to the
sensor (if removed, the system returns to
normal)
• Heavy rain or water strikes the vehicle
• In severe weather such as fog, snow or a
sand storm
● Influence from other sonic waves
• An ultrasonic wave source is nearby, such
as the horn or clearance sonar of another
vehicle, a vehicle detector, a motorcycle
engine or the air brake of a large vehicle
• Electronic components (such as a backlit
license plate (especially fluorescent
types), fog lights, a fender pole or a wire-
less antenna) are installed near the sen-
sors
● Changes in the vehicle
• The vehicle is tilted a large amount
• The height of the vehicle has drastically
changed due to the carried load (the
nose tilts up or down)
• The direction of the sensor has deviated
due to a collision or other impact
■ When “Parking Support Brake Unavail-
able” is displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display and the PKSB OFF indicator
flashes
● Ice, snow, dirt, etc., may have adhered to
the sensor. If this occurs, remove the ice,
snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to return
the system to normal.
Also, a warning message may be dis-
played at low temperatures due to ice
forming on the sensor, and the sensor
may not detect static objects. Once the
ice melts, the system will return to normal.
● If this message is shown even after
removing dirt from the sensor, or shown
when the sensor was not dirty to begin
with, have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
● System initialization may not have been
performed after removal and installation
of the 12-volt battery. Perform system ini-
tialization.
■ When removing and installing the 12-
volt battery
The system needs to be initialized.
The system can be initialized by driving the
vehicle straight ahead for 5 seconds or
more at a speed of approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) or higher.
■ When “Parking Support Brake Mal-
function Visit Your Dealer” is displayed
on the multi-information display, the
PKSB OFF indicator flashes and the
buzzer sounds
The system may not be operating properly.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
WARNING
■ In order for the system to operate
properly
Make sure to observe the following pre-
cautions regarding the sensors
(P.251). Failure to observe these pre-
cautions may cause the sensors not to
operate properly, and may result in an
unexpected accident.
● Do not perform work such as modifi-
cation, disassembly or painting
● Only perform replacements using
genuine parts
260
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
When the hybrid system output restric-
tion control or brake control operates,
the buzzer sounds and a message is
displayed on the multi-information dis-
play, head-up display and naviga-
tion/multimedia system screen to alert
the driver.
Depending on the situation, output restric-
tion control operates to either limit accel-
eration or restrict output as much as
possible.
■ Hybrid system output restriction
control is operating (acceleration
limitation control)
■ Hybrid system output restriction
control is operating (control to
restrict output as much as possible)
● Do not subject the area around the
sensors to any impacts
● Do not damage the sensors, and
always keep them clean
■ Handling the suspension
Do not modify the suspension, as
changes to the height or incline of the
vehicle may prevent the sensors from
correctly detecting static objects, may
cause the system not operate, or may
cause the system to operate unnecessar-
ily.
NOTICE
■ Preventing unnecessary operation
In the following situations, turn the Park-
ing Support Brake function (for static
objects) OFF. The system may operate
even though there is no possibility of a
collision.
● A chassis roller, chassis dynamo, free
roller or similar equipment is being
used for an inspection, etc.
● The vehicle is being loaded onto a ship,
truck or other transport vessel
● The suspension has been lowered or
tires that have a different size than the
genuine tires are equipped
● The height of the vehicle has drastically
changed due to the carried load (the
nose tilts up or down).
● A towing hook is installed
● When using an automatic car wash
Display and buzzer for hybrid
system output restriction con-
trol and brake control
Situation
Acceleration at a certain
speed or higher is not
possible.
Multi-informa-
tion dis-
play/Head-up
display
“Object Detected Accel-
eration Reduced”
Naviga-
tion/multime-
dia system
screen
PKSB OFF
Indicator
Not illuminated
Buzzer
Situation
A stronger than normal
brake operation is neces-
sary
Multi-informa-
tion dis-
play/Head-up
display
“BRAKE!”
Naviga-
tion/multime-
dia system
screen
261
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ Brake control is operating
■ The vehicle is stopped by system
operation
*
: If the accelerator pedal is not depressed,
“Press Brake Pedal” will be displayed.
■ If the Parking Support Brake has oper-
ated
If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of
the Parking Support Brake, the Parking
Support Brake will be disabled and the
PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate. If the
Parking Support Brake operates unneces-
sarily, brake control can be canceled by
depressing the brake pedal or waiting for
approximately 2 seconds for it to automati-
cally be canceled. Then, the vehicle can be
operated by depressing the accelerator
pedal.
■ Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake
To re-enable the Parking Support Brake
when it has been disabled due to system
operation, perform any of the following
operations. At this time, the PKSB OFF indi-
cator will turn off (P.82)
● Turn the PKSB system on (P.254)
● Turn the power switch off, and then back
to ON mode
● Shift the shift lever to P
● Drive with no operation targets in the
traveling direction of the vehicle
● Change the traveling direction of the
vehicle
■ Lexus parking assist-sensor buzzer
Regardless of whether the Lexus parking
assist-sensor buzzer is enabled or not
(P.248), if the Parking Support Brake
function (static objects) is enabled
(P.254), the front or rear sensors detect
an object and brake control is performed,
the Lexus parking assist-sensor buzzer will
sound to notify the driver of the approxi-
mate distance to the object.
■ In the unlikely event that the Parking
Support Brake function (for static
objects) mistakenly operates at a cross-
ing or elsewhere
Even in the unlikely event that the Parking
Support Brake function (for static objects)
mistakenly operates at a crossing or else-
where, brake control is canceled after
approximately 2 seconds, allowing you to
proceed forward and leave the area. Fur-
thermore, brake control is also canceled
PKSB OFF
Indicator
Not illuminated
Buzzer Short beep
Situation
Emergency braking is
necessary
Multi-informa-
tion dis-
play/Head-up
display
“BRAKE!”
Naviga-
tion/multime-
dia system
screen
PKSB OFF
Indicator
Not illuminated
Buzzer Short beep
Situation
The vehicle is stopped
after brake control oper-
ation
Multi-informa-
tion dis-
play/Head-up
display
“Switch to Brake”
*
Naviga-
tion/multime-
dia system
screen
“Press Brake Pedal”
PKSB OFF
Indicator
Illuminated
Buzzer Short beep
262
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
when the brake pedal is depressed.
Depressing the accelerator pedal again
allows you to proceed forward and leave
the area.
*
: If equipped
BSM main switch
Pressing the switch turns the system on or
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
*
The Blind Spot Monitor uses the
sensors installed behind the rear
bumper. The system is intended to
assist the driver check areas that
are not easily visible. The system
has the following 2 functions:
The Blind Spot Monitor function
Assists the driver in making the decision
when changing lanes
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert func-
tion
Assists the driver when backing up
These functions use the same sen-
sors.
System components
A
263
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
off. When the switch is set to on, the
switch’s indicator illuminates and the
buzzer sounds. This switch is for both Blind
Spot Monitor function and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert function.
BSM outside rear view mirror indi-
cators
Blind Spot Monitor function:
When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot
of the outside rear view mirrors or
approaching rapidly from behind into a
blind spot, the outside rear view mirror
indicator on the detected side will illumi-
nate. If the turn signal lever is operated
toward the detected side, the outside rear
view mirror indicator will flash.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function:
When a vehicle approaching from the right
or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected,
both outside rear view mirror indicators
will flash.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
only)
When a vehicle approaching from the right
or left rear of the vehicle is detected, a
buzzer sounds from behind the right-hand
rear seat.
Navigation/multimedia system
screen (Rear Cross Traffic Alert
function only)
If a vehicle approaching from the right or
left at the rear of the vehicle is detected,
the Rear Cross Traffic Alert icon (P.267)
for the detected side will be displayed.
■ The BSM outside rear view mirror indi-
cators visibility
When under strong sunlight, the BSM out-
side rear view mirror indicator may be diffi-
cult to see.
■ Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer hearing
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may be
difficult to hear over loud noises such as
high audio volume.
■ When “Blind Spot Monitor Unavailable”
is shown on the multi-information dis-
play
Water, snow mud, etc., may be built up in
the vicinity of the sensor area of bumper.
(P.265) Removing the water, snow, mud,
etc., from the vicinity of the sensor area
bumper should return it to normal. Also, the
sensor may not function normally when
used in extremely hot or cold weather.
■ When “Blind Spot Monitor System Mal-
function Visit Your Dealer” is shown on
the multi-information display
There may be a sensor malfunction or volt-
age abnormality. Have the vehicle
inspected at a Lexus dealer.
B
C
D
264
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
For vehicles sold in Canada
265
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
The Blind Spot Monitor function uses
radar sensors to detect vehicles that
are traveling in an adjacent lane in the
area that is not reflected in the outside
rear view mirror (the blind spot), and
advises the driver of the vehicles exis-
tence via the BSM outside rear view
mirror indicator.
■ The Blind Spot Monitor function
detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be
detected in are outlined below.
The range of the detection area extends to:
Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from
the side of the vehicle
The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the
vehicle is not in the detection area
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from
the rear bumper
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward
of the rear bumper
■ The Blind Spot Monitor function is oper-
ational when
● The BSM main switch is set to on
● Vehicle speed is greater than approxi-
mately 10 mph (16 km/h).
■ The Blind Spot Monitor function will
detect a vehicle when
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes
WARNING
■ Handling the radar sensor
One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is
installed inside the left and right side of
the vehicle rear bumper respectively.
Observe the following to ensure the
Blind Spot Monitor system can function
correctly.
● Keep the sensor and its surrounding
area on the bumper clean at all times.
● Do not subject the sensor or surround-
ing area on the bumper to a strong
impact. If the sensor moves even
slightly off position, the system may
malfunction and vehicles that enter the
detection area may not be detected. If
the sensor or surrounding area is sub-
ject to a strong impact, always have the
area inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers
to the sensor or surrounding area on
the bumper.
● Do not modify the sensor or surround-
ing area on the bumper.
● Do not paint the rear bumper any
color other than an official Lexus color.
● If the radar sensor needs to be
replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
The Blind Spot Monitor function
A
B
C
266
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
your vehicle.
● Another vehicle enters the detection
area when it changes lanes.
● You overtake a vehicle in adjacent lane
slowly.
■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot
Monitor function will not detect a vehi-
cle
The Blind Spot Monitor function is not
designed to detect the following types of
vehicles and/or objects:
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians,
etc.
*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direc-
tion
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles
and similar stationary objects
*
● Following vehicles that are in the same
lane
*
● Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your
vehicle
*
● Vehicles which are being overtaken rap-
idly by your vehicle
*
*
: Depending on conditions, detection of a
vehicle and/or object may occur.
■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot
Monitor function may not function cor-
rectly
● The Blind Spot Monitor function may not
detect vehicles correctly in the following
situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned due to a
strong impact to the sensor or its sur-
rounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is
covering the sensor or surrounding area
on the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is
wet with standing water during bad
weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are approaching
with only a small gap between each vehi-
cle
• When the distance between your vehicle
and a following vehicle is short
• When there is a significant difference in
speed between your vehicle and the vehi-
cle that enters the detection area
• When the difference in speed between
your vehicle and another vehicle is
changing
• When a vehicle enters a detection area
traveling at about the same speed as your
vehicle
• As your vehicle starts from a stop, a vehi-
cle remains in the detection area
• When driving up and down consecutive
steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the
road, etc.
• When driving on roads with sharp bends,
consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
• When vehicle lanes are wide, or when
driving on the edge of a lane, and the
vehicle in an adjacent lane is far away
from your vehicle
• When towing a trailer (vehicles with tow-
ing package)
• When items such as a bicycle carrier are
installed on the rear of the vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in
height between your vehicle and the
vehicle that enters the detection area
• Immediately after the Blind Spot Monitor
function is turned on
● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor func-
tion unnecessarily detecting a vehicle
and/or object may increase in the follow-
ing situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned due to a
strong impact to the sensor or its sur-
rounding area
• When the distance between your vehicle
and a guardrail, wall, etc. that enters the
detection area is short
• When driving up and down consecutive
steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the
road, etc.
• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when
driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehi-
cle traveling in a lane other than the adja-
cent lanes enters the detection area
• When driving on roads with sharp bends,
consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
• When the tires are slipping or spinning
• When the distance between your vehicle
and a following vehicle is short
• When a bicycle carrier or other acces-
sory is installed to the rear of the vehicle
• When towing a trailer (vehicles with tow-
ing package)
267
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function operates when your vehicle is in reverse. It
can detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle. It
uses radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehicle’s existence through flash-
ing the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.
Approaching vehicles
Detection areas
■ Rear Cross Traffic Alert icon dis-
play (if equipped)
When a vehicle approaching from the
right or left at the rear of the vehicle is
detected, the following will be dis-
played on the navigation/multimedia
system screen.
Lexus parking assist monitor
A vehicle is approaching from the left
or right at the rear of the vehicle
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of the sys-
tem
The driver is solely responsible for safe
driving. Always drive safely, taking care
to observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor function is a sup-
plementary function which alerts the
driver that a vehicle is present in the blind
spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot
Monitor function. The function cannot
judge if it is safe to change lanes, there-
fore over reliance could cause an acci-
dent resulting in death or serious injury.
According to conditions, the system may
not function correctly. Therefore the
driver’s own visual confirmation of safety
is necessary.
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function
A
B
268
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Panoramic view monitor
A vehicle is approaching from the left
or right at the rear of the vehicle
■ The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
To give the driver a more consistent
time to react, the buzzer can alert for
faster vehicles from farther away.
Example:
■ The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is
operational when
● The BSM main switch is set to on.
● The shift lever is in R.
● Vehicle speed is less than approximately
5 mph (8 km/h).
● Approaching vehicle speed is between
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 18
mph (28 km/h).
■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross
Traffic Alert function will not detect a
vehicle
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is not
designed to detect the following types of
vehicles and/or objects.
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians,
etc.
*
● Vehicles approaching from directly
behind
*
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles
and similar stationary objects
*
● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the parking
Approach-
ing vehicle
Speed
Approxi-
mate alert
distance
Fast
18 mph (28
km/h)
65 ft. (20 m)
Slow
5 mph (8
km/h)
18 ft. (5.5 m)
A
269
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
spaces next to your vehicle
*
● Vehicles backing up in the parking space
next to your vehicle
*
*
: Depending on conditions, detection of a
vehicle and/or object may occur.
■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross
Traffic Alert function may not function
correctly
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may
not detect vehicles correctly in the follow-
ing conditions:
● During bad weather such as heavy rain,
fog, snow, etc.
● When ice or mud, etc., is attached to the
rear bumper
● When multiple vehicles approach contin-
uously
● Shallow angle parking
● When a vehicle is approaching at high
speed
● When backing up on a slope with a sharp
change in grade
● When backing out of a sharp angle park-
ing spot
● When parking on a steep incline, such as
hills, a dip in the road, etc.
● Directly after the BSM main switch is set
to on
● Directly after the hybrid system is started
with the BSM main switch on
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect
because of obstacles
● Instances of the Rear Cross Traffic Alert
function unnecessary detecting a vehicle
and/or object may increase in the follow-
ing situations:
• When a vehicle passes by the side of your
vehicle
• When the parking space faces a street
and vehicles are being driven on the
street
• When the distance between your vehicle
and metal objects, such as a guardrail,
wall, sigh, or parked vehicle, which may
reflect electrical waves toward the rear of
the vehicle, is short
270
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Vehicles without Adaptive Variable
Suspension System
1 Normal mode
For normal driving.
Press the switch to change the driving
mode to Normal mode when selected to
Eco mode or Sport mode.
2 Eco mode
In contrast to Normal mode when stepping
on the accelerator pedal, torque genera-
tion becomes slower, air conditioning
operations (heating/cooling) are
restrained, and driving is suited for
improved fuel consumption.
When not in Eco mode and the driving
mode select switch is turned to the left,
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of the sys-
tem
The driver is solely responsible for safe
driving. Always drive safely, taking care
to observe your surroundings.
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is
only an assist and is not a replacement for
careful driving. Driver must be careful
when backing up, even when using Rear
Cross Traffic Alert function. The driver’s
own visual confirmation of behind you
and your vehicle is necessary and be sure
there are no pedestrians, other vehicles,
etc., before backing up. Failure to do so
could cause death or serious injury.
According to conditions, the system may
not function correctly. Therefore the
driver’s own visual confirmation of safety
is necessary.
Driving mode select switch
The driving modes can be selected
to suit driving conditions.
Selecting a driving mode
271
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
“Eco” indicator will be shown on the multi-
information display.
3 Sport mode
Assists acceleration response by con-
trolling the hybrid system and steering.
Suitable for when precise handling is desir-
able, for example when driving on moun-
tain roads.
When not in Sport mode and the driving
mode select switch is turned to the right,
“Sport” indicator will be shown on the
multi-information display and the hybrid
system indicator changes to the tachome-
ter. (P.84)
Vehicles with Adaptive Variable
Suspension System
1 Normal/Custom mode
Press the switch and select Normal mode
or Custom mode. Each time the switch is
pressed, the system changes between
Normal mode and Custom mode. When
Custom mode is selected, the “Custom”
indicator comes on.
When in Eco mode or Sport mode, when
the switch is pressed, the system returns to
Normal mode. Press the switch to change
the driving mode to Normal mode when
selected to Eco mode or Sport mode.
Custom mode can be setup on the naviga-
tion system or multimedia system screen.
• Normal mode
Suitable when driving in the city, for good
fuel consumption efficiency, silence, and
drive-ability.
• Custom mode
Driving is possible by setting the desired
function for power train control, chassis
control or air conditioning operations.
Custom mode settings can only be
changed using the Remote Touch.
(P.286)
2 Eco mode
In contrast to Normal mode when stepping
on the accelerator pedal, torque genera-
tion becomes slower, air conditioning
operations (heating/cooling) are
restrained, and driving is suited for
improved fuel consumption.
When not in Eco mode and the driving
mode select switch is turned to the left,
“Eco” indicator will be shown on the multi-
information display.
3 Sport mode
• Sport S mode
Assists acceleration response by con-
trolling the hybrid system and transmission.
Suitable for when powerful acceleration is
desirable.
When not in Sport S mode and the driving
mode select switch is turned to the right,
“Sport S” indicator will be shown on the
multi-information display.
•Sport S+ mode
Helps to ensure superior vehicle stability
by simultaneously controlling the steering
and suspension in addition to the hybrid
system and transmission. Suitable for
sporty driving.
272
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
When in Sport S mode and the driving
mode select switch is turned to the right,
“Sport S+” indicator will be shown on the
multi-information display.
■ Operation of the air conditioning sys-
tem in Eco mode
Eco mode controls the heating/cooling
operations and fan speed of the air condi-
tioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. To
improve air conditioning performance,
adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco mode.
■ When canceling Eco mode/Sport mode
● Select another driving mode. Also, Sport
mode will be canceled automatically
when the power switch is turned off.
● Normal mode and Eco mode will not be
canceled automatically until another driv-
ing mode is selected, even if the power
switch is turned off.
■ Operating the ASC (Active Sound
Control)
If the ASC is ON, an electronic sound plays
when the Sport S+ mode is selected.
■ Customization
The Custom mode can be changed. (Cus-
tomizable features: P.443)
■ ECB (Electronically Controlled
Brake System)
The electronically controlled system
generates braking force correspond-
ing to the brake operation
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the
brakes are applied suddenly, or if the
brakes are applied while driving on a
slippery road surface
■ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of brak-
ing force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a
panic stop situation
■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding
when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces.
■ Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehi-
cle Stability Control)
Provides cooperative control of the
ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.
Driving assist systems
To keep driving safety and perfor-
mance, the following systems oper-
ate automatically in response to
various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are
supplementary and should not be
relied upon too heavily when oper-
ating the vehicle.
Summary of the driving assist
systems
273
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
Helps to maintain directional stability
when swerving on slippery road sur-
faces by controlling steering perfor-
mance.
■ Trailer Sway Control
Helps the driver to control trailer sway
by selectively applying brake pressure
for individual wheels and reducing
driving torque when trailer sway is
detected.
■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and pre-
vent the drive wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerat-
ing on slippery roads
■ Active Cornering Assist (ACA)
Helps to prevent the vehicle from drift-
ing to the outer side by performing
inner wheel brake control when
attempting to accelerate while turning
■ Hill-start assist control
Helps to reduce the backward move-
ment of the vehicle when starting on an
uphill
■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce
the amount of effort needed to turn the
steering wheel
■ E-Four
Electronic On-Demand AWD system.
Automatically switches from front-
wheel drive to all-wheel drive (AWD)
according to the driving conditions,
helping to ensure reliable handling and
stability. Examples of conditions where
the system will switch to AWD are
when cornering, going uphill, starting
off or accelerating, and when the road
surface is slippery due to snow, rain,
etc.
■ AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspen-
sion system) (if equipped)
By independently controlling the
damping force of the shock absorbers
for each of the 4 wheels according to
the road and driving conditions, this
system helps riding comfort with supe-
rior vehicle stability, and helps good
vehicle posture. If Sport S+ mode is
selected using the driving mode select
switch, the damping force will become
more suitable for sporty driving.
(P.270)
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System)
P.211
■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (if
equipped)
P.262
■ When the TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer
Sway Control systems are operating
The slip indicator light will flash while the
TRAC/VSC/ABS/Trailer Sway Control
systems are operating.
■ Disabling the TRAC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow,
the TRAC system may reduce power from
the hybrid system to the wheels. Pressing
274
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
to turn the system off may make it eas-
ier for you to rock the vehicle in order to
free it.
To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press
and release .
The “Traction Control Turned Off” will be
shown on the multi-information display.
Press again to turn the system back on.
■ Turning off both TRAC, VSC and Trailer
Sway Control systems
To turn the TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway
Control systems off, press and hold for
more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is
stopped. The VSC OFF indicator light will
come on and the “Traction Control Turned
Off” will be shown on the multi-information
display.
*
Press again to turn the system
back on.
*
: On vehicles with pre-collision system,
pre-collision brake assist and pre-colli-
sion braking will also be disabled. The
PCS warning light will come on and the
message will be shown on the multi-infor-
mation display. (P.217)
■ When the message is displayed on the
multi-information display showing that
TRAC has been disabled even if has
not been pressed
TRAC is temporary deactivated. If the infor-
mation continues to show, contact your
Lexus dealer.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the
ABS, brake assist, VSC, Trailer Sway
Control, TRAC and hill-start assist con-
trol systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine
compartment when the brake pedal is
depressed repeatedly, when the hybrid
system is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This sound does not indi-
cate that a malfunction has occurred in
any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may
occur when the above systems are oper-
ating. None of these indicates that a mal-
function has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle
body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard also after
the vehicle comes to a stop.
■ ECB operating sound
ECB operating sound may be heard in the
following cases, but it does not indicate that
a malfunction has occurred.
● Operating sound heard from the engine
compartment when the brake pedal is
operated.
● Motor sound of the brake system heard
from the front part of the vehicle when
the driver’s door is opened.
● Operating sound heard from the engine
compartment when one or two minutes
passed after the stop of the hybrid sys-
tem.
■ Active Cornering Assist operation
sounds and vibrations
When the Active Cornering Assist is oper-
ated, operation sounds and vibrations may
be generated from the brake system, but
this is not a malfunction.
275
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
■ EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a
motor sound (whirring sound) may be
heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS sys-
tem
The effectiveness of the EPS system is
reduced to prevent the system from over-
heating when there is frequent steering
input over an extended period of time. The
steering wheel may feel heavy as a result.
Should this occur, refrain from excessive
steering input or stop the vehicle and turn
the hybrid system off. The EPS system
should return to normal within 10 minutes.
■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC, Trailer
Sway Control and VSC systems
After turning the TRAC, Trailer Sway Con-
trol and VSC systems off, the systems will
be automatically re-enabled in the following
situations:
● When the power switch is turned off
● If only the TRAC system is turned off, the
TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed
increases
If both the TRAC and VSC systems are
turned off, automatic re-enabling will not
occur when vehicle speed increases.
■ Operating conditions of Active Corner-
ing Assist
The system operates when the following
occurs.
● TRAC/VSC can operate
● The driver is attempting to accelerate
while turning
● The system detects that the vehicle is
drifting to the outer side
● The brake pedal is released
■ Operating conditions of hill-start assist
control
When the following four conditions are met,
the hill-start assist control will operate:
● The shift lever is in a position other than P
or N (when starting off forward/back-
ward on an upward incline)
● The vehicle is stopped
● The accelerator pedal is not depressed
● The parking brake is not engaged
■ Automatic system cancelation of hill-
start assist control
The hill-start assist control will turn off in any
of the following situations:
● The shift lever is shifted to P or N
● The accelerator pedal is depressed
● The parking brake is engaged
● 2 seconds at maximum elapsed after the
brake pedal is released
WARNING
■ The ABS does not operate effectively
when
● The limits of tire gripping performance
have been exceeded (such as exces-
sively worn tires on a snow covered
road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving
at high speed on wet or slick roads.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is
operating may exceed that of normal
conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the
vehicle’s stopping distance. Always main-
tain a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you, especially in the following
situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-
covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes
or uneven surfaces
■ TRAC/VSC may not operate effec-
tively when
Directional control and power may not
be achievable while driving on slippery
road surfaces, even if the TRAC/VSC
system is operating. Drive the vehicle
carefully in conditions where stability and
power may be lost.
276
4-5. Using the driving support systems
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
WARNING
■ Active Cornering Assist does not
operate effectively when
● Do not overly rely on Active Corner-
ing Assist. Active Cornering Assist
may not operate effectively when
accelerating down slopes or driving on
slippery road surfaces.
● When Active Cornering Assist fre-
quently operates, Active Cornering
Assist may temporarily stop operating
to ensure proper operation of the
brakes, TRAC and VSC.
■ Hill-start assist control does not oper-
ate effectively when
● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist
control. Hill-start assist control may
not operate effectively on steep
inclines and roads covered with ice.
● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start
assist control is not intended to hold
the vehicle stationary for an extended
period of time. Do not attempt to use
hill-start assist control to hold the vehi-
cle on an incline, as doing so may lead
to an accident.
■ When the TRAC/ABS/VSC/Trailer
Sway Control is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always
drive carefully. Reckless driving may
cause an accident. Exercise particular
care when the indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway
Control systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed
appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are the systems to help ensure
vehicle stability and driving force, do not
turn the TRAC/VSC/Trailer Sway Con-
trol systems off unless necessary. Trailer
Sway Control is part of the VSC system
and will not operate if VSC is turned off
or experiences a malfunction.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the speci-
fied size, brand, tread pattern and total
load capacity. In addition, make sure that
the tires are inflated to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure level. The
ABS, TRAC, Trailer Sway Control and
VSC systems will not function correctly if
different tires are installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further
information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■ Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or
modifying the suspension will affect the
driving assist systems, and may cause a
system to malfunction.
■ Trailer Sway Control precaution
The Trailer Sway Control system is not
able to reduce trailer sway in all situa-
tions. Depending on many factors such
as the conditions of the vehicle, trailer,
road surface and driving environment,
the Trailer Sway Control system may not
be effective. Refer to your trailer owner’s
manual for information on how to tow
your trailer properly.
■ If trailer sway occurs
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or seri-
ous injury.
● Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer
straight ahead. Do not try to control
trailer sway by turning the steering
wheel.
● Begin releasing the accelerator pedal
immediately but very gradually to
reduce speed. Do not increase speed.
Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with
the steering or brakes, your vehicle and
trailer should stabilize. (P.273)
277
4-6. Driving tips
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
4-6.Driving t ips
When using Eco mode, the torque cor-
responding to the accelerator pedal
depression amount can be generated
more smoothly than it is in normal con-
ditions. In addition, the operation of the
air conditioning system (heating/cool-
ing) will be minimized, improving the
fuel economy. (P.270)
The Eco-friendly driving is possible by
keeping the indicator needle of Hybrid
System Indicator within Eco area.
(P.87)
Shift the shift lever to D when stopped
at a traffic light, or driving in heavy traf-
fic, etc. Shift the shift lever to P when
parking. When using the N, there is no
positive effect on fuel consumption. In
the N, the gasoline engine operates
but electricity cannot be generated.
Also, when using the air conditioning
system, etc., the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) power is consumed.
Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid
abrupt acceleration and decelera-
tion. Gradual acceleration and
deceleration will make more effec-
tive use of the electric motor (trac-
tion motor) without having to use
gasoline engine power.
Avoid repeated acceleration.
Repeated acceleration consumes
hybrid battery (traction battery)
power, resulting in poor fuel con-
sumption. Battery power can be
restored by driving with the acceler-
ator pedal slightly released.
Make sure to operate the brakes gently
and in a timely manner. A greater
amount of electrical energy can be
regenerated when slowing down.
Repeated acceleration and decelera-
tion, as well as long waits at traffic
lights, will lead to bad fuel economy.
Check traffic reports before leaving
and avoid delays as much as possible.
When driving in a traffic jam, gently
release the brake pedal to allow the
vehicle to move forward slightly while
avoiding overuse of the accelerator
pedal. Doing so can help control
excessive gasoline consumption.
Hybrid vehicle driving tips
For economical and ecological
driving, pay attention to the follow-
ing points:
Using Eco mode
Use of Hybrid System Indicator
Shift lever operation
Accelerator pedal/brake pedal
operation
When braking
Delays
278
4-6. Driving tips
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Control and maintain the vehicle at a
constant speed. Before stopping at a
toll booth or similar, allow plenty of
time to release the accelerator and
gently apply the brakes. A greater
amount of electrical energy can be
regenerated when slowing down.
Use the air conditioning only when
necessary. Doing so can help reduce
excessive gasoline consumption.
In summer: When the ambient tem-
perature is high, use the recirculated
air mode. Doing so will help to reduce
the burden on the air conditioning sys-
tem and reduce fuel consumption as
well.
In winter: Because the gasoline engine
will not automatically cut out until it and
the interior of the vehicle are warm, it
will consume fuel. Also, fuel consump-
tion can be improved by avoiding over-
use of the heater.
Make sure to check the tire inflation
pressure frequently. Improper tire infla-
tion pressure can cause poor fuel
economy.
Also, as snow tires can cause large
amounts of friction, their use on dry
roads can lead to poor fuel economy.
Use tires that are appropriate for the
season.
Carrying heavy luggage will lead to
poor fuel economy. Avoid carrying
unnecessary luggage. Installing a large
roof rack will also cause poor fuel
economy.
Since the gasoline engine starts up and
cuts out automatically when cold,
warming up the engine is unnecessary.
Moreover, frequently driving short dis-
tances will cause the engine to repeat-
edly warm up, which can lead to excess
fuel consumption.
Highway driving
Air conditioning
Checking tire inflation pressure
Luggage
Warming up before driving
279
4-6. Driving tips
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
Use fluids that are appropriate to
the prevailing outside temperatures.
•Engine oil
• Engine/power control unit coolant
•Washer fluid
Have a service technician inspect
the condition of the 12-volt battery.
Have the vehicle fitted with four
snow tires or purchase a set of tire
chains for the front tires
*
.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and
brand, and that chains match the size of the
tires.
*
: Tire chains cannot be mounted on the
225/60R18 tires.
Perform the following according to the
driving conditions:
Do not try to forcibly open a window
or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour
warm water over the frozen area to
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary prepara-
tions and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive
the vehicle in a manner appropriate
to the prevailing weather condi-
tions.
Preparation for winter
WARNING
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do
so may result in a loss of vehicle control
and cause death or serious injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended level of air
pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120
km/h), regardless of the type of snow
tires being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some
wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do
so may result in the vehicle being unable
to be driven safely, and may cause death
or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed
limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), which-
ever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces
or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt
steering, sudden braking and shifting
operations that cause sudden engine
braking.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering
a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.
● Do not use LDA (Lane Departure
Alert with steering control) (if
equipped).
● Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
(if equipped).
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow
tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire
retailers. This is because the removal and
attachment of snow tires affects the
operation of the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters.
Before driving the vehicle
280
4-6. Driving tips
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
melt the ice. Wipe away the water
immediately to prevent it from
freezing.
To ensure proper operation of the
climate control system fan, remove
any snow that has accumulated on
the air inlet vents in front of the
windshield.
Check for and remove any excess
ice or snow that may have accumu-
lated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s
roof, chassis, around the tires or on
the brakes.
Remove any snow or mud from the
bottom of your shoes before getting
in the vehicle.
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a
safe distance between you and the
vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced
speed suitable to road conditions.
Park the vehicle and move the shift
lever to P without setting the park-
ing brake. The parking brake may
freeze up, preventing it from being
released. If the vehicle is parked
without setting the parking brake,
make sure to block the wheels.
Failure to do so may be dangerous
because it may cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly, possibly lead-
ing to an accident.
When the parking brake is in automatic
mode, release the parking brake after shift-
ing the shift lever to P. (P.184)
If the vehicle is left parked with the
brakes damp in cold temperatures,
there is a possibility of the brakes
freezing.
If the vehicle is parked without set-
ting the parking brake, confirm that
the shift lever cannot be moved out
of P
*
.
*
: The shift lever will be locked if it is
attempted to be shifted from P to any
other position without depressing the
brake pedal. If the shift lever can be
shifted from P, there may be a problem
with the shift lock system. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
Use the correct tire chain size when
mounting the tire chains. Chain size is
regulated for each tire size.
Vehicles with 225/65R17 tires
When driving the vehicle
When parking the vehicle
WARNING
■ When parking the vehicle
When parking the vehicle without apply-
ing the parking brake, make sure to
chock the wheels. If you do not chock the
wheels, the vehicle may move unexpect-
edly, possibly resulting in an accident.
Selecting tire chains
281
4-6. Driving tips
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
Side chain:
0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
0.39 in. (10 mm) in width
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
Cross chain:
0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter
0.55 in. (14 mm) in width
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
Vehicles with 225/60R18 tires
Tire chains cannot be mounted on the
225/60R18 tires.
Snow tires should be used instead.
Regulations regarding the use of tire
chains vary depending on location and
type of road. Always check local regu-
lations before installing chains.
■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when
installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe
location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires only.
Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.
● Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as
possible. Retighten chains after driving
1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instruc-
tions provided with the tire chains.
Regulations on the use of tire
chains
A
B
C
D
E
F
NOTICE
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.
282
4-6. Driving tips
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Specific design characteristics give
it a higher center of gravity than
ordinary passenger cars. This vehi-
cle design feature causes this type
of vehicle to be more likely to roll-
over. Utility vehicles have a signifi-
cantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
It is not designed for cornering at
the same speeds as ordinary pas-
senger cars any more than low-
slung sports cars designed to per-
form satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at
excessive speeds may cause roll-
over.
Your vehicle is not designed to be
driven off-road. However, in the event
that off-road driving cannot be
avoided, please observe the following
precautions to help avoid the areas
prohibited to vehicles.
Drive your vehicle only in areas
where off-road vehicles are permit-
ted to travel.
Respect private property. Get
owner’s permission before entering
private property.
Do not enter areas that are closed.
Honor gates, barriers and signs that
Utility vehicle precautions
This vehicle belongs to the utility
vehicle class, which has higher
ground clearance and narrower
tread in relation to the height of its
center of gravity.
Utility vehicle feature
WARNING
■ Utility vehicle precautions
Always observe the following precau-
tions to minimize the risk of death or seri-
ous injury or damage to your vehicle:
● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt. Therefore,
the driver and all passengers should
always fasten their seat belts.
● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
vers, if at all possible.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover causing death or serious
injury.
● Loading cargo on the roof luggage
carrier (if equipped) will make the cen-
ter of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid
high speeds, sudden starts, sharp
turns, sudden braking or abrupt
maneuvers, otherwise it may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover due
to failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly.
● Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.
Because of its profile and higher cen-
ter of gravity, your vehicle is more sen-
sitive to side winds than an ordinary
passenger car. Slowing down will allow
you to have better control.
● Do not drive horizontally across steep
slopes. Driving straight up or straight
down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any
similar off-road vehicle) can tip over
sideways much more easily than for-
ward or backward.
Off-road driving
283
4-6. Driving tips
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4
Driving
restrict travel.
Stay on established roads. When
conditions are wet, driving tech-
niques should be changed or travel
delayed to prevent damage to
roads.
Avoid driving on very steep, slippery
roads and other surfaces, such as
sand, where the tires are liable to
lose traction. Your vehicle may not
perform as well as conventional
AWD on-road vehicles on these
surfaces.
■ Additional information for off-road driv-
ing
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and
Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining
to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the
following organizations.
● State and Local Parks and Recreation
Departments
● State Motor Vehicle Bureau
● Recreational Vehicle Clubs
● U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land
Management
WARNING
■ Off-road driving precautions
Always observe the following precau-
tions to minimize the risk of death or seri-
ous injury or damage to your vehicle:
● Drive carefully when off the road. Do
not take unnecessary risks by driving in
dangerous places.
● Do not grip the steering wheel spokes
when driving off-road. A bad bump
could jerk the wheel and injure your
hands. Keep both hands and especially
your thumbs on the outside of the rim.
● Always check your brakes for effec-
tiveness immediately after driving in
sand, mud, water or snow.
● After driving through tall grass, mud,
rock, sand, water, etc., check that there
is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone,
sand, etc. adhering or trapped to the
underbody. Clear off any such matter
from the underbody. If the vehicle is
used with these materials trapped or
adhering to the underbody, a break-
down or fire could occur.
● When driving off-road or in rugged
terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike
objects, etc. This may cause loss of
control or vehicle rollover causing
death or serious injury. You are also
risking expensive damage to your
vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
NOTICE
■ To prevent water damage
Take all necessary safety measures to
ensure that water damage to the hybrid
battery (traction battery), hybrid system
or other components does not occur.
● Water entering the engine compart-
ment may cause severe damage to the
hybrid system. Water entering the inte-
rior may cause the hybrid battery
stowed under the rear seats to short
circuit.
● Water entering the hybrid transmis-
sion and rear electric motor (traction
motor) will cause deterioration in
transmission quality. The malfunction
indicator may come on, and the vehi-
cle may not be drivable.
● Water can wash the grease from wheel
bearings, causing rusting and prema-
ture failure, and may also enter the
hybrid transmission case, reducing the
gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
284
4-6. Driving tips
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
NOTICE
■ When you drive through water
If driving through water, such as when
crossing shallow streams, first check the
depth of the water and the bottom of the
riverbed for firmness. Drive slowly and
avoid deep water.
■ Inspection after off-road driving
● Sand and mud that has accumulated
around brake discs may affect braking
efficiency and may damage brake sys-
tem components.
● Always perform a maintenance
inspection after each day of off-road
driving that has taken you through
rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For
scheduled maintenance information,
refer to the “Warranty and Services
Guide/Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment/Scheduled Maintenance”.
285
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
5
Interior features
Interior features
5-1. Remote Touch
Remote Touch............................286
5-2. Using the air conditioning system
and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
.........................................................291
Heated steering wheel/seat heat-
ers/seat ventilators................299
5-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list.........................302
5-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features............305
Luggage compartment features
........................................................308
5-5. Using the other interior features
Other interior features ............ 312
Garage door opener...............322
Compass.......................................328
286
5-1. Remote Touch
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5-1.Remote Touch
■ Switches
10.3-inch display model
“MAP” button
Press this button to display the vehicle’s
current position.
8-inch display model
“HOME” button
Press this button to display the home
screen.
“MENU” button
Press this button to display the menu
screen.
Back button
Press this button to display the previous
screen.
Touchpad
Slide your finger on the touchpad and
move the pointer to select a function, letter
and screen button.
Press the touchpad to enter the selected
function, letter or screen button. Certain
finger movements on the touchpad can
perform functions, such as changing map
scalings and scrolling list screens.
Sub function button
When is displayed on the screen, a
function screen assigned to the screen can
be displayed.
■ Using the touchpad
1 Select: Touch the touchpad to
select the desired button on the
screen.
2 Enter: The buttons on the screen
can be selected by either depress-
ing or double tapping on the touch-
pad. Once a button has been
selected, the screen will change.
■ Touch operation
Operations are performed by touching
the touchpad with your finger.
Trace
Trace the pad surface while maintaining
contact with the touchpad. Moving the
cursor and the pointer.
Remote Touch
The Remote Touch can be used to
operate the navigation/multimedia
system display Owners of models
equipped with a navigation system
should refer to the “NAVIGATION
AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Remote Touch operation
A
A
B
C
D
E
287
5-1. Remote Touch
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
Double tap
Tap the touchpad twice, quickly. Select the
button on the screen.
Flick
Quick and long movement along the
touchpad with your finger. Move the list
screen or map screen.
Pinch in/Pinch out
Slide fingers toward each other or apart on
the touchpad. Change the scale of the
map.
■ Apple CarPlay
The Apple CarPlay Maps app is not com-
patible with pinch multi-touch gestures.
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch to display the menu
screen.
The display may differ depending on
the type of the system.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the Remote
Touch
Observe the following precautions. Fail-
ure to do so may cause damage to the
Remote Touch.
● Do not allow the Remote Touch to
come into contact with food, liquid,
stickers or lit cigarettes.
● Do not subject the Remote Touch to
excessive pressure or strong impact.
● Do not push the touchpad with a
strong force or use a sharp pointed
object to operate the pad.
Menu screen
288
5-1. Remote Touch
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8-inch display model
10.3-inch display model
*1
: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
*2
: This function is not made available in
some countries or areas.
*3
: This function is not made available on
some models.
8-inch display models
The home screen can be display multiple information screens. For details about the
functions and operation of the display, refer to the respective section and “NAVI-
Switch Function
Select to display the “Destina-
tion” screen.
*1
Select to display the audio con-
trol screen.
*1
Select to display the hands-free
control screen.
*1
Select to display the “Apps”
screen.
*1, 2
Select to display the information
screen.
*1
(P.99)
When an Apple Car-
Play/Android Auto connection is
established and this button dis-
plays “Apple CarPlay”/“Android
Auto”, select to display the
home screen of Apple Car-
Play/Android Auto.
*1, 2
Select to display the “Setup”
screen.
*1
Select to display the air condi-
tioning control screen.
(P.295)
Select to adjust the contrast and
brightness of the screens, turn
the screen off, etc.
*1, 3
Switch Function
Display overview
289
5-1. Remote Touch
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
GATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”
10.3-inch display models
Split-screen display
Different information can be displayed on the left and right of the screen. For example, air
conditioning system screen can be displayed and operated while the fuel consumption
information screen is being displayed. The large screen on the left of the display is called
the main display, and the small screen to the right is called the side display.
Main display
For details about the functions and operation of the main display, refer to the respective
section and “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Side display
The following functions can be displayed and operated on the side display.
Select or to display the desired screen.
Navigation system
*
Audio
*
Vehicle information
Air conditioning system (P.295)
Show/hide the side display.
*
*
: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
■ Screen display during low temperatures
When the ambient temperature is
extremely low, screen response may be
delayed even if the Remote Touch is oper-
ated.
A
B
C
D
E
290
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5-2.Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Left-hand side temperature control switch
Fan speed control switch
Airflow mode control switch
Right-hand side temperature control switch
Automatic mode switch
Off switch
Front windshield defogger switch
Rear windshield and outside rear view mirror defogger switch
Automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the tem-
perature setting.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select to display the
air conditioning control screen.
The air conditioning system can be displayed and operated on the side display.
Air conditioning controls
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
291
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
Outside/recirculated air mode switch
A/C switch
DUAL switch
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Operate the temperature control
switch upwards to increase the tem-
perature and downwards to decrease
the temperature.
If “A/C” switch is not pressed, the sys-
tem will blow ambient temperature air
or heated air.
■ Adjusting the fan speed setting
Operate the fan speed control switch
upwards to increase the fan speed and
downwards to decrease the fan speed.
Press the off switch to turn the fan off.
■ Change the airflow mode
Operate the airflow mode control
switch upwards or downwards.
The mode changes as follows each time
the switch is operated.
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the wind-
shield defogger operates.
■ Switching between outside air and
recirculated air modes
Press the outside/recirculated air
mode switch.
The mode switches between outside air
mode (the indicator is off) and recirculated
air mode (the indicator is on) each time the
button is pressed.
■ Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the wind-
shield and front side windows.
Press the front windshield defogger
switch.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode
switch to outside air mode if the recircu-
lated air mode is used. (It may switch auto-
matically.)
To defog the windshield and the side win-
dows early, turn the air flow and tempera-
ture up.
To return to the previous mode, press the
front windshield defogger switch again
when the windshield is defogged.
■ Defogging the rear window and
outside rear view mirrors
Defoggers are used to defog the rear
window and to remove raindrops, dew
and frost from the outside rear view
mirrors.
I
J
K
A
B
C
D
292
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Press the rear windshield and outside
rear view mirror defogger switch.
The defoggers will automatically turn off
after a period of time.
■ Windshield wiper de-icer (if
equipped)
P.296
■ When the outside temperature exceeds
75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning
system is on
● In order to reduce the air conditioning
power consumption, the air conditioning
system may switch to recirculated air
mode automatically.
This may also reduce fuel consumption.
● Recirculated air mode is selected as a
default mode when the power switch is
turned to ON mode.
● It is possible to switch to outside air mode
at any time by pressing the outside/recir-
culated air mode switch.
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the
humidity in the vehicle is high. Pressing
“A/C” button or selecting “A/C” will
dehumidify the air from the outlets and
defog the windshield effectively.
● If you turn “A/C” off, the windows may
fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recircu-
lated air mode is used.
■ When driving on dusty roads
Close all windows. If dust thrown up by the
vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake mode be set to outside air
mode and the fan speed to any setting
except off.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● Setting to the recirculated air mode tem-
porarily is recommended in preventing
dirty air from entering the vehicle interior
and helping to cool the vehicle when the
outside air temperature is high.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may auto-
matically switch depending on the tem-
perature setting or the inside
temperature.
■ Registering air conditioning settings to
electronic keys (vehicles with driving
position memory)
● Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic
key and turning the power switch to ON
mode will recall that key’s registered air
conditioning settings.
● When the power switch is turned off, the
current air conditioning settings will auto-
matically be registered to the electronic
key that was used to unlock the vehicle.
● The system may not operate correctly if
more than one electronic key is in the
vicinity or if the smart access system with
push-button start is used to unlock a pas-
senger door.
● The doors that can recall the air condi-
tioning setting when unlocked using the
smart access system with push-button
start can be changed.
*
For details, con-
tact your Lexus dealer.
*
: The doors that can recall the driving posi-
tion memory are changed at the same
time.
■ Operation of the air conditioning sys-
tem in Eco mode
● In the Eco mode, the air conditioning sys-
tem is controlled as follows to prioritize
fuel efficiency
• Engine speed and compressor operation
controlled to restrict heating/cooling
capacity
• Fan speed restricted when automatic
mode is selected
● To improve air conditioning performance,
perform the following operations
• Adjust the fan speed
• Adjust the temperature setting
• Turn off Eco mode
● Even when the driving mode is set to Eco
mode, the air conditioning eco mode can
be turned off by selecting the
293
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
■ When the outside temperature is low
The dehumidification function may not
operate even when “A/C” is pressed or
“A/C” is selected.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning
system to the outside air mode.
● During use, various odors from inside and
outside the vehicle may enter into and
accumulate in the air conditioning sys-
tem. This may then cause odor to be
emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occur-
ring:
• It is recommended that the air condition-
ing system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be
delayed for a short period of time imme-
diately after the air conditioning system is
started in automatic mode.
■ Air conditioning filter
P.368
■ Air conditioning system refrigerant
● A label regarding the refrigerant of the
air conditioning system is attached to the
hood at the location shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
● The meaning of each symbol on the label
are as follows:
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. A/C automatic mode switch
operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 443)
Caution
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning system lubri-
cant type
Requires registered techni-
cian to service air conditioning
system
Flammable refrigerant
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield from fog-
ging up
Do not use the front windshield defogger
switch during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference
between the temperature of the outside
air and that of the windshield can cause
the outer surface of the windshield to fog
up, blocking your vision.
■ To prevent burns
● Do not touch the rear view mirror sur-
faces when the outside rear view mir-
ror defoggers are on.
● Vehicles with windshield wiper de-
icer: Do not touch the glass at lower
part of the windshield or to the side of
the front pillars when the windshield
wiper de-icer is on.
NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system
on longer than necessary when the
hybrid system is off.
■ When repairing/replacing parts of
the air conditioning system
Have repair/replacement performed by
your Lexus dealer. When a part of the air
conditioning system, such as the evapo-
rator, is to be replaced, it must be
replaced with a new one.
294
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Main control screen
Using the touchpad of the Remote
Touch (P.286), select the button on
the screen.
to can be adjusted by perform-
ing the following operations.
Flick operation: Move the pointer to
the desired item and flick the touchpad
up or down.
The item can be adjusted by one level.
Trace operation: After selecting the
desired item, slide your finger up or
down.
The item can be adjusted by the amount
that you trace.
Trace operation cannot be used while driv-
ing.
Sub menu
Selecting the sub menu item to switch the
main screen.
: Display the air conditioning control
screen
: Display the option control screen
Adjust the left-hand side tempera-
ture setting
Adjust the fan speed setting
Select the air flow mode
: Air flows to the upper body
: Air flows to the upper body and feet
: Air flows to the feet
: Air flows to the feet and the wind-
shield defogger operates
Adjust the right-hand side tem-
perature setting
Function on/off indicators
When the function is on, the indicator illu-
minates on the control screen.
Sub function menu
When the button on the Remote
Touch is pressed, the following functions
can be switched on and off.
“AUTO”: Set automatic mode on/off
(P.297)
“OFF”: Turn the fan off
“A/C”: Set cooling and dehumidification
function
“DUAL”: Adjust the temperature for driver
and passenger seats separately (“DUAL”
mode) (P.298)
: Set eco air conditioning mode
■ Option control screen
Select on the sub menu to display
the option control screen.
The functions can be switched on and off.
When the function is on, the indicator illu-
Air conditioning control screen
B
E
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
295
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
minates on the screen.
Adjusting the temperature for
driver and passenger seats sepa-
rately (“DUAL” mode) (P.298)
Set eco air conditioning mode
Air conditioning and heater output is lim-
ited to prioritize fuel economy.
Cooling and dehumidification func-
tion
Select S-FLOW mode (P.296)
Prevent ice from building up on the
windshield and wiper blades
(Windshield wiper de-icer) (if
equipped)
Removing pollen from the air
(Micro dust and pollen filter)
■ Side display (Vehicles with naviga-
tion system)
Adjust the left-hand side tempera-
ture setting
Adjust the fan speed setting
Adjust the right-hand side tem-
perature setting
Set cooling and dehumidification
function on/off
Adjust the temperature for the
driver’s and front passenger’s seats
separately (“DUAL” mode)
(P.298)
Select the air flow mode
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the
humidity in the vehicle is high. Pressing
“A/C” button or selecting “A/C” will
dehumidify the air from the outlets and
defog the windshield effectively.
● If you turn “A/C” off, the windows may
fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recircu-
lated air mode is used.
■ Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)
This feature is used to prevent ice from
building up on the windshield and wiper
blades.
Select on the option control screen.
When the windshield wiper de-icer on,
is displayed on the air conditioning
control screen.
The windshield wiper de-icer will automati-
cally turn off after a period of time.
■ Eco air conditioning mode
When Eco mode is selected using the driv-
ing mode select switch, eco air conditioning
mode turns on. When a drive mode other
than Eco mode is selected, eco air condi-
tioning mode may turn off.
■ S-FLOW mode
Priority for airflow is given to the front seats,
and the airflow and air conditioning for the
rear seats is effectively controlled.
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
296
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Select on the option control screen.
The indicator comes on when S-FLOW
mode is on.
Select again to return to the previ-
ous mode.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter
Pollen is removed from the air and the air
flows to the upper part of the body.
Select on the option control screen.
When the micro dust and pollen filter is on,
is displayed on the air conditioning
control screen.
In order to prevent the windshield from fog-
ging up when the outside air is cold, the
dehumidification function may operate.
The pollens are filtered out even if the micro
dust and pollen filter is turned off.
1 Press the “AUTO” button.
2 Adjust the temperature setting.
3 To stop the operation, press the
“OFF” button.
If the fan speed setting or air flow
modes are operated, the automatic
mode indicator goes off. However,
automatic mode for functions other
than that operated is maintained.
■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically accord-
ing to the temperature setting and the
ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until
warm or cool air is ready to flow immedi-
ately after the “AUTO” button is pressed or
“AUTO” is selected.
■ Windshield fog detection function
When automatic mode is set, the humidity
sensor (P.297) detects fog on the wind-
shield and controls the air conditioning sys-
tem to prevent fog.
■ Air conditioning filter
P.368
■ Customization
Settings (e.g. A/C automatic mode switch
operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P.443)
To turn on the “DUAL” mode, perform
WARNING
■ To prevent burns (vehicles with wind-
shield wiper de-icer)
Do not touch the glass at lower part of
the windshield or to the side of the front
pillars when the windshield wiper de-icer
is on.
Using automatic mode
NOTICE
■ Humidity sensor
In order to detect fog on the windshield,
a sensor which monitors the temperature
of the windshield, the surround humidity,
etc., is installed.
Follow these points to avoid damaging
the sensor:
● Do not disassemble the sensor
● Do not spray the glass cleaner on the
sensor or subject it to strong impacts
● Do not stick anything on the sensor
Adjusting the temperature for
driver and passenger seats sepa-
rately (“DUAL” mode)
297
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
any of the following procedures:
Press the “DUAL” button.
Select “DUAL” on the option con-
trol screen.
Adjust the temperature setting of
the passenger side with the passen-
ger side temperature adjustment
button.
The indicator comes on when the “DUAL”
mode is on.
■ Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume changes
according to the selected air flow
mode.
■ Adjusting the position of and open-
ing and closing the air outlets
Front
1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up
or down
2 Turn the knob to open or close the
vent
Rear
1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up
or down
2 Turn the knob to open or close the
vent
Air outlet layout and operations
WARNING
■ To not interrupt the windshield defog-
ger from operating
Do not place anything on the instrument
panel which may cover the air outlets.
Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed,
preventing the windshield defoggers
from defogging.
298
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
*
:If equipped
Turns the heated steering wheel on/off
The indicator light comes on when the
heated steering wheel is operating.
■ Operation condition
The power switch is in ON mode.
■ Timer function
The heated steering wheel will automati-
cally turn off after about 30 minutes.
■ Front
Vehicles without seat ventilators
Each time the switch is pressed, the
operation condition changes as fol-
lows.
Hi (3 segments lit) Mid (2 segments
lit) Lo (1 segment lit) Off
The level indicator (amber) light up
during operation.
Heated steering wheel
*
/seat
heaters
*
/seat ventilators
*
Heated steering wheel
Warm up the grip of the steering wheel
Seat heaters
Warm up the seat upholstery
Seat ventilators
Maintain good airflow on the seat uphol-
stery by blowing air from the seats
WARNING
■ To prevent minor burn injuries
Care should be taken if anyone in the fol-
lowing categories comes in contact with
the steering wheel or seats when the
heater is on:
● Babies, small children, the elderly, the
sick and the physically challenged
● Persons with sensitive skin
● Persons who are fatigued
● Persons who have taken alcohol or
drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the seat heat-
ers and seat ventilators
Do not put heavy objects that have an
uneven surface on the seat and do not
stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
into the seat.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the functions when the hybrid
system is off.
Heated steering wheel
Seat heaters
A
299
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
Vehicles with seat ventilators
Each time the switch is pressed, the
operation condition changes as fol-
lows.
Hi (3 segments lit) Mid (2 segments
lit) Lo (1 segment lit) Off
The indicator (amber) and level indicator
(green) light up during operation.
■ Rear
Each time the switch is pressed, the
operation condition changes as fol-
lows.
Hi (3 segments lit) Mid (2 segments
lit) Lo (1 segment lit) Off
The level indicator (amber) lights up
during operation.
■ Operation condition
The seat heaters can be used when the
power switch is in ON mode.
Each time the switch is pressed, the
operation condition changes as fol-
lows.
Hi (3 segments lit) Mid (2 segments
lit) Lo (1 segment lit) Off
The indicator (green) and level indicator
(green) light up during operation.
A
A
WARNING
■ To prevent causes of overheating and
minor burn injuries
Observe the following precautions when
using a seat heater
● Do not cover the seat with a blanket or
cushion when using the seat heater.
● Do not use seat heater more than nec-
essary.
Seat ventilators (front)
A
300
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Operation condition
The power switch is in ON mode.
301
5-3. Using the interior lights
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
5-3.Using the inter ior lights
Outer foot lights
Personal lights (P.303)
Front interior light (P.303)
Rear interior light (P.303)
Footwell lights
• When the power switch is in ON mode, the footwell lights will turn on.
However, if the instrument panel light control switch is turned to minimum, the footwell
lights will turn off. (P.88)
• When the shift lever is in a position other than P, the brightness of the footwell light will
reduce intensity.
■ Personal lights automatic on/off
● Illuminated entry system: The lights auto-
matically turn on/off according to power
switch mode, the presence of the elec-
tronic key, whether the doors are locked/
unlocked, and whether the doors are
opened/closed.
● If the interior lights remain on when the
power switch is turned off, the lights will
go off automatically after 20 minutes.
■ When front interior lights and personal
lights do not respond as normal
● When water, dirt, etc., have adhered to
the lens surface
● When operated with a wet hand
● When wearing gloves, etc.
Interior lights list
Location of the interior lights
A
B
C
D
E
302
5-3. Using the interior lights
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Customization
Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before lights
turn off) can be changed. (Customizable
features: P.443)
■ Front interior light
Turns the light on/off (touch the light)
The rear interior light also turns on/off.
However, when the rear interior light has
already been turned on, it will not be con-
trolled by front interior light operations.
Turns the door position on/off
1 On
The front and rear interior lights turn on/
off when a door is opened/closed.
2 Off
■ Rear interior light
Turns the light on/off
The rear interior light is also turned on/off
by the front interior light operations.
If the light is turned on by front interior light
operation, the rear interior light cannot
turn off by pressing the switch.
Turns the lights on/off (touch the lights)
NOTICE
■ Removing light lenses
Never remove the lens for the front inte-
rior light and personal lights. Otherwise,
the lights will be damaged. If the lens
need to remove, contact your Lexus
dealer.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than
necessary when the hybrid system is off.
Operating interior lights
Operating personal lights
303
5-3. Using the interior lights
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
304
5-4. Using the storage features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5-4.Using the s torage features
Glove box (P.306)
Bottle holders (P.306)
Console box (P.306)
Cup holders (P.306)
Auxiliary box (P.307)
List of storage features
Location of the storage features
A
B
C
D
E
WARNING
■ Items that should not be left in the
vehicle
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray
cans in the storage spaces, as this may
cause the following when cabin tempera-
ture becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or
cracked if they come into contact with
other stored items.
● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If
they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire
or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
■ When storage compartments are not
in use
When driving or when the glove box and
the console box are not in use, keep it
closed.
In the event of sudden braking or sudden
swerving, an accident may occur due to
an occupant being struck by an open lid
or the items stored inside.
305
5-4. Using the storage features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
1 Open (press the button)
2 Unlock with the mechanical key
3 Lock with the mechanical key
■ Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the tail
lights are on.
1 Lift the lid while pushing the button
to release the lock.
2 Vehicles with wireless charger: Lift
the wireless charger.
■ Console box tray (vehicles without wire-
less charger)
The tray slides forward/backward and can
be removed.
■ Console box light
The console box light turns on when the tail
lights are on.
■ Cup holders
Front
Rear Pull down the armrest and push the
release button.
Glove box
Console box
Cup holders/bottle holders
306
5-4. Using the storage features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Bottle holders
Front
Rear
■ Cup holders/bottle holders
● When storing a bottle, close the cap.
● The bottle may not be stored depending
on its size or shape.
Remove the lid using the strap .
■ Auxiliary box lid
● The removed auxiliary box lid can be
stored on the tray in the console box.
WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the cup hold-
ers/bottle holders
Do not place anything other than cups or
aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other
items may be thrown out of the holders in
the event of an accident or sudden brak-
ing, causing injury. If possible, cover hot
drinks to prevent burns.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the rear cup
holder
Stow the cup holder before stowing the
armrest.
■ Bottle holders
Do not place open bottles or glass and
paper cups containing liquid in the bottle
holders. The contents may spill and
glasses may break.
Auxiliary box
A
307
5-4. Using the storage features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
● The back side of the auxiliary box lid can
be used as a vanity mirror.
Raise the hook to use.
The cargo hooks are provided for securing
loose items.
Raise the hook to use.
The cargo net can be hanged, using the
hook.
Luggage compartment fea-
tures
Cargo hooks
WARNING
■ When cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the hooks
to their stowed positions when not in use.
Cargo net hooks
308
5-4. Using the storage features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Lift the deck board and attach the
hook. (P.309) The following item
can be stowed.
First-aid kit and other items
Accessories
Warning reflector
*
*
: The warning reflector itself is not
included as an original equipment.
1 Open the back door.
2 Pull the lever upwards and open the
deck board.
WARNING
■ When cargo net hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the hooks
to their stowed positions when not in use.
Grocery bag hooks
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the grocery
bag hooks
Do not hang any object heavier than 11 lb.
(5 kg) on the grocery bag hooks.
Deck under tray
Deck board
A
B
C
309
5-4. Using the storage features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
3 Lift the deck board and remove the
hook on the backside of the deck
board.
4 Use the hook to secure the deck
board as shown in the illustration.
■ When attaching the side deck board
When attaching the side deck board, attach
it so that the “ FRONT” mark points to
the front side of the vehicle.
1 Unhook the cords.
2 Fold up the luggage cover.
WARNING
■ If the deck boards are opened or
removed
Return them to their original positions
before driving. In the event of sudden
braking, an accident may occur due to an
occupant being struck by the deck
boards or the items stored in the deck
under tray.
Stowing the luggage cover
310
5-4. Using the storage features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
3 Pull the lever upwards and open the
deck board.
4 Remove the luggage cover.
When the seatback for the rear seat is col-
lapsed to the rear, remove the cover after
the cover most upright position. (P.133)
5 Stow the luggage cover in the deck
under tray while lifting the deck
board.
WARNING
■ Luggage cover
● Do not place anything on the luggage
cover. In the event of sudden braking
or turning, the item may go flying and
strike an occupant. This could lead to
an unexpected accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to climb on the
luggage cover. Climbing on the lug-
gage cover could result in damage to
the luggage cover, possibly causing
death or serious injury to the child.
311
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
5-5.Using the ot her interior feature s
1 To set the visor in the forward posi-
tion, flip it down.
2 To set the visor in the side position,
flip down, unhook, and swing it to
the side.
3 To use the side extender, place the
visor in the side position, then slide
it backward.
■ Sun visors
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the cover is
opened.
■ Auxiliary box
Remove the lid of auxiliary box using
the strap . (P.307)
There is a vanity mirror on the back side of
the lid.
■ Automatic light off to prevent 12-volt
battery discharge
If the vanity lights remain on when the
power switch is turned off, the lights will go
off automatically after 20 minutes.
The GPS clock’s time is automatically
adjusted by utilizing GPS time infor-
mation.
For details, refer to the “NAVIGA-
TION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Other interior features
Sun visors
Vanity mirrors
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the vanity mir-
ror
When the lid of auxiliary box is removed,
do not subject it to strong impacts or set
heavy objects on top of it.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the vanity lights on longer
than necessary when the hybrid system is
off.
Clock
A
312
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Please use a power supply for elec-
tronic goods that use less than 12
VDC/10 A (power consumption of
120 W).
When using electronic goods, make
sure that the power consumption of all
the connected power outlets is less
than 120 W.
■ Console box
Open the lid.
■ Luggage compartment
Open the lid.
■ The power outlet can be used when
The power switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode.
■ When stopping the hybrid system
Disconnect electrical devices with charging
functions, such as mobile battery packs. If
such devices are left connected, the hybrid
system may not stop normally.
■ Using power outlet
The notch in console box allows power
cables to be passed through even when the
console box is closed.
Power outlet (12 VDC)
NOTICE
■ When power outlet is not in use
To avoid damaging the power outlet,
close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the
power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than
necessary when the hybrid system is off.
313
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
Please use a power supply for elec-
tronic goods that use less than 120
VAC (power consumption of 100 W).
Open the lid.
■ The power outlet can be used when
The power switch is in ON mode.
A portable device can be charged by
just placing Qi standard wireless
charge compatible portable devices
according to the Wireless Power Con-
sortium, such as smart phones and
mobile batteries, etc., on the charge
area.
This function cannot be used with por-
table devices that are larger than the
charging area. Also, depending on the
portable device, it may not operate as
normal. Please read the operation
manual for portable devices to be
used.
■ The “Qi” symbol
The “Qi” symbol is a trademark of the
Wireless Power Consortium.
Power outlet (120 VAC) (if
equipped)
NOTICE
■ When power outlet is not in use
To avoid damaging the power outlet,
close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the
power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent blown fuse
Do not use a 120 VAC appliance that
requires more than 100 W.
If a 120 VAC appliance that consumes
more than 100 W is used, the protection
circuit will cut the power supply.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than
necessary when the hybrid system is off.
■ Appliances that may not operate
properly
The following 120 VAC appliances may
not operate properly even if their power
consumption is under 100 W:
● Appliances with high initial peak watt-
age
● Measuring devices that process pre-
cise data
● Other appliances that require an
extremely stable power supply
Wireless charger (if equipped)
314
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Name for all parts
Power supply switch
Operation indicator light
Charge area
■ Using the wireless charger
1 Open the console box. (P.306)
2 Press the power supply switch of
the wireless charger.
Switches on and off with each press of the
power supply switch.
When turned on, the operation indicator
light (green) comes on.
Even with the hybrid system off, the on/off
state of the power supply switch is memo-
rized.
3 Place the charging side of the por-
table device down.
When charging, the operation indicator
light (orange) comes on.
If charging is not occurring, try placing the
portable device as close to the center of
the charging area as possible.
When charging is complete, the operation
indicator light (green) comes on.
Recharging function
• When charging is complete and
after a fixed time in the charge sus-
pension state, charging restarts.
• When the portable device is moved,
charging is stopped for a moment
and then it restarts.
A
B
C
315
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
■ Lighting conditions of operation
indicator light
*
: Depending on the portable device, there
are cases where the operation indicator
light will continue being lit up orange
even after the charging is complete.
When the operation indicator light
flashes
When an error occurs, the operation indi-
cator light flashes an orange color. Handle
the error based on the following tables.
• Flashing repeatedly once every second
(Orange)
• Repeatedly flashes 3 times continuously
(Orange)
• Repeatedly flashes 4 times continuously
(Orange)
■ The wireless charger can be operated
when
The power switch is in ACCESSORY or
ON mode.
■ Usable portable devices
● Qi standard wireless charge standard
can be used on compatible devices.
However, not all Qi standard devices and
compatibility are guaranteed.
● Starting with mobile phones and smart
phones, it is aimed for low power electri-
cally supplied portable devices of no
more than 5W.
■ When covers and accessories are
attached to portable devices
Do not charge in situations where cover
and accessories not able to handle Qi are
attached to the portable device. Depending
on the type of cover and accessory, it may
not be possible to charge. When charging is
not performed even with the portable
device placed on the charge area, remove
the cover and accessories.
Operation
indicator
light
Conditions
Turning off
When the Wireless charger
power supply is off
Green
(comes on)
On Standby (charging pos-
sible state)
When charging is complete
*
Orange
(comes on)
When placing the portable
device on the charging area
(detecting the portable
device)
Charging
Suspected cause Handling method
Vehicle to charger
communication fail-
ure.
Contact your Lexus
dealer.
Suspected causes Handling method
A foreign substance
is between the por-
table device and
charge area.
Remove the foreign
substance from
between portable
device and the
charge area.
The portable device
is out of sync due to
the device being
shifted from the cen-
ter of the charge
area.
Place the portable
device near the cen-
ter of the charge
area.
Suspected cause Handling method
Temperature rising
within the wireless
charger.
Stop charging at
once and start
charging again after
for a while.
316
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ While charging, noise enters the AM
radio
Turn off the wireless charger and confirm
that the noise has decreased. If the noise
decreases, continuously pushing the power
supply switch of the wireless charger for 2
seconds, the frequency of the charger can
be changed and the noise can be reduced.
Also, on that occasion, the operation indi-
cator light will flash orange 2 times.
■ Important points of the wireless charger
● If the electronic key cannot be detected
within the vehicle interior, charging can-
not be done. When the door is opened
and closed, charging may be temporarily
suspended.
● When charging, the wireless charging
device and portable device will get
warmer, however this is not a malfunction.
When a portable device gets warm while
charging, charging may stop due to the
protection function on the portable
device side. In this case, when the tem-
perature of the portable device drops
significantly, charge again.
■ Operation sounds
When the power supply is turned on, while
searching for the portable device a sound
will be produced, however this is not a mal-
function.
■ Certification for the wireless charger
FCC Note: This equipment has been tested
and found to comply with Part 18 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installa-
tion.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifica-
tions not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate this equipment.
317
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
318
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
319
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
When charging a portable device, for
safety reasons, the driver should not
operate the main the part of the portable
device while driving.
■ Caution regarding interference with
electronic devices
People with implantable cardiac pace-
makers, cardiac resynchronization ther-
apy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators, as well as any
other electrical medical device, should
consult their physician about the usage of
the wireless charger.
The operations of the wireless charger
may have an affect on medical devices.
■ To prevent damage or burns
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in a possibility
of equipment failure and damage, catch
fire, burns due to overheat.
● Do not insert any metallic objects
between the charging area and the
portable device while charging
● Do not attach stickers, metallic
objects, etc., to the charger area or
portable device
● Do not cover with cloth, etc., and
charge
● Do not charge portable devices other
than designated
● Do not attempt to dismantle for disas-
sembly or modifications
● Do not hit or apply a strong force
NOTICE
■ Conditions in which the function may
not operate correctly
In the following conditions, it may not
operate correctly
● The portable device is fully charged
● There is foreign matter between the
charge area and portable device
● The temperature of the portable
device gets higher from charging
● The charging surface of the portable
device is facing up
● The placement of the portable device
is out of alignment with the charge
area
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant,
gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates
strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When the electronic key is in contact
with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is
attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum
foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
•Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that emit
radio waves) are being used nearby
In addition, excluding the above-men-
tioned, when the charger does not per-
form normally or the operation display
lamp is flashing continuously, it is consid-
ered that the wireless charger is malfunc-
tioning. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ To prevent failure or damage to data
● Do not bring magnetic cards, such as
credit cards, or magnetic recording
media, etc., close to the charger while
charging, otherwise, data may disap-
pear under the influence of magne-
tism. Also, do not bring precision
instruments such as wrist watches, etc.,
close to the charger, as such objects
may break.
320
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Fold down the armrest for use.
An assist grip installed on the ceiling
can be used to support your body
while sitting on the seat.
NOTICE
● Do not leave portable devices in the
cabin. The temperature inside the
cabin may become high, when under
the sun, and cause damage to the
device.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
When the hybrid system is stopped, do
not use the wireless charger for a long
time.
Armrest
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not apply too much load on the arm-
rest.
Assist grips
WARNING
■ Assist grips
Do not use the assist grip when getting in
or out of the vehicle or rising from your
seat.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the assist grip
Do not hang any heavy object or put a
heavy load on the assist grip.
321
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
*
:If equipped
The HomeLink
®
wireless control sys-
tem in your vehicle has 3 buttons which
can be programmed to operate 3 dif-
ferent devices. Refer to the program-
ming methods on the following pages
to determine the method which is
appropriate for the device.
HomeLink
®
indicator light
Garage door operation indicators
Buttons
■ Codes stored in the HomeLink
®
mem-
ory
● The registered codes are not erased even
if the battery cable is disconnected.
● If learning failed when registering a dif-
ferent code to a HomeLink
®
button that
already has a code registered to it, the
already registered code will not be
erased.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
Garage door opener
*
The garage door opener can be
programmed using the Home-
Link
®
to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks,
home lighting systems, security sys-
tems, and other devices.
System components
A
B
C
322
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
For vehicles sold in the Canada
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com/lexus
or call 1-800-355-3515.
■ Before programming the Home-
Link
®
During programming, it is possible
that garage doors, gates, or other
devices may operate. For this rea-
son, make sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door
or other devices to prevent injury or
other potential harm.
It is recommended that a new bat-
tery be placed in the remote control
transmitter for more accurate pro-
gramming.
Garage door opener motors manu-
WARNING
■ When programming a garage door or
other remote control device
The garage door or other device may
operate, so ensure people and objects
are out of danger to prevent potential
harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety stan-
dards
Do not use the HomeLink
®
compatible
transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by federal
safety standards.
This includes any garage door that can-
not detect an interfering object. A door
or device without these features
increases the risk of death or serious
injury.
■ When operating or programming
HomeLink
®
Never allow a child to operate or play
with the HomeLink
®
buttons.
Programming the HomeLink
®
323
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
factured after 1995 may be
equipped with rolling code protec-
tion. If this is the case, you may need
a stepladder or other sturdy, safe
device to reach the “learn” or
“smart” button on the garage door
opener motor.
■ Programming the HomeLink
®
Steps 1 through 3 must be performed
within 60 seconds, otherwise the indi-
cator light will stop flashing and pro-
gramming will not be able to be
completed.
1 Press and release the HomeLink
®
button you want to program and
check that the HomeLink
®
indica-
tor light flashes orange.
2 Point the remote control transmit-
ter for the device at the rear view
mirror, 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm)
from the HomeLink
®
buttons.
Keep the HomeLink
®
indicator light in
view while programming.
3 Program a device.
Programming a device other than
an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)
Press and hold the remote control trans-
mitter button until the HomeLink
®
indica-
tor light changes from slowly flashing
orange to rapidly flashing green (rolling
code) or continuously lit green (fixed
code), then release the button.
Programming an entry gate (for
U.S.A. owners)/Programming a
device in the Canadian market
Press and release the remote control trans-
mitter button at 2 second intervals, repeat-
edly, until the HomeLink
®
indicator light
changes from slowly flashing orange to
rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or
continuously lit green (fixed code).
4 Test the HomeLink
®
operation by
pressing the newly programmed
button and observing the indicator
light:
Indicator light illuminates: Program-
ming of a fixed code device has
completed. The garage door or
other device should operate when a
HomeLink
®
button is pressed and
released.
Indicator light flashes rapidly: The
garage door opener motor or other
device is equipped with a rolling
code. To complete programming,
firmly press and hold the Home-
Link
®
button for 2 seconds then
release it.
If the garage door or other device
324
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
does not operate, proceed to “Pro-
gramming a rolling code system”.
5 Repeat the steps above to program
another device for any of the
remaining HomeLink
®
buttons.
■ Programming a rolling code sys-
tem
2 or more people may be necessary to
complete rolling code programming.
1 Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” but-
ton on the garage door opener
motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
unit. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer. Refer to the Owner’s
manual supplied with the garage door
opener motor for details.
2 Press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button.
Perform 3 within 30 seconds after
performing 2.
3 Press and hold the desired Home-
Link
®
button (inside the vehicle)
for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat
this sequence (press/hold/release)
up to 3 times to complete pro-
gramming.
If the garage door opener motor
operates when the HomeLink
®
button is pressed, the garage door
opener motor recognizes the
HomeLink
®
signal.
■ Enabling 2-way communication
with a garage door (only available
for compatible devices)
When enabled, 2-way communication
allows you to check the status of the
opening and closing of a garage door
through indicators in your vehicle.
2-way communication is only available
if the garage door opener motor used
is a compatible device. (To check
device compatibility, refer to
www.HomeLink.com.)
1 Within 5 seconds after program-
ming the garage door opener has
been completed, if the garage door
opener motor is trained to Home-
Link
®
, both garage door operation
indicators will flash rapidly green
and the light on the garage door
325
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
opener motor will blink twice, indi-
cating that 2-way communication is
enabled.
If the indicators do not flash, perform and
within the first 10 presses of the Home-
Link
®
button after programming has been
completed.
2 Press a programmed HomeLink
®
button to operate a garage door.
3 Within 1 minute of pressing the
HomeLink
®
button, after the
garage door operation has
stopped, press the “Learn” or
“Smart” button on the garage door
opener motor. Within 5 seconds of
the establishment of 2-way com-
munication with the garage door
opener, both garage door opera-
tion indicators in the vehicle will
flash rapidly green and the light on
the garage door opener motor will
blink twice, indicating that 2-way
communication is enabled.
■ Reprogramming a single Home-
Link
®
button
When the following procedure is per-
formed, buttons which already have
devices registered to them can be
overwritten:
1 With one hand, press and hold the
desired HomeLink
®
button.
2 When the HomeLink
®
indicator
starts flashing orange, continue to
hold the HomeLink
®
button and
perform “Programming Home-
Link
®
” 1 (it takes 20 seconds for
the HomeLink
®
indicator to start
flashing).
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the transmitter.
● The battery side of the transmitter must
be pointed away from the HomeLink
®
.
Press the appropriate HomeLink
®
button. The HomeLink
®
indicator light
should turn on.
The status of the opening and closing
of a garage door is shown by the indi-
cators.
Opening
Closing
This function is only available if the garage
door opener motor used is a compatible
device. (To check device compatibility,
refer to www.HomeLink.com.)
Operating the HomeLink
®
Color Status
Orange (flashing)
Currently open-
ing/closing
A
B
326
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
The indicators can operate within
approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the
garage door. However, if there are
obstructions between the garage door
and the vehicle, such as houses and
trees, feedback signals from the
garage door may not be received.
To recall the previous door operation
status, press and release either Home-
Link
®
buttons and or
and simultaneously.
The last recorded status will be dis-
played for 3 seconds.
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons
for 10 seconds until the HomeLink
®
indicator light changes from continu-
ously lit orange to rapidly flashing
green.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the
programs stored in the HomeLink
®
mem-
ory.
Green
Opening/closing has
completed
Red (flashing)
Feedback signals
cannot be received
Erasing the entire HomeLink
®
memory (all three codes)
Color Status
327
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
*
:If equipped
To turn the compass on or off, press the
button for more than 3 seconds.
Directions are displayed as follows:
■ Conditions unfavorable to correct
operation
The compass may not show the correct
direction in the following conditions:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after
turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s
magnetic field is subject to interference
by artificial magnetic fields (under-
ground car park/parking lot, under a
steel tower, between buildings, roof car
park/parking lot, near an intersection,
near a large vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near
the inside rear view mirror.)
● The 12-volt battery has been discon-
nected.
● A door is open.
Compass
*
The compass on the inside rear
view mirror indicates the direction
in which the vehicle is heading.
Operation and displays
Display Direction
“N” North
“NE” Northeast
“E” East
“SE” Southeast
“S” South
“SW” Southwest
“W” West
“NW” Northwest
WARNING
■ While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Adjust the dis-
play only when the vehicle is stopped.
NOTICE
■ To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal
objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause the compass sen-
sor to malfunction.
■ To ensure normal operation of the
compass
● Do not perform a circling calibration of
the compass in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to
interference by artificial magnetic
fields.
● During calibration, do not operate
electric systems (moon roof, power
windows, etc.) as they may interfere
with the calibration.
328
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Deviation
The direction display deviates from the
true direction determined by the
earth’s magnetic field. The amount of
deviation varies depending on the geo-
graphic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over one of the map boundar-
ies shown in illustration, the compass will
deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect cali-
bration, refer to “Deviation calibration”.
■ Deviation calibration
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the button for 6 sec-
onds. A number (1 to 15) appears
on the compass display.
3 Referring to the map above, press
the button to select the number of
the zone you are in.
If the direction is displayed several seconds
after adjustment, the calibration is com-
plete.
■ Circling calibration
1 Stop the vehicle in a place where it
is safe to drive in a circle.
2 Press and hold the button for 9 sec-
onds.
“C” appears on the compass display.
3 Drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/
h) or less in a circle until a direction
is displayed.
Calibrating the compass
329
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5
Interior features
If there is not enough space to drive in a
circle, drive around the block until a direc-
tion is displayed.
WARNING
■ When doing the circling calibration
Secure a wide space, and watch out for
people and vehicles in the vicinity. Do not
violate any local traffic rules while per-
forming circling calibration.
330
5-5. Using the other interior features
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
331
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
6
Maintenance and care
Maintenance and care
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehi-
cle exterior................................332
Cleaning and protecting the vehi-
cle interior.................................335
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements..339
General maintenance.............340
Emission inspection and mainte-
nance (I/M) programs.........342
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
........................................................344
Hood...............................................346
Positioning a floor jack............346
Engine compartment...............348
12-volt battery.............................354
Tires ................................................357
Tire inflation pressure..............365
Wheels...........................................367
Air conditioning filter...............368
Electronic key battery.............369
Checking and replacing fuses371
Headlight aim..............................373
Light bulbs....................................375
332
6-1. Maintenance and care
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6-1.Maintenance and care
Working from top to bottom, liber-
ally apply water to the vehicle body,
wheel wells and underside of the
vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a
sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks, use car
wash soap and rinse thoroughly with
water.
Wipe away any water.
Wax the vehicle when the water-
proof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface,
apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
■ Self-restoring coat
The vehicle body has a self-restoring coat-
ing that is resistant to small surface
scratches caused in a car wash etc.
● The coating lasts for 5 to 8 years from
when the vehicle is delivered from the
plant.
● The restoration time differs depending on
the depth of the scratch and outside tem-
perature. The restoration time may
become shorter when the coating is
warmed by applying warm water.
● Deep scratches caused by keys, coins,
etc. cannot be restored.
● Do not use wax that contain abrasives.
■ Automatic car washes
● Before washing the vehicle:
• Fold the mirrors
• Turn off the power back door (if
equipped)
Start washing from the front of the vehicle.
Extend the mirrors before driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes
may scratch the vehicle surface, parts
(wheel, etc.) and harm your vehicle’s
paint.
● Rear spoiler may not be washable in
some automatic car washes. There may
also be an increased risk of damage to
vehicle.
■ High pressure car washes
As water may enter the cabin, do not bring
the nozzle tip near the gaps around the
doors or perimeter of the windows, or spray
these areas continuously.
■ Note for a smart access system with
push-button start
● If the door handle becomes wet while the
electronic key is within the effective
range, the door may lock and unlock
repeatedly. In that case, follow the follow-
ing correction procedures to wash the
vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft.
(2 m) or more away from the vehicle.
(Take care to ensure that the key is not
stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving
mode to disable the smart access system
with push-button start. (P.127)
■ Wheels and wheel ornament
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a
neutral detergent.
● Wash detergent off with water immedi-
ately after use.
● To protect the paint from damage, make
sure to observe the following precau-
tions.
• Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive
detergent
• Do not use hard brushes
• Do not use detergent on the wheels when
they are hot, such as after driving or park-
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle exterior
Perform cleaning in a manner
appropriate to each component
and its material.
Cleaning instructions
333
6-1. Maintenance and care
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
ing in hot weather
■ Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■ Front side windows water-repellent
coating (vehicles with water-repellent
coating)
● The following precautions can extend the
effectiveness of the water-repellent coat-
ing.
• Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side
windows regularly.
• Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate
on the windows for a long period.
Clean the windows with a soft, damp
cloth as soon as possible.
• Do not use wax or glass cleaners that
contain abrasives when cleaning the win-
dows.
• Do not use any metallic objects to
remove condensation build up.
● When the water-repellent performance
has become insufficient, the coating can
be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Plated portions
If dirt cannot be removed, clean the parts as
follows:
● Use a soft cloth dampened with an
approximately 5% solution of neutral
detergent and water to clean the dirt off.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to
remove any remaining moisture.
● To remove oily deposits, use alcohol wet
wipes or a similar product.
WARNING
■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the
engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components etc. to
catch fire.
■ When cleaning the windshield (vehi-
cles with rain-sensing windshield wip-
ers)
Set the wiper switch to off.
If the switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may
operate unexpectedly in the following sit-
uations, and may result in hands being
caught or other serious injuries and
cause damage to the wiper blades.
Off
AUTO
● When the upper part of the windshield
where the raindrop sensor is located is
touched by hand
● When a wet rag or similar is held close
to the raindrop sensor
● If something bumps against the wind-
shield
● If you directly touch the raindrop sen-
sor body or if something bumps into
the raindrop sensor
■ Precautions regarding the exhaust
pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to
become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not
to touch the pipe until it has cooled suffi-
ciently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe
can cause burns.
■ Precautions regarding the rear
bumper with Blind Spot Monitor (if
equipped)
If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped
or scratched, the system may malfunc-
tion. If this occurs, consult your Lexus
dealer.
A
B
334
6-1. Maintenance and care
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and
corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the
following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the
paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings or
bird droppings are present on the
paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated
with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled
with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline
are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched,
have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding,
remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the
wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic
substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the
lights.
● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the
lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ To prevent damage to the windshield
wiper arms
When lifting the wiper arms away from
the windshield, pull the driver side wiper
arm upward first, and repeat for the pas-
senger side. When returning the wipers
to their original position, do so from the
passenger side first.
■ When using an automatic car wash
(vehicles with rain-sensing windshield
wipers)
Set the wiper switch to the off position.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wip-
ers may operate and the wiper blades
may be damaged.
■ When using a high pressure car wash
● When washing the vehicle, do not let
water of the high pressure washer hit
directly or the vicinity of the camera.
Due to the shock from the high pres-
sure water, it is possible the device may
not operate as normal.
● Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or resin manufactured
cover), connectors or the following
parts. The parts may be damaged if
they come into contact with high-pres-
sure water.
• Traction related parts
•Steering parts
• Suspension parts
• Brake parts
● Keep the cleaning nozzle at least 11.9
in. (30 cm) away from the vehicle
body. Otherwise resin section, such as
moldings and bumpers, may be
deformed and damaged. Also, do not
continuously hold the nozzle in the
same place.
● Do not spray the lower part of the
windshield continuously. If water
enters the air conditioning system
intake located near the lower part of
the windshield, the air conditioning
system may not operate correctly.
● Do not wash the underside of the vehi-
cle using a high pressure car washer.
335
6-1. Maintenance and care
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
Remove dirt and dust using a vac-
uum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with luke-
warm water.
If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off
with a soft cloth dampened with
neutral detergent diluted to approx-
imately 1%. Wring out any excess
water from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off remaining traces of deter-
gent and water.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type
cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush
to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping cir-
cles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces
and let them dry. Excellent results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible.
■ Handling the seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water
using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying
or cuts.
■ Front side windows with UV protective
coating (vehicles with UV protective
coating)
The front side windows have UV protective
coating. To prevent any damage to the UV
protective coating, observe the following:
● If the windows are dirty, gently wipe them
with a cloth soaked in water or lukewarm
water as soon as possible.
NOTICE
■ When raising the windshield wiper
arms
Make sure to hold the hook parts of
the wiper arms to raise them.
Do not hold only the wiper blades when
raising them, or it may cause deformation
of the wiper blades.
A
Cleaning and protecting the
vehicle interior
Perform cleaning in a manner
appropriate to each component
and its material.
Protecting the vehicle interior
336
6-1. Maintenance and care
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
● If the windows are very dirty, do not open
and close them repeatedly.
WARNING
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehi-
cle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid
battery (traction battery) air vents, and
in the luggage compartment. Doing so
may cause the hybrid battery, electri-
cal components, etc. to malfunction or
catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components
or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P.32)
An electrical malfunction may cause
the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious
injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially
instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner.
The instrument panel may reflect off the
windshield, obstructing the driver’s view
and leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of
detergent, as they may discolor the
vehicle interior or cause streaks or
damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic sub-
stances such as benzene or gasoline,
alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and
bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions,
such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
● Do not use polish wax or polish
cleaner. The instrument panel’s or
other interior part’s painted surface
may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather sur-
faces
Observe the following precautions to
avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather
surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct
sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, espe-
cially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plas-
tic, or containing wax on the uphol-
stery, as they may stick to the leather
surface if the vehicle interior heats up
significantly.
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with
water.Vehicle systems such as the audio
system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components
such as the audio system above or under
the floor of the vehicle. Water may also
cause the body to rust.
■ When cleaning the inside of the wind-
shield (vehicles with Lexus Safety
System + 2.0)
Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the
lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
(P.205)
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear win-
dow
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the
rear window, as this may cause dam-
age to the rear window defogger
heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth
dampened with lukewarm water to
gently wipe the window clean. Wipe
the window in strokes running parallel
to the heater wires or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage
the heater wires or antenna.
337
6-1. Maintenance and care
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
Clean the air intake vents by the follow-
ing procedures to prevent dust from
accumulating in them, or to prevent
them from clogging.
There are air intake vents on the both sides
of the seats.
■ Cleaning the air intake vents
1 Remove the dust from the vents
with a vacuum cleaner etc.
Clean the vents of the both sides.
2 Start the hybrid system and check
that the warning message on the
multi-information display disap-
pears.
It may take about 20 minutes before the
warning message disappears.
■ Cleaning the air intake vents
● Dust on the air intake vents may inter-
feres cooling of the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) and results in poor fuel
consumption. Clean the air intake vents
periodically.
● If continuing to drive the vehicle with
“Maintenance required for Traction bat-
tery cooling parts See owner’s manual”
shown on the multi-information display,
the hybrid battery (traction battery) input
and output may be restricted, leading to a
reduction in hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) output and a malfunction. It may
cause poor fuel consumption or a mal-
function. If the warning message is shown,
contact your Lexus dealer or clean the air
intake vents immediately.
● If the warning message on the multi-infor-
mation display does not disappear after
cleaning the air intake vents, have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● Timing of cleaning air intake vents differs
depending on the use environment of the
vehicle.
NOTICE
■ Cleaning the front side windows
Do not use any compound or abrasive
product (e.g., glass cleaner, detergent,
wax) to clean the windows. It may dam-
age the coating.
Cleaning the air intake vents
338
6-1. Maintenance and care
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Remove dirt using a water-damp-
ened soft cloth or synthetic chamois.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft
cloth to remove any remaining
moisture.
■ Cleaning the areas with satin-finish
metal accents
The metal areas use a layer of real metal for
the surface. It is necessary to clean them
regularly. If dirty areas are left uncleaned for
long periods of time, they may be difficult to
clean.
Remove dirt and dust using a vac-
uum cleaner.
Wipe off any excess dirt and dust
with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approxi-
mately 5% neutral wool detergent.
Wring out any excess water from
the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all
remaining traces of detergent.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft
cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in
a shaded and ventilated area.
■ Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of
the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain
the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
Remove dirt and dust using a vac-
uum cleaner.
Wipe it off with a soft cloth damp-
ened with neutral detergent diluted
to approximately 1%.
Wring out any excess water from
the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
remaining traces of detergent and
water.
NOTICE
■ When cleaning the air intake vents
When cleaning the air intake vent, make
sure to only use a vacuum to suck out
dust and clogs. If a compressed air blow
gun, etc. is used to blow out dust and
clogs, the dust or clogs may be pushed
into the air intake vent, which may affect
the performance of the hybrid battery
(traction battery) and cause a malfunc-
tion.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle
Observe the following precautions. Fail-
ure to do so may cause damage to the
vehicle.
● Do not use water or other liquid to
clean the air intake vents
● Do not install anything but the filters
exclusive for this vehicle to the air
intake vents or use the vehicle without
installing the filters.
Cleaning the areas with satin-fin-
ish metal accents
Cleaning the leather areas
Cleaning the synthetic leather
areas
339
6-2. Maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
6-2.Maintenance
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts
be used for repairs to ensure performance
of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used
in replacement or if a repair shop other than
a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm
the warranty coverage.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be per-
formed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained spe-
cialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information. They are well
informed about the operation of all sys-
tems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves
that the maintenance that has been per-
formed is under warranty coverage. If any
problem should arise while your vehicle is
under warranty, your Lexus dealer will
promptly take care of it.
General maintenance should be per-
formed on a daily basis. This can be
done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.
Scheduled maintenance should be
performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance sched-
ule.
For details about maintenance items and
schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Ser-
vice Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.
■ Resetting the message indicating main-
tenance is required (Except for Can-
ada)
After the required maintenance is pre-
formed according to the maintenance
schedule, please reset the message.
To reset the message, follow the procedures
described below:
1 Press or of the meter control
switches and select .
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driv-
ing, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance are essential. It is the
owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. Lexus recommends
the following maintenance:
WARNING
■ If your vehicle is not properly main-
tained
Improper maintenance could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and possi-
ble death or serious injury.
■ Handling of the 12-volt battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-
ents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and
other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehi-
cles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Avoid exposure and wash any affected
area immediately.
● 12-volt Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds which are known to
cause brain damage. Wash your hands
after handling. (P.354)
General maintenance
Scheduled maintenance
340
6-2. Maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
2 Press or of the meter control
switches, select the “Vehicle Settings”
and then press .
3 Press or of the meter control
switches, select the “Scheduled Mainte-
nance” and then press and hold the .
4 Select the “Yes” and push .
“The Data Has Been Reset” is displayed
on the multi-information display.
You can perform some maintenance
procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself
maintenance may affect warranty cov-
erage.
The use of Lexus repair manuals is recom-
mended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer
to the separate “Owner’s Guide”, “War-
ranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Man-
ual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.
Do-it-yourself maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general main-
tenance items that should be per-
formed at the intervals specified in
the “Warranty and Service Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
It is recommended that any prob-
lem you notice should be brought to
the attention of your Lexus dealer
or qualified service shop for advice.
WARNING
■ If the hybrid system is operating
Turn the hybrid system off and ensure
that there is adequate ventilation before
performing maintenance checks.
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Brake fluid
Is the brake fluid at the
correct level? (P.353)
Engine/power
control unit
coolant
Is the engine/power con-
trol unit coolant at the cor-
rect level? (P.351)
Engine oil
Is the engine oil at the cor-
rect level? (P.349)
Exhaust sys-
tem
There should not be any
fumes or strange sounds.
Radiator/con-
denser
The radiator and con-
denser should be free from
foreign objects. (P.352)
Washer fluid
Is there sufficient washer
fluid? (P.353)
341
6-2. Maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
Luggage compartment
Items Check points
12-volt battery
Check the connections.
(P.354)
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator
pedal
The accelerator pedal
should move smoothly
(without uneven pedal
effort or catching).
Hybrid trans-
mission “Park”
mechanism
When parked on a slope
and the shift lever is in P, is
the vehicle securely
stopped?
Brake pedal
• Does the brake pedal
move smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal
have appropriate clear-
ance from the floor?
• Does the brake pedal
have the correct amount
of free play?
Brakes
• The vehicle should not
pull to one side when
the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work
effectively.
• The brake pedal should
not feel spongy.
• The brake pedal should
not get too close to the
floor when the brakes
are applied.
Head
restraints
Do the head restraints
move smoothly and lock
securely?
Indica-
tors/buzzers
Do the indicators and
buzzers function properly?
Lights Do all the lights come on?
Parking brake
• Does the parking brake
switch operate nor-
mally?
• When parked on a slope
and the parking brake is
on, is the vehicle
securely stopped?
Seat belts
• Do the seat belts oper-
ate smoothly?
• The seat belts should not
be damaged.
Seats
Do the seat controls oper-
ate properly?
Steering
wheel
• Does the steering wheel
rotate smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel
have the correct amount
of free play?
•There should not be any
strange sounds coming
from the steering wheel.
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Doors
Do the doors operate
smoothly?
Engine hood
Does the engine hood lock
system work properly?
Fluid leaks
There should not be any
signs of fluid leakage after
the vehicle has been
parked.
Items Check points
342
6-2. Maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
The OBD system determines that a
problem exists somewhere in the emis-
sion control system. Your vehicle may
not pass the I/M test and may need to
be repaired. Contact your Lexus
dealer to service the vehicle.
When the 12-volt battery is discon-
nected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during
ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving
habits, the readiness codes may not
be completely set.
When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp
comes on indicating a temporary
malfunction and your vehicle may
not pass the I/M test.
Tires
• Is the tire inflation pres-
sure correct?
• The tires should not be
damaged or excessively
worn.
• Have the tires been
rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• The wheel nuts should
not be loose.
Windshield
wipers/rear
window wiper
•The wiper blades should
not show any signs of
cracking, splitting, wear,
contamination or defor-
mation.
•The wiper blades should
clear the wind-
shield/rear window
without streaking or
skipping.
Items Check points
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M) pro-
grams
Some states have vehicle emission
inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics)
checks. The OBD system monitors
the operation of the emission con-
trol system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on
Your vehicle may not pass the
I/M test in the following situa-
tions:
343
6-2. Maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
The error code in the OBD system will
not be cleared unless the vehicle is
driven 40 or more times.
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare
the vehicle for re-testing.
When the malfunction indicator
lamp still remains on after sev-
eral driving trips
If your vehicle does not pass the
I/M test
344
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6-3.Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service pre-
cautions
If you perform maintenance by
yourself, be sure to follow the cor-
rect procedure as given in these
sections.
Maintenance
Items Parts and tools
12-volt bat-
tery condition
(P.354)
•Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp
bolts)
Brake fluid
level
(P.353)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
or SAE J1703; FMVSS
No.116 DOT 4 or SAE
J1704 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for
adding brake fluid)
Engine/power
control unit
coolant level
(P.351)
•“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or a similar
high quality ethylene
glycol-based non-sili-
cate, non-amine, non-
nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid
technology
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed
with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed
with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for
adding coolant)
Engine oil
level
(P.349)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor
Oil” or equivalent
•Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for
adding engine oil)
Fuses
(P.371)
Fuse with same amperage
rating as original
Light bulbs
(P.375)
Bulb with same number
and wattage rating as orig-
inal
Headlight aim Phillips-head screw-driver
Radiator and
condenser
(P.352)
—
Items Parts and tools
345
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
Tire inflation
pressure
(P.365)
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid
(P.353)
• Water or washer fluid
containing antifreeze
(for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for
adding water or washer
fluid)
WARNING
The engine compartment contains many
mechanisms and fluids that may move
suddenly, become hot, or become elec-
trically energized. To avoid death or seri-
ous injury, observe the following
precautions.
■ When working on the engine com-
partment
● Make sure that the “IGNITION ON”
on the multi-information display and
the “READY” indicator are both off.
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from the moving fan and engine drive
belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine,
power control unit, radiator, exhaust
manifold, etc. right after driving as they
may be hot. Oil and other fluids may
also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn
easily, such as paper and rags, in the
engine compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose
an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are
flammable.
Items Parts and tools ■ When working near the electric cool-
ing fans or radiator grille
Be sure the power switch is off.
With power switch in ON mode, the
electric cooling fans may automatically
start to run if the air conditioning is on
and/or the coolant temperature is high.
(P.352)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or
falling material, fluid spray, etc. from get-
ting in your eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter
removed may cause excessive engine
wear due to dirt in the air.
346
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1 Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2 Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and
lift the hood.
■ Front
Hood
Opening the hood
WARNING
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and
locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may
open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in
death or serious injury.
Positioning a floor jack
When using a floor jack, follow the
instructions in the manual provided
with the jack and perform the oper-
ation safely.
When raising your vehicle with a
floor jack, position the jack cor-
rectly.
Improper placement may damage
your vehicle or cause injury.
Location of the jack point
347
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
■ Rear
1 Remove the bolt and then
remove the cover .
2 Raise your vehicle with a floor jack.
A
B
348
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Fuse box (P.371)
Engine coolant reservoir (P.351)
Engine oil filler cap (P.350)
Power control unit coolant reservoir (P.352)
Brake fluid reservoir (P.353)
Radiator (P.352)
Condenser (P.352)
Electric cooling fans
Engine oil level dipstick (P.349)
Washer fluid tank (P.353)
■ 12-volt battery
P.354
Engine compartment
Components
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
349
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
■ Removing the engine compart-
ment cover
■ Installing the clips
1 Insert
2 Press
With the engine at operating tempera-
ture and turned off, check the oil level
on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
1 Park the vehicle on level ground.
After warming up the hybrid sys-
tem, and turning off the engine, wait
more than 5 minutes for the oil to
drain back into the bottom of the
engine.
2 Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out.
3 Wipe the dipstick clean.
4 Reinsert the dipstick fully with its
protruding areas ( in the illustra-
tion) pointing towards engine.
Engine compartment cover
NOTICE
■ After installing an engine compart-
ment cover
Make sure that the cover is securely
installed in its original position.
Checking and adding the engine
oil
A
350
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
5 Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out and check the oil
level.
Low
Normal
Excessive
Measuring side
6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it
fully.
■ Checking the oil type and prepar-
ing the items needed
Make sure to check the oil type and
prepare the items needed before add-
ing oil.
Engine oil selection
P.426
Oil quantity (Low Full)
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)
Items
Clean funnel
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the low
level mark, add engine oil of the same
type as that already in the engine.
1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning
it counterclockwise.
2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the
dipstick.
3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it
clockwise.
■ Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be con-
sumed while driving. In the following situa-
tions, oil consumption may increase, and
engine oil may need to be refilled in
between oil maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example
directly after purchasing the vehicle or
after replacing the engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate
viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or
with a heavy load, when towing, or when
driving while accelerating or decelerat-
ing frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for a long
time, or when driving frequently through
heavy traffic
■ After changing the engine oil
The engine oil maintenance data should be
reset. Perform the following procedures:
1 Press or of the meter control
switches and select .
A
B
C
D
351
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
2 Press or of the meter control
switches, select the “Vehicle Settings”
and then press .
3 Press or of the meter control
switches, select the “Oil Maintenance”
and then press and hold .
4 Select the “Yes” and push .
“The Data Has Been Reset” is displayed
on the multi-information display.
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is
between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines
on the reservoir when the hybrid sys-
tem is cold.
■ Engine coolant reservoir
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the “LOW” line,
add coolant up to the “FULL” line.
(P.418)
WARNING
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially
harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflamma-
tion and skin cancer, so care should be
taken to avoid prolonged and
repeated contact. To remove used
engine oil from your skin, wash thor-
oughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a
safe and acceptable manner. Do not
dispose of used oil and filters in house-
hold trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call your Lexus dealer, ser-
vice station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or
disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the
reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the
vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could
be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick
every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is prop-
erly tightened.
Checking the coolant
A
B
C
352
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Power control unit coolant reser-
voir
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the “LOW” line,
add coolant up to the “FULL” line.
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or a similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite,
and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mix-
ture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized
water.
(Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C])
Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mix-
ture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized
water.
(Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about coolant, contact
your Lexus dealer.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short
time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses,
engine/power control unit coolant reservoir
caps, drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus
dealer test the cap and check for leaks in
the cooling system.
Check the radiator and condenser and
clear away any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely
dirty or you are not sure of their condi-
tion, have your vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
A
B
C
WARNING
■ When the hybrid system is hot
Do not remove the engine/power control
unit coolant reservoir caps.
The cooling system may be under pres-
sure and may spray hot coolant if the cap
is removed, causing serious injuries, such
as burns.
NOTICE
■ When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor
straight antifreeze. The correct mixture
of water and antifreeze must be used to
provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read
the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to pre-
vent it from damaging parts or paint.
Checking the radiator and con-
denser
WARNING
■ When the hybrid system is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser
as they may be hot and cause serious
injuries, such as burns.
353
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines
on the tank.
■ Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and
prepare the necessary item.
Fluid type
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703;
FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704
brake fluid
Items
Clean funnel
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from
the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause
a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use
only newly opened brake fluid.
If none of the washer do not work or
the “Windshield Washer Fluid Low” on
the multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
WARNING
■ When the electric cooling fans are
operating
Do not touch the engine compartment.
With the power switch in ON mode, the
electric cooling fans may automatically
start to run if the air conditioning is on
and/or the coolant temperature is high.
Be sure the power switch is off when
working near the electric cooling fans or
radiator grille.
Checking and adding the brake
fluid
WARNING
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm your
hands and eyes and damage painted sur-
faces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes,
flush the affected area with clean water
immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a
doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go
down slightly as the brake pads wear out
or when the fluid level in the accumulator
is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling,
there may be a serious problem.
Checking and adding the washer
fluid
354
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
The 12-volt battery is located in the left-
hand side of luggage compartment.
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the 12-volt battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, observe the fol-
lowing precautions before recharging:
● If recharging with the 12-volt battery
installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-
nect the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the char-
ger is off when connecting and discon-
necting the charger cables to the 12-volt
battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-
volt battery
● The hybrid system may not start. Follow
the procedure below to initialize the sys-
tem.
1 Shift the shift lever to P.
2 Open and close any of the doors.
3 Restart the hybrid system.
● Unlocking the doors using the smart
access system with push-button start may
not be possible immediately after recon-
necting the 12-volt battery. If this hap-
pens, use the wireless remote control or
the mechanical key to lock/unlock the
doors.
● Start the hybrid system with the power
switch in ACCESSORY mode. The
WARNING
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid
system is hot or operating as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if
spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than
washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine anti-
freeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the
vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as
damaging the pump leading to problems
of the washer fluid not spraying.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as neces-
sary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed
on the label of the washer fluid bottle.
12-volt battery
Location
355
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
hybrid system may not start with the
power switch turned off. However, the
hybrid system will operate normally from
the second attempt.
● The power switch mode is recorded by
the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is recon-
nected, the vehicle will return the power
switch mode to the status it was in before
the 12-volt battery was disconnected.
Make sure to turn off the power before
disconnect the 12- volt battery. Take extra
care when connecting the 12-volt battery
if the power switch mode prior to dis-
charge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple
attempts at all methods above, contact your
Lexus dealer.
WARNING
■ Chemicals in the 12-volt battery
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid and may pro-
duce hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following pre-
cautions while working on or near the 12-
volt battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the
12-volt battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the
12-volt battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and
clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when
working near the 12-volt battery.
● Keep children away from the 12-volt
battery.
■ Where to safely charge the 12-volt
battery
Always charge the 12-volt battery in an
open area. Do not charge the 12-volt bat-
tery in a garage or closed room where
there is insufficient ventilation.
■ Emergency measures regarding
electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue
to apply water with a sponge or cloth
while traveling to the nearest medical
facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If
you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your
skin. Immediately take off the clothing
and follow the procedure above if nec-
essary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk.
Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
■ When handling the 12-volt battery
P.417
■ When disconnecting the 12-volt bat-
tery
Do not disconnect the negative (-) termi-
nal on the body side as shown. The dis-
connected negative (-) terminal may
touch the positive (+) terminal, which
may cause a short and result in death or
serious injury.
356
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1 Lift the deck board and attach the
hook. (P.309)
2 Remove the left side deck board.
3 Remove the cover after removing
the chip.
Press
Pull out
Make sure that the 12-volt battery ter-
minals are not corroded and that there
are no loose connections, cracks, or
loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
Insert the left side auxiliary box.
1 Push up center position
2 Insert
3 Press
NOTICE
■ When recharging the 12-volt battery
Never recharge the 12-volt battery while
the hybrid system is operating. Also, be
sure all accessories are turned off.
Removing the 12-volt battery
maintenance cover
Exterior
A
B
Installing the 12-volt battery
maintenance cover
A
B
357
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
Check if the treadwear indicators are
showing on the tires. Also check the
tires for uneven wear, such as excessive
wear on one side of the tread.
Check the spare tire condition and
pressure if not rotated.
New tread
Worn tread
Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators is
shown by a “TWI” or mark, etc.,
molded into the sidewall of each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear indica-
tors are showing on a tire.
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● The treadwear indicators are showing on
a tire.
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits,
cracks deep enough to expose the fabric,
and bulges indicating internal damage.
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be
properly repaired due to the size or loca-
tion of a cut or other damage.
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus
dealer.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked
by a qualified technician even if it has sel-
dom or never been used or damage is not
obvious.
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the
replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of
either the front axle or the rear axle, which-
ever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.
For the maximum load of the tire, see the
load limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the
tire. (P.434)
■ Tire types
● Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed perfor-
mance tires best suited to highway driv-
ing under dry conditions. Since summer
tires do not have the same traction per-
formance as snow tires, summer tires are
inadequate for driving on snow-covered
or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accor-
dance with maintenance schedules
and treadwear.
Checking tires
A
B
C
358
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is
recommended. When installing snow
tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
● All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide
better traction in snow and to be ade-
quate for driving in most winter condi-
tions as well as for use year-round. All
season tires, however, do not have ade-
quate traction performance compared
with snow tires in heavy or loose snow.
Also, all season tires fall short in accelera-
tion and handling performance com-
pared with summer tires in highway
driving.
● Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy
roads, we recommend using snow tires. If
you need snow tires, select tires of the
same size, construction and load capacity
as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equip-
ment, make sure your snow tires also
have radial construction. Do not install
studded tires without first checking local
regulations for possible restrictions.
Snow tires should be installed on all
wheels. (P.279)
■ If the tread on snow tires wears down
below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is
lost.
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend tire life,
Lexus recommends that tire rotation is car-
ried out at the same interval as tire inspec-
tion.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure
warning system after tire rotation.
WARNING
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to
prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to
parts of the drive train as well as danger-
ous handling characteristics, which may
lead to an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes,
models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably
different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix differently constructed
tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and
snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used
on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know
how they were used previously.
● Do not tow if your vehicle has a com-
pact spare tire installed.
NOTICE
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on
roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire
inflation pressure, reducing the cushion-
ing ability of the tires. In addition, driving
on rough roads may cause damage to
the tires themselves, as well as the vehi-
cle’s wheels and body.
■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire
becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires
and/or wheels may be ruined.
Tire rotation
359
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
Front
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure warning system that uses tire
pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters to detect low tire inflation pressure
before serious problems arise.
If the tire pressure drops below a
predetermined level, the driver is
warned by a warning light.
(P.394)
The tire pressure detected by the
tire pressure warning system can be
displayed on the multi-information
display.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not
replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation
pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
■ Situations in which the tire pressure
warning system may not operate prop-
erly
● In the following cases, the tire pressure
warning system may not operate prop-
erly.
• If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is
not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is
not of the specified size.
• Tire chains etc. are equipped.
• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is
equipped.
• If a window tint that affects the radio wave
signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehi-
cle, particularly around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is extremely
higher than the specified level.
• If wheel without the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter is used.
• If the ID code on the tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters is not regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning
computer.
● Performance may be affected in the fol-
lowing situations.
• Near a TV tower, electric power plant,
gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates
strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular
phone, cordless phone or other wireless
communication device
● When the vehicle is parked, the time
taken for the warning to start or go off
could be extended.
● When tire inflation pressure declines rap-
idly for example when a tire has burst, the
warning may not function.
Tire pressure warning system
A
360
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Certification for tire pressure warning system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
361
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
For vehicles sold in Canada
362
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
When replacing tires or wheels, tire
pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters are installed,
new ID codes must be registered in the
tire pressure warning computer and
the tire pressure warning system must
be initialized. Have tire pressure warn-
ing valve and transmitter ID codes reg-
istered by your Lexus dealer.
(P.364)
■ When replacing the tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter is not registered, the
tire pressure warning system will not work
properly. After driving for about 20 min-
utes, the tire pressure warning light blinks
for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a sys-
tem malfunction.
WARNING
■ Caution regarding interference with
electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pace-
makers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should not
come within 17.7 in. (450 mm) of the
tire pressure warning system initiators.
The radio waves may affect the opera-
tion of such devices.
● Users of any electrical medical device
other than implantable cardiac pace-
makers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should con-
sult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under
the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected
effects on the operation of such medi-
cal devices.
Installing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels,
tire pressure warning valves, trans-
mitters and tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels,
tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact your
Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters may be
damaged if not handled correctly.
● Make sure to install the tire valve caps.
If the tire valve caps are not installed,
water could enter the tire pressure
warning valves and the tire pressure
warning valves could be bound.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not
use tire valve caps other than those
specified. The cap may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid seal-
ants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a
liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop as
soon as possible. After use of liquid seal-
ant, make sure to replace the tire pres-
sure warning valve and transmitter when
repairing or replacing the tire. (P.359,
367)
363
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
■ The tire pressure warning system
must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
When adjusting the tire inflation
pressure.
When the tire inflation pressure is
changed such as when changing
traveling speed.
When rotating the tires.
When changing the tire.
When the tire pressure warning system
is initialized, the current tire inflation
pressure is set as the benchmark pres-
sure.
■ How to initialize the tire pressure
warning system
1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and
turn the power switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed while
the vehicle is moving.
2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the specified cold tire inflation pres-
sure level.
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the
specified cold tire inflation pressure level.
The tire pressure warning system will oper-
ate based on this pressure level.
3 Turn the power switch to ON
mode.
4 Press or of the meter con-
trol switches and select .
5 Press or of the meter con-
trol switches, select the “Vehicle
Settings” and then press .
6 Press or of the meter con-
trol switches, select the “TPMS”
and then press and hold the .
The “Tire Pressure Recalibrating. Please
Wait Until Complete” will be displayed on
the multi-information display and the tire
pressure warning light will blink slowly 3
times.
When the message disappears, initializa-
tion is complete.
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning sys-
tem
Initialize the system with the tire inflation
pressure adjusted to the specified level
■ The initialization operation
● Make sure to carry out initialization after
adjusting the tire inflation pressure. Also,
make sure the tires are cold before carry-
ing out initialization or tire inflation pres-
sure adjustment.
● If you have accidentally turned the power
switch off during initialization, it is not
necessary to press the reset switch again
as initialization will restart automatically
when the power switch has been turned
to ON mode for the next time.
Initializing the tire pressure
warning system
364
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
● If you accidentally press the reset switch
when initialization is not necessary, adjust
the tire inflation pressure to the specified
level when the tires are cold, and conduct
initialization again.
■ Warning performance of the tire pres-
sure warning system
The warning of the tire pressure warning
system will change in accordance with the
conditions under which it was initialized. For
this reason, the system may give a warning
even if the tire pressure does not reach a
low enough level, or if the pressure is higher
than the pressure that was adjusted to when
the system was initialized.
■ When initialization of the tire pressure
warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few min-
utes. However, in the following cases, the
settings have not been recorded and the
system will not operate properly. If repeated
attempts to record tire inflation pressure
settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● When initializing the tire pressure warn-
ing system, the tire pressure warning light
does not blink 3 times.
● After carrying out the initialization proce-
dure, the tire pressure warning light
blinks for 1 minute then stays on after
driving for 20 minutes.
The tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter is equipped with a unique
ID code. When replacing a tire pres-
sure warning valve and transmitter, it is
necessary to register the ID code.
Have the ID code registered by your
Lexus dealer.
WARNING
■ When initializing the tire pressure
warning system
Do not initializing tire inflation pressure
without first adjusting the tire inflation
pressure to the specified level. Other-
wise, the tire pressure warning light may
not come on even if the tire inflation pres-
sure is low, or it may come on when the
tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
Registering ID codes
365
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure and tire size are displayed on
the tire and loading information label.
(P.430)
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
1 Remove the tire valve cap.
2 Press the tip of the tire pressure
gauge onto the tire valve.
3 Read the pressure using the gauge
gradations.
4 If the tire inflation pressure is not at
the recommended level, adjust the
pressure.
If you add too much air, press the
center of the valve to deflate.
5 After completing the tire inflation
pressure measurement and adjust-
ment, apply soapy water to the
valve and check for leakage.
6 Put the tire valve cap back on.
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure
every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pres-
sure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure
may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel economy
● Reduced driving comfort and poor han-
dling
● Reduced tire life due to wear
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it
checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation
pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure,
observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at
least 3 hours or has not been driven for
Tire inflation pressure
Checking the specified tire infla-
tion pressure
Inspection and adjustment pro-
cedure
A
B
366
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an
accurate cold tire inflation pressure read-
ing.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly
inflated based only on its appearance.
● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure
to be higher after driving as heat is gen-
erated in the tire. Do not reduce tire infla-
tion pressure after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity
weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should
be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
WARNING
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire
performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly inflated, the
following conditions may occur which
could lead to an accident resulting in
death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from
overheated tires
● Air leaking from between tire and
wheel
● Wheel deformation and/or tire dam-
age
● Greater possibility of tire damage
while driving (due to road hazards,
expansion joints, sharp edges in the
road, etc.)
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire
inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or mois-
ture may get into the valve and cause an
air leak, resulting in decreased tire infla-
tion pressure.
367
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
When replacing wheels, care should
be taken to ensure that they are equiv-
alent to those removed in load capac-
ity, diameter, rim width and inset
*
.
Replacement wheels are available at
your Lexus dealer.
*
: Conventionally referred to as offset.
Lexus does not recommend using the
following:
Wheels of different sizes or types
Used wheels
Bent wheels that have been straight-
ened
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped
with tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters that allow the tire pressure warning
system to provide advance warning in the
event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pres-
sure warning valves and transmitters must
be installed. (P.359, 367)
Use only Lexus wheel nuts and
wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
When rotating, repairing or chang-
ing your tires, check that the wheel
nuts are still tight after driving 1000
miles (1600 km).
Be careful not to damage the alumi-
num wheels when using tire chains.
Use only Lexus genuine balance
weights or equivalent and a plastic
or rubber hammer when balancing
your wheels.
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily
corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate
from the wheel or cause a loss of
handling control.
Wheel selection
WARNING
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different
size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a
loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking
wheel which is designed for a tubeless
tire. Doing so may result in an acci-
dent, causing death or serious injury.
■ Use of defective wheels prohibited
Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.
Doing so could cause the tire to leak air
during driving, possibly causing an acci-
dent.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement
may affect the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, make sure to
have tires serviced by your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop.
In addition, make sure to purchase
your tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels
are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters may not work properly with
non-genuine wheels.
Aluminum wheel precautions
368
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1 Turn the power switch off.
2 Open the glove box. Slide off the
damper.
3 Push in the glove box on the vehi-
cle’s outer side to disconnect the
claws. Then pull out the glove box
and disconnect the lower claws.
4 Remove the filter cover.
5 Remove the air conditioning filter
and replace it with a new one.
The “ UP” marks shown on the filter
should be pointing up.
■ Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning fil-
ter according to the maintenance schedule.
In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic
flow, early replacement may be required.
(For scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Sup-
plement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dra-
matically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter
and replace if necessary.
■ Air conditioning filter with deodorizing
function
When fragrances are placed in your vehi-
cle, the deodorizing effect may become
significantly weakened in a short period:
When an air conditioning odor comes out
continuously, replace the conditioning filter.
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be
changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
369
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
■ When the card key battery needs to be
replaced (if equipped)
The battery for the card key is available only
at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can
replace the battery for you.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart access system with push-but-
ton start and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
● The operational range will be reduced.
Prepare the following before replacing
the battery:
Flathead screwdriver
Lithium battery CR2032
■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus
dealer, local electrical appliance shops or
camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent
type recommended by the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to
the local laws.
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning sys-
tem
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without
a filter may cause damage to the system.
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one
if it is depleted.
Items to prepare
370
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1 Take out the mechanical key.
2 Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip
of the flathead screwdriver with a tape.
3 Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal
facing up.
Replacing the battery
WARNING
■ Removed battery and other parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by
a child, they can cause choking. Keep
away from children. Failure to do so
could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing
the battery
Observe the following precautions to
prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to
rust.
● Do not touch or move any other com-
ponent inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery ter-
minals.
371
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
1 Turn the power switch off.
2 Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment: type A fuse
box
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
Engine compartment: type B fuse
box
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
Left side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
Luggage compartment
3 Remove the fuse.
Only type A fuse can be removed using the
pullout tool.
4 Check if the fuse is blown.
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of
an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found on the fuse
box lid.
Checking and replacing
fuses
If any of the electrical components
do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and
replace the fuses as necessary.
Checking and replacing fuses
372
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
■ After a fuse is replaced
● When installing the lid, make sure that the
tab is installed securely.
● If the lights do not turn on even after the
fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need
replacement. (P.375)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting
the wiring harness from damage.
■ When replacing light bulbs
Lexus recommends that you use genuine
Lexus products designed for this vehicle.
Because certain bulbs are connected to cir-
cuits designed to prevent overload, non-
genuine parts or parts not designed for this
vehicle may be unusable.
A
B
A
B
A
B
WARNING
■ To prevent system breakdowns and
vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to
the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage
rating than that indicated, or use any
other object in place of a fuse.
A
B
373
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
Type A
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B
Type B
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B
Make sure the vehicle has a full tank
of gasoline and the area around the
headlight is not deformed.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Make sure the tire inflation pressure
WARNING
● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or
equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even
as a temporary fix.
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
■ Fuse box near the power control unit
Never check or replace the fuses as
there are high voltage parts and wiring
near the fuse box.
Doing so may cause electric shock,
resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload
determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
Headlight aim
Vertical movement adjusting
bolts
Before checking the headlight
aim
A
B
A
B
374
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
is at the specified level.
Have someone sit in the driver’s
seat.
Bounce the vehicle several times.
1 Using a Phillips-head screwdriver,
turn bolt A in either direction.
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns.
Type A
Type B
2 Turn bolt B the same number of
turns and in the same direction as
step 1.
If the headlight cannot be adjusted using
this procedure, take the vehicle to your
Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.
Type A
Type B
Adjusting the headlight aim
375
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
P.349
Front side marker light (bulb type)
Front turn signal light (bulb type)
■ Bulbs that need to be replaced by
the Lexus dealer
Headlights
Front turn signal lights (LED type)
Parking lights and Daytime running
lights
Front fog lights
Front side marker lights (LED type)
Side turn signal lights
Stop/tail lights
Rear side marker lights
Back-up light
Rear turn signal light
High mounted stoplight
License plate lights
Outer foot lights
■ LED lights
The lights other than the front side marker
lights (bulb type) and front turn signal lights
(bulb type) each consist of a number of
LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your
vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the
light replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of
the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the
inside of the headlight lens does not indi-
cate a malfunction. Contact your Lexus
dealer for more information in the following
situations:
● Large drops of water have built up on the
inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
■ When replacing light bulbs
P.372
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs
by yourself.
The difficulty level of replacement
varies depending on the bulb. If
necessary bulb replacement seems
difficult to perform, contact your
Lexus dealer.
For more information about replac-
ing other light bulbs, contact your
Lexus dealer.
Removing the engine compart-
ment cover
Bulb locations
A
B
376
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Before replacing, check the wattage of
the light bulb to be replaced. (P.431)
■ Front side marker lights (bulb type)
1 Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
2 Remove the light bulb.
3 When installing, reverse the steps
listed.
■ Front turn signal lights (bulb type)
1 Open the hood and remove the
cover for engine compartment
cover. (P.346, 349)
2 Remove the cover.
Push the center of the clip and remove
the clip and cover .
3 Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
4 Remove the light bulb.
5 Replace the light bulb.
Replacing light bulbs
A
B
377
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
6
Maintenance and care
6 Turn clockwise and set the bulb
base.
7 Attach the clip to the cover.
Push up on the center of the clip and attach
the clip .
8 Attach the cover.
Align the 2 tabs positions and close the
cover and fix the cover by pushing the
center of the clip .
9 Install the engine compartment
cover. (P.349)
A
A
B
WARNING
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Be sure to stop the hybrid system and
turn off the lights. Do not attempt to
replace the bulb immediately after
turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may
cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the
light bulb with bare hands. When it is
unavoidable to hold the glass portion,
use and hold with a clean dry cloth to
avoid getting moisture and oils on the
bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or
dropped, it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts
used to secure them. Failure to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or
water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause
condensation to build up on the lens.
● Do not attempt to repair or disassem-
ble light bulbs, connectors, electric cir-
cuits or component parts.
Doing so may result in death or serious
injury due to electric shock.
■ To prevent damage or fire
● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and
locked.
● Check the wattage of the bulb before
installing to prevent heat damage.
378
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
379
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
7
When trouble arises
When trouble arises
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers..................380
If your vehicle has to be stopped in
an emergency..........................380
If the vehicle is trapped in rising
water.............................................381
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
........................................................383
If you think something is wrong
........................................................386
If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds .......388
If a warning message is displayed
........................................................398
If you have a flat tire..................402
If the hybrid system will not start
........................................................409
If you lose your keys...................411
If the fuel filler door cannot be
opened.......................................... 411
If the electronic key does not
operate properly..................... 412
If the 12-volt battery is discharged
.........................................................414
If your vehicle overheats.........418
If the vehicle becomes stuck .421
380
7-1. Essential information
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7-1.Essential inf ormation
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn
them off, press the switch once again.
■ Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a
long time while the hybrid system is not
operating (while the “READY” indicator is
not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may dis-
charge.
1 Steadily step on the brake pedal
with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly
as this will increase the effort required to
slow the vehicle.
2 Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
3 After slowing down, stop the vehi-
cle in a safe place by the road.
4 Stop the hybrid system.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to
N
3 Keep depressing the brake pedal
with both feet to reduce vehicle
speed as much as possible.
4 To stop the hybrid system, press
and hold the power switch for 2
consecutive seconds or more, or
Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are used to
warn other drivers when the vehicle
has to be stopped in the road due to
a breakdown, etc.
Operating instructions
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it
becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way, stop the
vehicle using the following proce-
dure:
Stopping the vehicle
381
7-1. Essential information
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
press it briefly 3 times or more in
succession.
5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by
the road.
Remove the seat belt first.
If the door can be opened, open the
door and exit the vehicle.
If the door can not be opened, open
the window using the power window
switch and exit the vehicle through
the window.
If the window can not be opened
using the power window switch,
remain calm, wait until the water
level inside the vehicle rises to the
point that the water pressure inside
of the vehicle equals the water pres-
sure outside of the vehicle, and then
open the door and exit the vehicle.
WARNING
■ If the hybrid system has to be turned
off while driving
Power assist for the steering wheel will
be lost, making the steering wheel
heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as
possible before turning off the hybrid sys-
tem.
If the vehicle is trapped in
rising water
In the event the vehicle is sub-
merged in water, remain calm and
perform the following.
WARNING
■ Using an emergency hammer
*
for
emergency escape
The front side windows and rear side
windows, as well as the rear window can
be shattered with an emergency ham-
mer
*
used for emergency escape. How-
ever, an emergency hammer can not
shatter the windshield as it is laminated
glass.
*
: Contact your Lexus dealer or after-
market accessory manufacturer for
further information about an emer-
gency hammer.
382
7-1. Essential information
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
WARNING
■ Escaping the vehicle from the window
There are cases where escaping the
vehicle from the window is not possible
due to seating position, passenger body
type, etc.
When using an emergency hammer,
consider your seat location and the size
of the window opening to ensure that the
opening is accessible and large enough
to escape.
383
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
7-2.Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be
towed
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend having your vehicle towed by
your Lexus dealer or commercial
towing service, using a wheel-lift
type truck or flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all
towing, and abide by all state/pro-
vincial and local laws.
If towing your vehicle with a wheel-
lift type truck, use a towing dolly.
(P.383, 384)
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle
Be sure to transport the vehicle with all
four wheels raised off the ground. If the
vehicle is towed with the tires contacting
the ground, the drivetrain or related
parts may be damaged, the vehicle may
fly off the truck, or electricity generated
by the operation of the motor may cause
a fire to occur depending on the nature
of the damage or malfunction.
■ While towing
● When towing using cables or chains,
avoid sudden starts, etc., which place
excessive stress on the towing eyelets,
cables or chains. The towing eyelets,
cables or chains may become dam-
aged, broken debris may hit people,
and cause serious damage.
● Do not turn the power switch off.
There is a possibility that the steering
wheel is locked and cannot be oper-
ated.
■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehi-
cle
Make sure that towing eyelets are
installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets
may come loose during towing.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle
when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear
when the power switch is off. The
steering lock mechanism is not strong
enough to hold the front wheels
straight.
● When raising the vehicle, ensure ade-
quate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle.
Without adequate clearance, the vehi-
cle could be damaged while being
towed.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle
when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either
from the front or rear.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle
during emergency towing
Do not secure cables or chains to the
suspension components.
384
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
The following may indicate a problem
with your hybrid transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer or commercial tow-
ing service before towing. (P.383)
The hybrid system warning message
is shown on the multi-information
display and the vehicle does not
move.
The vehicle makes an abnormal
sound.
From the front
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
When using a flat-bed truck to trans-
port the vehicle, use tire strapping
belts. Refer to the owner’s manual of
the flat-bed truck for the tire strapping
method.
NOTICE
■ Recreational towing (behind motor
home, etc.)
Never dinghy tow your vehicle to pre-
vent causing serious damage to the
Hybrid AWD system and transmission.
(P.173)
Situations when it is necessary to
contact dealers before towing
Towing with a wheel-lift type
truck
NOTICE
■ Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck to pre-
vent body damage.
Using a flatbed truck
385
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
In order to suppress vehicle movement
during transportation, set the parking
brake and turn the power switch off.
If a tow truck is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using cables or chains
secured to the emergency towing eye-
lets. This should only be attempted on
hard surfaced roads for short distance
at under 18 mph (30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer
and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s
wheels, drivetrain, axles, steering and
brakes must be in good condition.
To have your vehicle towed by another
vehicle, the towing eyelet must be
installed to your vehicle. Install the tow-
ing eyelet by following the specified
procedure.
1 Take out the wheel nut wrench, flat-
head screwdriver and towing eye-
let. (P.402)
2 Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag
between the screwdriver and the vehicle
body as shown in the illustration.
Type A
Type B
3 Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.
Emergency towing
To have your vehicle towed
386
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4 Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut wrench
or hard metal bar.
5 Securely attach cables or chains to
the towing eyelet.
Take care not to damage the vehicle body.
6 Enter the vehicle being towed and
start the hybrid system.
If the hybrid system does not start, turn the
power switch to ON mode.
7 Shift the shift lever to N and release
the parking brake.
Turn automatic mode off. (P.184)
When the shift lever cannot be shifted:
P.181
■ While towing
If the hybrid system is off, the power assist
for the brakes and steering will not function,
making steering and braking more difficult.
■ Wheel nut wrench
Wheel nut wrench is installed in luggage
compartment. (P.402)
Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air condi-
tioning after use is normal.)
Flat-looking tires or uneven tire
wear
Engine coolant temperature gauge
needle continually points higher
than normal
Changes in exhaust sound
Excessive tire squeal when corner-
ing
Strange noises related to the sus-
pension system
Pinging or other noises related to
the hybrid system
Engine misfire or misses, stumbling
or running roughly
Appreciable loss of power
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side
when braking
If you think something is
wrong
If you notice any of the following
symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Con-
tact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
Visible symptoms
Audible symptoms
Operational symptoms
387
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side
when driving on a level road
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy
feeling, pedal almost touches the
floor
388
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
■ Charging system warning light
*
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ Output control warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or
flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessar-
ily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur,
have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers
Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
(Red)
(Canada)
Indicates that:
The brake fluid level is low; or
The brake system is malfunctioning
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle
may be dangerous.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle
may be dangerous.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates the hybrid system has overheated
Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Handling method
(P.420)
389
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
■ Low engine oil pressure warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ High coolant temperature warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ Brake system warning light
■ Malfunction indicator lamp
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and con-
tact your Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle
may be dangerous.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine is overheating
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. Continu-
ing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
Handling method (P.418)
Warning light Details/Actions
(Yellow)
Indicates a malfunction in:
The regenerative braking system;
The electronically controlled brake system; or
The electric parking brake
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Indicates a malfunction in:
The hybrid system;
The electronic engine control system;
The electronic throttle control system; or
The emission control system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
390
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ SRS warning light
■ ABS warning light
■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
The SRS airbag system;
The front passenger occupant classification system; or
The seat belt pretensioner system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Indicates a malfunction in:
The ABS; or
The brake assist system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
(Yellow)
(Red)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steer-
ing) system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
391
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
■ PCS warning light
■ LTA indicator
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ LDA indicator
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
Warning light Details/Actions
When a buzzer sounds simultaneously: Indicates a mal-
function has occurred in the PCS (Pre-Collision System).
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound: The PCS (Pre-Collision
System) has become temporarily unavailable, corrective
action may be necessary.
Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display. (P.209, 398)
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability
Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illu-
minate.
P.217
Warning light Details/Actions
(Orange)
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display. (P.226)
Warning light Details/Actions
(Orange)
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the LDA (Lane Departure Alert)
with steering control
Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-informa-
tion display. (P.234)
392
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ PKSB OFF indicator (warning buzzer)
■ Slip indicator light
■ Brake hold operated indicator
■ Parking brake indicator
Warning light Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
When a buzzer sounds: Indicates a malfunction in the PKSB
(Parking Support Brake) system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:
Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possi-
bly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.
Clear the dirt, etc.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
The VSC system;
The TRAC system; or
The hill-start assist control system
The light will flash when the ABS, VSC or TRAC system is
operating.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
(Flashes)
Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
Warning light Details/Actions
(Flashes)
(U.S.A.)
(Flashes)
(Canada)
It is possible that the parking brake is not fully engaged or
released
Operate the parking brake switch once again.
This light comes on when the parking brake is not released.
If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released,
the system is operating normally.
393
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
■ Low fuel level warning light
■ Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer
*
)
*
: Driver’s seat belt warning buzzer:
The driver’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is
not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the buzzer
sounds. If the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer sounds intermittently for a certain
period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain speed.
Front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that
his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfastened, the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently for a certain period of time after the vehicle reaches a certain speed.
■ Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder light
*1
(warning buzzer
*2
)
*1
: This light illuminates on the center panel. Regardless of whether or not a rear passenger
is present, if the power switch is turned to ON mode with the rear seat belts unfastened,
this light will also illuminate for a certain period of time.
*2
: Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer:
The rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear passenger that
his or her seat belt is not fastened. If the seat belt is unfastened, the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently for a certain period of time, after the seat belt is fastened and unfastened and
the vehicle reaches a certain speed.
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 2.2 gal. (8.4
L, 1.8 Imp.gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Warning light Details/Actions
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat
belts
Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front pas-
senger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to make
the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.
Warning light Details/Actions
Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts
Fasten the seat belt.
394
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Master warning light (warning buzzer)
■ Tire pressure warning light
Warning light Details/Actions
A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
P.398
Warning light Details/Actions
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such as
Natural causes (P.396)
Flat tire (P.402)
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.
The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the
light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure
is adjusted, have the system checked by your Lexus
dealer.
When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system (P.396)
Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.
395
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
■ Brake Override System/Drive-Start Control warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the air-
bag sensor assembly, front impact sensors,
side impact sensors (front door), side
impact sensors (rear), driver’s seat position
sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front
passenger occupant classification system
(ECU and sensors), “AIR BAG ON” indi-
cator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
driver’s seat belt pretensioner, front passen-
ger’s seat belt pretensioner and force lim-
iter, airbags, interconnecting wiring and
power sources. (P.32)
■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat
belt reminder and warning buzzer
● If luggage is placed on the front passen-
ger seat, the front passenger detection
sensor may cause the warning light to
flash and the warning buzzer to sound
even if a passenger is not sitting in the
seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sen-
sor may not detect a passenger, and the
warning light may not operate properly.
■ Electric power steering system warning
light (warning buzzer)
When the 12-volt battery charge becomes
insufficient of the voltage temporarily drops,
the electric power steering system warning
light may come on and the warning buzzer
may sound.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes
on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
Warning light Details/Actions
Brake Override System
Indicates that the accelerator and brake pedals are being
depressed simultaneously, and the Brake Override System
is operating.
Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake
pedal.
Indicates a malfunction in the Brake Override System (with
warning buzzer)
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
Drive-Start Control
Indicates that the shift position was changed and Drive-
Start Control was operated while depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. (with warning buzzer)
Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.
Indicates a malfunction in the Drive-Start Control system
(with warning buzzer)
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
396
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
The light will go off after several driving
trips.
If the light does not go off even after several
trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
■ When the tire pressure warning light
comes on
Inspect the appearance of the tire to check
that the tire is not punctured.
If the tire is punctured: P.402
If the tire is not punctured:
Carry out the following procedure after the
tire temperature has lowered sufficiently.
● Check the tire inflation pressure and
adjust to the appropriate level.
● If the warning light does not go out even
after several minutes, check that the tire
inflation pressure is at the specified level
and carry out initialization. (P.363)
The warning light may come on again if the
above operations are conducted without
first allowing the tire temperature to lower
sufficiently.
■ The tire pressure warning light may
come on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may come
on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks and tire inflation pressure changes
caused by temperature. In this case, adjust-
ing the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with
a tire pressure warning valve and transmit-
ter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warn-
ing light will not turn off even though the flat
tire has been replaced with the spare tire.
Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire
and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The
tire pressure warning light will go off after a
few minutes.
■ Conditions that the tire pressure warn-
ing system may not function properly
P.359
■ If the tire pressure warning light fre-
quently comes on after blinking for 1
minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently
comes on after blinking for 1 minute when
the power switch is turned to ON mode,
have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard
due to being in a noisy location or audio
sound.
WARNING
■ If both the ABS and the brake system
warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immedi-
ately and contact your Lexus dealer. The
vehicle will become extremely unstable
during braking, and the ABS system may
fail, which could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
■ When the electric power steering
system warning light comes on
When the light comes on yellow, the
assist to the power steering is restricted.
When the light comes on red, the assist
to the power steering is lost and handling
operations of the steering wheel become
extremely heavy. When steering wheel
operations are heavier than usual, grip
the steering wheel firmly and operate it
using more force than usual.
■ If the tire pressure warning light
comes on
Be sure to observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to do so could cause a loss
of vehicle control and result in death or
serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as
soon as possible. Adjust the tire infla-
tion pressure immediately.
WARNING
● If the tire pressure warning light comes
on even after tire inflation pressure
adjustment, it is probable that you have
a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat,
change it with the spare tire and have
the flat tire repaired by the nearest
Lexus dealer.
397
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and brak-
ing. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you
could lose control of the steering
wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage
should occur
The tire pressure warning system may
not activate immediately.
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly when
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufac-
turer on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label (tire and load
information label). (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indi-
cated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label [tire and load
information label], you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure
warning system) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warn-
ing light) when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
(tire pressure warning light) illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping abil-
ity.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure
warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale
(tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-
sure warning light). When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
(tire pressure warning system) from func-
tioning properly. Always check the
TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire
pressure warning system) to continue to
function properly.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the tire pressure warning
system operates properly
Do not install tires with different specifi-
cations or makers, as the tire pressure
warning system may not operate prop-
erly.
398
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on the con-
tent of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspection by a dealer, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
If a warning message is dis-
played
The multi-information display
shows warnings of system malfunc-
tions, incorrectly performed opera-
tions, and messages that indicate a
need for maintenance. When a
message is shown, perform the cor-
rection procedure appropriate to
the message.
Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on
or flashes in order to indicate that a mes-
sage is currently being displayed on the
multi-information display.
Multi-information display
Follow the instructions of the message
on the multi-information display.
If any of the warning messages are
shown again after the following actions
have been performed, contact your
Lexus dealer.
A
B
Messages and warnings
399
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
*
: A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-information display.
■ System warning lights
The master warning light does not come on
or flash in the following cases. Instead, a
separate system warning light will come on
along with a message shown on the multi-
information display.
● Malfunction of the ABS
The ABS warning light comes on.
(P.390)
● Malfunction of the charging system
The charging system warning light comes
on. (P.388)
■ If “Hybrid System Overheated Output
power reduced” is shown
This message may be displayed when driv-
ing under severe operating conditions. (For
example, when driving up a long steep hill.)
Handling method: P.418
■ If “Traction Battery Needs to be Pro-
tected Refrain From the Use of N Posi-
tion” is shown
This message may be displayed when the
shift lever is in N.
As the hybrid battery (traction battery) can
not be charged when the shift lever is in N,
shift the shift lever to P when the vehicle is
stopped.
■ If “Traction Battery Needs to be Pro-
tected. Shift into P to Restart.” is shown
This message is displayed when the hybrid
battery (traction battery) charge has
become extremely low because the shift
lever has been left in N for a certain amount
of time.
When operating the vehicle, shift to P and
restart the hybrid system.
■ If “Shift to P Before Exiting Vehicle” is
shown
Message is displayed when the driver’s
door is opened without turning the power
switch to OFF with the shift lever in any
position other than P.
Shift the shift lever to P.
■ If “Shift Is in N Release Accelerator
Before Shifting” is shown
Message is displayed when the accelerator
System
warning
light
Warning buzzer
*
Warning
Comes
on
Sounds
Indicates an important situation, such as
when a system related to driving is malfunc-
tioning or that danger may result if the cor-
rection procedure is not performed
Comes
on or
flashes
Sounds
Indicates an important situation, such as
when the systems shown on the multi-infor-
mation display may be malfunctioning
Flashes Sounds
Indicates a situation, such as when damage
to the vehicle or danger may result
Comes
on
Does not sound
Indicates a condition, such as malfunction of
electrical components, their condition, or
indicates the need for maintenance
Flashes Does not sound
Indicates a situation, such as when an opera-
tion has been performed incorrectly, or indi-
cates how to perform an operation correctly
400
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
pedal has been depressed and the shift
lever is in N. Release the accelerator pedal
and shift the shift lever to D, S or R.
■ If “Depress Brake When Vehicle Is
Stopped Hybrid System May Overheat”
is shown
Message is displayed when the accelerator
pedal is depressed to maintain the vehicle
position when stopped on a upward slope,
etc.
If this continues, the hybrid system may
overheat.
Release the accelerator pedal and depress
the brake pedal.
■ If a message that indicates the malfunc-
tion of front camera is displayed
The following systems may be suspended
until the problem shown in the message is
resolved. (P.209, 391)
● PCS (Pre-Collision System)
● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if equipped)
● LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering
control) (if equipped)
● Automatic High Beam
● RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped)
● Dynamic radar cruise control with full-
speed range
■ If “RSA malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is
shown
The system may be malfunctioning. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ If “Radar Cruise Control Unavailable
See Owner’s Manual” is shown
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-
speed range system is suspended tempo-
rarily or until the problem shown in the mes-
sage is resolved. (causes and coping
methods: P.209)
■ If “Radar Cruise Control Unavailable” is
shown
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-
speed range system cannot be used tempo-
rarily. Use the system when it becomes
available again.
■ If “Oil Maintenance Required Soon” is
shown
Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to
be changed. (The indicator will not work
properly unless the oil maintenance data
has been reset.)
Check the engine oil, and change if neces-
sary. After changing the engine oil, the oil
change system should be reset. (P.350)
■ If “Oil Maintenance Required” is shown
Indicates that the engine oil should be
changed. (After the engine oil is changed
and the oil maintenance data has been
reset.)
Check and change the engine oil, and oil fil-
ter by your Lexus dealer. After changing the
engine oil, the oil change system should be
reset. (P.350)
■ If “See Owner’s Manual” is shown
● If the following messages are shown, fol-
lowing the instructions, accordingly.
• “Engine Coolant Temp High” (P.418)
● If the following messages are shown,
there may be a malfunction.
Immediately have the vehicle inspected
by your Lexus dealer.
• “Hybrid System Malfunction”
•“Check Engine”
• “Hybrid Battery System Malfunction”
• “Accelerator System Malfunction”
• “Braking Power Low”
• “Smart Access System Malfunction”
● If “Aux Battery Low” is shown
• When the display goes off after several
seconds
*
Maintain the hybrid system operation for
more than 15 minutes and charge the 12-
volt battery.
• When the display does not go off
Start up the hybrid system using the pro-
cedures for “If the 12-volt battery is dis-
charged” (P.414).
*
: Displays for about 6 seconds
● If “Maintenance required for Traction bat-
tery cooling parts” is shown, the filters
may be clogged, the air intake vents may
be blocked, or there may be a gap in the
duct. Therefore, perform the following
correction procedure.
• If the air intake vents of the hybrid battery
401
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
(traction battery) are dirty, perform the
procedure on P.337 to clean them.
• If the warning message is shown when
the air intake vents of the hybrid battery
(traction battery) are not dirty, have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● If the following messages are shown,
there may be a malfunction.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Continuing to drive the vehicle may be
dangerous.
• “Oil Pressure Low”
• “Charging System Malfunction”
■ Warning buzzer
P.396
NOTICE
■ “High Power Consumption Partial
Limit On AC/Heater Operation” is
frequently shown
There is a possible malfunction relating
to the charging system or the 12-volt bat-
tery may be deteriorating. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ “Aux Battery Low” is frequently
shown
The 12-volt battery may have deterio-
rated. As the battery may discharge in
this state when left unattended, have the
battery inspected by your Lexus dealer.
402
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a
hard, flat surface.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Stop the hybrid system.
Turn on the emergency flashers.
(P.380)
Jack handle
Wheel nut wrench
Towing eyelet
Spare tire
Jack
If you have a flat tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a
spare tire. The flat tire can be
replaced with the spare tire.
For details about tires: P.357
WARNING
■ If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat
tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair, which could result in an
accident.
Before jacking up the vehicle
Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
A
B
C
D
E
403
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
Screwdriver
1 Open the back door.
2 Pull the lever upwards and open the
deck board.
3 Lift the deck board and remove the
hook on the backside of the deck
board.
F
WARNING
■ Using the tire jack
Observe the following precautions.
Improper use of the tire jack may cause
the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack,
leading to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any pur-
pose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with
this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do
not use other tire jacks for replacing
tires on this vehicle.
● Put the jack properly in its jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under
the vehicle while it is supported by the
jack.
● Do not start the hybrid system or drive
the vehicle while the vehicle is sup-
ported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while some-
one is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an
object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height
greater than that required to replace
the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get
under the vehicle.
● When lowering the vehicle, make sure
that there is no-one near the vehicle. If
there are people nearby, warn them
vocally before lowering.
Taking out the jack
404
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
4 Use the hook to secure the deck
board as shown in the illustration.
5 Removing the jack.
1 Remove the rubber band.
2 Remove the cover and the jack.
When stowing the jack, close it by turning
the handle indicated by until it does not
move anymore, stow the jack and the
cover, and press on the jack to fix with the
rubber band.
1 Remove deck under tray.
2 Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
1 Chock the tires.
A
Taking out the spare tire
WARNING
■ When storing the spare tire
Be careful not to catch fingers or other
body parts between the spare tire and
the body of the vehicle.
Replacing a flat tire
405
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
2 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
3 Turn the tire jack portion by
hand until the notch of the jack is in
contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are located under
the rocker panel. They indicate the jack
point positions.
4 Install the wheel nut wrench in jack
handle.
5 Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
6 Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the ground, place
the tire so that the wheel design faces up to
avoid scratching the wheel surface.
Flat tire Wheel chock positions
Front left-
hand side
Behind the rear right-hand
side tire
Front right-
hand side
Behind the rear left-hand
side tire
Rear left-hand
side
In front of the front right-
hand side tire
Rear right-
hand side
In front of the front left-
hand side tire
A
406
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact
surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while
the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to
WARNING
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious
injury:
• Do not try to remove the wheel orna-
ment by hand. Take due care in han-
dling the ornament to avoid
unexpected personal injury.
• Do not touch the disc wheels or the
area around the brakes immediately
after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the
disc wheels and the area around the
brakes will be extremely hot. Touching
these areas with hands, feet or other
body parts while changing a tire, etc.
may result in burns.
● Failure to follow these precautions
could cause the wheel nuts to loosen
and the tire to fall off, resulting in death
or serious injury.
• Never use oil or grease on the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel
nuts to be excessively tightened, lead-
ing to bolt or disc wheel damage. In
addition, the oil or grease can cause
the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel
may fall off, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease from the
wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a
torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m,
10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after
changing wheels.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel
nuts that have been specifically
designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations
in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt
holes of the wheel, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged
wheel ornament, as it may fly off the
wheel while the vehicle is moving.
■ Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with
power back door
In cases such as when replacing tires,
make sure to turn off the power back
door main switch (P.124). Failure to do
so may cause the back door to operate
unintentionally if the power back door
switch is accidentally touched, resulting
in hands and fingers being caught and
injured.
Installing the spare tire
407
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
come off.
2 Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact with
the disc wheel seat .
3 Install the wheel nut wrench in jack
handle.
4 Lower the vehicle.
5 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two
or three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
6 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all
tools.
■ The compact spare tire
● The compact spare tire is identified by the
label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” on
the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily,
and only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire inflation pres-
sure of the compact spare tire. (P.430)
■ After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be
reset. (P.363)
■ When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped
with a tire pressure warning valve and trans-
mitter, low inflation pressure of the spare
tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure
A
B
408
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
warning system. Also, if you replace the
compact spare tire after the tire pressure
warning light comes on, the light remains
on.
■ When the compact spare tire is
equipped
The vehicle becomes lower when driving
with the compact spare tire compared to
when driving with standard tires.
■ If you have a flat front tire on a road cov-
ered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on one of the
rear wheels of the vehicle. Perform the fol-
lowing steps and fit tire chains to the front
tires:
1 Replace a rear tire with the compact
spare tire.
2 Replace the flat front tire with the tire
removed from the rear of the vehicle.
3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.
WARNING
■ When using the compact spare tire
● Remember that the spare tire provided
is specifically designed for use with
your vehicle. Do not use your spare
tire on another vehicle.
● Do not use more than one spare tire
simultaneously.
● Replace the spare tire with a standard
tire as soon as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt
steering, sudden braking and shifting
operations that cause sudden engine
braking.
■ When the compact spare tire is
attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly
detected, and the following systems may
not operate correctly:
• ABS & Brake assist
•VSC
•TRAC
• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-
speed range
• PCS (Pre-Collision System)
•EPS
• AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension
System) (if equipped)
• LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if equipped)
• LDA (Lane Departure Alert with
steering control) (if equipped)
• Panoramic view monitor (if equipped)
• Lexus parking assist monitor (if
equipped)
• Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
• Navigation system (if equipped)
• BSM (Blind spot monitor) (if
equipped)
• Automatic high Beam (if equipped)
Also, not only can the following system
not be utilized fully, but it may even nega-
tively affect the drive-train components:
•E-Four
■ Speed limit when using the compact
spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50
mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare
tire is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed
for driving at high speeds. Failure to
observe this precaution may lead to an
accident causing death or serious injury.
409
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
One of the following may be the cause
of the problem:
The electronic key may not be func-
tioning properly. (P.412)
There may not be sufficient fuel in
the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle. (P.70)
There may be a malfunction in the
immobilizer system. (P.75)
There may be a malfunction in the
steering lock system.
The hybrid system may be malfunc-
tioning due to an electrical problem
such as electronic key battery
depletion or a blown fuse. However,
depending on the type of malfunc-
tion, an interim measure is available
to start the hybrid system. (P.410)
WARNING
■ After using the tools and jack
Before driving, make sure all the tools
and jack are securely in place in their
storage location to reduce the possibility
of personal injury during a collision or
sudden braking.
NOTICE
■ Be careful when driving over bumps
with the compact spare tire installed
on the vehicle
The vehicle becomes lower when driving
with the compact spare tire compared to
when driving with standard tires. Be
careful when driving over uneven road
surfaces.
■ Driving with tire chains and the com-
pact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact
spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body
and adversely affect driving perfor-
mance.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels,
tires or the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter, contact your Lexus
dealer as the tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter may be damaged if not
handled correctly.
If the hybrid system will not
start
Reasons for the hybrid system not
starting vary depending on the situ-
ation.
Check the following and perform
the appropriate procedure:
The hybrid system will not start
even though the correct starting
procedure is being followed.
(P.174)
410
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
One of the following may be the cause
of the problem:
The 12-volt battery may be dis-
charged. (P.414)
The 12-volt battery terminal con-
nections may be loose or corroded.
(P.354)
One of the following may be the cause
of the problem:
The 12-volt battery may be dis-
charged. (P.414)
One or both of the 12-volt battery
terminals may be disconnected.
(P.354)
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem
cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures
are unknown.
When the hybrid system does not start,
the following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the hybrid sys-
tem if the power switch is functioning
normally.
Do not use this starting procedure
except in cases of emergency.
1 Set the parking brake.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
3 Turn the power switch to ACCES-
SORY mode.
4 Press and hold the power switch for
about 15 seconds while depressing
the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the hybrid system can be
started using the above steps, the sys-
tem may be malfunctioning. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
The interior lights and head-
lights are dim, or the horn does
not sound or sounds at a low vol-
ume.
The interior lights and head-
lights do not turn on, or the horn
does not sound.
Starting the hybrid system in an
emergency
411
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
1 Remove the cover inside the lug-
gage compartment by inserting a
screwdriver.
When removing the cover, to pre-
vent damage, cover the tip of the
screwdriver with a rag.
2 After removing the cover, pull the
lever to unlock the fuel filler door
and it will be ready to open as usual.
If you lose your keys
New genuine mechanical keys can
be made by your Lexus dealer using
another mechanical key and the
key number stamped on your key
number plate. Keep the plate in a
safe place such as your wallet, not in
the vehicle.
NOTICE
■ When an electronic key is lost
If the electronic key remains lost, the risk
of vehicle theft increases significantly.
Visit your Lexus dealer immediately with
all remaining electronic keys and the
card key that were provided with your
vehicle.
If the fuel filler door cannot
be opened
If the fuel filler door opener switch
cannot be operated, the following
procedure can be used to open the
fuel filler door.
Opening the fuel filler door
412
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Things to check before taking measures
● Make sure that the smart access system
with push-button start has not been deac-
tivated in the customization setting. If it is
off, turn the function on.
● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is
set, cancel the function. (P.127)
Use the mechanical key (P.108) to
perform the following operations.
■ Unlocking the door
1 Insert the mechanical key while
pulling on the driver’s door handle.
2 Turn the key in order to perform the
following operations.
Unlocking the door
Opens the windows and moon
roof
*
(turn and hold)
Closes the windows and moon
roof
*
(turn and hold)
*
: This setting must be customized at your
Lexus dealer
3 Remove the key, return the handle,
and then pull the handle again.
If the electronic key does not
operate properly
If communication between the
electronic key and vehicle is inter-
rupted (P.128) or the electronic
key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart
access system with push-button
start and wireless remote control
cannot be used. In such cases, the
doors can be opened and the hybrid
system can be started by following
the procedure below.
NOTICE
■ In case of a smart access system with
push-button start malfunction or
other key related problems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic
keys provided with your vehicle, includ-
ing the card key, to your Lexus dealer.
Locking and unlocking the doors
A
B
C
413
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
■ Locking the door
1 Move the inside lock button to the
lock position.
2 Close the door.
1 Ensure that the shift lever is in P and
depress the brake pedal.
2 Touch the Lexus emblem side of the
electronic key to the power switch.
When the electronic key is detected, a
buzzer sounds and the power switch will
turn to ON mode.
When the smart access system with push-
button start is deactivated in customization
setting, the power switch will turn to
ACCESSORY mode.
3 Firmly depress the brake pedal and
check that message shown on the
multi-information display.
4 Press the power switch.
In the event that the hybrid system still can-
not be operated, contact your Lexus
dealer.
■ Stopping the hybrid system
Set the parking brake, shift the shift lever to
P and press the power switch as you nor-
mally do when stopping the hybrid system.
■ Electronic key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary
measure, it is recommended that the elec-
tronic key battery be replaced immediately
when the battery is depleted.
■ Alarm
Using the mechanical key to lock the doors
will not set the alarm system. If a door is
unlocked using the mechanical key when
the alarm system is set, the alarm may be
triggered.
WARNING
■ When using the mechanical key and
operating the power windows or
moon roof
Operate the power window or moon
roof after checking to make sure that
there is no possibility of any passenger
having any of their body parts caught in
the window or moon roof.
Also, do not allow children to operate the
mechanical key. It is possible for children
and other passengers to get caught in
the power window or moon roof.
Starting the hybrid system
414
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Changing power switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press the
power switch in step 3 above.
The hybrid system does not start and modes
will be changed each time the switch is
pressed. (P.177)
If you have a set of jumper (or booster)
cables and a second vehicle with a 12-
volt battery, you can jump start your
vehicle by following the steps below.
1 Confirm that the electronic key is
being carried.
When connecting the jumper (or booster)
cables, depending on the situation, the
alarm may activate and the doors may lock.
(P.78)
If the 12-volt battery is dis-
charged
The following procedures may be
used to start the hybrid system if the
vehicle’s 12-volt battery is dis-
charged.
You can also call your Lexus dealer
or a qualified repair shop.
Restarting the hybrid system
415
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
2 Open the hood (P.346) and fuse
box cover.
3 Open the exclusive jump starting
terminal cover.
4 Remove the engine cover.
5 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to on your vehicle and connect the
clamp on the other end of the positive cable to on the second vehicle. Then,
connect a negative cable clamp to on the second vehicle and connect the
clamp at the other end of the negative cable to .
Exclusive jump starting terminal (your vehicle)
A
B
C
D
A
416
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclusive jump starting
terminal and any moving parts as shown in the illustration
6 Start the engine of the second vehi-
cle. Increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain at that level for
approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the 12-volt battery of your
vehicle.
7 Open and close any of the doors of
your vehicle with the power switch
off.
8 Maintain the engine speed of the
second vehicle and start the hybrid
system of your vehicle by turning
the power switch to ON mode.
9 Make sure the “READY” indicator
comes on. If the indicator light does
not come on, contact your Lexus
dealer.
10 Once the hybrid system has
started, remove the jumper cables
in the exact reverse order from
which they were connected.
11 Close the exclusive jump starting
terminal cover, and reinstall the fuse
box cover to its original position.
Once the hybrid system starts, have
the vehicle inspected at your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
■ Starting the hybrid system when the 12-
volt battery is discharged
The hybrid system cannot be started by
push-starting.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio sys-
tem while the hybrid system is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical com-
ponents when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such
as in heavy traffic.
■ Charging the 12-volt battery
The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery
will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural dis-
charge and the draining effects of certain
electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for
a long time, the 12-volt battery may dis-
charge, and the hybrid system may be
unable to start. (The 12-volt battery
recharges automatically while the hybrid
system is operating.)
■ When the 12-volt battery is removed or
discharged
● In some cases, it may not be possible to
unlock the doors using the smart access
system with push-button start when the
12-volt battery is discharged. Use the
wireless remote control or the mechani-
cal key to lock or unlock the doors.
● The hybrid system may not start on the
first attempt after the 12-volt battery has
recharged but will start normally after the
second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
● The power switch mode is memorized by
the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery is
reconnected, the system will return to the
mode it was in before the 12-volt battery
was discharged. Before disconnecting
the 12-volt battery, turn the power switch
off.
If you are unsure what mode the power
switch was in before the 12-volt battery
discharged, be especially careful when
reconnecting the 12-volt battery.
● Some systems may require initialization.
B
C
D
417
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
■ When replacing the 12-volt battery
● Use a 12-volt battery that the case size is
same as the previous one (LN2), 20 hour
rate capacity (20HR) is equivalent
(60Ah) or greater, and performance rat-
ing (CCA) is equivalent (460A) or
greater.
• If the sizes differ, the 12-volt battery can-
not be properly secured.
• If the 20 hour rate capacity is low, even if
the time period where the vehicle is not
used is a short time, the 12-volt battery
may discharge and hybrid system may
not be able to start.
● After exchanging, firmly attach the fol-
lowing items to the exhaust hole of the 12-
volt battery.
• Use the exhaust hose that was
attached to the 12-volt battery before
exchanging and confirm that it is firmly
connected to the hole section of the vehi-
cle.
• Use the exhaust hole plug included
with the 12-volt battery exchanged or the
one installed on the battery prior to the
exchange. (Depending on the 12-volt
battery to be exchanged, the exhaust
hole may be plugged.)
For details, consult your Lexus dealer.
C
A
B
WARNING
■ Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or
explosions
Observe the following precautions to
prevent accidentally igniting the flamma-
ble gas that may be emitted from the 12-
volt battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is con-
nected to the correct terminal and that
it is not unintentionally in contact with
any other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the other end of the
jumper cable connected to the “+” ter-
minal to come into contact with any
other parts or metal surfaces in the
area, such as brackets or unpainted
metal.
● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the
jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette
lighters or allow open flame near the
12-volt battery.
■ 12-volt Battery precautions
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous
and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Observe the following precau-
tions when handling the 12-volt battery:
● When working with the 12-volt battery,
always wear safety glasses and take
care not to allow any battery fluids
(acid) to come into contact with skin,
clothing or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes
into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area
with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the
affected area until medical attention
can be received.
● Always wash your hands after handling
the 12-volt battery support, terminals,
and other battery-related parts.
418
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ “Engine Coolant Temp High” is
shown on the multi-information dis-
play
1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and
turn off the air conditioning system,
and then stop the hybrid system.
2 If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the
steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
3 After the hybrid system has cooled
down sufficiently, inspect the hoses
WARNING
● Do not allow children near the 12-volt
battery.
■ After recharging the 12-volt battery
Have the 12-volt battery inspected at
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, con-
tinued use may cause the 12-volt battery
to emit a malodorous gas, which may be
detrimental to the health of passengers.
■ When exchanging the 12-volt battery
After exchanging, securely attach the
exhaust hose and exhaust hole plug to
the exhaust hole of the exchanged 12-
volt battery. If not properly installed,
gases (hydrogen) may leak into the vehi-
cle interior, and there is the possible dan-
ger of the gas igniting and exploding.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables,
ensure that they do not become entan-
gled in the cooling fans or belt.
■ To prevent damaging the vehicle
The exclusive jump starting terminal is to
be used when charging the 12-volt bat-
tery from another vehicle in an emer-
gency. It cannot be used to jump start
another vehicle.
If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that
your vehicle is overheating.
The needle of the engine coolant
temperature gauge (P.84)
enters the red zone, or a loss of
hybrid system power is experi-
enced. (For example, the vehicle
speed does not increase.)
“Engine Coolant Temp High” or
“Hybrid System Overheated” is
shown on the multi-information
display.
Steam comes out from under the
hood.
Correction procedures
419
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
and radiator core (radiator) for any
leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fans
If a large amount of coolant leaks, immedi-
ately contact your Lexus dealer.
4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it
is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir.
Reservoir
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
5 Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if
coolant is unavailable.
6 Start the hybrid system and turn the
air conditioning system on to check
that the radiator cooling fans oper-
ate and to check for coolant leaks
from the radiator or hoses.
The fans operate when the air conditioning
system is turned on immediately after a
cold start. Confirm that the fans are oper-
ating by checking the fan sound and air
flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the
air conditioning system on and off repeat-
edly.
(The fans may not operate in freezing tem-
peratures.)
7 If the fans are not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately
and contact your Lexus dealer.
If the fans are operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest Lexus dealer.
8 Check if “Engine Coolant Temp
High” is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display.
If the message does not disappear:
Stop the hybrid system and contact
your Lexus dealer.
If the message is not displayed:
Have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest Lexus dealer.
A
B
A
B
C
420
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ If “Hybrid System Overheated” is
shown on the multi-information dis-
play
1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
2 Stop the hybrid system and care-
fully lift the hood.
3 After the hybrid system has cooled
down, inspect the hoses and radia-
tor core (radiator) for any leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fans
If a large amount of coolant leaks, immedi-
ately contact your Lexus dealer.
4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it
is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir.
Reservoir
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
5 Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if
coolant is unavailable.
6 After stopping the hybrid system
and waiting for 5 minutes or more,
start the hybrid system again and
check if “Hybrid System Over-
heated” is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display.
If the message does not disappear:
Stop the hybrid system and contact your
Lexus dealer.
If the message is not displayed:
The hybrid system temperature has
dropped and the vehicle may be driven
normally.
However, if the message appears again fre-
quently, contact your Lexus dealer.
A
B
A
B
C
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident or injury when
inspecting under the hood of your
vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious
injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine com-
partment may be very hot.
421
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
7
When trouble arises
1 Stop the hybrid system. Shift the
shift lever to P and set the parking
brake.
2 Remove the mud, snow or sand
from around the front wheels.
3 Place wood, stones or some other
material under the front wheels to
help provide traction.
4 Restart the hybrid system.
5 Shift the shift lever to D or R,
release the parking brake. Then,
while exercising caution, depress
the accelerator pedal.
■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle
Press to turn off TRAC. (P.273)
WARNING
● After the hybrid system has been
turned off, check that the “READY”
indicator is off. When the hybrid sys-
tem is operating, the gasoline engine
may automatically start, or the cooling
fan may suddenly operate even if the
gasoline engine stops. Do not touch or
approach rotating parts such as the
fan, which may lead to fingers or cloth-
ing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muf-
fler) getting caught, resulting in serious
injury.
● Do not loosen the coolant reservoir
cap while the hybrid system and radia-
tor are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant
could spray out.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine/power control
unit coolant
Add coolant slowly after the hybrid sys-
tem has cooled down sufficiently. Adding
cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too
quickly can cause damage to the hybrid
system.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling sys-
tem
Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with
foreign matter (such as sand or dust
etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additive.
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following proce-
dures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
Recovering procedure
422
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
WARNING
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehi-
cle
If you choose to push the vehicle back
and forth to free it, make sure the sur-
rounding area is clear to avoid striking
other vehicles, objects or people. The
vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge
back suddenly as it becomes free. Use
extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid accel-
eration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damage to the hybrid trans-
mission and other components
● Avoid spinning the front wheels and
depressing the accelerator pedal
more than necessary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck even after
these procedures are performed, the
vehicle may require towing to be freed.
423
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
8
Vehicle specifications
Vehicle specifications
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level,
etc.) ..............................................424
Fuel information.........................432
Tire information..........................434
8-2. Customization
Customizable features............443
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize........................454
424
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8-1.Specificat ions
*1
:Unladen vehicle
*2
: Vehicles with towing package
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identifica-
tion number for your Lexus. It is used in
registering the ownership of your vehi-
cle.
This number is stamped on the top left
of the instrument panel.
This number is also on the Certification
Label.
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
Overall length 182.7 in. (4640 mm)
Overall width 72.6 in. (1845 mm)
Overall height
*1
64.8 in. (1645 mm)
Wheelbase 104.7 in. (2660 mm)
Tread
Front 62.2 in. (1580 mm)
Rear 62.2 in. (1580 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
895 lb. (405 kg)
Trailer Weight Rating
*2
(Trailer weight + cargo weight)
1500 lb. (685 kg)
Seating capacity
Seating capacity 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)
Vehicle identification
425
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
This number is also stamped under the
right-hand front seat.
■ Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown.
Engine
Model 2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FXE)
Type 4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.54 3.86 in. (90.0 98.0 mm)
Displacement
152.2 cu.in. (2494 cm
3
)
Valve clearance (engine cold) Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 14.8 gal. (56 L, 12.3 Imp.gal.)
426
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Front
Rear
■ Oil capacity (Drain and refill [Reference
*
])
*
: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil.
Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes, and check
the oil level on the dipstick.
■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”
or equivalent to satisfy the following
grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade
engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good starting
in cold weather.
Electric motor (traction motor)
Type Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Maximum output 105 kW
Maximum torque 199 ft•lbf (270 N•m, 27.5 kgf•m)
Type Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Maximum output 50 kW
Maximum torque 103 ft•lbf (139 N•m, 14.2 kgf•m)
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Type Nickel-Metal hydride battery
Voltage 7.2 V/module
Capacity 6.5 Ah (3HR)
Quantity 34 modules
Nominal voltage 244.8 V
Lubrication system
With filter 4.6 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp.qt.)
Without filter 4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp.qt.)
427
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE
5W-20 oil may be used. However, it
must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at
the next oil change.
Outside temperature
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here
as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the
characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower
value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold
weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the vis-
cosity characteristic of the oil when
the oil is at high temperature. An oil
with a higher viscosity (one with a
higher value) may be better suited if
the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme load con-
ditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant Specifica-
tion Advisory Committee (ILSAC)
Certification Mark is added to some oil
containers to help you select the oil you
should use.
A
Cooling system
Capacity
*
Gasoline
engine
Vehicles with towing package
7.7 qt. (7.3 L, 6.4 Imp.qt.)
Vehicles without towing package
7.1 qt. (6.7 L, 5.9 Imp.qt.)
Power con-
trol unit
3.3 qt. (3.1 L, 2.7 Imp.qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-
silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and nonborate
coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
Do not use plain water alone.
428
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
*
: The coolant capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Spark plug
■ 12-volt battery
■ Charging rates
*
: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
Ignition system
Make DENSO FK16HR-A8
Gap 0.03 in. (0.8 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
Electrical system
Specific voltage reading
at 68°F (20°C):
12.0 V or higher
If the voltage is lower than the standard value,
charge the battery.
(After charging the battery, turn on the high beam
headlights for 30 seconds with the power switch
off, and turn the headlights off.)
Quick charge
Slow charge
15 A max.
5 A max.
Hybrid transmission
Fluid capacity
*
Front
4.0 qt. (3.8 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
429
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
*
: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
*
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50.0 kgf)
while the hybrid system is operating.
NOTICE
■ Transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal noise or vibra-
tion, or ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
Rear differential (Rear electric motor)
Fluid capacity
*
1.9 qt. (1.8 L, 1.6 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■ Transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than the above type may cause abnormal noise or vibra-
tion, or ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
Brakes
Pedal clearance
*
4.13 in. (105 mm) Min.
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Pedal free play 0.04 — 0.24 in. (1.0 — 6.0 mm)
Fluid type
• FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
• FMVSS No. 116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704
Steering
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
430
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Type A
Type B
Tires and wheels
Tire size 225/65R17 102H
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation
pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160
km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are permit-
ted by law)
Add 1 psi (10 kPa, 0.1 kgf/cm
2
or bar) to the front
and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire
inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size 17 7 J
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire size 225/60R18 100H
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation
pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Driving at high speeds (above 100 mph [160
km/h]) (in countries where such speeds are permit-
ted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm
2
or bar) to the front
and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire
inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size 18 7 1/2 J
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
431
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
Compact spare tire
A: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
B: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
*
:If equipped
Tire size T165/80D17 104M
Spare tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation
pressure)
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Wheel size 17 4 T
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Light bulbs
Light bulbs Bulb No. W Type
Exterior
Front side marker lights (bulb
type)
W5W 5 A
Front turn signal lights (bulb
type)
*
WY21W 21 B
Interior Vanity lights 8 A
432
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may
be caused by the brand of gasoline you are
using. If driveability problems persist, try
changing the brand of gasoline. If this does
not correct the problem, consult your Lexus
dealer.
■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline
containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline
that contains detergent additives to avoid
the build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains
minimum detergent additives to clean
and/or keep clean intake systems, per
EPA’s lowest additives concentration pro-
gram.
● Lexus strongly recommends the use of
Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more
information on Top Tier Detergent Gaso-
line and a list of marketers, please go to
the official website www.toptiergas.com.
■ Recommendation of the use of low
emissions gasoline
Gasolines containing oxygenates such as
ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated
gasolines, are available in some cities.
These fuels are typically acceptable for use,
providing they meet other fuel require-
ments.
Lexus recommends these fuels, since the
formulations allow for reduced vehicle
emissions.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of
blended gasoline
● Use only gasoline containing up to 15%
ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 15% etha-
nol, including from any pump labeled
E30 (30% ethanol ), E50 (50% etha-
nol ), E85 (85% ethanol ) (which
are only some examples of fuel contain-
ing more than 15% ethanol).
● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure
that it has an octane rating no lower than
87.
● Lexus does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing methanol.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of gas-
oline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhanc-
ing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopen-
tadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus does not recommend the use of gas-
oline that contains MMT. If fuel containing
MMT is used, your emission control system
may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the
instrument cluster may come on. If this hap-
pens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knock-
ing for a short time while accelerating or
driving uphill. This is normal and there is
no need for concern.
Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gaso-
line in your vehicle.
Select octane rating 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher. Use
of unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than 87 may result in
engine knocking. Persistent knock-
ing can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use
should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A.
A
B C
433
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper
fuels are used, the engine will be dam-
aged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to
your vehicle’s three-way catalytic con-
verters causing the emission control sys-
tem to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than the type
previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system
damage or vehicle performance prob-
lems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an
octane number or rating lower than
the level previously stated will cause
persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine dam-
age.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability (poor hot starting,
vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is
encountered after using a different type
of fuel, discontinue the use of that type of
fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can dam-
age your vehicle’s paint.
434
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Full-size tire
Compact spare tire
Tire size (P.436)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P.435)
Location of treadwear indicators (P.357)
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies
in a tire.
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
A
B
C
D
435
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a
tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P.357)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P.430)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Summer tires or all season tires (P.357)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded on its
sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.
Type A
DOT symbol
*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identification
mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer’s optional tire type
code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*
: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire
conforms to applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Type B
DOT symbol
*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identification
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Typical DOT and Tire Identifica-
tion Number (TIN)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
B
C
436
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
mark
Manufacturer’s code
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*
:The DOT symbol certifies that the tire
conforms to applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical tire
size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol (alphabet with one
letter)
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Tire size
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Tire section names
A
B
C
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
437
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
Chafer
This information has been prepared in
accordance with regulations issued by
the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or pro-
spective purchasers of Lexus vehicles
with information on uniform tire quality
grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any
questions you may have as you read this
information.
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must con-
form to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades. Quality
grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified government test
course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they
represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under con-
trolled conditions on specified govern-
ment test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on braking (straight
ahead) traction tests and does not include
cornering (turning) traction.
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this
tire are established for a tire that is prop-
erly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or exces-
sive loading, either separately or in combi-
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
K
438
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
nation, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related
term
Meaning
Cold tire
inflation
pressure
Tire pressure when the vehi-
cle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has
not been driven more than 1
mile or 1.5 km under that
condition
Maximum
inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflated
pressure to which a tire may
be inflated, shown on the
sidewall of the tire
Recom-
mended
inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure
recommended by a manu-
facturer
Accessory
weight
The combined weight (in
excess of those standard
items which may be
replaced) of transmission,
power steering, power
brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and
heater, to the extent that
these items are available as
factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehi-
cle with standard equip-
ment, including the
maximum capacity of fuel,
oil and coolant, and if so
equipped, air conditioning
and additional weight
optional engine
Maximum
loaded vehi-
cle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options
weight
Normal
occupant
weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the
number of occupants speci-
fied in the second column of
Table 1
*
that follows
Occupant
distribution
Distribution of occupants in
a vehicle as specified in the
third column of Table 1
*
below
Production
options
weight
The combined weight of
installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb.
(2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they
replace, not previously con-
sidered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride lev-
elers, roof rack, heavy duty
12-volt battery, and special
trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or
a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads
are seated
Rim diame-
ter
(Wheel
diameter)
Nominal diameter of the
bead seat
Rim size des-
ignation
Rim diameter and width
Tire related
term
Meaning
439
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
Rim type
designation
The industry manufac-
turer’s designation for a rim
by style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between
rim flanges
Vehicle
capacity
weight
(Total load
capacity)
The rated cargo and lug-
gage load plus 150 lb. (68
kg) times the vehicle’s des-
ignated seating capacity
Vehicle max-
imum load
on the tire
The load on an individual
tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight, and
dividing by two
Vehicle nor-
mal load on
the tire
The load on an individual
tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its
share of curb weight, acces-
sory weight, and normal
occupant weight (distrib-
uted in accordance with
Table 1
*
below), and dividing
by two
Weather
side
The surface area of the rim
not covered by the inflated
tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is
made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by
ply cords and that is shaped
to fit the rim
Bead sepa-
ration
A breakdown of the bond
between components in the
bead
Tire related
term
Meaning
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alter-
nate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except
tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears
the load
Chunking
The breaking away of
pieces of the tread or side-
wall
Cord
The strands forming the
plies in the tire
Cord sepa-
ration
The parting of cords from
adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking
Any parting within the
tread, sidewall, or innerliner
of the tire extending to cord
material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an
inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is
designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and
the tire is designed to fit on
the underside of the rim in a
manner that encloses the
rim flanges inside the air
cavity of the tire
Extra load
tire
A tire designed to operate
at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures
than the corresponding
standard tire
Tire related
term
Meaning
440
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Groove
The space between two
adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the
inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflat-
ing medium within the tire
Innerliner
separation
The parting of the innerliner
from cord material in the
carcass
Intended
outboard
sidewall
(a) The sidewall that con-
tains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the
same molding on the other
sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing side-
wall of an asymmetrical tire
that has a particular side
that must always face out-
ward when mounted on a
vehicle
Light truck
(LT) tire
A tire designated by its
manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on light-
weight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a
tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure
Maximum
load rating
The load rating for a tire at
the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that
tire
Tire related
term
Meaning
Maximum
permissible
inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation
pressure to which a tire may
be inflated
Measuring
rim
The rim on which a tire is fit-
ted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction
of tread, sidewall, or inner-
liner that extends to cord
material
Outer diam-
eter
The overall diameter of an
inflated new tire
Overall
width
The linear distance between
the exteriors of the sidewalls
of an inflated tire, including
elevations due to labeling,
decorations, or protective
bands or ribs
Passenger
car tire
A tire intended for use on
passenger cars, multipur-
pose passenger vehicles,
and trucks, that have a gross
vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated
parallel cords
Ply separa-
tion
A parting of rubber com-
pound between adjacent
plies
Tire related
term
Meaning
441
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
*
:Table 1 Occupant loading and distri-
bution for vehicle normal load for vari-
ous designated seating capacities
Pneumatic
tire
A mechanical device made
of rubber, chemicals, fabric
and steel or other materials,
that, when mounted on an
automotive wheel, provides
the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains
the load
Radial ply
tire
A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at sub-
stantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced
tire
A tire designed to operate
at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures
than the corresponding
standard tire
Section
width
The linear distance between
the exteriors of the sidewalls
of an inflated tire, excluding
elevations due to labeling,
decoration, or protective
bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire
between the tread and bead
Sidewall sep-
aration
The parting of the rubber
compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
Tire related
term
Meaning
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction
index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the
ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-
1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel
Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and
Ice-Covered Surfaces, and
which is marked with an
Alpine Symbol ( ) on at
least one sidewall
Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fit-
ted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropri-
ate for use with that tire
Tread
That portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the
road
Tread rib
A tread section running cir-
cumferentially around a tire
Tread sepa-
ration
Pulling away of the tread
from the tire carcass
Treadwear
indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the
principal grooves designed
to give a visual indication of
the degrees of wear of the
tread
Wheel-hold-
ing fixture
The fixture used to hold the
wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
Tire related
term
Meaning
442
8-1. Specifications
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Designated seating capac-
ity, Number of occupants
Vehicle normal load, Num-
ber of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in
third seat, 1 in fourth seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2
in third seat, 1 in fourth seat
443
8-2. Customization
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
8-2.Customization
When customizing vehicle features,
ensure that the vehicle is parked in a
safe place with the shift lever in P and
the parking brake set.
■ Changing using the Remote Touch
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
2 Select on the menu screen and
select “Vehicle”.
3 Select “Vehicle Customization”.
Various setting can be changed. Refer
to the list of settings that can be
changed for details.
■ Changing using the multi-informa-
tion display
1 Press or of the meter con-
trol switches and select .
2 Press or of the meter con-
trol switches, select the item, and
then press .
3 Press or of the meter con-
trol switches, select the desired set-
ting, and then press .
To go back to the previous screen or
exit the customize mode, press .
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being cus-
tomized. Contact your Lexus dealer.
Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch
Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of
electronic features that can be per-
sonalized to suit your preferences.
The settings of these features can
be changed using the multi-infor-
mation display, the Remote Touch,
or at your Lexus dealer.
Customizing vehicle features
WARNING
■ Cautions during customization
As the hybrid system needs to be operat-
ing during customization, ensure that the
vehicle is parked in a place with ade-
quate ventilation. In a closed area such as
a garage, exhaust gases including harm-
ful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect
and enter the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During customization
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge,
ensure that the hybrid system is operat-
ing while customizing features.
Customizable features
A
B
444
8-2. Customization
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer
Settings that can be changed using the vehicle switch
Definition of symbols: O = Available, – =Not available
■ Door lock (P.110, 412)
■ Smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control
(P.110, 126)
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Unlocking using a mechani-
cal key
Driver’s door
unlocked in first
step, all doors
unlocked in sec-
ond step
All doors
unlocked in first
step
— — O —
Automatic door locking func-
tion
Shift position
linked door lock-
ing operation
Off O — O —
Speed linked
door locking
operation
O — O —
Automatic door unlocking
function
Shift position
linked door
unlocking opera-
tion
Off O — O —
Driver’s door
linked door
unlocking opera-
tion
O — O —
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Operation signal (emergency
flashers)
On Off O — O —
Operation buzzer volume 5
Off
O — O —
1 to 7
Time elapsed before the auto-
matic door lock function is
activated if a door is not
opened after being unlocked
60 seconds
Off
O — O —30 seconds
120 seconds
Open door reminder buzzer
(When locking the vehicle)
On Off — — O —
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
445
8-2. Customization
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
■ Smart access system with push-button start (P.126)
■ Wireless remote control (P.107)
■ Automatic light control system (P.190)
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
The doors that are unlocked
using the smart access sys-
tem with push-button start
can be selected
Driver’s door All the doors O — O O
Smart access system with
push-button start
On Off — — O —
Number of consecutive door
lock operations
2 times
As many as
desired
— — O —
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Wireless remote control On Off — — O —
Unlocking operation
Driver’s door
unlocked in first
step, all doors
unlocked in sec-
ond step
All doors
unlocked in first
step
O — O —
Panic function On Off — — O —
The function that validates the
switch of the wireless
remote control when locking
the door (P.117)
When locking the
door
When unlocking
the door
— — O —
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Light sensor sensitivity Standard -2 to 2 O — O —
Adjust the time elapsed
before the headlights auto-
matically turn off
30 seconds
Off
O — O —60 seconds
90 seconds
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
446
8-2. Customization
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Lights (P.190)
■ Illumination (P.302)
■ Multi-information display (P.84, 89)
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Daytime Running Lights
(Daytime running lights can
be disabled)
On Off O — O —
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Time elapsed before the inte-
rior lights turn off
15 seconds
Off
O — O —7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Time elapsed before the exte-
rior lights turn off
15 seconds
Off
O — O —7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation after the power
switch is turned off
On Off — — O —
Operation when the doors
are unlocked
On Off — — O —
Operation when you
approach the vehicle with the
electronic key on your person
On Off — — O —
Footwell lighting On Off — — O —
Fading out of the outer foot
lights when they turn off
Long Short — — O —
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Changeover to tachometer
when Sport mode is selected
Auto
Hybrid system
indicator (always)
— O — —
Tachometer
(always)
EV indicator On Off — O — —
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
447
8-2. Customization
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
*1
: The default setting varies according to countries.
*2
: Some status screens cannot be registered (indicated on the multi-information display)
*3
: 2 of the following items: current fuel consumption, average fuel economy (after reset),
average fuel economy (after refuel), average fuel economy (after start), average vehicle
speed (after reset), average vehicle speed (after start), distance (driving range), dis-
tance (after start), elapsed time (after reset), elapsed time (after start), blank
*4
: Intersection guidance, Incoming calls, Adjust brightness
Language
*1
English
French
O O — —
Spanish
Units
*1
miles (MPG US)
miles
(MPG Imperial)
O O — —
km (L/100 km)
km (km/L)
switch settings
Drive information
1
Desired status
screen
*2
— O — —
Drive information 1
Current fuel con-
sumption
*3
— O — —
Average fuel con-
sumption (after
reset)
Drive information 2
Distance (range)
*3
— O — —
Average speed
(after reset)
Drive information 3
Average fuel con-
sumption (after
refuel)
*3
— O — —
Elapsed time
(after start)
Pop-up display
*4
On Off — O — —
Accent color
Color 1 Color 2
O O — —
Clock 24-hour display 12-hour display — O — —
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
A
B
C
D
448
8-2. Customization
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Head-up display
*
(P.95)
*
:If equipped
■ Automatic air conditioning system (P.291)
■ Eco mode (P.270)
■ Power windows (P.148)
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Route guidance to destina-
tion
On Off — — — O
Driving assist system informa-
tion
On Off — — — O
Audio system operation sta-
tus
On Off — — — O
Lane display On Off — — — O
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Switching between outside
air and recirculated air mode
linked to “AUTO” switch
operation
On Off O — O —
A/C Auto switch operation On Off O — O —
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Heating/cooling operation
minimized in Eco mode
On Off — — O —
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Mechanical key linked opera-
tion
Off On — — O —
Wireless remote control
linked open operation
Off On — — O —
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
449
8-2. Customization
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
■ Moon roof
*1
(P.150)
*1
: If equipped
*2
: This function cannot be customized unless power window operations, using the wireless
remote control or mechanical key, is enabled.
■ Turn signal lever (P.183)
■ PKSA (Parking Support Alert)
*
(P.247)
*
:If equipped
■ Intuitive parking assist
*
(P.248)
*
:If equipped
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Mechanical key linked opera-
tion
*2
Off On — — O —
Wireless remote control
linked open or Tilt up opera-
tions
*2
Off On — — O —
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
The number of times the turn
signal lights flash automati-
cally when the turn signal
lever is moved to the first
position during a lane change
3
4
— — O —
5
6
7
Off
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Buzzer volume 2
1
— O O —
3
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Display setting (When intui-
tive parking assist is operat-
ing)
On Off — O O —
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
450
8-2. Customization
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Parking Support Brake function (for static objects)
*
(P.253)
*
:If equipped
■ Driving position memory
*
(P.138)
*
:If equipped
■ Outside rear view mirrors (P.146)
■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
*
(P.218)
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Parking Support Brake func-
tion (for static objects)
On Off — O — —
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Driver’s seat movement when
exiting the vehicle
Standard
Off
O — O —
Partial
Selection the door linking
driving position memory with
door unlock operation
Driver’s door All doors — — O —
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Automatic mirror folding and
extending operation
Linked to the
locking/unlock-
ing of the doors
Off
— — O —
Linked to opera-
tion of the power
switch
Linked mirror function when
reversing
On Off — — O —
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Lane centering function On Off — O — —
Steering assist function On Off — O — —
Alert types
Steering wheel
vibration
Buzzer — O — —
Alert sensitivity High Standard — O — —
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
451
8-2. Customization
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
*
:If equipped
■ LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering control)
*
(P.227)
*
:If equipped
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (P.211)
■ RSA (Road Sign Assist)
*
(P.235)
Vehicle sway warning func-
tion
On Off — O — —
Vehicle sway warning sensi-
tivity
Standard
High
— O — —
Low
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Steering assist function On Off — O — —
Alert types
Steering wheel
vibration
Buzzer — O — —
Alert sensitivity High Standard — O — —
Vehicle sway warning func-
tion
On Off — O — —
Vehicle sway warning sensi-
tivity
Standard
High
— O — —
Low
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
PCS (Pre-Collision System) On Off — O — —
Adjust alert timing Middle
Early
— O — —
Late
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
RSA (Road Sign Assist) On Off — O — —
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
452
8-2. Customization
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
*
:If equipped
■ Power back door
*1
(P.114)
*1
: If equipped
*2
: Configured by operating the switch of the lower back door. (P.125)
*3
: While carrying the electronic key on your person, press the back door opener switch.
*4
: When the towing hitch is installed, the kick sensor does not work
Excess speed notification
method
Display only
No notification
— O — —
Display and
buzzer
Excess speed notification
level
1 mph (2 km/h)
3 mph (5 km/h)
— O — —
5 mph (10 km/h)
Other notifications method
(No-entry notification)
Display only
No notification
— O — —
Display and
buzzer
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Back door automatic open
and stop position
5
Stop at the
desired position
(height)
*2
O — — O
1 to 5
Back door opener switch
operations
When the back
door is locked
*3
When the back
door is unlocked
— — O —
Power back door operations On Off — O — —
Operation buzzer volume 3
1
— O — —
2
Kick Sensor
*1, 4
On Off — O — —
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
453
8-2. Customization
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8
Vehicle specifications
■ Driving mode select switch (P.270)
■ Vehicle customization
● When the speed linked door locking function and shift position linked door locking func-
tion are both on, the door lock operates as follows.
• When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P, all the doors will be locked.
• If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the speed linked door locking function
would not operate.
• If the vehicle is started with any door unlocked, the speed linked door locking function will
operate.
● When the smart access system with push-button start is off, smart door unlocking cannot
be customized.
● When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the automatic door lock
function is activated, the signals will be generated in accordance with the Operation sig-
nal (buzzer) and the Operation signal (emergency flashers) settings.
■ In the following situations, customize mode in which the settings can be changed
through the multi-information display will automatically be turned off.
● A warning message appears after the customize mode screen is displayed.
● The power switch is turned off.
● The vehicle begins to move while the customize mode screen is displayed.
Function Default setting
Customized set-
ting
Powertrain control in custom
mode
Normal
Power
O — — —
Eco
Chassis control in custom
mode
Normal Sport O — — —
Air conditioning operation in
custom mode
Normal Eco O — — —
A
B
C
D
454
8-3. Initialization
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
8-3.Initializat ion
*
:If equipped
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such
cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or maintenance being per-
formed on the vehicle.
List of the items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
Parking Support Brake function (for
static objects)
*
After reconnecting or changing the
12-volt battery
P.259
Message indicating maintenance is
required (Except for Canada)
After the maintenance is performed P.339
Tire pressure warning system
• When rotating the tires on vehi-
cles with differing front and rear
tire inflation pressures
• When changing the tire inflation
pressure by changing traveling
speed or load weight, etc.
•When changing the tire size
P.363
Oil maintenance After the maintenance is performed P.350
Lexus parking assist monitor
*
• After reconnecting or changing
the 12-volt battery
• After changing a fuse
Refer to the
“NAVIGA-
TION AND
MULTIME-
DIA SYS-
TEM
OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
Panoramic view monitor
*
Power back door
*
P.121
Power window
When functioning abnormally
P.148
Moon roof
*
P.151
455
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
9
9
For owners
For owners
9-1. For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S.
owners ........................................456
Seat belt instructions for Cana-
dian owners (in French).......456
SRS airbag instructions for Cana-
dian owners (in French).......458
Headlight aim instructions for
Canadian owners (in French)
........................................................465
456
9-1. For owners
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
9-1.For owners
Déroulez la sangle diagonale de
telle sorte qu’elle passe bien sur
l’épaule, sans pour autant être en
contact avec le cou ou glisser de
l’épaule.
Placez la sangle abdominale le plus
bas possible sur les hanches.
Réglez la position du dossier de
siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus
droit possible et calez-vous bien
dans le siège.
Ne pas vriller la ceinture de sécu-
rité.
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying the Lexus Division
of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
(Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota
Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-
424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov
; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200
New Jersey Ave. SE., Washington,
DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
.
Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explana-
tion of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section
in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more
detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des cein-
tures de sécurité
457
9-1. For owners
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
9
For owners
■ Soins à porter aux ceintures de
sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une
éponge humectée d’eau savonneuse
tiède. Par ailleurs, vérifiez régulière-
ment que les ceintures ne sont pas
effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent
pas exagérément usées.
Entretien et soin
AVERTISSEMENT
Respectez les précautions suivantes afin
de réduire le risque de blessure en cas
de freinage brusque, d’embardée ou
d’accident.
À défaut, des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, pourraient s’ensuivre.
■ Port de la ceinture de sécurité
● Ne pas passer la sangle diagonale
sous le bras.
● Faites toujours passer votre ceinture
de sécurité au plus bas sur vos
hanches et bien dans l’axe.
■ État et usure des ceintures de sécu-
rité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité péri-
odiquement. Contrôlez qu’elles ne sont
pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs
ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. Ne pas
utiliser une ceinture de sécurité
défectueuse avant qu’elle ne soit rem-
placée. Une ceinture de sécurité
défectueuse n’apporte aucune garantie
de protection de l’occupant contre des
blessures graves, voire mortelles.
■ Lorsque vous utilisez la ceinture de
sécurité du siège central arrière
Ne pas utiliser la ceinture de sécurité du
siège central arrière avec une de ses
deux boucles déverrouillée. Si une seule
des boucles est verrouillée, tout freinage
brusque ou collision peut entraîner des
blessures graves, voire mortelles.
458
9-1. For owners
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
■ Emplacement des coussins gonflables SRS
Coussins gonflables SRS frontaux
Coussin gonflable SRS conducteur/passager avant
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et du passager avant con-
tre les chocs avec les éléments de l’habitacle
Coussin gonflable SRS de genoux
Participe à la protection du conducteur
Coussin gonflable SRS d’assise de siège
Participe à retenir le passager avant
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et rideau
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux
Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants aux places avant
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted
from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.
Système de coussins gonflables SRS
A
B
C
D
459
9-1. For owners
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
9
For owners
Coussins gonflables SRS rideau
• Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants assis dans les sièges
des places extérieures
• Participent à empêcher les occupants d’être éjectés du véhicule en cas de retournement
de celui-ci
■ Composition du système de coussins gonflables SRS
Coussin gonflable passager avant
Témoins indicateurs “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”
Coussins gonflables latéraux
Coussins gonflables rideau
Capteurs d’impact latéral (arrière)
Témoin d’alerte SRS
Système de classification d’occupant du siège passager avant (ECU et cap-
teurs)
Coussin gonflable conducteur
Capteurs d’impact latéral (porte avant)
Prétensionneur de ceinture de sécurité du conducteur
Prétensionneur et limiteurs d’effort de ceinture de sécurité du passager avant
Coussin gonflable d’assise de siège
Capteur de position du siège conducteur
Coussin gonflable de genoux
E
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
460
9-1. For owners
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité conducteur
Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité passager avant
Capteurs d’impact avant
Boîtier électronique de coussins gonflables
Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELLIGENTS
(ADVANCED AIRBAGS) conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables
aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). Le boîtier électronique de coussins gonflables
(ECU) utilise les informations reçues des capteurs, etc. détaillés dans le schéma ci-dessus
de composition du système pour commander le déploiement des coussins gonflables. Ces
informations comprennent des informations sur la gravité de la collision et les occupants.
Le déploiement rapide des coussins gonflables est obtenu au moyen d’une réaction
chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant
d’amortir le mouvement des occupants.
O
P
Q
R
AVERTISSEMENT
■ Précautions avec les coussins gonfla-
bles SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes
concernant les coussins gonflables SRS.
À défaut, des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, pourraient s’ensuivre.
● Le conducteur et tous les passagers à
bord du véhicule doivent porter leur
ceinture de sécurité correctement.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des
dispositifs de protection complémen-
taires aux ceintures de sécurité.
461
9-1. For owners
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
9
For owners
AVERTISSEMENT
● Le coussin gonflable SRS conducteur
se déploie avec une puissance con-
sidérable et peut occasionner des
blessures graves, voire mortelles,
notamment lorsque le conducteur se
trouve très près du coussin gonflable.
L’autorité fédérale chargée de la sécu-
rité routière aux États-Unis, la NHTSA
(National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration) conseille:
Sachant que la zone de danger pour le
coussin gonflable conducteur se
trouve dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50
à 75 mm) du déploiement, placez-
vous à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin
gonflable conducteur pour garantir
une marge de sécurité suffisante.
Cette distance est à mesurer entre le
moyeu du volant de direction et le ster-
num. Si vous êtes assis à moins de 10
in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer
votre position de conduite de plusieurs
façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible,
tout en continuant à pouvoir atteindre
confortablement les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du
siège. Bien que les véhicules soient dif-
férents les uns des autres, la plupart
des conducteurs peuvent s’asseoir à
une distance de 10 in. (250 mm),
même avec le siège conducteur com-
plètement avancé, simplement en
inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si
vous avez des difficultés à voir la route
après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez
un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour
vous rehausser ou, si votre véhicule est
équipé du réglage en hauteur du
siège, remontez-le.
• Si votre volant de direction est régla-
ble, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela vous
permet d’orienter le coussin gonflable
vers votre buste plutôt que vers la tête
et le cou.
Le siège doit être réglé selon les recom-
mandations de la NHTSA ci-dessus, tout
en conservant le contrôle des pédales et
du volant, et la vue des commandes au
tableau de bord.
● Si vous attachez une rallonge de cein-
ture de sécurité aux boucles des cein-
tures de sièges avant, mais pas au
pêne de la ceinture de sécurité pro-
prement dite, les coussins gonflables
SRS frontaux déterminent que le con-
ducteur et le passager avant portent
leur ceinture de sécurité, alors même
qu’elle n’est pas attachée. Dans ce cas,
les coussins gonflables SRS frontaux
risquent de ne pas se déployer cor-
rectement en cas de collision, causant
des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
Veillez à porter la ceinture de sécurité
avec la rallonge de ceinture de sécu-
rité.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS passager
avant se déploie également avec une
puissance considérable et peut occa-
sionner des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, notamment lorsque le pas-
sager avant se trouve très près du
coussin gonflable. Le siège du pas-
sager avant doit se trouver le plus loin
possible du coussin gonflable et le
dossier doit être réglé de manière à ce
que le passager avant soit assis bien
droit.
462
9-1. For owners
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
AVERTISSEMENT
● Le déploiement d’un coussin gonflable
peut infliger des blessures graves,
voire mortelles, aux nourrissons et aux
enfants mal assis et/ou mal attachés.
Installez dans un siège de sécurité
enfant les enfants trop jeunes pour
pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité.
Lexus recommande vivement
d’installer tous les nourrissons et
enfants aux places arrière du véhicule
et de prévoir pour eux des systèmes
de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière
sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et
les enfants que le siège passager
avant.
● Ne jamais installer un siège de sécurité
enfant type dos à la route sur le siège
passager avant, même si le témoin
indicateur “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé.
En cas d’accident, la force exercée par
le déploiement rapide du coussin gon-
flable passager avant peut causer des
blessures graves, voire mortelles à un
enfant, si le siège de sécurité enfant
type dos à la route est installé sur le
siège passager avant.
● Ne pas s’asseoir sur le bord du siège et
ne pas s’appuyer contre la planche de
bord.
● Ne pas laisser un enfant rester debout
devant le coussin gonflable SRS pas-
sager avant ni assis sur les genoux du
passager avant.
● Ne pas laisser les occupants des
sièges avant voyager avec un objet sur
les genoux.
● Ne pas s’appuyer contre la porte, con-
tre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les
montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
● Interdisez à quiconque de s’age-
nouiller sur le siège passager en appui
contre la porte ou de sortir la tête ou
les mains à l’extérieur du véhicule.
463
9-1. For owners
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
9
For owners
AVERTISSEMENT
● Ne rien fixer ou disposer sur la
planche de bord, la garniture centrale
du moyeu de volant de direction et la
partie inférieure du tableau de bord.
Lors du déploiement des coussins
gonflables SRS conducteur, passager
avant et de genoux, tout objet risque
de se transformer en projectile.
● Ne rien fixer aux parties telles qu’une
porte, le pare-brise, une vitre latérale,
un montant avant ou arrière, un rail
latéral de toit et une poignée de main-
tien.
● Ne pas suspendre aux crochets à
vêtements un cintre nu ni aucun objet
dur ou tranchant. En cas de déploie-
ment des coussins gonflables SRS
rideau, tous ces objets pourraient se
transformer en projectiles et causer
des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Si une housse en vinyle recouvre la
partie où le coussins gonflable SRS de
genoux se déploie, veillez à l’enlever.
● N’utilisez pour les sièges aucun acces-
soire venant recouvrir les parties où se
déploient les coussins gonflables SRS
latéraux et le coussin gonflable SRS
d’assise de siège, car il risquerait de
gêner le déploiement des coussins
gonflables SRS. De tels accessoires
peuvent empêcher les coussins gon-
flables latéraux et d’assise de siège de
s’activer correctement, neutraliser le
système ou provoquer le déploiement
accidentel des coussins gonflables
latéraux et d’assise de siège, provo-
quant ainsi des blessures graves, voire
mortelles.
● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des
pressions excessives aux parties ren-
fermant les composants des coussins
gonflables SRS.
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un
mauvais fonctionnement des coussins
gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez aucun composant du sys-
tème immédiatement après le
déclenchement (déploiement) des
coussins gonflables SRS, car ils sont
alors encore très chauds.
● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer
après le déploiement des coussins
gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou
une vitre pour faire entrer de l’air frais,
ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela
ne présente pas de danger. Retirez
tout résidu dès que possible afin
d’éviter d’éventuelles irritations de la
peau.
● Si les parties renfermant les coussins
gonflables SRS, telles que la garniture
du moyeu de volant et les garnitures
de montants avant et arrière, apparais-
sent abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les
remplacer par votre concessionnaire
Lexus.
464
9-1. For owners
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
AVERTISSEMENT
● Ne rien poser sur le siège du passager
avant, comme un coussin par exemple.
Cela a pour conséquence de répartir
le poids du passager sur toute la sur-
face du siège, ce qui empêche le cap-
teur de détecter normalement le poids
du passager. En conséquence, les
coussins gonflables SRS frontaux du
passager avant peuvent ne pas se
déployer en cas de collision.
■ Modification et élimination en fin de
vie des éléments du système de cous-
sins gonflables SRS
Consultez impérativement votre conces-
sionnaire Lexus si vous avez besoin
d’intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de
procéder à l’une des modifications suiva-
ntes. Les coussins gonflables SRS peu-
vent ne pas fonctionner correctement ou
se déployer (se gonfler) accidentelle-
ment, provoquant ainsi des blessures
graves, voire mortelles.
● Installation, dépose, démontage et
réparations des coussins gonflables
SRS
● Réparations, modifications, démon-
tage ou remplacement du volant, du
tableau de bord, de la planche de
bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage,
des montants avant, latéraux et arrière
ou des rails latéraux de toit
● Réparation ou modification des ailes
avant, du bouclier avant, ou des flancs
de l’habitacle
● Installation d’un équipement de pro-
tection sur la calandre (pare-buffle,
pare-kangourou, etc.), d’un chasse-
neige, de treuils ou d’une galerie de
toit
● Modification des suspensions du
véhicule
● Installation d’appareils électroniques,
tels qu’un émetteur/récepteur radio ou
lecteur de CD
● Aménagements du véhicule visant à
permettre sa conduite par une per-
sonne atteinte d’un handicap physique
465
9-1. For owners
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
9
For owners
Type A
Vis de réglage A
Vis de réglage B
Type B
Vis de réglage A
Vis de réglage B
Veillez à ce que le réservoir de car-
burant soit plein et vérifiez que la
partie autour des projecteurs n’est
pas déformée.
Stationnez le véhicule sur sol plat.
Vérifiez que les pneus sont gonflés à
la pression préconisée.
Demandez à quelqu’un de s’asseoir
dans le siège conducteur.
Faites plusieurs fois rebondir le
véhicule sur ses suspensions.
1 Avec un tournevis à empreinte Phil-
lips, tournez la vis A dans l’un ou
l’autre sens.
Notez le sens de rotation et le nom-
bre de tours.
Type A
Headlight aim instructions
for Canadian owners (in
French)
The following is a French explana-
tion of headlight aim instructions
from the headlight aim section in
this manual.
Vis de réglage en mouvement
vertical
A
B
A
B
Avant de contrôler le pointage
des projecteurs
Réglage du pointage des projec-
teurs
466
9-1. For owners
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Type B
2 Tournez la vis B du même nombre
de tours et dans le même sens qu’à
l’étape 1.
Si vous n’arrivez pas à régler les project-
eurs par cette procédure, confiez le
véhicule à votre concessionnaire Lexus
afin qu’il en règle le pointage.
Type A
Type B
468
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
1-1.What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you lose your mechanical keys,
new genuine mechanical keys can
be made by your Lexus dealer.
(P.411)
If you lose your electronic keys, the
risk of vehicle theft increases signifi-
cantly. Contact your Lexus dealer
immediately. (P.411)
Is the electronic key battery weak or
depleted? (P.369)
Is the power switch in ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the
power switch off. (P.177)
Is the electronic key left inside the
vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure
that you have the electronic key on
your person.
The function may not operate prop-
erly due to the condition of the radio
wave. (P.128)
Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle when the
lock is set. Open the rear door from
outside and then unlock the child-
protector lock. (P.113)
Did you press the power switch
while firmly depressing the brake
pedal? (P.174)
Is the shift lever in P? (P.174)
Is the electronic key anywhere
detectable inside the vehicle?
(P.126)
Is the steering wheel unlocked?
(P.175)
Is the electronic key battery weak or
depleted?
In this case, the hybrid system can
be started in a temporary way.
(P.413)
Is the 12-volt battery discharged?
(P.414)
If you have a problem, check the
following before contacting your
Lexus dealer.
The doors cannot be locked,
unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
The electronic key does not oper-
ate properly
The doors cannot be locked or
unlocked
The rear door cannot be opened
If you think something is wrong
The hybrid system does not start
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
469
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
Is the power switch in ON mode?
If you cannot release the shift lever
by depressing the brake pedal with
the power switch in ON mode
(P.181)
It is locked automatically to prevent
theft of the vehicle. (P.175)
Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the
one at the driver’s seat cannot be
operated if the window lock switch
is pressed. (P.149)
The auto power off function will be
operated if the vehicle is left in
ACCESSORY or ON mode (the
hybrid system is not operating) for a
period of time. (P.177)
The seat belt reminder light is flash-
ing
Are the driver and the passengers
wearing the seat belts? (P.393)
The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released?
(P.184)
Depending on the situation, other
types of warning buzzer may also
sound. (P.388, 398)
Did anyone inside the vehicle open
a door during setting the alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm
sounds. (P.77)
To stop the alarm, turn the power
switch to ON mode or start the hybrid
system.
Is the message displayed on the
multi-information display?
Check the message on the multi-
information display. (P.398)
When a warning light turns on or a
warning message is displayed, refer
to P.388, 398.
The shift lever cannot be shifted
from P even if you depress the
brake pedal
The steering wheel cannot be
turned after the hybrid system is
stopped
The windows do not open or
close by operating the power
window switches
The power switch is turned off
automatically
A warning buzzer sounds during
driving
An alarm is activated and the
horn sounds
A warning buzzer sounds when
leaving the vehicle
A warning light turns on or a
warning message is displayed
470
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and
replace the flat tire with the spare
tire. (P.402)
Try the procedure for when the vehi-
cle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or
snow. (P.421)
When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
The vehicle becomes stuck
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
471
Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index
A
A/C.....................................................................291
Air conditioning filter ...............................368
Automatic air conditioning system.....291
Micro dust and pollen filter................... 297
S-FLOW mode..........................................296
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)...............272
Function...........................................................272
Warning light...............................................390
Active Sound Control (ASC) .................188
Adaptive Variable Suspension system
(AVS) ............................................................ 273
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System).192
Air conditioning filter.................................368
Air conditioning system..............................291
Air conditioning filter ...............................368
Automatic air conditioning system.....291
Micro dust and pollen filter................... 297
S-FLOW mode..........................................296
Airbags ............................................................... 32
Airbag operating conditions................... 34
Airbag precautions for your child.........37
Airbag warning light ................................390
Correct driving posture............................ 25
Curtain shield airbag operating condi-
tions.................................................................. 34
Curtain shield airbag precautions ........37
Front passenger occupant classification
system...............................................................41
General airbag precautions ....................37
Locations of airbags.....................................32
Modification and disposal of airbags .40
Seat cushion airbag......................................32
Side airbag operating conditions......... 34
Side airbag precautions.............................37
Side and curtain shield airbags operating
conditions...................................................... 34
Side and curtain shield airbags precau-
tions...................................................................37
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian
owners.........................................................458
SRS airbags...................................................... 32
SRS warning light...................................... 390
Alarm....................................................................77
Alarm....................................................................77
Warning buzzer........................................388
Anchor brackets.....................................55, 57
Antenna (Smart access system with push-
button start) ..................................................126
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)................272
Function.......................................................... 272
Warning light .............................................. 390
Approach warning......................................243
Armrest..............................................................321
ASC (Active Sound Control) .................188
Assist grips.......................................................321
Automatic air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter............................... 368
Automatic air conditioning system.....291
Micro dust and pollen filter...................297
S-FLOW mode..........................................296
Automatic headlight leveling system.....191
Automatic High Beam ................................193
Automatic light control system.................191
Auxiliary box..................................................307
B
Back door..........................................................114
Wireless remote control........................... 117
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulb..................................375
Battery (12-volt battery)
If the 12-volt battery is discharged ......414
Preparing and checking before winter
..........................................................................279
Replacing ........................................................ 416
Warning light ..............................................388
Battery (traction battery) ............................70
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)....................... 262
Blind Spot Monitor function.................265
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.......267
Bottle holders................................................306
Brake
472
Alphabetical Index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Brake Hold .....................................................187
Fluid..................................................................429
Parking brake ............................................... 184
Regenerative braking.................................68
Warning light...............................................389
Brake assist .....................................................272
Brake Hold.......................................................187
Break-in tips.....................................................157
Brightness control
Instrument panel light control ................88
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)....................... 262
Blind Spot Monitor function.................265
Rear Cross Traffic Alert function....... 267
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) main switch
.......................................................................... 262
C
Card key .......................................................... 106
Care
Aluminum wheels......................................332
Exterior ...........................................................335
Interior.............................................................335
Seat belts........................................................335
Cargo capacity...........................161, 164, 424
Cargo hooks .................................................308
Cargo net hooks..........................................308
Chains..............................................................280
Child restraint system....................................47
Booster seats installation..........................53
Convertible seats installation..................52
Front passenger occupant classification
system...............................................................41
Infant seats definition...................................48
Infant seats installation..................................51
Installing CRS with LATCH anchors.55
Installing CRS with seat belts....................51
Installing CRS with top tether strap..... 57
LATCH anchors...........................................55
Child safety ........................................................47
12-volt battery precautions.........355, 417
Airbag precautions.......................................37
Back door precautions...............................114
Child restraint system................................. 47
How your child should wear the seat belt
............................................................................. 27
Installing child restraints............................. 47
Moon roof precautions............................ 152
Power window lock switch.................... 149
Power window precautions .................. 149
Rear door child-protectors ..................... 113
Removed key battery precautions....370
Seat belt extender precautions.............. 27
Seat belt precautions ..........................26, 47
Seat heater precautions..........................299
Child-protectors.............................................113
Cleaning...............................................332, 335
Aluminum wheels......................................332
Exterior............................................................332
Interior .............................................................335
Seat belts........................................................335
Clock..................................................................312
Compass.........................................................328
Condenser.....................................................352
Console box..................................................306
Consumption screen....................................99
Coolant
Capacity.........................................................427
Checking ........................................................351
Preparing and checking before winter
..........................................................................279
Warning light .............................................. 389
Cooling system...............................................351
Hybrid system overheating ................... 418
Cornering lights.............................................192
Coussins gonflables
Modification et élimination en fin de vie
des coussins gonflables ......................464
Précautions avec les coussins gonflables
latéraux ....................................................... 460
Précautions avec les coussins gonflables
latéraux et rideau................................... 460
Précautions avec les coussins gonflables
pour votre enfant................................... 460
Précautions avec les coussins gonflables
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Alphabetical Index
473
rideau ...........................................................460
Précautions générales avec les coussins
gonflables...................................................460
Cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-
speed range.............................................. 237
Cup holders...................................................306
Curtain shield airbags .................................. 32
Customizable features..............................443
D
Daytime running light system....................191
Deck board....................................................309
Deck under tray...........................................309
Defogger
Outside rear view mirrors ....................292
Rear window................................................292
Windshield....................................................292
Differential......................................................429
Dimension ......................................................424
Dinghy towing.................................................173
Display
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ...................262
Drive information..........................................90
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-
speed range.............................................. 237
Energy monitor..............................................99
Head-up display ...........................................95
Intuitive parking assist..............................248
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering
control).........................................................227
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)......................218
Multi-information display..........................89
Warning messages ..................................398
Do-it-yourself maintenance....................344
Door lock
Back door......................................................... 115
Side doors........................................................110
Smart access system with push-button
start..................................................................126
Wireless remote control..........................107
Doors
Automatic door locking and unlocking
system..............................................................113
Back door......................................................... 114
Door glasses.................................................148
Door lock..........................................................110
Outside rear view mirrors...................... 146
Rear door child-protectors ..................... 113
Side doors ........................................................110
Drive information ...........................................90
Drive-start control .............................157, 180
Driver’s seat belt reminder light............393
Driver’s seat position memory................ 138
Driving
Break-in tips ...................................................157
Correct posture.............................................25
Driving mode select switch ..................270
Hybrid vehicle driving tips .................... 277
Procedures ....................................................156
Winter drive tips.........................................279
Driving position memory........................... 138
Memory recall function............................ 139
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-
speed range
Function.......................................................... 237
E
E-Four .............................................................. 273
ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake Sys-
tem).................................................................272
Eco mode........................................................270
EDR (Event data recorder)...........................8
Electric motor
Location.............................................................67
Specification .................................................426
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
Function.......................................................... 272
Warning light .............................................. 390
Electronic key
Battery-saving function.............................127
If the electronic key does not operate
properly.........................................................412
474
Alphabetical Index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Replacing the battery...............................369
Electronically Controlled Brake System
(ECB).............................................................272
Emergency flashers....................................380
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer sounds .................388
If a warning light turns on ..................... 388
If a warning message is displayed.....398
If the 12-volt battery is discharged......414
If the electronic key does not operate
properly.........................................................412
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
.............................................................................411
If the hybrid system will not start........409
If the vehicle is trapped in rising water
.......................................................................... 381
If you have a flat tire..................................402
If you lose your keys.....................................411
If you think something is wrong .........386
If your vehicle becomes stuck...............421
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency ............................................... 380
If your vehicle needs to be towed.....383
If your vehicle overheats......................... 418
Energy monitor ...............................................99
Engine ..............................................................425
Accessory mode ......................................... 177
Compartment .............................................348
Engine switch.................................................174
Hood................................................................346
How to start the hybrid system ............174
Identification number...............................425
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency ............................................... 380
Ignition switch (power switch)..............174
Overheating.................................................. 418
Power switch .................................................174
Engine compartment cover....................349
Engine coolant
Capacity......................................................... 427
Checking .........................................................351
Preparing and checking before winter
..........................................................................279
Warning light .............................................. 389
Engine coolant temperature gauge .......84
Engine oil
Capacity.........................................................426
Checking .......................................................349
Warning light .............................................. 389
Engine switch..................................................174
EPS (Electronic Power Steering)
Function.......................................................... 272
Warning light .............................................. 390
EV drive mode................................................178
EV indicator......................................................68
Event data recorder (EDR)...........................8
F
Flat tire .............................................................402
Tire pressure warning system ............ 359
Floor mats.......................................................... 24
Fluid
Brake................................................................429
Transmission.................................................428
Washer ...........................................................353
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs................................375
Switch................................................................196
Front passenger occupant classification
system ................................................................41
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
..........................................................................393
Front seat heaters........................................300
Front seats........................................................132
Adjustment......................................................132
Cleaning.........................................................335
Correct driving posture ............................25
Driving position memory........................138
Head restraints............................................... 141
Power easy access system ....................138
Seat heaters.................................................300
Seat position memory ..............................138
Front side marker lights
Light switch....................................................190
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Alphabetical Index
475
Replacing light bulbs................................376
Wattage............................................................431
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs....................375, 376
Turn signal lever.......................................... 183
Wattage............................................................431
Fuel
Capacity.........................................................425
Fuel gauge .......................................................84
Gas station information..........................484
Information.................................................... 432
Refueling ........................................................203
Type..................................................................425
Warning light...............................................393
Fuel filler door...............................................203
Refueling ........................................................203
When the fuel filler door cannot be
opened ............................................................411
Fuses...................................................................371
G
Garage door opener................................. 322
Gas station information............................484
Gauges...............................................................84
Glove box.......................................................306
Glove box light.............................................306
Grocery bag hooks....................................309
H
Head restraints................................................141
Head-up display..............................................95
Headlights ....................................................... 190
Automatic headlight leveling.................. 191
Automatic High Beam..............................193
Light switch.................................................... 190
Replacing light bulbs................................375
Heated steering wheel..............................300
Heaters
Automatic air conditioning system.....291
Heated steering wheel............................299
Outside rear view mirrors ....................292
Seat heaters.................................................300
High mounted stoplight
Replacing light bulb..................................375
Hill-start assist control............................... 273
Hood.................................................................346
Open................................................................346
Hooks
Cargo hooks...............................................308
Retaining hooks (floor mat)..................... 24
Horn....................................................................144
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Location.............................................................70
Specification .................................................426
Hybrid battery air vent..................................72
Hybrid system...................................................67
Acoustic vehicle alerting system...........69
Emergency shut off system...................... 73
Energy monitor/consumption screen99
EV drive mode............................................. 178
High voltage components .......................70
Hybrid System Indicator ...........................87
Hybrid system precautions......................70
Hybrid vehicle driving tips .................... 277
If the hybrid system will not start ....... 409
Overheating.................................................. 418
Power switch..................................................174
Regenerative braking.................................68
Starting the hybrid system.......................174
Warning lights............................................388
Hybrid System Indicator......................84, 87
Hybrid transmission.....................................180
I
I/M test ............................................................342
Identification
Engine..............................................................425
Vehicle............................................................424
Ignition switch (Power switch).................174
Illuminated entry system...........................302
Immobilizer system........................................ 75
Indicators...........................................................82
476
Alphabetical Index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Initialization
Items to initialize .........................................454
Inside rear view mirror................................144
Instrument panel light control...................88
Interior lights..................................................302
Intuitive parking assist
Enabled/disabled on the system.......248
Function..........................................................248
Warning message..................................... 249
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack............................346
Vehicle-equipped jack...........................402
Jack handle ....................................................402
Jam protection function
Moon roof........................................................ 151
Power back door closer............................121
Power windows........................................... 148
Rear seats ........................................................137
K
Keyless entry
Smart access system with push-button
start..................................................................126
Wireless remote control..........................107
Keys.................................................................... 106
Battery-saving function ............................127
Electronic key............................................... 106
Engine switch.................................................174
If the electronic key does not operate
properly.........................................................412
If you lose your keys.....................................411
Key number plate....................................... 106
Keyless entry.........................................110, 126
Mechanical key............................................ 106
Power switch .................................................174
Replacing the battery...............................369
Warning buzzer...........................................127
Wireless remote control key.................107
Knee airbags ....................................................32
L
Lane Departure Alert with steering control
(LDA).............................................................227
Lane Tracing Assist (LTA).........................218
Language (multi-information display) 446
LATCH anchors.............................................55
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering
control)..........................................................227
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever .................................346
Hood lock release lever.........................346
Shift lever.........................................................180
Turn signal lever .......................................... 183
Wiper lever.................................................... 196
Lexus Enform Remote..................................65
Lexus Enform Safety Connect..................60
Lexus Enform Service Connect...............66
Lexus Safety System+ 2.0
Automatic High Beam............................. 193
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-
speed range..............................................237
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering
control) ........................................................ 227
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)..................... 218
PCS (Pre-Collision System)................... 211
RSA (Road Sign Assist)..........................235
License plate lights
Light switch....................................................190
Replacing light bulbs................................375
Light
Automatic High Beam system.............193
Cornering lights ...........................................192
Fog light switch............................................196
Headlight switch..........................................190
Illuminated entry system.........................302
Interior light list ............................................302
Interior lights................................................ 303
Luggage compartment light ...................116
Personal lights ............................................303
Replacing light bulbs................................375
Turn signal lever .......................................... 183
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Alphabetical Index
477
Vanity lights....................................................312
Wattage............................................................431
Welcome light illumination control.......111
Light bulbs
Replacing...........................................375, 376
Wattage............................................................431
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).........................218
Luggage cover ..............................................310
M
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance .................344
General maintenance.............................340
Maintenance data...................................... 424
Maintenance requirements..................339
Malfunction indicator lamp.....................389
Meter
Head-up display ...........................................95
Indicators ..........................................................80
Instrument panel light control ................88
Meters................................................................84
Multi-information display..........................89
Warning lights............................................ 388
Warning messages ..................................398
Micro dust and pollen filter ..................... 297
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror..............................144
Outside rear view mirror defoggers292
Outside rear view mirrors ......................146
Vanity mirrors................................................312
Moon roof
Jam protection function.............................151
Operation....................................................... 150
Warning message..........................152, 398
Multi-information display
Clock ..................................................................84
Drive information..........................................90
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-
speed range.............................................. 237
Energy monitor..............................................99
Language.......................................................446
LDA (Lane Departure Alert with steering
control) ........................................................ 227
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)..................... 218
Warning messages..................................398
N
Noise from under vehicle ...............................6
O
Odometer .........................................................84
Oil
Engine oil........................................................426
Rear differential oil.....................................429
Opener
Back door......................................................... 117
Fuel filler door..............................................203
Hood................................................................346
Outside rear view mirrors.........................146
Adjusting and folding................................ 146
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)....................262
Linked mirror function when reversing
............................................................................147
Mirror position memory..........................138
Outside rear view mirror defoggers292
Outside temperature display....................84
Overheating................................................... 418
P
Paddle shift switches....................................182
Panic mode.....................................................108
Parking brake
Operation.......................................................184
Parking brake engaged warning buzzer/
message.......................................................185
Warning light ...............................................392
Parking lights
Light switch....................................................190
Replacing light bulb..................................375
Parking Support Brake function (for static
objects).........................................................253
Enabled/disabled on the system.......254
478
Alphabetical Index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Indicator ...................................................80, 82
Warning light...............................................392
Warning messages ..................................259
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
Changing settings of the system .........213
Function..............................................................211
Warning light.................................................391
Warning message.....................................398
Personal lights...............................................302
Switch..............................................................303
PKSA (Parking Support Alert)...............247
Power back door opener and closer..... 117
Power control unit coolant
Capacity......................................................... 427
Checking .........................................................351
Preparing and checking before winter
......................................................................... 279
Radiator..........................................................352
Power easy access system.......................138
Power outlets..................................................313
Power steering (Electric Power Steering
system)...........................................................272
Warning light...............................................390
Power switch...................................................174
Power windows
Door lock linked window operation..149
Jam protection function........................... 148
Operation....................................................... 148
Window lock switch ..................................149
Pre-Collision System (PCS)
Changing settings of the system .........213
Function..............................................................211
Warning light.................................................391
Warning message.....................................398
R
Radar cruise control (dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range)............. 237
Radiator...........................................................352
Rear Cross Traffic Alert............................267
Rear seat
Folding down the rear seatbacks........134
Rear side marker lights
Light switch....................................................190
Replacing light bulbs................................375
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulb..................................375
Turn signal lever .......................................... 183
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror..............................144
Outside rear view mirrors...................... 146
Rear window defogger.............................292
Rear window wiper.......................................201
Refueling.........................................................203
Capacity.........................................................425
Fuel types.......................................................425
Opening the fuel tank cap ....................203
When the fuel filler door cannot be
opened............................................................411
Regenerative braking...................................68
Remote Touch..............................................286
Replacing
Electronic key battery............................. 369
Fuses...................................................................371
Light bulbs.....................................................375
Tires ..................................................................402
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
..........................................................................456
Resetting the message indicating mainte-
nance is required......................................339
Road accident cautions .................................71
RSA (Road Sign Assist)............................235
S
S-FLOW mode............................................296
Safety Connect................................................60
Seat belts............................................................ 26
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor
height...............................................................30
Automatic Locking Retractor.................28
Child restraint system installation......... 47
Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt
..........................................................................335
Emergency Locking Retractor..............28
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Alphabetical Index
479
How to wear your seat belt......................27
How your child should wear the seat belt
.............................................................................27
Pregnant women, proper seat belt use
............................................................................ 26
Reminder light and buzzer...................393
Seat belt extender .........................................27
Seat belt instructions for Canadian own-
ers...................................................................456
Seat belt pretensioners..............................30
SRS warning light ......................................390
Seat heaters...................................................299
Seat position memory................................. 138
Seat ventilators.............................................. 301
Seating capacity................................. 164, 424
Seats
Adjustment............................................132, 133
Adjustment precautions.................132, 134
Child seats/child restraint system installa-
tion.....................................................................47
Cleaning.........................................................335
Driving position memory........................ 138
Folding down the rear seatbacks........134
Front seat heaters..................................... 300
Head restraint..................................................141
Power easy access system.................... 138
Properly sitting in the seat........................25
Rear seat heaters...................................... 300
Seat position memory.............................. 138
Seat ventilators............................................. 301
Sécurité de l’enfant
Précautions avec les coussins gonflables
.........................................................................460
Sensor
Automatic High Beam system..............193
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ...................265
Inside rear view mirror..............................145
Intuitive parking assist..............................248
Kick sensor.......................................................118
Radar sensor................................................205
Rain-sensing windshield wipers.........200
Service plug......................................................70
Service reminder message .....................339
Shift lever .........................................................180
Shift lock system..............................................181
Side airbags ......................................................32
Side doors..........................................................110
Side marker lights
Light switch....................................................190
Replacing light bulbs....................375, 376
Wattage............................................................431
Side mirrors .....................................................146
Adjusting and folding................................ 146
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)....................262
Heaters............................................................292
Side turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs................................375
Turn signal lever .......................................... 183
Smart access system with push-button
start...................................................................126
Antenna location..........................................126
Entry functions.......................................110, 115
Starting the hybrid system.......................174
Warning message.................................... 398
Snow tires....................................................... 279
Spare tire
Inflation pressure....................................... 430
Storage location.........................................402
Spark plug ......................................................428
Specifications................................................424
Speedometer...................................................84
Sport mode ....................................................270
Steering wheel
Adjustment......................................................143
Heated steering wheel............................299
Power easy access system ....................138
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs................................375
Storage feature ............................................305
Storage precautions...................................305
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes stuck..................421
Sun visors..........................................................312
480
Alphabetical Index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Switch
ASC (Active Sound Control) dial.....188
Automatic High Beam switch...............193
Brake hold switch........................................187
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) main switch
.........................................................................262
Cruise control switch .............................. 237
Door lock switch............................................112
Driving mode select switch..................270
Driving position memory switches.... 138
Emergency flashers switch.................. 380
EV drive mode switch ..............................178
Fog light switch.............................................196
Garage door opener switches .......... 322
Heated steering wheel............................299
HUD (Head-up display) switches.......95
Ignition switch................................................174
LDA switch .....................................................231
Light switches............................................... 190
LTA switch....................................................223
Meter control switches..............................89
Moon roof switches .................................. 150
Outside rear view mirror switches.....146
Paddle shift switches..................................182
Parking brake switch ................................ 184
Power back door opener and closer
switch................................................................117
Power switch .................................................174
Power window switch.............................. 148
Rear window and outside rear view mir-
ror defoggers switch............................292
Rear window wiper and washer switch
...........................................................................201
Seat heater switches ................................299
“SOS” button ..................................................60
Tire pressure warning reset switch ..363
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.. 237
VSC off switch............................................ 273
Window lock switch ..................................149
Windshield wipers and washer switch
................................................................196, 201
T
Tachometer.......................................................84
Tail lights
Light switch....................................................190
Replacing light bulbs................................375
Theft deterrent system
Alarm....................................................................77
Immobilizer system......................................75
Tire inflation pressure
Maintenance data..................................... 430
Warning light ...............................................394
Tire information............................................434
Glossary........................................................ 438
Size....................................................................436
Tire identification number......................435
Uniform Tire Quality Grading............437
Tire pressure warning system
Function......................................................... 359
Initializing........................................................363
Installing tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters.......................................362
Registering ID codes ...............................364
Warning light ...............................................394
Tires...................................................................357
Chains ............................................................ 280
Checking .......................................................357
Glossary........................................................ 438
If you have a flat tire ..................................402
Inflation pressure...........................365, 430
Replacing .......................................................402
Rotating tires ...............................................358
Size................................................................... 430
Snow tires ......................................................279
Spare tire........................................... 402, 430
Tire identification number......................435
Tire pressure warning system ............ 359
Uniform Tire Quality Grading............437
Warning light ...............................................394
Tools..................................................................402
Top tether strap............................................... 57
Total load capacity...................................... 424
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Alphabetical Index
481
Towing
Dinghy towing...............................................173
Emergency towing ...................................383
Towing eyelet............................................. 385
Trailer Sway Control ............................... 273
Trailer towing...................................... 165, 173
TRAC (Traction Control)........................ 273
Traction battery (Hybrid battery)............ 70
Hybrid battery (traction battery) air
intake and discharge vents....................72
Location............................................................. 70
Specification.................................................426
Warning messages ......................................73
Traction motor (electric motor)................67
Trailer Sway Control.................................. 273
Trailer towing........................................165, 173
Transmission
Hybrid transmission ..................................180
Selecting a driving mode.......................270
Trip meters........................................................84
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs....................375, 376
Turn signal lever.......................................... 183
Wattage............................................................431
V
Vanity lights
Vanity lights....................................................312
Wattage............................................................431
Vanity mirrors.................................................312
Vanity lights....................................................312
Vehicle data recordings..................................7
Vehicle identification number................ 424
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC)............272
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)............272
W
Warning buzzers
Approach warning.................................... 243
Downshifting................................................. 183
Intuitive parking assist..............................252
Light reminder................................................191
Open door.........................................................111
Seat belt reminder.....................................393
Vehicle sway warning ...................222, 231
Warning lights
ABS.................................................................. 390
Brake hold operated indicator ...........392
Brake Override System........................ 395
Brake system...............................................388
Charging system.......................................388
Drive-Start Control.................................. 395
Electric power steering.......................... 390
High coolant temperature.................... 389
Hybrid system.............................................388
LDA indicator............................................... 391
Low engine oil pressure........................ 389
Low fuel level ...............................................393
LTA indicator ................................................ 391
Malfunction indicator lamp.................. 389
Master warning light.................................394
Parking brake indicator..........................392
PCS warning light ...................................... 391
PKSB OFF indicator................................392
Seat belt reminder light...........................393
Slip indicator.................................................392
SRS................................................................... 390
Tire pressure ................................................394
Warning messages.....................................398
Washer
Checking .......................................................353
Low washer fluid warning message353,
398
Preparing and checking before winter
..........................................................................279
Switch......................................................196, 201
Washing and waxing..................................332
Weights
Cargo capacity........................161, 164, 424
Load limits ...........................................164, 424
Weights ..........................................................424
Wheels............................................................. 367
Replacing wheels.......................................367
482
Alphabetical Index
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Size....................................................................430
Window glasses............................................ 148
Window lock switch.....................................149
Windows
Power windows........................................... 148
Rear window defogger .......................... 292
Washer..................................................196, 201
Windshield wiper de-icer........................296
Windshield wipers
Intermittent windshield wipers..............196
Rain-sensing windshield wipers..........198
Winter driving tips....................................... 279
Wireless charger...........................................314
Wireless remote control key....................107
Battery-saving function ............................127
Locking/Unlocking....................................107
Panic mode....................................................108
Replacing the battery...............................369
For information regarding the
equipment listed below, refer to
the “NAVIGATION AND MULTI-
MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
· Audio/visual system
· Navigation system
· Lexus parking assist monitor
· Panoramic view monitor
· Lexus Enform
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
Alphabetical Index
483
484
LEXUS NX300h Owners Manual_USA_M78578_en
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever (P.346)
Back door opener switch
*
(P.117)
Fuel filler door (P.203)
Hood lock release lever (P.346)
Tire inflation pressure (P.430)
*
: Vehicles with power back door
Fuel tank capacity (Ref-
erence)
14.8 gal. (56 L, 12.3 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P.425
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
P.430
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill — ref-
erence)
P.426
Engine oil type P.426
A
B
C
D
E
